Scale modeling, an enduring pastime since the 1950s, has its roots reaching back to humanity's earliest days. Realistic scale models serve as the culminating phase in the evolution of a design, providing a tangible manifestation of a concept. They are invaluable for their precise depiction of scale and volume, offering an immediate visualization that closely mirrors reality and provides an accurate sense of dimension.
Contemporary history has witnessed the transformation of realistic scale models from purely functional prototypes to forms of art. While retaining their foundational purpose, these models have acquired an aesthetic dimension, transcending their role as mere technical tools.
Below are dioramas that defy verbal description, their beauty transcending language.
When integrated into the planning phase, realistic scale models engage viewers interactively, much like toys captivate children, allowing for an intuitive grasp of the object’s true form and scale. This characteristic is not only pivotal in the design phase of an object but also vital for our imaginative faculties, enabling the sharing of a vision where the object is realized, operational, and fully functional. The unique attribute of realistic scale models is their ability to depict anything in a static or mobile form.
Static models offer a snapshot, portraying objects as if time has stood still. They provide a fixed view that, unlike mobile models, does not grapple with replicating motion—a task that can sometimes lead to a loss of immersive experience due to scale-related discrepancies. While mobile models may be better suited for digital animations where real-world physics can be challenging to replicate, static models have recently reached an extraordinary fidelity in detail, approaching miniature replicas of reality. They cover an array of themes, from the quotidian to the fantastical, requiring diverse techniques to authentically recreate the desired atmosphere.
Realistic scale models come in various scale ratios—1/48 and 1/32 for aircraft, and 1/35 for vehicles being the standard. Larger scales such as 1/16 or 1/24 are often reserved for cars and some aircraft, but the universal scale for all types is 1/72. These scales cater to the true dimensions of the models, as different objects have different real-life sizes. For example, a military vehicle's gun may measure between 5.25 to 5.75 meters, which equates to a manageable 15 to 16 centimeters on 1/35 scale—a size conducive to desktop display. The choice of scale typically aligns with ease of manufacturing and the ability to produce well-proportioned models that comfortably fit in a display case or on a shelf. The thematic range is vast, spanning from the Napoleonic era to the Cold War for figures, with military vehicles and cars predominantly featuring designs post-1920s, with a particular prevalence of World War II and Cold War-era military models, and automotive models from the 1940s to the 1980s.
The following examples delve into various dioramas, particularly those representing military vehicles and aircraft. They illustrate the art of capturing life in miniature, highlighting the skill of rendering scenes from reality with convincing authenticity.
Shoe storage ideas are a hot commodity online, especially DIY shoe storage that is clever, quick, and inexpensive considering that the average person owns 12 pairs of shoes. Getting creative with DIY shoe storage solutions is a great way to neatly organize your footwear and reclaim space in your home. Read on for 19 genius DIY shoe storage ideas you can implement to keep your shoe collection tidy and impress your guests.
Metal Sticks Behind The Wardrobe Door
Keep shoes hidden but easily accessible by installing metal sticks on the back of a closet door. Hang shoes by their heels for an organized display.
Cardboard Shoe Storage
Get creative with cardboard boxes to DIY customized shoe cubbies on a budget. This modular storage solution can be scaled to your space and replaced as needed.
Pallet Shoe Shelves
Repurpose wooden pallets into shelving units for an easy shoe organization project. Stack and arrange pallets to fit your space.
Shoe Box Storage
Store shoes in their original boxes and label them with photos for a neat, personalized storage system.
Wall-Mounted Coat Hooks
Install wall hooks designed for coats to hold shoes and free up floor space in small rooms.
Ladder Bookcase Shoe Storage
Upcycle a wooden ladder into a leaning bookcase. Add shelves to store shoes creatively.
Crate Shoe Storage
Stack vintage crates or buy new collapsible ones to hold shoes in a rustic cubby storage unit. Arrange crates vertically or horizontally.
Cardboard Pipe Shoe Storage
Get crafty with cardboard tubes or PVC pipes cut to size. Lean tubes against a wall or stack them to create DIY cubbies.
Metal Grid For Heels
Install a metal pegboard and use hooks to neatly store heels and keep them in view.
Corner Wall Shelves
Optimize wasted space by installing corner shelves. Use them to neatly store shoes vertically.
Display Shoes On Shelves
Show off your favorite pair by dedicating a shelf to artfully arrange shoes. Add lights for dramatic effect.
Build A Walk-In Shoe Closet
For the ultimate shoe storage, construct a customized walk-in closet with plenty of shelves and cubbies. Add a window for natural light.
Dedicate Dresser Drawers To Shoes
Make use of furniture you already own by storing shoes in empty dresser drawers. Line drawers with fabric for a tidy presentation.
Shoe Display Shelves
Build or buy shelving units specifically to showcase your most prized shoes. Add lighting for extra flair.
Shoe Wall Decor
Get creative by arranging shoes into wall art patterns and designs. Paint or stain shoes to complement your décor.
Laundry Room Shoe Storage
Install shelves or cubbies in your laundry room to store shoes near the entryway. Keep shoes off the floor to avoid tracking in dirt.
Rotating Shoe Display
Get the most out of your walk-in closet by installing a rotating shoe rack. Spin to view all your pairs with ease.
Garage Shoe Storage
Keep garage floors clear by mounting panels or shelving to hold shoes. Add hooks for hanging bulky shoes.
Repurposed Furniture Shoe Storage
Give old furniture new life by refinishing and using it to hold shoes. An old dresser or cabinet works great.
Open Shelving Units
An open storage design allows you to easily view all shoes. Keep shelves near the entryway for convenience.
Hallway Built-In Shelves
Maximize hallway space with built-in shelving that spans the length of the wall. Store shoes of every height.
Luxury Walk-In Closet
Go all out with a professionally designed walk-in closet complete with plentiful shoe storage. Consider glass doors to admire your collection.
Custom Pull-Out Drawers
Make use of wasted cabinet space by installing custom pull-out shelves just for shoes. Keep shoes hidden but easily accessible.
Organized Shoe Closet
Invest in a closet system with plenty of shelves, cubbies, and drawers to neatly accommodate all your footwear.
Repurposed Furniture Shoe Storage
Upcycle old wooden pallets or metal file cabinets into DIY shoe racks. Stack and arrange them to fit your space.
Minimalist Shoe Shelves
Adopt a minimalist style by dedicating a small shelving unit near the entryway to neatly store shoes out of the way.
Bathroom Shoe Storage
Make use of vertical space in your bathroom by mounting shelving on the wall to attractively display shoes.
With some creativity and elbow grease, you can implement any of these storage solutions to keep your shoe collection neat. Find a method that fits your space and style. Your feet (and guests) will thank you
A backyard or garden is one of the best assets of your property. The added open space gives you a private place to lounge and soak up the sun or have fun with your family. However, when the sun starts getting too hot in the summer, the outside doesn’t seem as appealing anymore.
Pergolas is the right solution for this dilemma. They add a lot of shade and privacy, adding value to your outdoor space. You can enjoy the sun and sit in the open or have your kids play safely, away from direct sunlight. Like any other outdoor furniture and accessory, there are various materials pergolas are available in. Here, we focus mainly on metal pergolas as there are many reasons why they are better suited to your needs than any other material.
One of the main factors that give metal pergolas an edge is that they last much longer. Also, they are better managed and maintained over time. They can withstand various weather and hot summers without losing any sturdiness. And surprisingly, metal pergola kits are relatively lighter than wooden ones. So, if a lightweight yet durable and long-lasting pergola kit is what you need, then a metal one is probably your right match.
Listed below are the best metal pergola kits:
Sojag Messina Hard Top Sun Shelter: A luxury pergola perfect for large outdoor gatherings with a hardtop roof and sturdy aluminum frame. It carries a heftier price tag compared to the Sunjoy and requires professional assembly.
Sunjoy 10’ x 12’ Chatham Steel Hardtop: The Sunjoy gazebo is distinguished for its all-weather protection with a hardtop canopy and solid steel frame. It might fade under intense sunlight, unlike the Sojag.
Vita Venetian Vinyl Pergola: The Vita pergola captures a classic garden design with a white, trellis-like vinyl roof. It lacks a canopy unlike the Sunjoy and is relatively pricey.
Kozyard Rosana 10' x 12' Hardtop Aluminum: Kozyard Rosana is a gazebo that excels in durability with a rust-proof aluminum frame and galvanized steel roof. It's more rugged than the Vita pergola, but the roof may create noise when it rains.
Great Deal Furniture Sonoma Outdoor Fabric/Steel Canopy: The Great Deal Furniture canopy is compact and stylish, with a reliable steel frame and polyester canopy. Assembly may be more challenging compared to the easier-to-set-up Kozyard gazebo.
1. Sojag Messina Hard Top Sun Shelter - Best for Large Outdoor Spaces
Large size
Hardtop roof and sturdy frame made of steel and aluminum
Replacement parts are available
The first pergola on our list is the largest and most luxurious one. 12’ by 16’ in size, this is the pergola for people who have large families or love to host outdoor gatherings.
The hardtop roof means you won’t have to take it down once the snow starts falling or when the monsoon arrives in all its glory. The pergola will stand strong and withstand the climate well.
The frame supporting the galvanized hardtop roof is made of rustproof aluminum. The charcoal color of the frame and ceiling gives a nice contrast to an otherwise green and luscious backyard. It easily becomes the focal point once it’s installed.
You can relax under the shade by the pool or just lounge around while your little ones play on the grass. It has space for a ceiling fan and lights so you can still enjoy your backyard when there is no breeze.
The kit comes with PVC-coated polyester mesh mosquito netting. It’s just as durable as the frame and also blocks sun exposure. Although it needs to be installed by a professional, it will protect you from environmental elements for years to come.
What We Like
Has fixtures for ceiling fans and lights
Quite a grand-looking design with many features
Hardtop roof can withstand snowfall
What We Don’t Like
Requires professional assembly
Heavy on the pocket
Size: 12' by 16' | Frame Material: Steel and Aluminum | Roof Type: Hardtop | Netting: Yes
2. Sunjoy 10’ x 12’ Chatham Steel Hardtop - Best for All-weather Protection
Hardtop canopy
Vented roof
Provides good ventilation
Hardtop canopies are perfect for those looking for a permanent gazebo. It keeps the sin away and gives you and your kids a comfortable place to enjoy the outdoors all year long. This Sunjoy gazebo is large and fits well in backyards where there is enough room.
The frame for this gazebo is very solid and heavy-duty. Made from high-quality powder-coated steel, it’s meant to last a long time and in multiple weather conditions all year long. The hardtop roof is made with the same material and can take heavy snowfall pretty well.
The double-tiered roof allows air to flow through the gazebo much more freely, providing good ventilation when it’s needed the most. The kit comes with mosquito netting so you can enjoy the outdoors even when there are bugs flying around.
You do have to get the pergola professionally installed as it is quite heavy. But once it’s assembled, it will immediately become the place for you and your family to hang out.
3. Vita Venetian Vinyl Pergola - Best for Classic Garden Design
Traditional Venetian design
White color
Dimensions: 10’ by 10’ frame with 5” x 5” posts
If you’ve ever come across Venetian themes in movies, the soft romantic textures, light colors, and minimal architectural details all look incredible. Your most notable piece from that time is the classic pergola design. This version is based on the traditional design, with some modern touches.
The white, trellis-like roof of the pergola is the perfect foundation for flowering vines. Set in a lush garden, with white wicker furniture and flowers all around, this pergola will become the focal point in your backyard.
The framework is made of vinyl, which is easy to clean and maintain. Whether you install it on grass, concrete patio, or wooden deck, it takes only people and a few tools to install the pergola. In a few hours, you can enjoy the pergola.
Be noted that the kit doesn’t come with a netting or canopy cover. You may have to purchase it separately if you need it.
What We Like
The vinyl material is easy to clean
Easy to install
Goes well with various themes
What We Don’t Like
Doesn’t come with a canopy
Relatively expensive
Size: 10' by 10' | Frame Material: Vinyl | Roof Type: Trellis-like | Netting: No
4. Kozyard Rosana 10' x 12' Hardtop Aluminum
Heavy-duty aluminum and steel material
Comes with netting and waterproof sidewalls
Dimensions: 10’ by 12’
If you need a waterproof, heavy-duty pergola, this Kozyard hardtop gazebo in Rosana is perfect. Unlike soft-top gazebos, this particular one is suitable for homes in places where winters have snow. Also, this gazebo is suitable for homeowners who have no opposition to having a permanent gazebo.
The frame is made from rust-proof aluminum. It is very sturdy and strong, built to last a long time. The dark brown color of the frame matches the hardtop roof. The metal top is made from galvanized steel roof.
It gives the gazebo more sturdiness. Also, it weatherproofs the pergola. You can leave it up in the winter as it can withstand heavy snow and harsh winds. The kit also comes with anchoring stands with pre-drilled holes for installation.
Lastly, this gazebo can be used anytime during the year. The netting keeps the bugs away while the waterproof sidewalls keep water out.
What We Like
Galvanized roof can withstand heavy snow load
Weather-proof and durable construction
Includes space and hooks for a ceiling fan
What We Don’t Like
Can be difficult to assemble
The roof may create noise when rain hits it
Size: 10' by 12' | Frame Material: Aluminum and Steel | Roof Type: Galvanized | Netting: Yes
5. Great Deal Furniture Sonoma Outdoor Fabric/Steel Canopy
The canopy is waterproof
Comes with two types of netting for different needs
Can be installed on a deck, balcony, backyard, and more
While it’s not the smallest gazebo, area-wise, it is better suited for homes that have limited outdoor space. This pergola can be made the focal point of the outdoor space without it taking up all the room.
This Sonoma gazebo is not only the right size and stylish, but it is also durable and provides protection from environmental elements including harsh UV rays.
The pergola kit comes with a 10’ by 10’ metal frame made of solid steel that can withstand harsh winds and the summer sun. The polyester canopy on top is large enough to provide sufficient shade and waterproofing.
You can place patio furniture underneath the gazebo and enjoy the outside when the sun is shining bright. If bugs are a problem, you can open the netting. There are two layers of netting to suit your needs. Interestingly, the netting also has a zipper door, which can make you feel like you’re inside a giant tent on a camping trip.
What We Like
Comes with a mosquito net that can be fastened with straps
What is the Best Metal Pergola Kit for Your Backyard?
If you're searching for the best metal pergola kit for your backyard, the table below provides a comparison of size measured in feet, frame material, roof type, and whether netting is included.
Whether made of metal or other materials, pergolas can serve a number of various purposes. They provide shade for an outdoor dining space or by the pool. Or it can create a covered space for your kids to play without being under the hot sun.
The creativity is really up to you. However, having some idea about how you will be using the pergola will help you choose the right one. This brief buyer’s guide can help you further.
Material
We’ve already explained why we prefer metal over wood for pergolas. It is low-maintenance and long-lasting. You don’t need to varnish it or worry about it aging and fading under the sun or how it will stand up to water damage and other weather elements. You can just use it straight out of the box.
Deciding to buy a metal pergola is just step one. You need to go further and decide what kind of metal you want. The most common options available include steel, vinyl, and aluminum. Each metal, while sturdy, has its pros and cons.
You can decide which one suits your needs better. Vinyl, for instance, is easier to clean compared to the other two and is more aesthetically pleasing. Steel, on the other hand, is much sturdier and will stand the test of time better than vinyl.
And lastly, aluminum is a much better option for those who live in wet climates because the metal is waterproof.
For people who do want the wooden pergola kit in their backyards, cedar anchors well in the ground. However, metal pergolas are lighter and work well on porches and decks where the weight can cause damage.
Size
Along with the material, the size of the pergola kit is the most important consideration. No matter the features and durability of a pergola, it won’t work if it’s too big or too small.
The size you need depends on where you want to install the kit and how you want to use it. Pergola kits come in various shapes and sizes to fit different spaces. They can range from the smallest at 6’ by 6’ to 122’ by 20’.
You need to consider the length and height of the pergola and the surface area of the location you are going to place it. Also, if your backyard has trees, take the height and width of nearby foliage.
Along with the exterior dimensions of the pergola, measurements for the inside are also important. You want to make sure that it is spacious enough to fit furniture and the tallest friend or family member that frequents your home.
Price
Prices on pergolas can vary from $300 to upwards of $3000. As one would expect, metal pergola kits on the smaller side cost less than the larger and more elaborate ones.
The price for metal pergolas is dependent on the size of the frame and whether the canopy is included or not in the kit. Most metal kits start at around $400 to $500. The price goes up when other features are added.
Style
The consideration for the style of the pergola is mostly for aesthetic purposes. You can pick between round, rectangular, and square gazebos. But that’s not the limit. There are many other unique shapes to look at as well.
The right gazebo would be the one that complements your home’s architecture. Instead of looking out of place, it should blend well with the design.
But don’t forego practicality when looking at the style. Don’t give in to your liking for the design and choose an attractive pergola that doesn’t quite fit the space right.
What is a metal pergola kit?
A metal pergola kit is a set of pre-fabricated pieces designed for assembling a pergola, which is an outdoor structure that provides shade over a patio or pathway. The kit typically includes all necessary metallic components, such as posts, rafters, and crossbeams, often made of materials like steel or aluminum for durability. Detailed assembly instructions and necessary fittings are usually provided, allowing for easier installation.
What is the difference between a hardtop and a soft-top metal pergola?
The key difference between a hardtop and a soft-top metal pergola lies in the type of covering used. A hardtop pergola features a rigid, often metal, roof that provides solid shade and protection from the elements. Conversely, a soft-top pergola typically has a canvas, cloth, or other fabric covering that can offer shade but might not provide the same level of weather resistance as a hardtop.
Each has its own aesthetic appeal and functional advantages, depending on the specific needs and preferences of the user.
How do I choose the right size metal pergola kit for my outdoor space?
Choosing the right size metal pergola kit for your outdoor space involves several considerations. Start by measuring the available area where the pergola would be installed, taking into account both width and depth.
Consider the primary purpose of the pergola (such as shading a patio or defining an outdoor living area) and scale it accordingly. Also, consider the human scale - a pergola should provide enough headroom and space for movement.
Finally, the pergola's size relative to your home or any adjacent structures should look proportionate. Always refer to the manufacturer's guidelines when choosing a size.
Can I readily customize a metal pergola kit to suit my outdoor space and preferences?
Customizing a metal pergola kit to suit your outdoor space and preferences may be possible, but it is advised to consult the product details or contact the manufacturer beforehand to determine the level of customization available.
Can a metal pergola be attached to an existing structure, such as a house or deck?
Yes, a metal pergola can be attached to an existing structure like a house or deck. These are known as attached pergolas. When attached to a house, they are typically anchored to the exterior wall or the roof structure. When attached to a deck, they must be securely fastened to the deck's structure to ensure stability.
It's essential to consider load-bearing capabilities, proper sealing to prevent water penetration, and local building codes when attaching a pergola to an existing structure. Professional consultation is often advisable.
Do I need a permit to install a metal pergola?
Whether you need a permit to install a metal pergola often depends on local regulations. Some jurisdictions may require a permit for constructing permanent outdoor structures, while others may not. The size of the pergola might also factor into permit requirements.
It's crucial to check with your local building department or similar authority to understand the specific rules in your area prior to installation. Zoning regulations, homeowner association rules, and similar considerations may also apply.
How difficult is it to assemble a metal pergola kit?
The difficulty of assembling a metal pergola kit can depend on various factors such as the complexity of the design, the individual's DIY skills, and the number of people involved in the assembly process. Generally, these kits are designed for self-assembly and come with detailed instructions. Basic tools, such as a screwdriver and level, are often required.
For larger or more complex structures, professional installation may be advisable. Users should always follow the manufacturer's assembly instructions to ensure safe and successful installation.
How do I maintain my metal pergola?
Maintaining a metal pergola typically involves regular cleaning and periodic checks for damage. Clean the pergola with a mild detergent and water to remove dirt and debris, using a soft brush or cloth to avoid scratching the surface.
Inspect the metal for signs of rust or damage, especially after extreme weather events. If rust is detected, it might need treatment with a rust remover or prevention product, and potentially a fresh coat of appropriate paint. If a part is significantly damaged, it may need to be replaced. Always consult the pergola's care manual for specific maintenance recommendations.
If you have a large enough backyard, deck, or patio, a pergola will complete your outdoor aesthetics. Even though they are not cheap, they are investment pieces and add value to your home, especially permanent ones.
We understand the importance of creating an inviting and functional outdoor space, and having the right pergola can make a significant difference in enhancing your backyard experience. We have gone through several excellent products, and out of all these options, here are the top three expert recommendations:
When it comes to large gatherings and making a statement, the Sojag Messina Hard Top Sun Shelter is an ideal option. Its spacious 12' x 16' size, hardtop roof, and durable aluminum and steel frame make it perfect for hosting outdoor parties and events.
For those who prefer a more permanent structure, the Sunjoy 10' x 12' Chatham Steel Hardtop is a good choice. It boasts a hardtop canopy, a vented roof for better airflow, and a robust, powder-coated steel frame.
If you appreciate a classic and elegant design, the New England Arbors Vinyl Pergola is the right choice. Based on a traditional Venetian design, this 10' x 10' pergola features a white vinyl framework, which is easy to clean and maintain.
You just have to make sure you know what you’re looking for and check the dimensions of the kit to get one that will serve you well for a long time. We hope that the buyer’s guide and the recommendations give you some options and guidance in choosing the one that suits your needs.
Do you think gluing plexiglass is difficult? Well, it isn't if you have the correct glue and know the right method.
Plexiglass is often used as an alternative to glass in various projects because it is transparent and, unlike glass, it can tolerate high pressure easily. Needless to say, this flexible and durable material might find multiple uses in and around the home.
Unfortunately, many people are still not sure how to glue it.
Actually, Plexiglass does not glue in the regular sense at all. It requires a chemical weld that allows two surfaces to melt and can fuse into each other. This creates an irreversible bond that you cannot separate, no matter how hard you try. So, today we've created a list of the best glues for acrylic Plexiglass to help you find the perfect choice for your project.
Listed below are the best glues for acrylic plexiglass:
J-B Weld: J-B Weld sealant and adhesive is renowned for its robust adhesion and forms a tough, weather-resistant seal. It takes 4-6 hours to dry, longer than other options like Loctite and Gorilla and has delicate packaging which may cause some glue to squirt out.
Loctite: Loctite is a cyanoacrylate superglue that is recognized for its high-temperature resistance. It has a fast-setting, moisture and chemical-resistant formula. The smaller packaging limits its use in larger projects.
Gorilla: The Gorilla super glue gel sets within 1 minute and requires no clamping. Its high viscosity makes it easy to apply without making a mess, compared to thinner solutions like Starbond. Not entirely transparent when dry.
Starbond: The Starbond glue offers low-viscosity instant adhesive properties. It has a quick drying time and a clog-free stopper for smooth application. Due to its thin consistency, it's more prone to spills and messes, unlike Gorilla.
Super Glue: Super Glue is an economical epoxy adhesive that sets in about 10 minutes and cures fully in 24 hours, allowing for a longer working time. It appears slightly yellowish upon drying.
1. J-B Weld - Best Overall
Who could skip out on the world's strongest bond available in a conveniently sized tube? This 100% silicone sealant by J-B Weld is as strong as commercial glues get. They come in compact packaging weighing 90 ml and in several colors.
J-B Weld is one of the more popular brands we included on our review list. With over 40 years of experience and hundreds of great reviews of this product online, we decided to test it on Plexiglass to see what we get.
One of the first things we noted was that this glue is an RTV (Room Temperature Vulcanized) silicone sealant, which sets at room temperature.
Apart from that, it is almost effortless to use. Also, we found that the silicone forms a tough, waterproof, weather-resistant seal on almost all surfaces, especially Plexiglass. After a few days of using it, we saw no sign of shrinkage or cracks, and the glue was strong enough to hold larger pieces.
Moreover, we found that it worked well on automotive products, ceramic, cloth, carpet, rubber, windows, door frames, and so on. That said, this product is versatile enough for diverse projects around the house and beyond.
And finally, this product sets clear within an hour and is resistant to mold and mildew.
We decided to include this product on our list after testing its versatile uses, beyond its adhesive properties on Plexiglass. And it certainly did not disappoint. However, we wish the seams were sealed more tightly.
That said, some amount of glue squirted out when we squeezed it. So, buyers should ensure that they handle the product delicately.
What We Like
Weather-resistant
Perfect for household DIY projects
Sets in one hour
Precise nozzle
What We Don’t Like
Delicate packaging
Bond Type: Epoxy | Drying Time: 4-6 hours | Viscosity: Thick/high viscosity | Volume: 3 fl oz | Temperature Resistance: -40°C to 200°C | Water Resistance: Yes | Chemical Resistance: Resistant to fuels, oils, and other chemicals
2. Loctite - Best for High Temperatures
This adhesive might sound familiar to those who often work with home improvement products. That said, the 1365882 model is a professional-grade liquid superglue by the well-known brand Loctite. As the name suggests, this superglue is incredibly strong and quick, making it one of the most reliable options we found.
Many people have superglue lying around the house, but can it be used to glue Plexiglass? Yes, absolutely. Therefore, we couldn't skip this versatile superglue by Loctite as we set out to find the best glues for Plexiglass.
Although you can use this glue for DIY projects at home, the ingredients are professional-grade and ideal for heavy-duty repairs.
Often an issue DIYers face while using glue is the drying up of the adhesive at the nozzle. To prevent such problems, this glue comes in compact packaging with a pinpoint nozzle for precise and drip-free application.
Another positive aspect of the bottle design is that the screw-on cap sits perfectly in place and seals the nozzle to prevent clogging.
Moreover, it has a fast-setting formula that is resistant to moisture and chemicals, so you can use this adhesive on Plexiglass projects using water. Speaking of which, an essential aspect of Plexiglass is the clarity after drying. And, this product offers just that- transparency after drying, without any clamping required.
Overall, this product checked all the boxes of a high-quality adhesive. However, we wanted a little bit more of it.
So, if there were one thing that needed improvement, it would be the lack of size options. That said, we wish the product were available in a larger bottle for bigger projects.
What We Like
Sets without clamping
It comes with a screw-on cap
Compatible with multiple surfaces
Quick-drying
What We Don’t Like
Small packaging
Bond Type: Cyanoacrylate | Drying Time: < 30 seconds | Viscosity: Thin/low viscosity | Volume: 0.7 fl oz | Temperature Resistance: -55°C to 120°C | Water Resistance: Yes | Chemical Resistance: Resistant to mild acids and alkalis
3. Gorilla - Best Dry Time
Next, we have another popular favorite - the 7700104 glue by Gorilla.This glue comes in a tiny bottle containing 0.71 ounces of the product. But the quantity may be sufficient for most jobs because one drop is enough for about one square inch of most surfaces. So, if you are looking for a quick-drying glue that requires no clamping, consider this option.
First off, the glue began solidifying within 30 seconds of application and did not need any clamps to hold it in place. While this feature comes in handy for DIY projects, you need to be quick while working with it because it dries in under a minute.
Also, the superior Gorilla formula does not run if the tube is held vertically, giving you ultimate control over the amount to apply.
Furthermore, a lesser-known fact about this product is that it contains tiny rubber particles, which improve its bond with materials. So, after using it for your Plexiglass project, you can use the same adhesive for various other purposes.
That said, this versatile formula works equally well on plastic, metal, rubber, ceramic, fabric, and paper.
For best results, use this product after shaking the bottle first and then tapping the bottom to bring the contents near the nozzle. Next, apply one drop of glue for one sq. inch of material and lightly press the object for 30 seconds. Rest assured, this is enough to form strong and long-lasting bonds.
While we had no major qualms with this product, there was a slight difference that we noticed over the course of testing it.
Although the glue sets pretty fast, the dried and finished result is not clear like other adhesives. Still, this is not a big deal and can be overlooked.
What We Like
Sets within one minute
Bond various surfaces
Resistant to impact
Mess-free application
What We Don’t Like
It is not entirely transparent
Bond Type: Cyanoacrylate | Drying Time: < 10 seconds | Viscosity: Thick/high viscosity | Volume: 0.7 fl oz | Temperature Resistance: -45°C to 90°C | Water Resistance: Yes | Chemical Resistance: Resistant to water and most chemicals
4. Starbond
Are you wondering which glue type is superior - superglue or CA glue? In fact, the two are more or less the same substance, but with different names.
That said, this CA glue has instant adhesive properties with medium viscosity, just like super glue. At the same time, this glue flows like oil from the tube, allowing for a smooth application on various materials.
Right off the bat, what's different about this product is its viscosity. While other glues are thicker with a consistency similar to honey or even more viscous, this one is much thinner. In fact, it has a viscosity measurement of 150 cPs, similar to the consistency of motor oil. However, the fluidity of this option has its pros and cons.
So, while it flows easily and is better to apply, it is also more prone to spills and messes. But the positive aspect is that it dries in a short amount of time, relieving you of the work required to clamp it. And since the product is made of cyanoacrylate, it has the brilliant ability to form bonds quickly.
Moreover, one of its additional features involves the inclusion of two cap applicators of different types. You can also switch to the other in case one gets clogged up. Not to mention how it also comes with a clog-free stopper and a bunch of micro tips for precise application.
As we mentioned earlier, the motor oil-like consistency is a double-edged sword. On the one hand, it allows the product to flow through a very fine micro tip for smooth application. On the other hand, it has a higher chance of clogging up.
What We Like
100% refund guarantee
Convenient application
Perfect for arts and repairs
Waterproof finish
What We Don’t Like
Prone to clogging
Bond Type: Cyanoacrylate | Drying Time: < 10 seconds | Viscosity: Thin/low viscosity | Volume: 2 fl oz | Temperature Resistance: -51°C to 80°C | Water Resistance: Yes | Chemical Resistance: Resistant to water and most chemicals
5. Super Glue
Next, we have a fast-setting plastic fusion glue that sets in a mere ten minutes. As the name suggests, the Super Glue Plastic Fusion Epoxy Adhesive works well on plastics. At the same time, it works equally well on Plexiglass. However, the USP of this product is the unique syringe feature that helps it release glue in a controlled manner.
First of all, it is easy to be fooled by the low cost of this product. But the results of this adhesive are far from average, and we say this from our first-hand experience.
If you know a thing or two about glues, you might've heard about epoxy adhesives too. Epoxies are one of the strongest and most reliable glues, and this product is no different.
That said, the 15277-12 model has 4000 PSI strength holding power, which is more than enough for bonding materials. Once you apply the glue, it starts bonding within the first eight minutes of application, and the curing process takes about 24 hours to complete.
Another feature we wanted to highlight is the unique bottle the contents come in. Upon a closer look, the dispenser is designed like a syringe with two different compartments carrying different materials. Once you press the syringe, one part releases the resin while the other removes the hardener. Both of them combine to form a super solid glue for Plexiglass and other materials.
One of the things we liked about this glue is the long working time it provides. But if you are in a hurry to fix repairs within a time limit, this option might not be the best one. So, choose wisely if you have such a project in mind. Also, the glue isn't completely clear; instead, it appears slightly yellowish upon drying.
What We Like
Allows a longer working time
Reasonably priced
Cures completely within 24 hours
Works on various surfaces
What We Don’t Like
It takes longer to dry
Bond Type: Epoxy | Drying Time: 30 minutes | Viscosity: Thick/high viscosity | Volume: 1 fl oz | Temperature Resistance: -40°C to 100°C | Water Resistance: Yes | Chemical Resistance: Resistant to most chemicals
6. WELD-ON
What do you look for when you need glue exclusively for Plexiglass? You need glue that fuses the materials together as if they have been welded. This is precisely what you get with this model by Weld-on. Simply put, it is a clear formula that bonds materials with a cement-like strength.
One of the things we wondered about while reviewing these glues for acrylics was how specific these adhesives could get. It's one thing to say that glue is multipurpose and can be used on various surfaces. And, it's another to claim that the adhesive is specifically designed to form irreversibly strong bonds with Plexiglass.
This got us intrigued enough to give Weld-on a shot. For starters, consider how multipurpose glues are excellent at holding two pieces together, but they do not actually fuse the surfaces.
On the other hand, Weld-on changes the molecular structure of the acrylic and softens its surface when applied. After joining two pieces of Plexiglass, these two parts harden again as if they have been welded into each other.
The product itself is thin, like a liquid, with a consistency similar to water, so you may even pour it into the dispenser. But it dries up pretty quickly, giving you only one minute of working time and three minutes before it sets.
Upon testing, we found that this glue dries and sets pretty fast, along with being an excellent choice for Plexiglass. Yet, there was one issue that we could not overlook. That said, the glue is so thin that it is prone to spillage, and thus it's possible to mess up the work area if you're not careful.
What We Like
Easy application
It doesn’t leave white marks
Made especially for acrylics and Plexiglass
Two-year shelf life
What We Don’t Like
Prone to spillage
Bond Type: Solvent-based | Drying Time: 10-20 minutes | Viscosity: Medium viscosity | Volume: 4 fl oz | Temperature Resistance: -30°C to 80°C | Water Resistance: No | Chemical Resistance: Resistant to most chemicals
7. SCIGRIP
Now that you have seen a few types of glue, it's time to check out a slightly different bonding agent - acrylic cement. This is one of the easiest solutions to work with because it is pretty thick and easy to apply. Not to mention how this is one of the best options for beginners.
One of the first aspects we noticed was the thickness of the product, which is medium-bodied compared to others that are much thinner. Due to this consistency, it becomes easy for newbies to use this glue on Plexiglass.
Also, this product is a high-strength solvent that does not need much time to set. Merely five minutes after the application, you have a dry surface that is transparent without a yellowish tinge. The good thing about this product is that it achieves 80% of its strength within 24 hours of application. But, the drying begins within minutes, eliminating the need to use clamps.
Furthermore, the adhesive is a low-VOC product which indicates a significantly lower release of harmful chemicals in the air. And while we liked this aspect, what impressed us even more, was its ability to securely bond objects apart from Plexiglass. Indeed, this adhesive works well on PVC, butyrate, polycarbonate, ABS, and styrene.
Overall, this product did not have any flaws worth pointing out, so it is safe to say that we were pretty pleased with its results. However, we can think of something that might be bothersome for some people. Despite its thickness, it is pretty messy to work with because of its container.
What We Like
Low-VOC content
Bonds rigid materials easily
Leaves no residue
Beginner-friendly
What We Don’t Like
Messy application
Bond Type: Solvent-based | Drying Time: 10-20 minutes | Viscosity: Medium viscosity | Volume: 1.5 fl oz | Temperature Resistance: -30°C to 80°C | Water Resistance: No | Chemical Resistance: Resistant to most chemicals
8. Aron Alpha
We decided to include another quality adhesive on our list. This glue is the AA490 model by the brand Aron Alpha. The product comes in simple packaging, which users need to squeeze for careful application. Also, the glue dries clear so that you can apply it in visible areas for decoration.
If you are someone who is engaged in frequent art projects or uses glues regularly, then this option might be worth considering. When we received this glue, the first thing we wanted to do was test it directly on Plexiglass. The results were pretty good, and we found that the glue set quite fast.
After that, we tried testing it on various other materials to find if it was compatible with different types of surfaces. When it came to paper and plastics, this glue could bond those surfaces reasonably quickly.
But when it came to metal, the story was slightly different. After applying the glue, the metal pieces didn't show any sign of bonding, and it was only after an hour or so that the glue dried out. Apart from this, the glue bottle was easy to use and glide over surfaces.
Although this option performs decently across the board, it isn't as durable as others on this list. While other glues are resistant to heat and impact, this one does not provide any such benefit. In fact, the glue bottle clearly states that it must be stored away from heat.
What We Like
Compatible with plastic and metal
Mess-free
Affordable
Convenient applicator
What We Don’t Like
Sensitive to heat
Bond Type: Cyanoacrylate | Drying Time: < 10 seconds | Viscosity: Thin/low viscosity | Volume: 0.7 fl oz | Temperature Resistance: -50°C to 80°C | Water Resistance: Yes | Chemical Resistance: Resistant to most chemicals
What is the Best Glue for Acrylic Plexiglass
If you're in the market for the best glue for acrylic plexiglass, the table below provides a side-by-side comparison of bond type, drying time (in hours, minutes, and seconds), viscosity, volume measured in fluid ounces, temperature resistance range in Celsius, water resistance, and chemical resistance.
Buying Guide for the Best Glue for Acrylic Plexiglass
Here are a few things to consider before buying glue for bonding Plexiglass:
Glue Type
The most crucial step is to read and check the label to find out the glue type before purchasing. While some glues can bond to almost any object, some are only specific to one or two materials.
You'll need to figure out if the glue you pick can indeed bond something as tricky as Plexiglass. Sometimes, people pick up a glue type that is the strongest at joining two surfaces, but it would still not be enough to hold Plexiglass.
As we mentioned before, two acrylic surfaces need to fuse together instead of simply joining. So, which type of glue would be the best for Plexiglass?
Here are a few options:
Cyanoacrylates or Superglue
The most common types are called CAs or cyanoacrylates and are also known as superglue. These glues are compatible with Plexiglass and are very quick to dry. They do not require any curing or setting time. But they might be difficult for beginners to use because they do not allow much time to work with the surface.
Epoxy Glues
Another type of glue that is often used is epoxy glue, which comes in two parts. There are epoxies that come as one component, but they are not adequate for gluing Plexiglass, so you must avoid those.
On the other hand, two-component epoxies consisting of resin and hardener are very effective when it comes to bonding acrylics.
Drying and Curing Time
Drying time can vary vastly depending on the type of glue. Super Glue bonds are pretty much instant, and only a few minutes should be enough to fuse Plexiglass together. On the other hand, epoxy glues take hours to dry and a minimum of 24 hours to cure completely.
If you need a stronger bond, a longer cure time will definitely help. Generally, epoxy bonds are much stronger than superglues, so make your selection wisely.
Also, some glues may require additional pressure to encourage bond formation. This additional time is known as clamp time. It is essentially the time needed to hold the two surfaces together.
Details about the drying, curing, and clamping time should be mentioned on the back of the glue bottle. If you are purchasing it online, make sure to read the description before finalizing your decision.
Surface Residue
If you need to glue decorative pieces, the color of the glue should not ruin the look of the item. Thus, it is best to go for an adhesive that turns transparent after drying. Since Plexiglass is clear anyway, a yellow or grey residue film from the glue would not be aesthetically pleasing.
Can I use superglue on acrylic Plexiglass?
Yes, you can use superglue on acrylic Plexiglass. It's important to note that superglue can sometimes cause a noticeable fogging effect around the joint, which might not be desirable in some uses. For cleaner bonds, consider using acrylic cement, which is specially designed for bonding acrylic materials.
Can I use epoxy on acrylic Plexiglass?
Yes, you can use epoxy on acrylic Plexiglass and can create a strong bond. Keep in mind that since epoxy is not as clear as some other adhesives, it can be visible when cured. For applications requiring a clear, nearly invisible bond, a specialized acrylic adhesive may be a better choice.
Can I use silicone on acrylic Plexiglass?
Yes, you can use silicone on acrylic Plexiglass, particularly for sealing purposes. For bonding or gluing acrylic plexiglass, silicone is not usually the adhesive of choice due to its flexibility and lower bonding strength. In such cases, a solvent-based adhesive designed for acrylics, such as acrylic cement, would be recommended.
How do I remove glue from acrylic Plexiglass?
To remove glue from acrylic Plexiglass, use specialized adhesive removers or a mild solution of soap and water. It's important to avoid using abrasive tools or harsh chemicals that can scratch or damage the acrylic surface. Always test the cleaning method on a small inconspicuous area first to ensure it does not harm the Plexiglass.
Is it possible to glue acrylic to wood?
Yes, it is possible to glue acrylic to wood. Epoxy or a specialized plastic-to-wood adhesive is commonly used for this purpose because of its strength and versatility. Ensure both surfaces are properly prepared and clean for the best adhesive performance.
So that was our list of the best glues for Plexiglass available on the market. We hope this review-based guide helps you find the correct adhesive for your next project.
And while all the products we listed performed well - both in quality and functionality, we had a couple of favorites that we'd like to mention.
Our first pick has to be the 31310 glue by J-B Weld. This option was the overall best and also worked on most surfaces. What’s more, it is incredibly strong, long-lasting, and versatile enough to replace all your other glues.
Another one of our top favorites would be the 1365882 model by Loctite. The highlight of this fantastic product was its pinpoint nozzle for delicate applications and its resistance to high temperatures.
And that’s it for today, see you next time!
Venturing into the world of glues for plastic eyeglass frames may seem challenging. The J-B Weld Plastic Bonder excels in bonding strength, while the versatile and quick-drying Gorilla Super Glue is another standout. Skim through our precise reviews for a well-informed selection.
The best possible solution during this time is to either fix them yourself or get hold of someone who can do the job for you. And in case you are planning to do it all by yourself, it is best to select a glue that can fix the eyeglass in no time. Sometimes fixing them is the only option as completely replacing the glass might not be a choice.
But when you go to the market, you will surely get perplexed by the number of options out there. So, to bail you out of the situation, we have designed this guide with the top 5 products worth trying. You will also find a buyer’s guide towards the end so that you don’t miss out on any important details.
Listed below are the best glues for plastic eyeglass frames:
J-B Weld Plastic Bonder: J-B Weld Plastic Bonder is a glue that stands out for its exceptional bond strength of 3770 PSI. It sometimes struggles with inconsistent adhesive distribution.
Gorilla: Gorilla super glue offers 10 to 45 seconds of drying time which is one of the fastest among the options, making it superior in cases that demand quick fixes, with a maximum cure time of 24 hours. The quantity is smaller than the J-B Weld.
Aleene's: Aileene's glue has wide surface compatibility, from porous to semi-porous materials. The super-strong nature can result in unwanted adhesion if not carefully applied.
E6000: The E600 adhesive has a unique resistance to high temperatures and the ability to alter its color post-drying, it stands out for its versatility. The lack of an applicator can make the application process challenging.
Starbond EM-150: The Starbond EM-150 is a lab-tested glue that is accompanied by additional micro applicators, ensuring precision in small crack repairs, a feature not commonly available in the list. Its weak packaging can potentially lead to damage during delivery.
1. J-B Weld Plastic Bonder - Best for Quick-setting Repairs
One of the first recommendations that we have for you is the J-B Weld 50139 Plastic Bonder which is best known for its quick-setting formula. You can rest assured that once you repair the eyeglass frames with this solution, they will last for a long time. Within no time, it will get cured to form a robust and permanent bond.
What we liked the best about this product is that not only does it fix your glasses, but it also fills the gap. Hence, you can have your glasses fixed in no time. If you do not want to go to the shop to fix your glass and engage in DIY plastic repairs, this is one of the best options. And the best part is that it comes with a sealable cap, which prevents the glue from drying out when not in use.
On top of that, the strength of this plastic bonder is noteworthy. With a strength of 3770 PSI, you can rest assured that this glue works as an excellent adhesive. Once you fix your eyeglasses with this glue, they will stay that way for a long time.
Moreover, it is pretty simple to work with this item. Once you apply it, all you have to do is wait for about 15 minutes for the glue to set in. Long story short, it reduces your work time considerably.
Some users find the application process of J-B Weld 50139 Plastic Bonder challenging due to the dispenser's unequal adhesive distribution, despite its straightforward working process and quick setting time.
The Gorilla 7805001 super Glue is one of the best adhesives that you can get your hands on for fixing plastic eyeglass frames. Because it includes a variety of tips in its package, you can use it for a range of applications, and that too completely mess-free. It does not matter how small the surface is; you can apply it anywhere you need to with utmost precision.
Once this glue dries up, you won’t even understand that it had been applied in the first place. It offers a seamless application and a discreet appearance. So, be it plastic sunglasses or eyeglasses, you can fix all kinds of eyewear with it.
Even better, the glue hardly takes any time to dry up. You can expect it to dry up within a span of 10 to 45 seconds and get cured entirely within 24 hours. So, you will be ready to wear your fixed eyeglass in under a day’s time.
Other than that, we were really impressed with how this glue can be used to fix a range of materials and not only plastic. We could not help but appreciate how versatile this item is, as we could use it on rubber, leather, ceramics, or wood. Irrespective of where you apply it, the bond will be quite strong.
Despite showing brilliant performance, we were not really happy with the quantity delivered. The tube is pretty small and is good to fix eyeglasses only. But in case you are planning to use it on bigger surfaces, you might need more than one bottle. Otherwise, you may run out of glue sooner than later.
Next up on the list, we have Aleene's 94830 29131 jewelry & metal glue. This super glue is best if you are looking for an adhesive that provides a good hold and a strong bond. This is best for DIY jewelry makers and is an excellent option for fixing your eyewear too. With this, you can fix your broken eyeglass in a matter of a few minutes.
What is really noteworthy about this item is that it can work on a range of surfaces. Be it semi-porous or porous materials; this item can perform its wonders anywhere. So, you do not have to restrict yourself to using it just on eyeglasses. If you are feeling experimental, feel free to try it on glass beads, rubber, stones, and even beads.
Moving on to the appearance, we would score it a perfect 10. Once the glue dries up, the finish is excellent and is undetectable. As it becomes completely clear when it dries up, it does not look blotchy and won’t feel like the eyeglass has been repaired. And even if you apply it on any other surface other than plastic, the finish will be the same.
Also, the quantity provided in the package is pretty good. You can use it for all your DIY projects with much ease. And you do not need to buy multiple packs to wrap up the project as you get not 1 but 3 tubes in the pack.
There’s only one downside to this item. It is super sticky, and you should be a little careful with the application process. We had applied it on Swarovski and because the glue was so strong that some parts of the crystal came off. We suggest that you check the strength of the glue before applying it.
What We Like
Can be used on a range of surfaces
High durability
Excellent finish
Good quantity
What We Don’t Like
Can be too strong
Quantity: 3 Tubes | Volume: 0.10 fl oz Each | Cure Time: N/A | Dry Color: Clear | Resistance: Waterproof
4. E6000
If you are on the lookout for an adhesive that is popular for its toughness and durability, the E6000 230010 craft adhesive is the best bet. Irrespective of the kind of substrate that you apply it on, this item will indeed work its magic. This provides a perfect bond, and you will be able to fix everything with it.
While the tubes might look tiny, the adhesive is pretty powerful. This unique formula is well-suited to deliver top-notch performance and is preferred by users for both industrial-level and craft projects. So, you can understand how efficiently it can fix your plastic eyewear.
Moreover, you can turn it into any color that you want once the glue dries up. So, it gets easy to make it match the color of the substance that you put it on. This makes it convenient for you to put it on any surface of your choice, as you can make it in any color.
Furthermore, this item is entirely non-inflammable when it gets cured. Once it gets cured, you can rest assured that it can handle a wide range of temperatures. To be honest, it is entirely temperature-resistant. So, if you use it for any DIY project that involves using high heat, it will handle it well.
There's no doubt that the product scores perfectly when it comes to performance. However, keep in mind that the application might seem a little difficult. The tube does not come with an applicator, and unless you apply it carefully, it might get blotchy.
What We Like
Strong bond
Versatile
Durable finish
Resistant to high temperatures
What We Don’t Like
Application is not easy
Quantity: 1 Tube | Volume: 3.7 fl oz | Cure Time: At Least 24 Hours | Dry Color: Clear | Resistance: Waterproof, Temperature-resistant
5. Starbond EM-150
For a high gloss finish that provides a clear and hard coat, you should give the Starbond EM-150 CECOMINOD040312 a try. This is a great opinion for fixing your plastic eyewear and also for filling wood cracks and the like. You can rest assured that this premium glue will provide nothing but outstanding output.
The best part about this item is that the manufacturer did not compromise on the quality at all. In fact, special attention has been paid to ensuring that the quality of this adhesive is top-notch. This industrial-grade adhesive undergoes proper tests in the lab before it gets packaged. So, there's no doubt that you can handle challenging projects with this item.
On top of that, the application process of this product makes it very impressive. You will find additional applicators, stoppers, and a collection of tips for precise application, all included in the package. As a result, you do not have to visit the local supermarket for additional supplies. You can easily fix the tiniest of the cracks with micro-applicators.
Moreover, this glue comes with a good shelf life. So, even if you do not end up using the entire file in one go, you can keep it saved for future use. It won't disappoint you as it will remain in the exact same condition for years if you store it well.
Despite scoring well on performance, we were not really impressed with the way this item was packaged. The box in which it arrived was a little torn, and we were worried that it got damaged. In case you face a similar problem, you can contact their customer support team to ask for a replacement.
What is the Best Glue for Plastic Eyeglass Frames?
If you're looking for the best glue for plastic eyeglass frames, the table below provides a comparison of the quantity per package in units, volume measured in fluid ounces, cure time in hours and minutes, dry color, and resistance properties.
Buying Guide for the Best Glue for Plastic Eyeglass Frames
Before you can decide which item to go for, we would like to let you know about a few other important considerations. This will help you pick the best adhesive for your plastic eyeglasses. Let's take a look!
Curing Time
Most of the glues that we have mentioned on our list are super quick to dry. So, when you fix the eyeglasses with them, you can go back to wearing them in a few minutes.
However, be cautious about selecting a glue that does not dry up too fast. In case you have shaky fingers, this will become a problem as you will hardly get any time to adjust the pieces. If that's the case with you, consider going with UV light glues.
Simplicity of Use
Unless you are a pro, handling difficult-to-use glues means only one thing- mess. And we are sure that you would not like that.
In order to avoid messy situations, it is best that you find an adhesive that involves an easy application process. Unless it is easy to apply, the results can turn out blotchy too. In case there is no micro-applicator included in the package and if you are planning to fix the eyeglasses with it, we suggest that you get some from the market.
Durability
What good is a product if it does not last long? And adhesives are no different. So, it is always best to look for glues whose bond will not deteriorate soon. There are a few adhesives whose bonds start to weaken within a few months.
We strongly advise that you remain cautious and not buy a product that comes with a similar problem. It is essential to fix your eyewear correctly so that it does not keep troubling you time and often. So, glue that lasts for a long time should be your ideal choice.
Can I use regular household glue to repair my plastic eyeglass frames?
No, regular household glue is not recommended for repairing plastic eyeglass frames because it may not provide the necessary strength or longevity. Instead, use adhesives specifically designed for plastic materials.
Are glues for plastic eyeglass frames safe to use around the lenses?
Yes, glues for plastic eyeglass frames are generally safe to use around lenses, as long as the lenses do not come into direct contact with the adhesive. It's recommended to remove the lenses before a repair, if possible, to avoid potential damage.
Will gluing my plastic eyeglass frames together be as strong as a professional repair?
Gluing plastic eyeglass frames together will not be as strong as a professional repair. Professional services use specific techniques and materials optimized for durability in eyewear repairs.
How can I ensure a clean and precise repair job?
To ensure a clean and precise job, carefully clean the surfaces to be glued using rubbing alcohol or a mild detergent. Apply a minimal amount of adhesive using a toothpick, needle, or fine applicator to ensure accuracy and prevent messes.
Outdoor cooling can be a troubling prospect, particularly during the summers when the heat just won’t let up. Fortunately, you can use outdoor air conditioners to cool your outdoor patio, deck, or porch. The selection of outdoor air conditioners on the market is huge, which makes choosing one that fits your needs perfectly difficult. What follows is a comprehensive look at the 14 best outdoor AC units that you can consider when looking for a new cooling device.
Listed below are the best outdoor air conditioners:
Hessaire MC37M Evaporative Cooler: The Hessaire MC37M air cooler is excellent for large spaces with its ability to cool about 950 square feet and a high CFM rating of 3,100. Its high power may result in noticeable noise compared to Honeywell's portable evaporative cooler.
VAGKRI Evaporative Cooler: An air cooler boasting three cooling methods - water, air, and ice. Powerful cooling for up to 700 square feet. While its 8-gallon water tank allows for long-duration cooling, the instruction manual's clarity lags behind other models.
Honeywell Portable Evaporative Cooler: The Honeywell evaporative cooler has a compact design, ideal for medium-sized outdoor spaces. The smaller size and coverage area of only 350 square feet make it less effective for larger spaces compared to the Hessaire MC37M.
Hessaire MC18M Portable Evaporative Cooler: The Hessaire MC18M is an affordable and lightweight option. It can cool medium to semi-large spaces, covering up to 500 square feet. This cooler has fewer secondary features, in comparison with the VAGKRI evaporative cooler.
Honeywell CO48PM Evaporative Cooler: Honeywell CO48PM is an evaporative cooler characterized by high-power cooling suitable for large areas and a hefty 10.6-gallon water tank for extended use. Mobility might become an issue due to its weight, unlike the lightweight Hessaire MC18M.
1. Best Overall: Hessaire MC37M Evaporative Cooler
What We Like
Low-weight and highly mobile
High-power evaporative cooler
Continuous-fill option
High-coverage area
What We Don't Like
It can be a little loud at times
The Hessaire MC37M evaporative cooler is an air conditioner geared for outdoor usage with a low-weight build for easy mobility. It is designed to be compact yet has enough power to cool about 950 square feet of space with no issues.
This portable air conditioner comes with four heavy-duty locking casters, further leaning into the mobility aspect of the air conditioner. I found that I could move it around my patio without much trouble, even with a full tank. If it suits your fancy, you can take the cooler along on a camping trip, as it is light and mobile enough for RVs.
As for its cooling capacity, the MC37M has a high CFM rating of 3,100. The fan in this cooling unit has three speeds and oscillating louvers for even distribution, comfort, and coverage. Both of these components can be controlled separately, allowing you a degree of control over the intensity of cooling. That said, I did find the cooler to be a little louder than what would be ideal.
The three sides of the unit have high-density cooling pads that increase evaporative surface area and spread cooler air. Moreover, you can attach a garden hose to the float adapter to make use of the continuous fill option. With this, you needn’t worry about repeated refills, as the cooler will do it for you.
Coverage Area: 750 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 3,100 | Power Consumption: 250 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 10.3 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3
2. Best Powerful Cooler for a Moderate Price Range: VAGKRI Evaporative Cooler
What We Like
8-gallon water tank
Includes a remote control
Ice compartment for extra cooling
A continuous fill hose attachment
What We Don't Like
The instructions manual may be a bit unclear
The VAGKRI evaporative cooler uses three cooling methods to provide you with cool air: water, air, and ice. It can reduce ambient temperature, add humidity, and act as a fan when using these modes.
As for its power, the VAGKRI portable swamp cooler can cover up to 700 square feet of area at the rate of 2,100 CFM, which makes for powerful cooling with decent area coverage.
Furthermore, it has an intake panel on three of its sides that allows quick cooling and delivery of cold air through a powerful motor. Additionally, it has an 8-gallon water tank large enough to provide sufficient cooling, and it can store ice in a compartment for a chilling effect. The water tank can be filled manually or by using the continuous fill option that keeps the cooler running for hours on end.
Lastly, the portable air conditioner features a digital display paired with an electronic control panel to keep the operation simple. For secondary features, the VAGKRI cooler has multiple fan speeds to choose from, a timer for auto-shutdown, and a fully functional remote control. I did find the instructions manual to be a little unclear about the functionalities of the swamp cooler, however.
Coverage Area: 700 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 2,100 | Power Consumption: 105 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 7.9 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3
3. Best Compact Outdoor AC: Honeywell Portable Evaporative Cooler
What We Like
Compact design
Detachable water tank
Top-loading ice compartment
Outdoor-safe
What We Don't Like
May not be effective for larger spaces
For medium-sized outdoor spaces, the Honeywell Portable Evaporative Cooler may be an option to look into. It is constructed with three primary components: a fan, a pump, and a honeycomb-shaped absorbent panel.
Being geared for medium-sized spaces, the Honeywell portable air conditioner is appropriately small. Thus, it can be moved around with ease and placed anywhere you like, so long as it has access to a power outlet. And because of its smaller size, the cooler doesn’t cover as large an area.
Covering 350 square feet, the Honeywell portable air conditioner can provide a cool breeze for lounging on your patio on summer days. It comes with three humidity settings to keep you comfortable while it runs: fan, ice, and water.
The water tank on this cooler is detachable, allowing you to fill it up separately without having to move the whole unit. And much like the VAGKRI outdoor air conditioner before it, the Honeywell cooler features an ice compartment for cooler air distribution in hotter spaces.
For secondary features, the cooler comes with a remote control and a timer that is programmable for up to 7.5 hours.
Coverage Area: 350 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 806 | Power Consumption: 288 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 7.9 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3
4. Best Affordable Outdoor AC: Hessaire MC18M Portable Evaporative Cooler
What We Like
Affordable portable air conditioner
Lightweight design
Low electricity consumption
Decent water tank capacity
What We Don't Like
Few secondary features
The Hessaire MC18M is an affordable option that is designed to cool spaces that are medium and semi-large. It functions as a humidifier in dry climates, using low electricity to increase condensation and air delivery.
At 16 pounds, the unit can be lifted up and moved around without any issues. It does include caster wheels to improve mobility when the water tank is full. And despite its small size, it is capable of covering a relatively large area of 500 square feet.
This model features knob-style controls that can be used to switch between two fan speeds. Moreover, you can combine high and low fan speeds with the pump to create the humidifying environment needed.
Hessaire has included both the manual and continuous fill for water filling, much like the MC37M that I reviewed earlier. The cooler can run for about four hours on a single manual refill, which is a decent water tank capacity. That said, the lack of any additional features may be a point of contention for some.
Coverage Area: 500 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 1,300 | Power Consumption: 85 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 4.8 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 2
5. Best Weather-resistant Outdoor AC: Honeywell CO48PM Evaporative Cooler
What We Like
High build quality
High cooling capacity
Large water tank
Weatherproof and UV-resistant
What We Don't Like
Mobility can be a bit of an issue
The Honeywell CO48PM is a high-power evaporative controller intended to be used in large spaces. This tower-type outdoor air conditioner can be used in patios, garages, decks, backyards, and more.
It makes use of honeycomb pads on three of its four sides to maximize coverage. And combined with its powerful cooling, the CO48PM can be placed anywhere in a large area without sacrificing cool air.
To sustain this high cooling capacity, the Honeywell cooler comes with a large 10.6-gallon tank. Moreover, the tank can be connected to a garden hose for continuous refilling, enabling it to run for hours uninterrupted.
The body of this outdoor air conditioner is weatherproof as well as UV resistant, meaning it can withstand being outside for a good while. Its high build quality means that the unit will continue to function for a long time.
As for mobility, the CO48PM can’t be lifted without help, but it does come with caster wheels to help with it. Even so, it may be difficult to move around because of its weight. It also has a long electrical cord that allows you to move it without interrupting the airflow. Additionally, you can avoid messy tangles with the dedicated cord storage.
Coverage Area: 1037 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 1,702 | Power Consumption: 150 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 10.6 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3
6. Best Battery-powered Outdoor AC: EEIEER Portable Air Conditioner
What We Like
Small and lightweight design
Affordable
Battery-powered
Quick cooling
What We Don't Like
Runs out of water quickly
The EEIEER Portable Air Conditioner is a small and affordable cooling fan that can sit on a desk in an outdoor office. It is targeted towards personal use and so, its fan covers a relatively small area.
This model combines the functionalities of a table fan, an air cooler, a humidifier, and night lights for a complete home office cooling solution. It comes with three distinct wind speed functions in the form of natural, cold, and strong wind that cater to different needs.
Much like most other outdoor air conditioners on this list, the EEIEER cooler uses water evaporation for fast cooling. While it doesn’t have a dedicated ice storage compartment, you can add ice to the water tank to further speed up the cooling process.
But unlike most other electric outdoor air conditioners on this list, the EEIEER cooler runs on a 4,000 mAh battery. Combined with its lightweight and low power consumption, the desk cooler can be taken to summer camps and other travels as the primary cooling device. The small water tank also means that it can run out of water very quickly.
For secondary features, the EEIEER air conditioner comes with a remote controller that is fairly responsive, along with a 2/4 H timing setting.
Coverage Area: 120 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 700 | Power Consumption: 10 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 0.11 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3
7. Best Humidifying Cooler: Paris Rhone Evaporative Cooler
What We Like
High-cooling capacity
Large water tank
High moisture output as a humidifier
Large air spread area
What We Don't Like
The top-fill design may not be very effective
If you want to maximize cooling in your outdoor space, you may look at the Paris Rhone cooler as an option. This is a swamp cooler that comes with four ice packs to spread moisturized and cool air across a wide area.
The Paris Rhone portable air conditioner is a 2,943 CFM outdoor air conditioner that features a maximum air velocity of 29.5 ft/s. This is paired with a large 11.9-gallon water tank that can keep the air conditioner going for up to 24 hours at low speed. It has a top-fill design for refilling, although I am not quite sold on its effectiveness.
You can use the Paris Rhone cooler as a humidifier as well which has a moisture output of 6 L/h for refreshing and humidified air. It comes with three wind speeds to choose from that spread air across the area with both auto and manual oscillation.
Despite the weight, the cooler can be moved around with the caster wheels. You can position the air conditioner in a manner that keeps it closer to the garden hose for the continuous fill feature.
And lastly, it has an easy-to-use remote control, along with a touch-operated panel.
Coverage Area: 1470 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 2,943 | Power Consumption: 25 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 1.58 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3
8. Best Build Quality: Uthfy Evaporative Cooler
What We Like
Sheet metal body
High cooling capacity
High-density cooling pads
High water tank capacity
What We Don't Like
The cooler may be a bit too heavy
The Uthfy Evaporative Cooler is a high-powered swamp cooler that comes with three ice boxes and a large water tank to facilitate cooling. Its body is made from sheet metal that is impact and corrosion-resistant and easy to clean.
It features a powerful fan with a high cooling capacity of 3531 CFM, which is combined with three fan speeds and auto side-to-side oscillation. The fan works in tandem with the three rigid high-density cooling pads that increase the evaporative surface area for spreading cooler air. And with the included ice boxes, the cooling effect increases even further.
The large 10.6-gallon water tank can be filled both manually and by using the continuous fill option. It can fit a standard garden hose with the water pipe joint included on the body. Additionally, it features a drainage port at the bottom to make cleaning and maintenance easy.
As for operation, the Uthfy air conditioner has four independent round buttons that control fan speed, from low to medium and high. The console also includes a built-in oscillation button that controls the side-to-side oscillation. For vertical adjustment, you can manually move the louvers up and down as required. These functions can also be accessed from the remote control.
It is a little heavier than most portable air conditioners, but it remains mobile with four heavy-duty caster wheels. Two of these feature brakes as well for easy maneuverability.
Coverage Area: 1715 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 3,531 | Power Consumption: 200 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 10.6 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3
9. Best Small Evaporative Cooler: Sharper Image Portable Evaporative Cooler
What We Like
LED water level display
Detachable water tank
Doubles as a humidifier
Built-in timer
What We Don't Like
Low water tank capacity
The Sharper Image Portable Evaporative Cooler is a small cooler geared towards relatively smaller spaces. It strives to maintain a comfortable space with an evaporative system both indoors and outdoors.
This model features three different speed settings to choose from, namely low, medium, and high. The Sharper Image cooler can be used as a humidifier as well to improve the air quality of your patio or room.
You can find the swing and oscillation features in this cooler, in addition to the built-in timer settings. The timer ranges from 0.5 hours to 9.5 hours, with an interval of 30 minutes between each set. Additionally, this cooler has an energy-saving mode to further reduce the amount of power it consumes during operation.
Featuring a detachable water tank capacity of 1.6 liters, the Sharper Image cooler can run for a few hours without interruption. That said, the tank capacity does leave a bit to be desired. You can view the water level on an LED display to get a better idea of when to refill it.
Lastly, it comes with a wireless remote control that allows you to control all of these functions from a distance.
Coverage Area: 250 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 750 | Power Consumption: 90 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 0.42 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3
10. Best Premium Outdoor Air Conditioner: Big Ass Fans Cool Space 400
What We Like
3,600-floor area coverage
Powerful cooling fan
Long run time without refills
Effective cooling media
What We Don't Like
May be priced too high for some
It is indeed a big fan with a high cooling capacity! The Big Ass Fans Cool Space 400 is a premium high-power portable air conditioner that covers a large floor area without much trouble. It makes use of a refrigerant to power its cooling even further.
Using its 36-inch fan, the Big Ass Fans cooler can cover an area of 3,600 square feet comfortably. Boasting a CFM rating that ranges from 6,400 to 9,700, the portable air conditioner is capable of cooling down air up to 33 degrees Fahrenheit.
It has a 46-gallon tank that can keep the fan running for up to 10 hours without needing a direct connection to a water source. That said, you can keep it connected to a garden hose to make use of the continuous fill function to keep it running endlessly.
The cooling media used by the Big Ass Fans cooler is 8 inches thick, long-lasting, chemically treated, and coated in a thermosetting resin. This makes it resistant to algae and dirt, which can reduce the effort needed to clean the media. Dirt and other particles cannot penetrate into the substrate, which can be convenient for maintenance.
As is the standard, the Cool Space 400 has variable speed controls that allow you to maintain the desired temperature. It comes with locking swivel casters, automatic low-water shutoff, and a drain plug for maintenance.
These features don’t come in an affordable price tag, though. This means that the Cool Space 400 may be priced too high for some users just looking for a moderately-sized cooler.
Coverage Area: 3,600 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 6,400 to 9,700 | Power Consumption: 515 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 46 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 10
11. Outdoor AC With Best Evaporation Rate: Portacool Cyclone 140
What We Like
High-power portable air conditioner
Effective evaporative media
900 square feet of coverage
40-gallon reservoir
What We Don't Like
Single speed fan
The Portacool Cyclone 140 is a portable outdoor cooler designed to be used in patios, garages, and outdoor spaces. It’s a portable air conditioner that sits in the premium price range, featuring many options to customize your cooling preferences.
Equipped with Kuul Comfort evaporative media, the Portacool Cyclone 140 has a high rate of water evaporation to provide cooling comfort. It is powerful enough to cool up to 900 square feet of area, along with a cooling capacity of 3,900. The lack of different fan speeds does leave a bit to be desired.
Facilitating this cooling is the large 40-gallon water reservoir, which comes with an LED water level indicator that pinpoints when you need to refill it. The reservoir can be filled manually or using the continuous fill option for continuous use.
Moreover, the Cyclone 140 can be moved around using the caster wheels without any issues. It can be placed where needed so long as it is within range of a power outlet.
Coverage Area: 900 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 4,200 | Wattage: 480 | Reservoir Capacity: 40 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 2
Remote battery compartment is not easily accessible
Designed to be fast and effective at cooling, the MEPTY evaporative cooler features three high-density cooling pads for maximum evaporative surface area. Combined with a high-powered fan, the MEPTY cooler is capable of quickly reducing the ambient temperature.
The 3,531 CFM portable air conditioner can cool outdoor areas and rooms up to 900 square feet while spreading 3,100 cubic feet per minute of cool air. Using a wide oscillation system, the cold breeze can be distributed throughout the personal space with no trouble.
Featuring a built-in 10.6-gallon water tank, the MEPTY cooler can keep working for several hours. The large water tank leans into the cooling aspect of the evaporative air conditioner, spreading even more cool wind.
Besides, it has a top-refill design that ensures the water hits the cooling medium more effectively. Moreover, the water tank level will be visible to you as you refill it, giving you an idea of when to stop refilling.
As for other features, the MEPTY portable air conditioner has four universal wheels with brakes on two for mobility. It can be moved around on a flat surface with relative ease in large spaces without needing help to lift it up. And for operation, the cooler has round buttons for fan speeds, as well as three switches for swing, cooling, and power options. Its remote battery compartment was surprisingly difficult to access, I must add.
Coverage Area: 900 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 3,531 | Power Consumption: 200 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 10.6 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3
13. Best for Customizable Cooling: Yescom Evaporative Cooler
What We Like
Easy to move
120-degree vertical wind direction adjustment
Customizable wind speed
Built-in auto timer
What We Don't Like
The cooling power may not be high enough
Sitting in the low-to-medium price range, the Yescom Evaporative Cooler is an option to look at as an outdoor air conditioner. It is geared towards efficient energy consumption, meaning that it consumes very little power to cool down a given area.
This is a portable remote control-operated cooler that can switch between fan and humidifier modes quickly. With its 17-liter water tank capacity, the cooler can keep going for several hours.
It comes with three fan speed options and a built-in timer to turn the machine on and off automatically. You can choose from 13.5 m/s on high, 10 m/s on medium, and 7.5 m/s on low for fan speeds. This can work with the timer, with the latter featuring a 1-8 hour customizable window, along with a 120-degree wind direction adjustment function.
The Yescom cooler has side handles on top, along with four caster wheels on the bottom for mobility. These features make the cooler highly mobile, requiring little effort to move around the space. Though its power may feel relatively low in comparison to other portable air conditioners.
Coverage Area: 650 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 525-729 | Power Consumption: 200 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 4.49 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3
14. Best Low-priced Outdoor Table Fan: HIFRESH Small Evaporative Air Cooler
What We Like
Small, lightweight design
360-degree auto-oscillation
LED touch control panel
Continuous mist spray as a humidifier
What We Don't Like
Does not cover a large area
Designed for outdoor office usage, the HIFRESH evaporative air cooler is a small desk fan that can sit unobtrusively on your table. It is a small portable cooler that can be moved around easily and features 360-degree auto oscillation.
The HIFRESH cooler works using a 4,000 mAh battery that can be recharged using an ordinary USB-C type cable. You can charge it on the go in your car or from a power bank if needed, further adding to its portability. It can be operated with the LED touch panel that sits on top of the cover.
Its water tank can hold up to 16 fluid ounces of water, which is sufficient to keep the air conditioner going for some time. Additionally, you can add ice cubes to the tank to add a little oomph to the cooling. That said, it doesn’t have a particularly large coverage area.
The HIFRESH evaporative air cooler can also double as a humidifier by toggling the humidification mode on. It sprays a continuous mist to simulate humid climates that can help reduce nasal congestion, dry skin, and cough that a dry summer day can cause.
Coverage Area: 300 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 700 | Power Consumption: 5 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 0.12 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3
What is the Best Outdoor Air Conditioner?
If you're on the lookout for the best outdoor air conditioner, the table below displays specifications detailing the coverage area measured in square feet, the CFM rating, power consumption in wattage, reservoir capacity measured in gallons, and the number of fan speeds available.
Unlike indoor Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) units, outdoor air conditioners make use of an evaporation system to cool air in a space. Since there are no walls to contain the cool air outdoors, these units have to function in a manner that is fundamentally different.
Unlike a central air conditioner, the British Thermal Unit is not used to determine how capable an outdoor cooling unit is. A different unit, named “CFM” (short for cubic feet per meter), is used to gauge the cooling capabilities of an outdoor air conditioner.
Thus, picking the right air conditioner for your outdoor space is fundamentally different from picking one for your living room or bedroom. Here’s a comprehensive look at the factors that make for a good outdoor air conditioner.
Water Tank Size
Outdoor air conditioners make use of a water tank as a part of their evaporation system. The larger this tank is, the longer your air conditioning unit will be able to cool your room down.
Now, the water tank should only be as large as what is needed to consistently cool the required area. Any smaller, and you will need to refill it frequently to keep the air conditioner working well. And an oversized one will consume too much water and electricity, on top of potentially simulating humid climates.
Some models come with an autofill or continuous fill feature that requires the unit to be connected to a garden hose. The air conditioner will draw water from the exhaust hose when the tank goes below a certain water level, circumventing the need to refill it repeatedly. And, if you need quick fills, you may also find dual hose models on the market.
Air Conditioner Size
The size of an outdoor air conditioner directly affects its mobility, and units with large water tanks will be difficult to move around. Ideally, if you want the unit to not be a semi-permanent fixture in your patio, you will want it to be as light as possible. A tower-type air conditioner may also work here, provided that it is designed for outdoor use. This includes the weight of the water in its tank as well.
Something that is of extreme importance to outdoor air conditioners is their ability to handle weather conditions. Some models can handle the sun when placed outside, but it’s generally a good idea to keep them away from direct exposure. You will need the air conditioner to be mobile enough to circumvent this issue.
CFM Rating
The CFM rating is a metric that determines how efficiently an air conditioner moves air in any given space. Outdoor conditioners with high CFM ratings are highly efficient at moving surrounding air in said space. Be sure to match your space with a unit that has the appropriate CFM rating.
Advanced Features
Secondary features add to the quality-of-life aspect of outdoor conditioners. These features are not strictly necessary for an outdoor AC to perform its task as necessary, but having them adds to their overall value. Some of them can be:
Fan oscillation
Fan speeds
Programmable timers
Auto-shutdown feature
Humidifier
Remote controls
A small caveat associated with air conditioners that come with these features is that they, too, require regular maintenance to function properly. Evaporators, condensers, and compressors are all vital parts of the air conditioner that must be taken care of properly every once in a while. Doing so will keep every part of your AC working properly for a long while.
Electronic and Mechanical Air Conditioners
Electronic air conditioners are the most common type of portable outdoor air conditioner. These include all the features mentioned earlier in order to perform their function in a convenient manner. But if you don’t want to commit to the relatively high maintenance needs of such devices, you could look into an alternative.
Mechanical air conditioners feature analog controls and mechanically controlled vents that work in a way similar to electronic portable air conditioners. The key difference here is that these are more affordable and simplified options that only require very occasional maintenance. Owing to their simplified nature, mechanical portable air conditioners can also be DIY-fixed, which is usually not possible with their electronic counterparts.
Moreover, these portable air conditioners have a mechanical air cleaner that uses a fibrous mesh that clears the air passing through them. It does so by trapping the particles onto the surface of the fibers, where they remain immobile.
You may also find mechanical outdoor air conditioners to be energy efficient, saving you some money on the electricity bill.
How long can I keep my evaporative cooler on?
Yes, you can keep your evaporative cooler on continuously for long periods if necessary, although it's essential to ensure adequate water supply. To prolong its lifespan and maintain efficiency it is advisable to turn it off when the desired temperature is reached or when not in use. Routine maintenance and inspections should also be carried out to ensure optimal operation.
How do I extend the lifespan of my outdoor air conditioner?
To extend the lifespan of your outdoor air conditioner, regular maintenance is crucial, including cleaning or replacing the filter, inspecting refrigerant levels, and ensuring the unit is clear of debris. Periodic professional servicing can catch small issues before they become bigger problems. Moreover, reducing the workload on the unit by using it judiciously and improving home insulation can also increase its lifespan.
Can I run an evaporative cooler without water?
While it is physically possible to run an evaporative cooler without water, it is not recommended. The primary function of an evaporative cooler, also known as a swamp cooler, is to cool the air through the evaporation of water. Running it without water will cause the unit to simply circulate air without cooling it, and continuous operation in this manner can potentially damage the system.
Are outdoor air conditioners environmentally friendly?
The environmental friendliness of outdoor air conditioners depends on factors such as the type of refrigerant they use and their energy efficiency. Traditional models that use HFC refrigerants can contribute to global warming if the refrigerant is released into the atmosphere. Newer models are becoming more energy-efficient and use environmentally friendly refrigerants, which can reduce their environmental impact.
For the simple fact that evaporative air coolers require more power to function correctly, gauging how powerful yours needs to be is a bit tricky. There is no shortage of options for a great portable air conditioner, after all.
During my testing, I found the Hessaire MC37M Evaporative Cooler to be the best outdoor air conditioner. It offers everything that an evaporative fan needs at an affordable rate without consuming too much power.
That said, evaporative coolers from brands like VAGKRI and Honeywell are not far behind, offering something similar while trading out a feature or two. They serve slightly different needs, and they may just be what you need.
At the end of the day, there is no correct answer when it comes to the conundrum of choosing a portable outdoor air conditioner. As a customer, what you need out of the evaporative cooler is all that matters, after all.
Science fiction is that unique genre in any literary or artistic medium that brings the best out of an artist’s mind. It juxtaposes whatever abstract thoughts the mind produces, forming the most extraordinary shapes and shadows and grotesque structures with a practical line of scientific thought and explanation.
This is interesting as although the scientific and rational mind strives to explain these strange figures to lessen their terrific effect on the psyche; ironically, it ends up pulling these fascinating thoughts to the verge of reality which intensifies the horror of the unreal!
And this is precisely why, humankind has always had a horrifying fascination with science fiction and fantastical interpretations, more in the area of visual renditions than in any other medium, driven by the inspirational effect it can have on an individual's imagination.
This is precisely why artists have turned towards sci-fi and fantasy art books time and again to be thrilled and to be inspired enough to be as thrilling in creativity as the mind that creates the most unbelievable of all unusual things.
Here's the list of the 21 best sci-fi art books for artists, curated to ignite the imagination and unleash the creative potential by exploring the captivating world of science fiction and fantastical interpretations through visual renditions.
1. The Art of Ian Miller - Best for Gothic Art
The ‘Art of Ian Miller’ is an extensive retrospective and analysis of Miller's unconventional artwork. Miller has been greatly influenced by the master storyteller and artist of gothic and fantastical fiction, HP Lovecraft himself which stunningly reflects in his creations.
Most of Miller’s grotesque, fantastical outlines and gothic imagery have been used on HP Lovecraft’s book covers and Games Workshop publications along with incorporating his signature style into the concept art used in films.
Miller’s mastery of the techniques of making the art of macabre seems to hold no hostage when it transforms his imagination into magnificent visual art forms. The book contains everything from some of his most disturbing and haunting depictions to enchanting Tolkien-esque characters and unnerving illustrations that may remind of the etching by Gustav Dore.
Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: 9.29 x 0.73 x 12.5 inches | Weight: 2.62 pounds | Publisher: Titan Books
2. H.R Giger’s Necronomicon - Best for Sci-Fi Art
Published in the year 1977, ‘Necronomicon’ was the first significant compendium of images that were created by prestigious Swiss artist, H.R Giger. This book was subsequently given to Ridley Scott during the pre-production of his movie, Alien, after which he hired Giger to create the conceptual designs and artwork for the film.
Sphinx Verlag first published the book. Thereafter, Morpheus International took it upon themselves to republish the book in the year 1993 along with a significant part of the designs produced by Giger for Alien.
A second collection of Giger’s images came out in print in 1985, known as the Necronomicon 2 which was published by Edition C in Switzerland.
Interestingly the title of Giger’s book is named after H.P Lovecraft’s fictional grimoire, “Necronomicon” which he invented and used as a “plot device” for his stories. Lovecraft’s “Necronomicon” is a compendium of “pre-human” lore enmeshed in Gothic elements of storytelling and depiction that was compiled by Arab Abdul Alhazred, a fictional mad Arab of Lovecraft’s creation, circa 700.
The fact Giger’s book of images has been republished and produced in numerous sci-fi art books makes it a unique and precious object for all lovers of the genre.
Length: 92 pages | Dimensions: 12.25 x 0.5 x 17 inches | Weight: 3.69 pounds | Publisher: Morpheus International
3. The Art of Chesley Bonestell by Ron Miller - Best for Space Art
Co-written with Frederick C. Durante with a forward from Sir Arthur C. Clarke, ‘The Art of Chesley Bonestell’ displays over 300 images by famed space artist and architect, Ron Miller.
These include drawings from the illustrations of the chief engineer’s plans for the Golden Gate Bridge for the benefit of investors. It also contains one of his favorite paintings from the ones that he had himself made, ‘The Engulfed Cathedral A Fantasy’ and his pre-space-travel lunar along with Martian landscapes created for magazines such as ‘Galaxy and Astounding.’
It can be safely remarked that if you aren’t an astronaut for real, then all your conceptions of how outer space might look have probably been formed by Chesley Bonestell's super-realistic paintings of the planetary scenes. And this was also the fact that caused a tremendous sensation when some of the images were published by ‘Life’ in 1944.
Length: 256 pages | Dimensions: 9.1 x 1.1 x 11.65 inches | Weight: 3.54 pounds | Publisher: Paper Tiger
4. The Art Of John Harris: Beyond The Horizon - Best for Science Fantasy Art
John Harris is unquestionably a name to reckon with when it comes to science fantasy fiction, and we could definitely tell why, as he grew up with books written by legends such as Arthur C Clarke, Isaac Asimov, and Alfred Bester. The influence of such writers on Harris has been profound, and the effect seen is unmistakable in his art books.
Harris is known as one of the most influential contributors to the sci-fi genre, creating a myriad of spectacular visual imagery in his books since the mid-’70s.
The Art Of John Harris: Beyond The Horizon stands to be a celebrated example of artwork that includes everything from vast and expansive landscapes and tower cities to ethereal, floating cities. This marvelous hardback consists of illustrations created by Harris over a span of four hefty decades that sound like an absolute treasure-house of imagery.
Although Harris worked mainly with watercolors taking them as his essential color medium for all sorts of illustrations, he was also known to experiment extensively with acrylics. He also has a book containing illustrations in colored pencils that capture his surrealistic take on fantastic world scenery.
Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: 9.35 x 0.7 x 12.5 inches | Weight: 2.59 pounds | Publisher: Titan Books
5. Middle-Earth Envisioned - Best for Tolkien-inspired Art
Few authors have been known to aspire and achieve the kind of creative grandeur that Tolkien had with his unbelievable portrayal of the magical Middle Earth in his equally mystical and unparalleled fantasy fiction, The Lord Of The Rings.
This literary milestone has been impacting and influencing art for decades and continues to inspire spectacular visual adaptations.
‘Middle-Earth Envisioned’ captures the wide spectrum of Tolkien-inspired art from the first unauthorized Canadian broadcast in 1953, comic books, Peter Jackson, and letter-known adaptations such as one for Russian TV.
All in all, this is one book that all fans of Tolkien’s fan should have by means.
Length: 216 pages | Dimensions: 10.5 x 1 x 12.38 inches | Weight: 3.55 pounds | Publisher: Race Point Publishing
6. The Art of Jim Burns: Hyperluminal
Hyperluminal celebrates 40 years’ worth of Jim Burns’s works and stands to be one of the most precious sources of inspiration for all die-hards of the fantasy art genre. Burns is known for the covers that he has created for some of the most esteemed contributors to the fantasy-fiction genre such as Peter F Hamilton, Anne McCaffrey, and George RR Martin.
And if you find these to be some of the finest works of Burns, then do get yourself a copy of Hyperluminal right away. This is one book that will help widen your perspective of the fantasy world, helping you to understand how artists can draw distinct parallelism between it with the mundane world.
The art of Jim Burns shows all the proofs of having transitioned and transcended the traditional techniques of art, pervading and imbibing all the essentials of Photoshop and methods of digital illustration, truly establishing as a prolific artist in the field.
Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: 9.3 x 0.7 x 12.5 inches | Weight: 1.25 pounds | Publisher: Titan Books
7. E338: The Art Of Loic Zimmermann
The cinematic art genius Loic Zimmerman is a celebrated and greatly sought-after visual artist for renowned filmmakers who have redefined cinematic art in itself! Zimmerman’s profound knowledge and incredibly deft handling of both 2D and 3D mediums has not only influenced other subgenres of fantasy in cinema substantially but has also earned him the reputation of having a “hotch-potch punk” attitude towards his work. This is because of the rebellious spirit that is often reflected in his works.
Zimmerman's own nature is not very different from the nature of his art itself. A unique and quirky character himself, Loic Zimmerman brings a new perspective to legendary pop culture icons that include names like Wolverine and Bob Dylan.
This reflects the extent of his imagination, his understanding of the subject, and his skills as an artist. E338, made from equal parts surrealism, eroticism, and nightmarish horror, stands to be magnificent proof of Zimmerman’s genius.
Length: 152 pages | Dimensions: 10 x 0.5 x 10 inches | Weight: 2.25 pounds | Publisher: 3DTotal Publishing
8. Substrata: Open World Dark Fantasy
The game, Darksiders by Vigil Games had shot up high in fame owing to its stunning art and battle levels that were created and developed by the esteemed game illustrator, Paul Richards. After the eventual collapse of the game, Richards gathered over 80 artists who have previously created some of the top video games ever from all corners of the world, together compiling what is known as the book of “what-if” on the Darksiders 3 concept art.
In the absence of studio constraints, the genre of dark fantasy fiction saw the unrestrained flow of imagination and absolute creative genius of the artists’ minds which came together to give birth to some of the most beautifully gruesome characters that there could ever have been.
These included monsters, designs, vast open spaces and locations, monsters, and all that a video game fan can ever dream of seeing in print. Also, one of the best things about this book is that it provides you with precious insight into their WIPs and gives you an idea of the world of video game concept design.
Length: 240 pages | Dimensions: 9 x 1 x 12 inches | Weight: 2.56 pounds | Publisher: Udon Entertainment
9. The Art Of Greg Spalenka
Greg Spalenka is no short of being a legendary illustrator who has produced simply bewitching visual art in his career that spanned more than four decades in time. His level of expertise involved creating concept film art and illustrating boxing heroes as well as marvelous Polaroid photographs. There is simply no section in the field Spalenka has not been known to have experimented with.
The Art of Greg Spalenka chronicles and showcases almost all of the artworks that Spalenka has produced in his entire career up until the point where he gracefully transitions into the world of digital illustration.
The highlights of the book include all that we would want to have from Spalenka, including the spectacular vistas and characters from the Chronicles of Narnia: The Voyage of the Dawn Treader illustrations!
Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: 9.34 x 0.79 x 12.5 inches | Weight: 2.72 pounds | Publisher: Titan Books
10. Sci-Fi and Fantasy Oil Painting Techniques by Patrick Jones
Patrick Jones during his learning days had been influenced and inspired by prominent names in art such as Frank Frazetta and Boris Vallejo which compelled him to leave his native Ireland and settle in London where he pursued his artistic career.
Over time Jones developed a brilliant understanding of traditional methods of art including a steady focus on oils, eventually exploring the field of digital art mediums, with Corel Painter becoming his favorite software.
His profound understanding of both forms of art foregrounds some of the crucial rules for getting it just right in fantasy oil paintings. So, if you’re aspiring to learn more about the traditional art methods in the fantasy genre, then this is a book that you should use as a definitive guide and reference tool for the purpose.
Length: 192 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 0.9 x 11 inches | Weight: 2.13 pounds | Publisher: Korero Press
11. Spectrum 25 The Best in Contemporary Fantastical Art
The Spectrum 25 is almost hailed as essential for fantasy art as anything can ever be in the field itself for all ardent admirers of the sci-fi and fantasy art genre. The edition that was launched on the book’s 20th anniversary is also the last book that was written and compiled by its celebrated author and illustrator, Laurie Lee Brom.
With the kind of magically beautiful visual art that the artist creates for the book, it would just be a mistake not to have a copy of it if you’re a fan of mystical and fantastical art. And this is precisely what makes Brom every bit a worthy recipient of the Grand Master Award along with the reputation of having been featured on the cover of every issue.
The book contains all that our imagination can spell out when it comes to fantasy art and all forms of it be it in comics, editorials, or even unpublished works. You will find a new, curious character on every page waiting for you to get to know the story of their origin.
Length: 304 pages | Dimensions: 9.35 x 1.25 x 12.25 inches | Weight: 1 pound | Publisher: Flesk Publications
12. Guillermo del Toro: Cabinet of Curiosities
Guillermo del Toro needs no introduction. The Mexican filmmaker has acquired enough accolades for the world to know of his brilliant works as a master storyteller and an artistic genius. And in this semi-autobiographical book, you will all of the works of del Toro that speak of his admiration and fascination with occult art.
The ‘Cabinet of Curiosities’ is replete with scribbled notes, sketches, doodles, storyboards, collections, and interestingly enough, “obsessions” that take us on a tour of del Toro’s enlightened, mystic mind from which he fashions a strategy of infusing all of his absolute masterpieces with the essence of the supernatural.
The book also gives us a visual slice of his sprawling mansion in LA that is considered almost like a museum containing oddities full of film memorabilia and original props, portraying del Toro’s larger-than-life imagination.
‘Sexy Robot’ was that work that had extolled Hajime Sorayama’s genius as an artist and brought him global recognition. The author paints a very organic picture of robotic forms inspired by pin-up art, where the “feminoid” robots appear as chrome-plated gynoids striking suggestive poses.
His next science fiction book, ‘Pin-up’ also follows the same pattern. The works of the author seem to follow similar themes involving figures in suggestive poses with one that includes a substantially realistic depiction of leather and latex. Sorayama’s art is considered to be highly explicit and meant strictly for adults. The futuristic and erotic illustrations resonate loudly in the mind’s eye owing to their hyperrealistic nature, creating the kind of visual landscape that is impossible to achieve in photography alone.
Length: N/A | Dimensions: 9.25 x 0.25 x 11.5 inches | Weight: 1.5 pounds | Publisher: Books Nippan
14. Journeyman: The Art of Chris Moore and Stephen Gallagher
The illustrative book, ‘Journeyman’ was the first collection by Chris Moore, a globally recognized science fiction illustrator, that included a stunning range of paintings, complete with book covers, albums, and posters. These were hyper-realistically created fantastical depictions of simple as well as elaborated colored sketches that foregrounded the versatility of Chris Moore’s illustrative universe.
It is an absolute feast for the senses that is bestowed with the best of expressions penned by the critically acclaimed author of the thriller genre, Stephen Gallagher, through a series of conversations in the book.
These conversations tell the story of the modern-day journeyman and during the course of the story reveal interesting details about the process of creating art.
Length: 112 pages | Dimensions: 9 x 0.75 x 10.75 inches | Weight: 1.74 pounds | Publisher: Paper Tiger
15. Frank Kelly Freas: The Art of Science Fiction by Frank Kelly Freas
It is a belief amongst a section of the community that is formed of ardent lovers of sci-fi art and literature that Frank Kelly Freas could possibly be the best sci-fi artist to have ever lived. And we certainly have solid reasons to believe so, as everything ever created by Kelly Freas has lived to define an entire era of science fiction in itself. And this immense adoration and fascination with science fiction are lovingly represented in this sci-fi artbook.
Freas’s work is unconventional and somewhat, way ahead of its time in its depiction of a state of being that celebrated an upliftment of emotions and humanity, connecting all of his illustrated characters whether human or otherwise with a much broader perspective on relationships and life. This grand scale of art could be seen in some of the earliest sci-fi covers that he had created for the likes of Algis Budrys’s work, ‘Who?’ and Tom Godwin’s ‘The Gulf Between.’
Length: 120 pages | Dimensions: N/A | Weight: 1 pound | Publisher: The Donning Company
16. Sci-Fi Art Now by John Freeman
John Freeman brings a refreshing mix of the finest sci-fi illustrations created by some of the most distinguished figures in the science fiction genre. These cutting-edge art forms and illustrations hail a revolutionizing impact on budding and aspiring artists everywhere through the spectacular images and concept designs it opens up for the world to see.
Freeman had been a former editor for official magazines for projects and franchises such as Babylon 5, Doctor Who, Star Trek, and Star Wars. The successive phases in his career saw him turning his outstanding takes and understanding of science fiction and everything related to magnificent pieces of art.
And this is precisely what you can expect from this ornately illustrated anthology to show you: the creative processes of speculative fiction’s latest and coolest upcoming stars. The book also celebrates some renowned creators who have continuously been breaking and creating new turf to expand the vividly colored and portrayed territories to great extents!
Length: 192 pages | Dimensions: 9.9 x 0.9 x 9.8 inches | Weight: 2.35 pounds | Publisher: Harper Design
17. The Art of John Berkey by Jane Frank
John Berkey was an immensely respected and inspiring space artist who was also considered one of the titans in the history of science fiction history who did have a prolific and richly productive career producing celestial fantasy art that began sometime in the 1950s.
He had initially been one of the leading creative heads for concept art working for many different studios up till the point he got into Brown & Bigelow, the famed calendar-publishing company spending eight formatives mastering his definitive style under his mentors.
It was at this place and time in his life that he developed extensively his stunning landscape skills that were depicted in scenes of Americana and similar genres.
When he turned to freelance, he made complete use of his marvelously evocative neo-impressionist style in the area of science fiction which made him a revered figure for all in the community of science fiction.
Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 0.5 x 11.25 inches | Weight: 1.9 pounds | Publisher: Paper Tiger
18. The Mind’s Eye: The Art of Omni by PowerHouse Books
Omni had always been a gem among popular science magazines during 1978-1998. Magazines such as Science News, Scientific America, Discover, and Science Digest might have been favorites for armchair scientists, but Omni had been that innovative and masterful cutting edge of conventional science news and fiction that could stun and mesmerize all of its readers.
With just the perfect amount of flashy graphic design coupled with the images created by a generation of artists who were completely free from the restraints of general rules and principles with just a touch of sex, Omni topped quite a few charts when it came to sci-fi artwork.
It was created by the legendary artist Bob Guccione, the founder of Penthouse. Guccione handpicked all the illustrators and artists who eventually made Omni happen, turning it into a legacy, creating works ignited by intellect and passion which were two of Guccione’s principle ideas. ‘The Mind’s Eye: The Art of Omni’ extolls the spectacular work that has appeared throughout the history of publication.
Length: 180 pages | Dimensions: 12.38 x 1.23 x 11.29 inches | Weight: 4.67 pounds | Publisher: PowerHouse Books
19. Star Trek: The Art Of The Film By Mark Cotta Vaz
J.J. Abrams takes an entirely different approach to the greatest space adventure ever: Star Trek! It features a younger crew selected straight right out of the academy. Abrams has created a completely new rendition of Star Trek even while paying homage to those sci-fi storytellers who are known for their versions of the famous spaceship, The U.S.S.Enterprise of the 20th century.
The film quickly became a critical as well as a commercial success across the world.
This visage of Abram’s new vision is stunningly portrayed in this brilliant sci-fi art book, which traces the evolution of the film’s productions through a spectacular collection of concept art and designs that the world had not seen previously.
Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: 9.35 x 0.72 x 12.2 inches | Weight: 2.7 pounds | Publisher: Titan Books
20. The Art Of The Barbarian by Arthur Suydam
The image of the Barbarian reflects raw, elemental power, brute force, and the vicious spirit of survival. The “seductive” imagery from the genre in a way, romanticizes this raging and violent era in the history of human evolution.
Arthur Suydam is notable for his fascinating work in this genre that depicts primal clashes on the battlefield, vivid shades of carnelian, and the thunderous gnashing of the swords done with astonishingly precise details.
The vividness and vibrancy of the images make almost a tangible visual impact where one can almost smell the fear, blood, and rage prevailing in the very atmosphere of the time.
And all of these are wonderfully assembled for you to enjoy in the ‘The Art Of The Barbarian.’
About Arthur Suydam, it has been famously remarked that the artist has been known to explore his own opinions and approaches on the primeval character of the Barbarian that expertly renders in a style that belonged to the old Dutch Masters.
The book is a highly resonant and reflective masterpiece done in fabulous shades that foreground Suydam’s immense caliber and justifiable global recognition for his works on the characters of Tarzan and Conan.
It brings you an in-depth and extensive analysis of the creative genius and inspiration of the artist.
Length: 64 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 0.25 x 11 inches | Weight: 0.6 pounds | Publisher: Image Comics
21. Progressions: The Art Of John Foster by John Foster
John Foster is known and globally celebrated for his hauntingly beautiful imagery that reflects immense visual power. His works include the renowned Dark Horse Comics where the Star Wars covers created by him have become a “collectors’ favorites” item and the sensational images of ‘Dungeons and Dragons’ portrayed bewitchingly by his deft hand.
You get to see all of it in ‘The Art Of John Foster’ which is a transfixing, yet at times, quite unnerving, provocative compilation of his best works. It is not for nothing that they say that Foster indeed knows the ways to capture the soul with his art!
Length: 80 pages | Dimensions: 8.75 x 0.5 x 10.75 inches | Weight: 1.3 pounds | Publisher: Steve Jackson Games
What is the Best Sci-Fi Art Books for Artist?
This table provides an overview of various Sci-Fi Art Books, including information on page count, dimensions (in inches), weight (in pounds), and publisher details.
Buying Guide for the Best Sci-Fi Art Books for Artists
The best sci-fi art book for artists is subjective and depends on your personal preferences and artistic goals. Use this buying guide as a starting point to explore different options, and choose the book that resonates with you the most.
Content and Variety
Look for books that offer a diverse range of artwork, including illustrations, concept art, landscapes, character designs, and more. The book should showcase the artist's versatility and provide a comprehensive overview of their work. This variety can inspire you to explore different techniques and subjects within the sci-fi and fantasy art genres.
Book Length and Dimensions
Consider the length and dimensions of the book. Longer books with more pages often provide a more in-depth exploration of the artist's work. Larger dimensions can also enhance the visual impact of the artwork. However, keep in mind that larger books may be less portable and harder to handle.
Weight and Binding
Check the weight of the book, especially if you plan to carry it around or travel with it. Heavy books can be cumbersome and may not be suitable for frequent use or mobility. Additionally, consider the type of binding used. Hardcover books tend to be more durable and long-lasting, while softcover books may be more affordable.
Reviews and Recommendations
Read reviews and seek recommendations from fellow artists or art communities. Their insights can provide valuable information about the quality, content, and usefulness of the book. Consider the credibility of the sources and look for reviews that align with your specific interests and needs.
Price and Budget
Set a budget for your purchase and compare prices across different platforms and sellers. Keep in mind that high-quality art books with extensive content and premium features may come at a higher cost. Consider the value you will gain from the book and prioritize quality over affordability if possible.
What are the essential elements to consider when choosing a sci-fi art book?
When choosing a sci-fi art book, consider the content and variety of artwork, book length, and dimensions, weight and binding, reviews and recommendations, as well as the price and your budget.
What should I look for in terms of content and variety in a sci-fi art book?
Look for books that offer a diverse range of artwork, including illustrations, concept art, landscapes, character designs, and more. The book should showcase the artist’s versatility and provide a comprehensive overview of their work.
Does the length of a sci-fi art book matter?
The length of a sci-fi art book can influence the depth of exploration into the artist’s work. Longer books with more pages often provide a more extensive collection of artwork and insights. However, shorter books can still offer valuable inspiration and guidance.
How important is the weight and binding of a sci-fi art book?
The weight of a sci-fi art book is crucial, especially if you plan to carry it around or travel with it. Heavy books can be cumbersome and may not be suitable for frequent use or mobility. Additionally, consider the type of binding used – hardcover books tend to be more durable, while softcover books may be more affordable.
Should I prioritize quality over affordability when choosing a sci-fi art book?
If possible, it is advisable to prioritize quality over affordability when choosing a sci-fi art book. High-quality art books with extensive content and premium features may provide more inspiration and value in the long run. However, it’s essential to find a balance between your budget and the value you expect to gain from the book.
Introducing the top recommendations for sci-fi art books, we have explored a vast selection of titles that cater to different artistic preferences. After careful consideration and analysis, we present the three standout choices.
For artists seeking inspiration in gothic art, "The Art of Ian Miller" is an ideal option, showcasing Miller's unconventional and haunting creations influenced by HP Lovecraft. If you're looking for sci-fi art, "H.R Giger's Necronomicon" is a good choice, with its iconic images and conceptual designs from renowned artists. Finally, for those interested in space art, "The Art of Chesley Bonestell" is the right choice, featuring over 300 super-realistic images that have shaped our visions of outer space.
And with that, we come to the very end of this vast and extensive guide on some of the best sci-fi and fantasy art books that will tickle and enrich the imagination and soul of every artist in every corner of the world.
We hope you liked our endeavor as much as we loved making this effort for you.
Hope to see you soon! Till next time!
Glues are a must-have item in every household as they can be applied to repair broken things in a jiffy.
However, with the availability of a ton of options on the market, zoning in on a single product can be quite challenging and time-consuming. That’s why we have tried to make the task easier for you by reviewing 2 products from the 2 best glue brands on the market.
Furthermore, we have provided an in-depth comparison between the two packs of glue to help accelerate your decision-making. So, without further chit-chat, let’s jump in and find out which glue holds better.
Read on to find out everything!
In this section, we’ll take a look at both the brands and their respective products in detail so that you can understand the fundamental difference between the two.
1. JB WELD 8281
For over 40 years, JB Weld has been manufacturing glues that hold firmly to a range of surfaces such as metal, plastic, and concrete in even the harshest environmental conditions. And naturally, the 8281 Twin Pack of resin and hardener is no different.
This two-part epoxy system was originally designed as an alternative to torch welding. So, it should come as no surprise that they offer extremely strong and lasting repairs to a wide variety of surfaces and produce a bond that’s even stronger than steel. Understandably, that makes it an ideal choice for craft, marine, DIY household, and automotive repair.
Additionally, when the two-part epoxy is mixed together, it forms a glue that takes 24 hours to cure, which is pretty decent, given it's not super glue. And the best part? Once it’s cured, it can be further drilled, molded, sanded, filled, and tapped. In other words, you can do whatever you please with it after waiting overnight.
Apart from this, the JB Weld glue is steel-reinforced, offering a tensile strength of around 5,020 PSI. Long story short, it is extremely durable and can withstand temperatures up to 550 degrees Fahrenheit without breaking a sweat. Not to mention, it is waterproof and resistant to acid, chemicals, and petroleum.
Now, as far as the application is concerned, you can apply it to a wide range of materials, including fiberglass, metal, concrete, wood, ceramic, PVC, and tile. And that’s why both the product and the brand have earned a loyal following from DIYers, repair professionals, and mechanics alike.
What We Like
Forms a solid adhesive layer
Can be used for bonding wood, metals, and other materials
Ideal for gap-filling on porous surfaces and non-porous surfaces
Heat-resistant
Perfect choice for DIYers and professionals
What We Don't Like
Takes a while to cure
2. Gorilla Glue 5002801
This company has been manufacturing high-quality glues for over 2 decades, and the 5002801 Original Gorilla Glue is yet another prestigious addition to its wood glue repertoire. Over the years, it has built a name for itself in the industry, primarily because of its outstanding versatility and holding power. Let’s learn a bit more about it in the coming sections.
Unlike other glues, this water-activated polyurethane expands into adhesive materials to create a strong bond that can adhere to virtually everything. Besides, it’s entirely waterproof and safe for use both outdoors and indoors. Rest assured, it can easily withstand the various weather elements quite conveniently.
Once cured, you can stain it, paint it, and sand it as per your requirement and give the project a completely new and finished look, which is great.
However, ensure that the surface is dampened and clean, tight-fitting, and dust-free before applying. And for shiny surfaces like glass, you need to sand the material a bit so that the glue holds onto it.
Since it’s water-resistant, it doesn’t break down when it comes in contact with moisture, which is truly remarkable. Needless to say, it is heat-resistant and can therefore withstand temperature in tough conditions.
Overall, this flexible glue is one of the top-rated and best gluing materials on the market.
What We Like
Ideal for professionals and DIYers alike
Expands to provide a long-lasting and powerful bond
Can withstand extreme temperatures
Easy to apply
Can be used on a variety of materials like leather, plastic, wood, etc.
Cures to a yellowish color
What We Don't Like
Offers a limited shelf life once opened
In-depth Comparison: JB Weld VS Gorilla Glue
Now that you know what both the products are all about, it’s time we made an in-depth comparison between the two of them. So, let’s jump right in.
1. Cleanup
As far as cleanup is concerned, both products are known to give users a tough time. That is because both of them feature solid adhesive materials. Note that the Gorilla Glue doesn’t need to be mixed with 2 different materials before application.
On the other hand, you have to mix different components of JBL Weld, which naturally makes it messy. So, we think it’s safe to say that the former is relatively easier to clean away than the latter.
2. Strength
If you are looking for an option that provides unmatched strength, then the JB Weld could be your best bet as it has a higher tensile strength than Gorilla glue. On top of that, it’s way more resistant to weather elements, which is no less than a bonus in the books of those who intend to use glue outdoors.
However, this doesn’t mean that the Gorilla glue is weaker or susceptible to cracking or shrinking; it’s just that it is not as durable as the two-part epoxy JB Weld. Additionally, the bond formed by the JB Weld is difficult to break regardless of where it has been applied or prevailing weather conditions.
So, the winner here is JB Weld.
3. Materials
The JB Weld two-part epoxy is highly versatile and can bond a wide range of surfaces together, such as jewelry, beads, metals, plastic, fabrics, and wood. DIY enthusiasts and loyal followers of JB Weld often claim that it can bond all materials.
Gorilla Glue is a polyurethane-based glue, which means that it is mainly used to glue wood together. However, this wood glue can bond together with other materials, such as fabrics, paper, metals, and a few other materials.
4. Health Concerns
The JB Weld features a non-toxic formula, which means it won’t kill you if you happen to accidentally eat it. On the contrary, the Gorilla Glue is extremely toxic and can cause death if ingested. So, in this regard, JB Weld is the winner.
5. Applications
Now, let’s see how each product performs in terms of applications.
The JB Weld glue is mainly used for repairs because it has a tensile strength of over 5,000 PSI, which is a lot. On top of that, it is water-resistant, solvent-acid, and petroleum-proof, meaning it is an ideal choice for craft, marine, and automotive repairs. Additionally, it is temperature-resistant and can be sanded or painted as per requirements.
As far as the Gorilla Glue is concerned, it is a polyurethane glue mainly used to bond wood. So, when it comes to wood repairs and carpentry, it can deliver unparalleled results without a hassle.
That said, keep in mind that it can bond together with other materials; as such, you can use it for small repairs and arts and crafts projects.
6. Cost
The JB Weld glue is more expensive than Gorilla Glue since its quality is a notch higher than its counterpart. However, in the long run, JB Weld can help you save a good amount of money as you can use it in place of a screw when you need two lighter materials to be held together.
Speaking of Gorilla Glue, it is less expensive than JB Weld since it is not meant for heavy repairs.
Quick Recap
Now, let’s do a quick recap on the basic differences between the two products.
JB Weld cures to a grayish color, whereas the Gorilla Glue cures to a yellowish color
Gorilla Glue is polyurethane-based wood glue, while JBL Weld glue is a two-part epoxy
What will the JB Weld glue not stick to?
It will not stick or bond to any surface that’s rubbery or flexible. This is because it is specifically made to provide incredibly durable and long-lasting repairs on solid surfaces such as cars, ships, etc.
How long do I have to wait for Gorilla Glue to dry?
Even though it doesn’t take too long to dry, we strongly recommend that you wait for at least 24 hours before you sand or paint it.
That was pretty much everything you needed to know about JB Weld and Gorilla Glue.
Now, coming to the main question, which one is a better adhesive? For us, it has to be the JB Weld glue because it is more durable and safe to use than Gorilla Glue. And even though the price is a bit higher, this product can help you cut costs in the long run.
That being said, it’s important to note that the Gorilla Glue is not a bad glue by any means. If you are looking for an adhesive for wooden materials, you can’t go wrong by choosing the polyurethane-based Gorilla Glue.
So, that’s all for today; we hope this guide has helped you choose the right glue based on your requirements. Until next time, take care!
A retractable awning is a great addition to the outdoor living space, such as a front porch, RV, or trailer. It protects residents from harmful UV rays from sun exposure and high winds while maintaining a low indoor temperature.
Living in a windy area has made me install retractable awnings to protect my outdoor furniture from high wind speeds. Thankfully, there are some brands manufacturing the best retractable awnings catering to windy locations.
Wind-resistant retractable awnings are very useful for both homes and businesses in case of storms or general bad weather. Moreover, awnings made from metal can withstand wind and protect the space from flying debris.
Retractable awnings protect your outdoor and indoor space from heat, heavy rain, high winds, and fading due to sun exposure. I researched and tested the best retractable awnings to determine how much current they can withstand. So, today, I’m going to review the best retractable awnings for windy areas…
Best Retractable Awnings For Windy Areas
Here’s my list of the 8 best retractable awnings for windy areas:
Aecojoy is known for being America’s leading patio furniture brand, with over one million buyers. This brand’s 10'ⅹ 8' Patio Awning Retractable Sun Shade gives an elegant look to any outdoor space. I used this for a family gathering on my patio, and it delivered what it promised.
It is unique for its UV-resistant high-quality polyester fabric, which provides 50+ sun protection. I could easily use this for sunbathing in my backyard without worrying about getting sunburned or too tanned. This retractable patio awning also claims to be windproof and fade-resistant.
Moreover, it has a steel frame material with an aluminum alloy body which gives it better durability for both outdoor and indoor usage. I also checked the retracting system, which cranked quite well with its 59” long manual hand crank.
Each of these awnings comes fully assembled with a pre-set pitching angle that is universally convenient. However, adjusting the angle with a few manual steps was easy.
This manual awning also has good customer service that guarantees free replacement in case of damage, as well as quick after-service. They also entertain questions regarding any mounting issue anytime.
Material: Aluminum, Alloy Steel | Available Sizes: 10' x 8', 8.2' x 6.5', 13' x 8', 13' x 10' | Dimensions: 5.1' Depth x 8.6', Projection Width x 7.8' Height | Color: Beige
Requires additional screws and bolts for installation
ALEKO Manual Retractable Patio Awning is another affordable outdoor deck and porch option. It is built with anti-rust steel material, a powder-coated aluminum frame, and anti-chip paint, giving this awning better longevity.
Besides providing UV protection, the canopy fabric reduces trapped heat and moisture, making it mildew-resistant. I noticed an increased air flow when put up, unlike other manual awnings that make the space a little stuffy.
ALEKO’s retractable awning is compatible with different wall materials, such as concrete, brick walls, and wooden frames. However, installing it on wooden walls requires lag screws or carriage bolts.
Moreover, it has an easy pitch system with a 6.5-foot maximum projection length. The retractable awning comes with a masonry screw box, fabric cords, and a detailed manual for quick and easy installation.
Although it is durable enough, I had to retract it when the wind ran too high since there was a lot of pressure on the frame. However, this family-owned and operated company provides a 30-day money-back scheme, with good customer support, multi-package delivery, and quick tech support.
Material: Powder-coated steel, Aluminum, Polyester | Available Sizes: 10' x 8', 12' x 10', 13' x 10' | Dimensions: 9.4' x 8.2' (Awning Fabric), 9.8' x 8' (Frame) | Color: Burgundy, Gray, Green, Red, Yellow, Sand
Best Choice Products’ Retractable Awning is a family-friendly lightweight option for balconies, patios, windows, and doors. It is built with a durable, powder-coated aluminum frame that features a PU coating, making it water and corrosion-resistant.
This retractable awning claims to provide all-weather coverage and protection from UV rays. Well, it did provide shade sufficiently and give enough coverage during both heavy and light rain.
It comes with an accessible 60-inch hand pole that smoothly extends and retracts the awning. Moreover, the mounting hardware is delivered along with the retractable awning that can be used for proper installation on vinyl, wood, stucco, or any other balcony or patio.
Lastly, the canopy is quite large, ranging up to 54 square feet when fully extended. And it can thrive with minimal support structures. If you have a big family or large occasion coming up, this might be the ideal retractable awning.
However, it only comes in one elegant beige color.
Material: Aluminum, Polyester | Available Sizes: 8.2' x 6.6' | Dimensions: 8.2' Fabric Length x 6.6' Fabric Width x 6.5' Flexible Height | Color: Beige
VEVOR Beige Retractable Awning is a multi-purpose side awning that acts as a privacy screen for a patio, terrace, backyard, garden, office, studio, etc.
It is built with an alloy aluminum frame that is lightweight and corrosion-resistant. The PU-coated canopy fabric is flame-retardant, breathable, and waterproof and offers complete protection from UV rays.
I was quite impressed with this because it is an ideal awning for people who want more privacy and sun protection at the same time. I could use it as an umbrella, a sun shade, and a divider to block sight.
This retractable awning features a screen handle, providing better stability since it is free-standing. For easy storage, it can be placed into the aluminum roller and stored in a dark place.
Installing the privacy screen was super easy for me, especially with all the mounting accessories, including mounting brackets provided. All you need to do is fix the support post to the base plate and then mount the entire thing onto the concrete wall or wood deck.
Moreover, it has different size options for various walls and spaces.
Material: Aluminum Alloy, Polyester | Available Sizes: 5.2' x 9.8', 5.2' x 19.6', 5.9' x 9.8' | Dimensions: 5.2' Height x 9.8' Flexible Fabric Width | Color: Beige
Hard to install on surfaces like vinyl, double brick, vinyl facing, etc.
MCombo Manual Retractable Awning has a solid structure made of an entirely corrosion-resistant aluminum frame and plastic steel hand crank that is easy to adjust.
These wind-resistant awnings have a wind rating of resident Beauport scale 4. It has a lightweight steel frame with PU-coated fabric that is anti-UV rays and water resistant. Moreover, I tested this awning during high wind speeds, and it was sufficiently sturdy. Its 50+ sun protection is also impressive.
MCombo provides the product along with mounting brackets, an instruction manual, and other mounting hardware for the installation process. You will only need a power drill, tape, and wrench to complete the installation.
I could also adjust the height of the retractable brackets according to my needs. It is advisable, however, to install this awning on concrete walls, hard wooden or brickwork walls. If you need to install it on other materials, consider booking professional help.
Overall, it is a high-quality retractable awning with a 100% money-back guarantee and a three-month warranty. It also comes in various colors, making color-coordinating your outdoor space easier.
Material: Aluminum Alloy, Polyester Fabric, Steel Tube | Available Sizes: 12' x 10' | Dimensions: 9.8' Fabric Length x 11.6' Fabric Width x 8' Flexible Height | Color: Beige, Brick Red, Burgundy, Coffee Brown, Dark Blue, Green
The STEELAID Manual Retractable Awning is the perfect small-sized option for the occasional sun baths and small gatherings. The canopy is 100% polyester, which is water and UV-resistant.
It is a unique pop-up canopy with a 46" coverage. Moreover, its easily adjustable hand crank allowed me to adjust the canopy even up to 122", which is quite impressive and higher than most retractable awnings.
This retractable awning decreases outdoor temperature, which I noticed since I put this up on a very sunny day. It is also comfortable to use and does not require too much effort to retract and extend.
Furthermore, its adjustable poles can be attached to almost any surface, which is a plus. There’s no requirement for drilling holes in your walls, either!
The retailers send this awning in a compact package that saves more time during installation. Moreover, the awning canopy also has a decorated edging to offer an elegant look.
It is also convenient for RVs, trailers, and tents.
Material: Aluminum, Polyester | Available Sizes: 4.9', 6.5', 9.8', 11.5', 13' | Dimensions: 9.8' Hand Crank x 3.9' Fabric Width x 6.5' Canopy Length | Color: Gray
The XtremepowerUS Retractable Awning has an overall secured coverage along with an elegant look. It is ideal for shading balconies, windows, and doors with better protection from bad weather and UV resistance.
It is built with a high-quality powder-coated aluminum frame which securely holds the canopy fabric made of 100% polyester to the front bar. The fabric also claims to be water and heat-resistant.
I liked the superior quality steel hand crank they provide since it feels very strong and sturdy. Moreover, the extension and retraction process was also sufficiently smooth.
Since this retractable awning is closed off in its structure, it provides suitable resistance against high wind speeds and extreme heat.
However, XtremepowerUS does not include any additional mounting hardware, so you have to buy them from a local store. If installing gets too difficult, consider booking a professional installation. But their installation manual got me through.
This is not a very affordable retractable awning for the average homeowner. But this can work wonders as a side awning for back porches and side patios of cafes and restaurants. This is because the structure of this awning can create a personal space that many customers might like.
Material: Polyester, Aluminum, Steel | Available Sizes: 10' x 8', 8' x 6' | Dimensions: 7' Hand Crank x 9.8' Flexible Fabric Width x 7' Flexible Fabric Length | Color: Beige
People can use it for landscaping and home gardens
What we don't like
Lower heat protection
This retractable patio awning doubles as a privacy fence while blocking harmful sun rays and high wind speeds. It is very easy to install, given its cartridge wall-mounted design, which requires only a few steps to mount.
All I did to install the set-up was to stick the support post to the base plate first and then fix the entire thing on my wall. But remember that for better stability, installing it on cement, hardwood, or brick walls is advisable.
The canopy fabric is made of breathable and waterproof polyester. It is built with an aluminum frame and oxidized paint, making it rust-proof while giving it an elegant, sleek finish. It is also easy to clean.
The product description further promises advanced UV stabilization for better heat protection and a corrosion-resistant aluminum pole for retraction.
I used this awning similarly to the previous privacy screen, and this one also had a smooth retraction system. Overall, it looks hardy and will last a long time.
The best way to use this retractable awning is for landscaping, home gardens, walkways, front yards, and patios.
Material: Alloy Steel, Aluminum, Polyester | Available Sizes: 9.8' x 5.9', 9.8' x 5.2'| Dimensions: 9.8' Fabric Length, 5.8' Flexible Height | Color: Creamy-White
Best Retractable Awning For Windy Areas Comparison Table
Buying Guide For The Best Retractable Awning For Windy Areas
Besides the wide variety of options for purchase, choosing the right retractable awning may be challenging without knowing its basic properties. Different customers look for different features – while some may want better sun and heat protection, others may want one that is easy to install. For this reason, I have gathered a set of properties you may consider when purchasing a retractable awning for your home or business.
1. Types of Retractable Awnings
The two main kinds of retractable awnings are manual retractable awnings and motorized retractable awnings.
Manual retractable awnings have hand cranks for adjusting the height and angle. You can do this by rotating them clockwise or anti-clockwise for retraction and extension, respectively. Such awnings are convenient for places with frequent power outages or low electric ratings.
Motorized retractable awnings are expensive but very useful for high wind ratings. They can be easily rolled and extended with automated features like remote control and apps that help you adjust the settings of the awning. This might be the one for you if you’re looking for remote control operation.
2. Wind Resistance Classification
Retractable awnings that offer wind resistance are widely divided into four categories by manufacturers. These classes are based on how well they perform in a real situation with different wind speeds.
Class 0 - These awnings are untested and offer no guarantee of wind resistance.
Class 1 - Awnings categorized in this group can withstand wind speeds of 12 mph with 15 mph gusts.
Class 2 - This category can sustain winds of 20 mph with 25 mph gust strength.
Class 3 - These awnings can sustain wind up to 30 mph with 38 mph.
I advise you to ask the salesperson or manufacturer about the classification of their products before purchase. I find that often campaign videos are misleading when they show retractable awnings withstanding hurricanes and extreme winds. No homeowner should leave their retractable awnings out during severe storms or hurricanes.
3. Size
Buying awnings that fit on the required wall or surface is essential. To ensure this, measure the dimensions of the wall where you want to install the retractable awnings before checking the products. For easy retracting and extending features, always go for extendable ones that provide more extensive coverage.
4. Material
The material of an awning determines its longevity and ease of use. Canopy fabrics of awnings are usually made with polyester, canvas, or acrylic with PA or PU coating for protection from the sun’s UV rays and heavy rainfall.
The frames that support the canopies are made from either steel or aluminum, both of which are durable. Moreover, these fabrics are washable, with some featuring dirt-repellant and water-resistant fabric. They come in various textures, colors, and patterns.
5. Suitability For Home and Business
I highly recommend metal awnings that can withstand up to 80 mph wind for better wind resistance and protection. However, it is also important to know the types of fabric used in awnings if you prefer these.
The two kinds of retractable fabric awnings are loose-frame retractable awnings and permanently closed-frame awnings. Closed-frame ones have an aluminum or steel metal frame that covers the sides with vinyl siding or canvas and is attached with grommets.
Closed-frame awnings do not offer good wind resistance since the fabric can get caught up in the wind and put pressure on the joints. Loose frame awnings are better suited because they are connected both at the residence and the front bar.
After testing several retractable awnings, I have begun to prefer motorized retractable ones since they come with automatic wind sensors that retract the awnings when the wind speed is too high.
Thus, it is a better fit for homeowners like me who need not worry about their awnings getting damaged even when they are absent. Moreover, a motorized awning makes the best retractable awning for camper vans.
Meanwhile, business establishments like restaurants require slightly different features. Since the awnings cannot be closed during storms when customers are in the building, the retractable awning needs to be incredibly wind-resistant.
I suggest using commercial motorized awnings with galvanized steel material and adhesive vinyl. This combination will make the motorized retractable awnings much sturdier than the residential ones.
6. Weatherproofing Features
Whether your awning is weatherproof depends on the material and fabric of the canopy. Various fabrics provide different types of protection – some resist heat, while others can sustain high wind and rain. Look for awnings with materials that suit your local climate. While most of the awnings prevent heat build-up, wind-resistant awnings feature better weatherproofing.
7. Angle
A retractable awning can be used both as a flat canopy and a shade that drops at an angle. Awnings for balconies, patios, windows, or doors have different angle requirements based on their construction. While awnings have flexible installation and can be installed on every surface, some models aren’t compatible with wood and vinyl surfaces. If that’s your requirement, look for awnings specifically catering to those surfaces.
8. Price
Although manual awnings are affordable and easy to install, most of them cannot withstand extreme weather. They are good for light showers and heat protection, but you can find motorized awnings with better protection if you increase your budget. Electric and motorized awnings can sustain high winds with their wind sensors and other convenient features.
9. Customer Service And Online Support
Besides high-quality materials, it is always better to choose well-known brands with good customer service. Online customer support can help if anything goes wrong during the installation or if the product is damaged. Some brands also offer maintenance services and professional repairs.
Maintaining A Retractable Awning
Purchasing a sturdy and convenient retractable awning alone will not help the product last for a long time. To maintain your retractable awning, there are certain methods to follow and additional equipment to add. Here’s what I do.
I always fully extend my awning when in use so that the fabric does not end up sagging in the long run. I also make sure to clean the metal frame, hand bar, and roller is also something I make sure to do. These parts also need oil or wax treatment annually for smoother extension and retraction. Spraying lubricant is also feasible.
If your awning has been retracted for more than a week, clean the fabric with a water hose or washing machine before extending it to avoid dirt stains. Likewise, before storing it away, clean it with mild soap to prevent mildew or bad smell. Moreover, always store the awnings in breathable boxes or plastic bags, so they do not accumulate dust.
It is crucial for awnings close to plant beds and gardens like mine to keep plant and soil matter away from them. The acid present in most leaves can damage the canopy fabric and stain it. Ensure not to place awnings near trees and trim down vines before they can reach the awning.
Although most retractable awnings offer weatherproofing and wind protection, I suggest not putting too much pressure on them. Extreme weather conditions like hail, thunderstorms, or cyclones can harm the fabric fibers and permanently damage the retraction system.
Remember that most warranties do not cover damages due to bad weather conditions!
How difficult is it to install a retractable awning in windy locations?
Installation of an awning can be somewhat challenging, due to the precautionary measures you ought to take for the wind. It’s often best to have a professional install the awning.
Does the fabric type affect the wind resistance of a retractable awning?
Indeed, the fabric’s thickness and material type can influence the wind resistance of the awning. Thicker and heavier fabrics tend to withstand stronger winds than lighter materials. However, the awning’s structural components also play a primary role in wind resistance.
Can you leave a retractable awning open in windy conditions?
It’s not recommended to leave your retractable awning extended during high winds or storms. Extreme wind can cause stress on the awning’s components and could lead to both fabric and mechanical damage.
Can retractable awnings withstand other adverse weather conditions as well?
While retractable awnings are designed for resilience against the elements, it’s advisable to retract them during heavy rain, snow, or hail. Prolonged exposure to harsh weather can shorten the lifespan of the awning.
Conclusion
According to my research, the best retractable awning on the market right now is AECOJOY Patio Awning Retractable Sun Shade. My preference is based on its high-quality fabric, solid build and design, multi-functionality, and excellent customer service.
However, the other 8 products also made their mark, so I have listed them in order of preference– they fit various needs for durability, easy installation, budget, and customer service.
My evaluation also included customer reviews, brand popularity, and product research to give you a more holistic idea of each product. I hope my guide helps you choose the perfect retractable awning for your needs!
Concept art is about the illustration of an idea, that is later fleshed out to create characters, landscapes, buildings, etc.
Finding the right book to learn concept art can be tricky since this field is vast. You need to find guides that cover- the fundamentals of art, skills for technical painting, and conceptual ideas and give you a clear picture of the career prospects in the concept art industry.
You need to be well-armed with your skills in traditional art to use different painting software, create your portfolio, and build a professional network. These days concept art has a lot to do with workflow, speed, and accuracy, but the main focus lies in design.
It is essential to understand how things are designed. If you look at any of the animated movies, will you be able to describe what went into making that film roughly? Or at least guess the ideas behind the creation of each scene?
If you can answer them correctly, then you are on the right footing.
For a budding artist, it's challenging to create a masterpiece with an undeveloped set of art skills. When time is invested in learning the basics and practicing exercises given in the books, your skills will improve gradually.
Let's look into the list of different books that can help to build your base in concept art!
Best Concept Art Books for Artists
Here's the list of the 25 best concept art books for artists everywhere, encompassing essential guides that cover the fundamentals of art, technical painting skills, conceptual ideas, and valuable insights into the concept art industry.
Art Fundamentals
If you're an aspiring concept artist, it's essential to understand the fundamentals of art. For every piece that you create, you'll have to use the skills that you gain from the fundamentals. The skill set includes measuring, figure drawing, light and shadow, rendering, perspective, colors, forms, and several others.
1. Light for Visual Artists
The concepts of light and shadow can get a little tricky if you're new to the field of art. These concepts relate to value and how values are rendered in a painting or drawing. Light for Visual Artists will help you to understand the artistic techniques and raw scientific points of getting the benefits down correctly.
As you read through the given resources and tips, the concept of light will be crystal clear. However, you cannot expect to become an expert at rendering value or a master draftsman by just reading this book. Constant practice of the ideas that are given in this book will help you to improve your skills.
Lighting plays a massive role in every piece that you're trying to create. We advise you to get this book if you're having any problems with light in your artwork, the book explains the intricate details of this subject.
Length: 176 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 0.75 x 11 inches | Weight: 1.95 pounds | Publisher: Laurence King Publishing
2. How to Draw - Best for Perspective & Imagination
If you want to learn about perspective and drawing from the imagination, then this book by Scott Robertson will come of great use. He is an educator to digital artists and concept artists at the Art Center and also conducts various presentations all across the US.
For a concept artist, it's essential to learn about imaginative drawing and realist life drawing as these concepts amalgamate to help you create any piece from your mind with realistic rendering.
The teaching style of the author is pretty detailed yet pristine at the same time. If you're a novice or an inexperienced artist, then it can get a little tricky to get your concepts clear from this book. However, if you're ready to put in an ample amount of practice, then the lessons will get easier to follow.
Length: 208 pages | Dimensions: 9.1 x 0.8 x 11.03 inches | Weight: 2.5 pounds | Publisher: Design Studio Press
3. Figure Drawing for Artists: Making Every Mark Count - Best for Foundation & Tips
When you focus on learning about figure drawing from a book, it's more like learning to cook from a book. You cannot gain these practical skills until you get hands-on practice with them.
Moreover, several books share different tricks and techniques of figure drawing that can be effectively applied while you practice this art. Figure Drawing for Artists by Steve Huston will help you get the basics right for every figure drawing that you create.
If you're a new artist facing trouble in analyzing the figure or rendering it correctly on paper, then this book will act as your guide. Steve has included his figure drawings in this book to give you a visual presentation of the techniques that he has employed.
But you cannot rely on just this book to improve your skills, because implying the techniques in the studio will be your most excellent teacher. However, we advise you to get this book if you want to know the foundational concepts or pick up a few tips on figure drawing.
Length: 192 pages | Dimensions: 8.63 x 0.75 x 10 inches | Weight: 1.5 pounds | Publisher: Rockport Publishers
4. Art Fundamentals: Color, Light, Composition, Anatomy, Perspective, and Depth
In this concise publication of 272 pages, the purpose was to introduce the reader to the fundamental topics. There is no in-depth information on the main fundamentals of art, like perspective, anatomy, or form.
The book will help you understand the different techniques and their importance to digital art. However, this book is suitable for beginners to get the basics right, but it cannot be used as a professional study guide.
Length: 272 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 1.25 x 12 inches | Weight: 2.55 pounds | Publisher: 3DTotal Publishing
5. Human Anatomy for Artists: The Elements of Form - Best for Mastering Anatomy
The Human Anatomy for Artists by Eliot Goldfinger has everything you want to know about mastering the human figure. It is one of the most detailed books that you can find on human anatomy.
If you want to draw something from your imagination, then focus on studying the general concepts of your subject- looks, behavior, and the way it operates. To gain explicit knowledge of human anatomy can be difficult, but for drawing a figure, it's vital to master every part of the anatomy.
As you have a good understanding of the muscles, facial features, and poses, then your figure drawing will turn out to be perfect. Human Anatomy for Artists is a scientific manual that gives all the lessons on muscles, bones, and tendons. Every professional artist has learned all these bits and pieces to become an expert in what they create.
Length: 368 pages | Dimensions: 12.32 x 9.32 x 1.11 inches | Weight: 3.79 pounds | Publisher: Oxford University Press
Digital Painting
As you complete the fundamentals of art, you'll gradually want to move into painting. Few artists will get into the traditional medium (oil paints), but if you're interested in concept art, then you should focus on digital painting.
The three aspects of digital painting are:
To gain an understanding of how the graphics tablet should be used.
To understand your choice of painting software.
Focus on your skillset and goal.
1. Digital Painting for the Complete Beginner
The book focuses on the process of transitioning from the traditional medium to digital painting. It will be of more value for artists who are into oil painting than for the ones who have experience in drawing with a pencil.
However, an aspiring digital artist having a base knowledge of the fundamentals and experience in the different mediums of traditional art should read this book. The methods and goals of painting are the same in a conventional and digital forum. This book will help you understand the change in techniques and medium when you're new to digital art.
Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: 8.28 x 0.49 x 9.28 inches | Weight: 1.16 pounds | Publisher: Watson-Guptill
2. Beginner's Guide to Digital Painting in Photoshop
If you're starting with digital painting, then you should pick up Beginner's Guide to Digital Painting in Photoshop. The fundamentals of working with Photoshop in a creative studio have been covered in detail in this book.
Many artists prefer to select their software for painting, but animation studios and game studios mostly prefer Photoshop. The painting canvas and the brush panel are clearly explained in this book by 3DTotal.
The book has a few exercises that will help you understand the groundwork of painting in the Photoshop environment. If you're going to pick up this book, then you should have some artistic experience. Moreover, without the fundamentals, you will not understand much about painting from this book.
Length: 224 pages | Dimensions: 11.5 x 0.25 x 8 inches | Weight: 2.19 pounds | Publisher: 3DTotal Publishing
3. Digital Painting with Krita 2.9
Photoshop comes with a big price tag, but everyone might not have that kind of budget. So, Krita, a free and open-source painting software, will be a good option that works on all operating systems.
If you want to start using this software, then Digital Painting with Krita 2.9 by Scott Petrovic will greatly help. The book begins with a clear description of the interface in Krita and gradually moves into the techniques for digital painting.
Once you cover the basics, the book moves into the shortcuts along with a few quick tips that will help to broaden your knowledge. The book appears more like a Krita software book and less like a book on digital painting.
The author also mentions the different techniques that can be used to improve your workflow in digital painting. We recommend this book for semi-experienced artists who have an idea to paint on a tablet, but it might not be of great help to beginners.
You need to know the proper use of a graphics tablet before you dive into this book. Scott has done an excellent job of presenting Krita, but do watch a few tutorials to understand if this software will come of use to you.
Length: 232 pages | Dimensions: 6 x 0.55 x 9 inches | Weight: 0.7 pounds | Publisher: Louvus Media
4. Digital Painting Techniques
The goal of this book is not to help you master the skills and techniques that you will require while painting digitally. This book of 288 pages is a gem that targets semi-experienced advanced artists.
There is sufficient practical information given in this book to paint different objects and render them accurately. This book is from 3DTotal, and it's part of a more extensive series. You should start with this book, but we advise you to read the other books in this series too to understand the teaching style.
As you get your hands on the other volumes, you'll be able to learn a lot about the 3DTotal staff while the given exercises will enhance your painting skills.
Length: 286 pages | Dimensions: 10.9 x 8.5 x 0.6 inches | Weight: 2.35 pounds | Publisher: Routledge
5. Digital Painting Fundamentals with Corel Painter X3
If you're looking for another alternative to Adobe Photoshop for digital painting, then a quality substitute is Corel Painter. This book does an outstanding job introducing Corel Painter. The 256 pages in this book cover various fundamental topics like color theory, mixing of colors, balance, and composition.
You can probably learn the entire interface of Corel Painter, through the given practice exercises. Most of the projects focus on shortcuts and techniques in Painter to help you progress in this field.
For a beginner, this book will be of great use if they are ready to put in the required effort to learn about digital painting. The fundamental concepts are given a lot of focus throughout the book, which makes this piece great for any artist.
Length: 288 pages | Dimensions: 7.5 x 0.75 x 9.25 inches | Weight: 1.54 pounds | Publisher: Cengage Learning PTR
Concept Art
If you have an excellent foundational knowledge of art and you know how to paint, then it's all about practice. As you repeat the techniques that you have learned, you'll gain a clear insight which will lead to constant growth by fixing the gaps
Concept art act is the guideline, inspiration, and mood that is prevalent for film or game production. We have a list of a few concept art books you can use to construct new ideas and make a mark in this field. However, if you want to gain some excellent skills in concept art, then these books will be your guide.
1. The Art Of Mulan
In this book, you'll find that the main text has been broken down into four parts which have been detailed pretty well. This book gives a clear description of how this movie was created. Disney puts a significant emphasis on the story, and that is prevalent in this book. Some subtle and exquisite pieces of art are present in the first two sections of the book.
The research process that was followed by the artist is an exciting part of the book, as they visit China, and travel throughout the country. For a book from the nineties to have such details about the research trip will you keener towards following them on this journey. The artists explain the learning process and how they were inspired to create every different scene.
This large piece explains the philosophy and details that went into the story, art, and production of the film Mulan.
The design and layout of the book are fantastic as they connect well with the world of the film. If you're an ardent fan of animation, then we advise you to treat yourself to this book.
Length: 192 pages | Dimensions: 10.5 x 1 x 13.5 inches | Weight: 4.46 pounds | Publisher: Hyperion
2. The Art of Pixar: The Complete Color Scripts
When we think of a book by Pixar, it's pretty normal to expect some playful and funky concept art. Unlike the other books on concept art, this piece features an extensive collection of color scripts.
Many of us got to know about color scripts only after Pixar books made this concept famous.
This book goes beyond the intricate details in the images and the artistic style used in each of the color scripts. The Art of Pixar: The Complete Color Scripts is a visual anthropology, which is made by the art directors from the most influential studio of filmmaking.
Length: 320 pages | Dimensions: 9.25 x 1.25 x 11.25 inches | Weight: 4.3 pounds | Publisher: Chronicle Books
3. Surf's Up: The Art and Making Of A True Story
This book is filled with sketches, concept art, movie stills, and 3D WIP imagery. You will find an adequate amount of character designs of penguins, along with the color keys and concepts of different sequences from the film.
The various extracts from the film that are present in bits and pieces within the book make the book and the reader travel along with the film.
You are also given a small sneak peek into the character creation phase, where you'll get to see the different stages from 3D models to concept sketches.
On the whole, if you love animation, then this is a must-have book for your collection!
Length: 148 pages | Dimensions: 10.5 x 1.1 x 11.3 inches | Weight: 3.1 pounds | Publisher: Insight Editions
4. The Art Of Robots
This book is similar to any other art book by Pixar. As you take a glance at the images, you'll understand the amount of thought that was put into highlighting every intricate detail.
The selection of art and the quality of the designs in this book is vast. There is a lot of sets and character design. Interestingly, you'll also find pages with photos of materials and characters that were used for texturing the 3D models.
If you're already a fan of the Art of Pixar books, then you'll enjoy this piece. This art book has some of the most amazing, talented, and awe-inspiring pieces of work.
Length: 144 pages | Dimensions: 9.2 x 0.8 x 11.4 inches | Weight: 2.38 pounds | Publisher: Chronicle Books
5. The Skillful Huntsman: Visual Development Of A Grimm Tale
The three artists Mike Yamada, Khang Le, and Felix Yoon share their experiences as students of the Art Center in Pasadena, CA. They explain their journey and the unique sketches that eventually paved their way into the entertainment industry.
As you read this book, you'll realize how it feels more as though you're going through a student project or a journal. Each of the concept artists has created the characters, props, environment, and other paintings for The Skillful Huntsman by following the Brothers Grimm story.
In this jam-packed book, you'll get a collection of design techniques and beautiful concept art. The book is filled with conceptual sketches, where you can see the process of an idea giving birth to an entire piece.
With this book, you'll be able to get a glimpse inside the minds of the three artists as they continue to develop their vision and create a well-known story.
Scott Robertson, who is a renowned teacher from the Art Center, leaves comments beneath each page where he critiques and gives an insight into the work. It's amusing to see how a teacher continues to critique the piece being created by his students.
The descriptions are brief enough and will not take your focus away from the designs. It is also exciting to read how the students of concept art create a piece that is based on an existing storyline.
If you love interpreting folklore and creating stories, then this book will be a gem in your collection.
Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: 10.28 x 0.77 x 10.24 inches | Weight: 2.55 pounds | Publisher: Design Studio Press
6. The Art Of Star Wars Episode II: Attack Of The Clones
This part of the trilogy has more details about concept art than The Art Of Star Wars Episode I: The Phantom Menace. In this book, the pages are filled to the brim with environmental paintings, storyboards, character designs, ships, and sculptures.
The book shows how the different aspects- the weapons, the characters, the location, and the crafts had evolved in various stages before it came on screen.
Every page has captions given by the artists which describe the idea that they are trying to put across through every image. It is like the artist is providing you with behind-the-scenes details to present an artistic side to help you understand the movie-making process.
As usual, the sketches and character designs in this book appear larger than life, especially the environment paintings. Moreover, you'll get the entire script of the movie at the back of the book.
We recommend this book to Star Wars fans, concept artists, and sci-fi artists. You'll be amazed by the talent that was put into effect to create such a stunning piece of concept art.
Length: 224 pages | Dimensions: 9.5 x 0.88 x 12.25 inches | Weight: 2.95 pounds | Publisher: Del Rey
7. The Disney Archives Series: Design
The Design edition of The Disney Archives Series is one fantastic book that will take you through the complete visual development history of Disney Animation. The book also has a few excerpts from other abandoned projects.
Try looking into The Disney Archives Series: Design, which is a concept art book that was written way further than the last decade. We advise you not to compromise on your creative potential, by just focusing on books from this decade.
Length: 256 pages | Dimensions: 13 x 11 inches | Weight: 5.4 pounds | Publisher: Disney Editions
8. The Art of How to Train Your Dragon
The character designs in this book are not over-rendered they have been well-balanced with some epic environments and high-resolution pieces.
The book features around 350 pieces of development artwork, which includes concept paintings, story sketches, and character designs.
If you're looking to have reference material that will guide your sketching work, then getting this book will help you to a great extent.
Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: 11.5 x 1 x 10.5 inches | Weight: 0.22 pounds | Publisher: Newmarket Press
9. The Art of Monsters, Inc.
The Art of Monsters, Inc. is filled with a ton of set drawings and character designs. Other than the credits and caption in this book, there is no other text that you can find.
The various art concepts in this book are very colorful, and you'll enjoy every panel of the pastel drawing by Ralph Eggleston and Dominique Louis. With this book, you can get inspired as you observe the excellent quality of skills used in creating art.
This collection of concept art has been created by using different mediums, and it was made before digital painting came into the arena.
Length: 144 pages | Dimensions: 9.4 x 0.9 x 11.4 inches | Weight: 2.35 pounds | Publisher: Chronicle Books
10. The Nine Old Men & The Art of Animation
The Nine Old Men & The Art of Animation has some expert animation drawings, and it consists of the grandfathers who are part of the history of Disney's animation.
Each chapter in this book talks about the projects and careers of each of the animators along with sequences that give you more explanation.
When we consider how rare, strong draftsmanship has become these days, we understand that such pieces of books are essential to set the standard in concept art.
Length: 310 pages | Dimensions: 9.25 x 1.25 x 12.25 inches | Weight: 4.86 pounds | Publisher: Disney Editions
11. Big Bad World of Concept Art for Video Games
If you're studying art and you choose to make your career in the field of concept art, then you'll love this book. In this book, the author Professor Eliott Lilly speaks about the student's work and his experience of teaching young minds who aspire to be artists.
The Big Bad World of Concept Art for Video Games offers a few distinct tips for selecting the right classes, the right school, and the practice exercises to focus on, along with suggestions to help you improve your portfolio. There are also tips shared by the author on how a young artist wanting to make a career in the video game industry can get jobs.
The works of students and professionals are widespread in this book to help you understand the level of progress and quality skills of different artists. By following this book, you'll gain the required knowledge to prepare you for the competitive path in the life of a concept artist. This will, in return, help you to hone your skills as an artist.
The author is straightforward and transparent with his thoughts, which helps to make this piece a good read. It is going to inspire you to learn different techniques to improve in the field of concept art, or it will make you second guess your career choice.
Irrespective of the outcome, we believe that this book will be of great use for you to understand the field of concept art.
Length: 144 pages | Dimensions: 8.7 x 1 x 11.2 inches | Weight: 1.6 pounds | Publisher: Design Studio Press
12. Imaginative Realism: How to Paint What Doesn't Exist
If you're an aspiring concept artist, then you should read Imaginative Realism. The book will help you understand how you can paint the things that don't exist and gives you different tricks over 224 pages.
Every concept artist is paid to create designs of things and characters that don't exist in real life. You might find that the book is not written for concept artists, but only if you focus on the details hidden behind each page will it be helpful for you.
In this book, James Gurney shares different techniques for helping you render various concepts like humans, creatures, buildings, the environment, and more.
It's simple to have different imaginative ideas in your mind, but the real test comes when you have to render them correctly. With this book, you'll understand how to represent your ideas on paper.
Length: 224 pages | Dimensions: 9 x 0.6 x 10.5 inches | Weight: 2.01 pounds | Publisher: Andrews McMeel Publishing
13. Drawing Basics and Video Game Art
If you're into video game art and you want to use your skills with a purpose, then you should try to give this book a read. You'll understand how concept art is applied to the world of video games.
The complex and rich history of gaming, along with a description of the different artistic styles have been covered in this book. A large portion of the book focuses on describing how video game art can be efficiently interwoven with fine art and how this concept has advanced over the past decades.
Many sections in this book talk about the different fundamentals of art like lighting, figures, composition, and general techniques used for sketching. This is an artist's book, even though it takes a dip into gaming.
Drawing Basics and Video Game Art has more to do with the history of game art and is not much of a drawing book.
Length: 240 pages | Dimensions: 8.49 x 0.67 x 10.02 inches | Weight: 1.97 pounds | Publisher: Watson-Guptill
14. How to Become a Video Game Artist
Sam R. Kennedy, who is a renowned game artist, has several years of experience and fellow workers who are employed in the gaming industry. The help that was rendered by his colleagues was put to productive use by the author in making How to Become a Video Game Artist.
In every chapter, you'll find a description of the different jobs in the field of concept art- animators, environment art, character art, and GUI designers. Each of the chapters consists of stories from professionals who are employed in this industry and the advice given in this book helps to guide aspiring concept artists.
The book describes the skills, requirements, and demands of each job, which gives you a clear overview of the professions. The last chapter has tips by the author for aspiring concept artists to refine their portfolios and how they should be preparing themselves for the field of game art.
When you have covered the basics of traditional art, you'll be left wondering how you can advance toward concept art from an ideal point of view.
When you plan to design a piece, it should be technically creative along with it being philosophical to a certain extent. The topics that have been covered in Beyond Art Fundamentals cannot be easily found in any other book.
In this book, you'll find several professional artists sharing their opinions and views gestures, moods, and emotions, and giving you ideas to create designs that will fit in perfectly with the storyline.
According to the view of professional artists, every image should have a specific emotion, purpose, and feeling associated with it. This book helps you to understand these subtle nuances that need to be incorporated into your artwork and the different approaches that you should use for creating every piece.
Length: 224 pages | Dimensions: 8.25 x 0.5 x 11.5 inches | Weight: 2.12 pounds | Publisher: 3DTotal Publishing
What is the Best Concept Art Book?
This section provides an informative comparison of top-rated concept art books. The accompanying table highlights key specifications for each product, including their length, dimensions, weight, and publisher.
Concept art is a form of illustration used to convey an idea for use in films, video games, animation, or comic books before it is put into the final product. It typically consists of sketches, paintings, and 3D models that help the creators visualize the world and characters of their stories.
Characters, places, stories, and entire worlds that do not exist are shaped as concept art through numerous iterations.
A concept is the first step in any design process.
Buying Guide for the Best Concept Art Books for Artists
When purchasing concept art books, it's crucial to consider several factors to ensure you make the right choice. The following comprehensive buying guide will help you navigate through the options and find the best concept art books for your needs.
Content and Focus
Look for books that cover the fundamentals of art, including figure drawing, perspective, color theory, composition, and rendering. Consider the specific focus of the book, whether it's character design, environment design, creature design, or general concept art techniques. Choose books that align with your interests and goals.
Author's Expertise and Reputation
Research the authors of the concept art books you're considering. Check their credentials, experience, and reputation within the industry. Look for books written by established concept artists or industry professionals who have worked on notable projects. Their insights and knowledge will be valuable.
Demonstrations and Step-by-Step Guides
Books that provide detailed demonstrations and step-by-step guides are highly beneficial for learning and practicing new techniques. Ensure the book includes clear explanations, visual examples, and exercises that allow you to apply the concepts and improve your skills.
Variety of Art Styles and Artists
Choose concept art books that showcase a range of art styles and feature different artists. Exposure to diverse styles will broaden your understanding and inspire creativity. Look for books that include interviews or profiles of successful concept artists, providing insights into their creative process and career paths.
Quality of Artwork Reproduction
Check the print quality and paper type of the book. High-quality reproductions of artwork will allow you to appreciate the details and nuances in the illustrations. Consider books with large, clear images that effectively showcase the artwork, making it easier to study and learn from.
Industry Relevance and Application
For aspiring concept artists, it's crucial to choose books that are relevant to the current industry trends and practices. Look for books that discuss digital painting techniques, software applications commonly used in the industry, and workflow processes for concept art production.
Reviews and Recommendations
Read reviews and seek recommendations from trusted sources, such as professional concept artists or reputable art communities. Consider joining online forums or communities where artists discuss and recommend concept art books based on their personal experiences.
Important Tip: Continual Practice and ApplicationWhile concept art books can provide valuable guidance and knowledge, remember that practice and application are crucial for skill development. Here's an important tip to keep in mind:
Regularly practice the techniques and exercises provided in the books to strengthen your foundation and improve your art skills. Apply what you've learned to personal projects and create your concept art to build a diverse portfolio that showcases your unique style and ideas. Seek feedback and critique from fellow artists or mentors to identify areas for improvement and refine your work.
Remember, concept art is a constantly evolving field, so keep learning, experimenting, and staying updated with the latest industry trends to excel in your journey as a concept artist.
What are some recommended concept art books for understanding light?
Light for Visual Artists” is a highly recommended book for understanding light in art. It provides insights into artistic techniques and the scientific aspects of rendering light and value in paintings or drawings.
Are there any books recommended for beginner artists to learn the basics of art?
Art Fundamentals: Color, Light, Composition, Anatomy, Perspective, and Depth” is a good book for beginner artists to grasp the basics of art. It covers various fundamental topics and techniques, providing a solid foundation for further study.
What book is suitable for beginners transitioning from traditional to digital painting?
Digital Painting for the Complete Beginner” is a book that focuses on helping artists transition from traditional to digital painting. It offers valuable insights and techniques for adapting to the digital medium.
What book is suitable for advanced artists looking to improve their digital painting skills?
Digital Painting Techniques” by 3DTotal is a book recommended for advanced artists looking to enhance their digital painting skills. It offers practical techniques and exercises for painting different objects.
Are there any books specifically about concept art?
Yes, there are several concept art books available. “The Art of Mulan,” “The Art of Pixar: The Complete Color Scripts,” “Surf’s Up: The Art and Making Of A True Story,” and “The Art Of Robots” are some examples of concept art books that provide insights into the creation of specific films and animation.
Conclusion
Use these books to your benefit to help you develop the fundamental skills of art, a professional network, and the right portfolio. These will pave the way for you to become a professional concept artist. There is no better way to learn than practicing religiously and following the experiences of other artists in this field.
These books provide valuable insights and practical tips to aid artists in their artistic journey and creative development.
Till next time keep exploring the field of art!
Top-freezer refrigerators are BUDGET-FRIENDLY options for moms, homeowners, and kitchen connoisseurs alike.
These refrigerators may not have the fanciest accessories and features. Yet, there are many reasons why people opt for this style.
Specifically, they're best for shoppers on a budget who want more fridge than freezer space. Additionally, it's a good choice for users with little space to spare at home.
If these three things resonate with you while searching for a new fridge, a top-freezer refrigerator could be your best bet!
To simplify your shopping experience, I've reviewed several brands and came up with the five top-freezer refrigerators of 2023.
A top-freezer refrigerator features a freezer compartment at the top of the unit and a fridge compartment at the bottom.
Top freezer refrigerators are the mostbasic fridge models you can purchase. As mentioned, they don't have fancy attachments and features; most are very STRAIGHTFORWARD, yet some offer more spice to their fridge models.
1. Whirlpool WRT518SZFG 18.2 cubic feet Top Freezer Refrigerator - Best Overall
This 18.2 cubic-foot, stainless steel top freezer from Whirlpool comes first on my list despite not having as many unique features and attachments as the other products listed.
While it lacks a deli drawer and only offers an optional ice maker model, I can say it's justifiable at its LOW PRICE of only $729.
It offers ample storage space for all your groceries, especially with the flexi-slide bins that quickly move side-to-side to make room for taller items.
Additionally, it has two crisper drawers with selectable humidity levels to keep fruits and veggies fresh, plus customizable door bins.
It also features a freezer temperature control that allows you to adjust the cold air in the freezer shelf. Hence, you can use it as an additional refrigerator compartment when you need more space.
The Whirlpool top-freezer also has an electronic temperature control, so you can set your fridge's coolness depending on the food you're storing.
What We Like
Large refrigerator capacity and flexible storage space
2. LG LRTLS2403S 20.2 Top-Freezer with Ice Maker - Best Value for Money
This stainless steel LG top-freezer fridge is pricier, but I assure you it's worth every dollar.
It offers a HUGE refrigerator capacity, featuring 24 cubic-foot storage for both the fridge and freezer spaces. It also has an ice maker plus an internal water dispenser — a rare find in most traditional models!
I also like the multi-flow air technology that maintains superior humidity and temperature levels to keep food fresh. Its linear compressor also REDUCES temperature fluctuations.
Food storage in this LG top-freezer model is also impressive. It features spill-proof shelves designed to contain spills in the fresh food section. These glass shelves are also height adjustable, so you can customize them to your liking.
Aside from the adjustable glass shelves, it also offers door-in-door bins, a folding shelving system to fit in taller items, and a 3-tier freezer space.
One major thing that sets it apart from other top-freezer models is its integration with the LG ThinQ app. Yes, it's SMART-ENABLED! This allows you to set the temperature using your smart devices.
3. LG LTCS20020S Top Freezer Refrigerator w/ Multi-Air Flow and Reversible Door - Best Energy-Efficient
This 20 cubic-foot stainless steel fridge from LG is your best bet if you want to go for ADDITIONAL STORAGE SPACE.
It has two crisper drawers with superior humidity and temperature controls, adjustable shelves, and 2-gallon door bins.
Additionally, its reversible door lets you decide if a left or right door swing fits your space and minimizes installation issues.
I can also say that this fridge is thoughtfully designed since it features contoured doors, hidden hinges, bright LED lighting, and other great internal features, which make it look and feel sophisticated.
It is also equipped with a digital sensor and smart diagnosis to consistently monitor the conditions of the fridge, maintain its cool temperature, and even help you troubleshoot issues.
4. Frigidaire FFHT1425VV 13.9 cubic feet Top Freezer Refrigerator - Best for Small Spaces
If you live in a small home and don't need as much storage space, this 13-cubic-foot stainless steel fridge from Frigidaire is your best choice.
For a $500 fridge, you gettwo full-width glass shelves, a half-width deli drawer to store your meat products, and humidity-controlled crisper drawers.
It also has three full-width racks for door storage, a glass shelf for the freezer, and two freezer door racks to store all your frozen foods.
The EvenTemp technology on this fridge also ensures that its airflow is evenly optimized for a consistent temperature.
What We Like
Energy Star certified
Ample storage capacity
2-gallon storage on the door bins
Meets the standards set by the Department of Energy
What We Don't Like
Does not freeze quickly
Attracts fingerprints
Capacity: 13.9 cubic-foot capacity (10.0 cu. ft. fridge and 3.9 cu. ft. frozen foods) | Dimension: 59.88 x 27.63 inches (H x W) | Installation depth: Standard depth | Depth: 31.25 inches | Finish: Stainless steel
5. GE GIE18GSNRSS 17.5 Cu. Ft. 28-Inch Top-Freezer Refrigerator - Best for Ice Maker Feature
This top-notch appliance stands out from the crowd with its functionality and convenience, setting a high standard in the refrigerator market. Let's delve into exploring the attributes, qualities, and benefits of this product.
GE GIE18GSNRSS defies the norms of top-freezer refrigerators by coming with a factory-installed ice maker. This automatic, energy-conscious system generates ice into a convenient storage bin, a feature often seen in appliances priced considerably higher.
The spaciousness of this model is undeniable, allocating 17.5 cubic feet of storage space in an intuitive design that maximizes utility. The lower section offers a hefty 13.49 cubic feet for fresh foods, with ample room in two crispers, a deli drawer, a butter keeper, and versatile shelves and door bins. The top section, designed for frozen goods, includes an adjustable wire shelf, allowing you to bifurcate the 4 cubic feet space to suit your needs.
Aesthetics are given due consideration with four available finishes; modern slate, as well as the more traditional black, white, and stainless steel. These choices allow for seamless integration with any kitchen décor.
To top it all off, this unit is Energy Star certified, marking it as an energy-efficient appliance designed to reduce environmental impact and save on utility bills.
Despite the numerous beneficial attributes, the GE GIE18GSNRSS Refrigerator is somewhat on the expensive side, which might deter a cost-conscious customer. Additionally, it would have added value if this model was designed to be garage-friendly, increasing the utility factor even more.
What We Like
Built-in ice maker with energy-efficient design
Spacious 17.5 cu. ft. capacity with smart organization
Energy Star certified for excellent energy savings
Comes in four attractive finishes for various decors
What We Don't Like
Slightly higher price may deter some cost-conscious customers
Which Top-Freezer Refrigerator Is Best for Your Needs?
The table below provides a comprehensive comparison of the best Top-Freezer Refrigerators for 2023. It outlines essential details, including capacity, dimensions, installation depth, depth (measured in inches), and finish, for each notable model.
As previously mentioned, top-freezer refrigerators feature a freezer compartment at the top of the unit and a fridge at the bottom — they're the most similar to traditional styles of refrigerators and come in counter-depth and standard sizes.
Top-freezer fridges are straightforward, simple, and budget-friendly. Most top-freezer models don't include as many attachments and special features as other options.
A top-freezer refrigerator offers adjustable shelves, compartments, storage bins, and LED lighting. It also offers MORE FRIDGE SPACE than freezer shelf space.
Benefits of Top-Freezer Refrigerators
Despite its straightforward design and functionality, many prefer purchasing a top-freezer model for their homes.
If you're looking for more reasons why you should go for top-freezer fridges, here are some of the benefits these models offer:
Cost-effective - given its simple and traditional style, top-freezer fridge manufacturers didn't spend too much time and resources to re-design these models, making them budget-friendly options for shoppers—most top-freezer refrigerators' costs range from $600 and $1000. You can already get a decent and highly functional fridge at this price point.
Simplistic design - although it doesn't have as many attachments and special features as other refrigerator styles, the simplistic design makes it easier for users to access the freezer and fridge of these models. They're not too complicated to use and don't require the user to bend over to access the fridge and freezer compartments. Additionally, these types of fridges are not difficult to clean and maintain. With fewer repairs and maintenance issues, you're also ensured that your fridge will last long.
Space-saving - most top freezer refrigerators are designed to be compact, plus there are counter-depth options to choose from. They are great for users living in small apartments with less room to spare. They're also not difficult to install, unlike other refrigerator styles on the market.
Extra storage capacity - if you're looking for a unit that offers ample storage space, a top-freezer fridge might be a good choice. The freezer in some models can even be converted and used as a fridge alone, which means it can provide adequate space to keep food cold and fresh and also makes it a good fit as a second fridge.
Factors to Consider When Choosing a Top-Freezer Refrigerator
At this point, you already know why you should (or shouldn't) consider buying a top-freezer fridge for your kitchen, plus great models to choose from, as provided in this list.
But it's still crucial that you know the factors and minute details you shouldn't miss when shopping for the best top freezer refrigerator.
This way, you can choose the model that would fit your and your family's needs. I suggest that you always look for these details to narrow down your choices:
Dimensions
Considering the size of the top freezer fridge is essential in ensuring it will fit your space. Should you get a counter-depth or standard-depth fridge?
While a larger fridge means greater storage capacity, you should note the maximum dimensions your place can cater to.
Hence, before shopping, measure the space where you plan to install your new fridge. Additionally, ensure that it can handle the width of an open-door swing.
Capacity
Top-freezer models are designed to be smaller and more compact compared to modern styles, such as French door models.
A top freezer has an average storage space of 16 cubic feet for your groceries, with the freezer occupying four cubic feet of this space. You can already picture that this is ideal for smaller family sizes or couples.
High-capacity top freezers offer up to 24 cubic feet and an adjustable shelving system to free up the fridge and provide more storage space. But we can't deny the fact that its capacity is generally limited.
Cost
You must also consider your budget when shopping for a new refrigerator. If you are looking for budget-friendly options, you've hit the jackpot; this is probably the best fridge you can get.
Plenty of top-freezer models you can choose from are HIGHLY FUNCTIONAL at a low price. But these don't come with modern features like the others.
The less sophisticated the fridge is, the lower the cost. But, if you're looking for additional attachments and features, like built-in ice makers and a sliding deli drawer, you should expect they'd cost a bit more.
Style
These traditional refrigerators aren't as impressive when it comes to style. Its color options are limited to black, stainless steel, and white. Other brands offer several colorways (black stainless steel, red, and bisque), yet rarely.
The style would also determine how to install the fridge in your home.
Others are meant to sit on your counter (like a counter-depth fridge), making it appear like it's built-in. This is contrary to the standard-depth fridge that needs to sit on the floor.
Energy Efficiency
One of the benefits of top-freezer fridges is energy efficiency because of their freezer placement.
You can also check if the fridge you're eyeing is Energy Star-certified to ensure that the fridge model is indeed energy-saving.
By saving energy, you're not only being eco-friendly. You're also cutting the cost of your utility bills!
Deli Drawer
If you don't know it yet, a deli drawer is used to store meat products to keep them fresh.
This is common in the side-by-side, French door, and bottom fridges but not in traditional models, so adding this to top-freezer models makes it a stand-out feature.
When integrated into top-freezer refrigerators, it mostly features a half-width deli drawer which might not be enough for some. So, try looking for a model that offers a full-width deli drawer.
Flexible Interior Storage System
Freezers are supposed to consistently have low temperatures to maintain the freezing point. Some models allow you to adjust the internal temperature to double as a refrigerator compartment and increase capacity.
From 0, you can crank it up to 32 degrees Fahrenheit, so it will be cool enough to store food and keep it fresh without freezing it completely.
Note
If your freezer refrigerator has this feature, make sure to give it enough time to adjust to the newly set temperature before stashing in fresh food, extra produce, or leftovers.
Ice Maker
An ice maker is a total giveaway for fridges. Many people like options with a built-in ice maker or those suitable for an ice maker kit. This is a great feature, especially when you like preparing drinks at home.
Having a built-in ice maker in your fridge eliminates the need for separate ice cube trays or the hassle of installing one separately.
Just a heads up; an automatic ice maker is NOT COMMON for top-freezer refrigerators. If you ever find one, you shouldn't be surprised it would cost more than the other top-freezer models.
Temperature Control and Cooling Performance
Temperature control and cooling performance are probably the most important criteria you shouldn't miss.
Obviously, if you're looking for the best top-freezer refrigerator, you should choose one with outstanding cooling performance since that's the primary purpose of a fridge.
Cooling performance is indicated by the EQUAL DISTRIBUTION of cold air in the fridge, compressor performance, and integrated cooling technology.
Warm spots in a fridge are a major red flag, and it's less likely to keep your food fresh for a long time.
Additionally, you should be able to control the temperature to adjust to seasonal temperature swings and maintain the performance of your fridge despite hot weather.
What are the Differences Between a Top Freezer Refrigerator and Bottom Freezer Models?
Top-freezer refrigerators feature a freezer shelf at the uppermost part of the unit, contrary to bottom-freezer refrigerators. However, aside from freezer placement, they also differ in energy consumption.
Top-freezer refrigerators use 10% to 25% LESS ENERGY, making them energy-efficient choices and cheaper to operate. But, if you’re looking for more freezer space, bottom-freezer fridges are the one to go for.
How Long Do Top Freezer Refrigerators Last?
Most freezer fridges are built to last between 10 and 15 years due to their lack of attachments and other features that need frequent maintenance. Compared to modern fridges that last 6 to 8 years, this is a great bargain.
How Much Does a Top Freezer Refrigerator Cost?
An average top freezer costs between $600 and $1000. Other brands and models are a bit cheaper, while the others are more expensive and can exceed $1000.
The price greatly depends on the brand, features, and technology integrated into the fridge.
Conclusion
That's a wrap! I hope you can find the best top freezer of your choice in this article. If not, it's your call! Just remember to consider the important factors when shopping for one.
Feel free to refer to this guide if you have more top-freezer concerns.
Happy shopping!
Drawing is much more than just putting pencil to paper and sketching what's in front of you.
Professional artists will tell you that it's a medium for exploring human emotions and evoking real-life feelings in a 2D medium. So, you can understand the challenge that artists face and realize now why famous paintings sell for millions.
If you're a budding artist looking to make a name in the world of art, it would be best to read a few books about drawing concepts and techniques. To help you, we have narrowed down the 50 best drawing books for beginners that explore various ways of bringing art forms to life.
Best Drawing Books for Beginners
Here's the list of the 50 best drawing books for beginners, a comprehensive collection that will inspire and guide you on your artistic journey.
To become proficient in different drawing techniques, it's important to practice, and that's where Bert Dodson's book comes in handy. It focuses on simple techniques so that you can create your own style.
All the techniques are easy to follow and suitable for new artists to help them apply clean strokes by controlling the movement of their hands and elbows. You'll find that the realistic drawing exercises have been divided into several lessons for quick understanding.
Number of Pages: 224 pages | Dimensions: 8.47 x 0.45 x 11 inches | Weight: 1.6 lbs | Publisher: North Light Books | Publication Date: August 15, 1990 | Book Format: Paperback
This book acts as a portal to the world of professional artists, especially for budding painters who need to practice realistic drawing exercises. Published in 1979, it’s a bestseller in the USA and has been translated into several languages.
The author, Betty Edwards, taught at California State University and has provided essential tips and tricks to be a successful painter. There's even a section about using the left and right sides of the brain to good effect.
Number of Pages: 291 pages | Dimensions: 8 x 0.75 x 9.5 inches | Weight: 1.45 lbs | Publisher: Tarcher | Publication Date: August 30, 1999 | Book Format: Paperback
Every famous artist was once a beginner, but you will have a slight advantage because they didn't have the luxury of reading this book. Written by Mary and Mark Willenbrik, it will help improve your drawing skills in short, effective strokes.
All the methods in this book are pretty straightforward, while the narrative tone is simple. We came across several useful tips that will help you grasp basic art forms and styles with ease.
Number of Pages: 128 pages | Dimensions: 8.51 x 0.37 x 10.86 inches | Weight: 0.22 lbs | Publisher: North Light Books | Publication Date: November 2, 2006 | Book Format: Paperback
Novice artists who one day aspire to bring various art forms to life will love this book by Claire Watson Garcia. You can learn to draw nature, people, still life, objects, textures, and basic shapes. The best part is that it has a separate section on charcoal shading and graphite pencil sketches for drawing realistic portraits.
Number of Pages: 160 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 0.4 x 11.1 inches | Weight: 1.31 lbs | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Publication Date: October 1, 2003 | Book Format: Paperback
To make your drawings stand out, it's essential to understand the interplay between light and shadow. We recommend studying the techniques in this book by Richard Yot but don't worry because it's not difficult to understand. The book isn't filled with complicated terminology despite talking about technical concepts.
It's perfect for creating detailed illustrations in visual art and proves to be a valuable resource for animators, photographers, novice artists, and professional painters.
Number of Pages: 176 pages | Dimensions: 8.8 x 0.75 x 11.2 inches | Weight: 1.59 lbs | Publisher: Laurence King Publishing | Publication Date: July 16, 2019 | Book Format: Paperback
At times, the best way to leave your mark as a painter is to look at things from a different perspective. To explore new drawing techniques, you can read this book about perspective drawing, which contains more than 250 line drawings related to the vanishing point and horizon.
Ernest R. Norlingod discusses the importance of seeing things at eye level to create shadows, shapes, objects, and figures to build your foundation as a painter.
Number of Pages: 224 pages | Dimensions: 5.39 x 0.47 x 8.46 inches | Weight: 0.58 lbs | Publisher: Dover Publications | Publication Date: January 19, 1999 | Book Format: Paperback
Another bestseller for art study is this book about drawing objects and figures by taking inspiration from real life. If you're committed to gathering practical knowledge, then follow the exercises carefully crafted by the author, Kimon Nicolaides, from his experiences.
Having learned from stalwarts like Sloan, Bridgman, and Miller, he explores his passion for teaching art in this detailed book. We found that it's ideal for beginners and slightly advanced painters.
Number of Pages: 240 pages | Dimensions: 6.88 x 0.69 x 9.25 inches | Weight: 1.13 lbs | Publisher: Mariner Books | Publication Date: February 1, 1990 | Book Format: Paperback
As far as figure drawing books go, the Vilppu Drawing Manual is one of the best and helps beginners make life drawings with ease. The author was employed at Disney for 15 years and passed on his knowledge by writing this comprehensive art course.
We found that the three main topics in this book are: gesture drawing, form construction, and hand action.
Number of Pages: 177 pages | Dimensions: N/A | Weight: 1.3 lbs | Publisher: Vilppu Studio | Publication Date: January 1, 1997 | Book Format: Spiral-bound
As professional painters will tell you, there's no need to look far for inspiration because humans are some of the most interesting subjects. If you want to draw a life-like human figure, we recommend Andrew Loomis' book to make this seemingly difficult task easy.
He details the intermediary steps involved in the process so that you can draw figures by maintaining the correct proportions of different body parts. Even though the methods described might appear outdated, they are extremely useful.
Number of Pages: 208 pages | Dimensions: 9.2 x 1.02 x 12.3 inches | Weight: 2.8 lbs | Publisher: Titan Books | Publication Date: May 31, 2011 | Book Format: Hardcover
Serious art teachers will always encourage you to travel because there's so much to see and paint. But don't forget to carry this sketchbook to capture the emotions of different places and their people. Instead of taking photos, this old-school technique of recording memories will help you develop human connections.
Thanks to its unique combination of lessons, the book discusses the techniques for painting nature, the environment, and urban scenes.
Number of Pages: 200 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 0.5 x 11 inches | Weight: 1.01 lbs | Publisher: Butterfly Books | Publication Date: April 1, 1991 | Book Format: Paperback
Suppose you chance upon an interesting scene while on a beach and want to paint it, but don't know how. It so happens that artists often fail to replicate the objects in front of them, so this book helps make that easier. We believe it's ideal for sketching objects in still life and explains how to add detail with each stroke.
Number of Pages: 303 pages | Dimensions: N/A | Weight: N/A | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Publication Date: September 7, 2011 | Book Format: Kindle
This book written by Terry Rosenberg and Peter Stanyer will be great reference material for serious art students. It extensively discusses drawing skills involving space, shape, light, and texture.
Several fun exercises keep you engaged and prove most suitable for artists who have some proficiency. You'll especially love topics covering landscape, movement of figures, abstract subjects, and still life.
Number of Pages: 240 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 0.75 x 12 inches | Weight: 1.7 lbs | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Publication Date: January 1, 2003 | Book Format: Paperback
If you're a budding storyteller, this book will hold great value for your career. It's one of the rare books for graphic novelists who wish to engage with the audience through their illustrations. And, thanks to Marcos Mateu-Mestre, a comic artist himself, you'll get to know about composing engaging shots through single images.
Apart from art techniques, readers will have clarity about choosing a relevant topic and using light to depict day/night scenes.
Number of Pages: 128 pages | Dimensions: 8.56 x 0.55 x 10.95 inches | Weight: 1.45 lbs | Publisher: Design Studio Press | Publication Date: August 31, 2010 | Book Format: Paperback
The absolute beginner should know that drawing and painting are two different mediums, even though they share many similarities. To learn about them both, order your copy of this book today since it highlights how drawing and sketching can improve your painting skills.
You'll find hands-on lessons discussing charcoal and pencil sketches by drawing lines, scales, patterns, depths, contours, and perspective exercises. Best of all are the multiple color illustrations to describe art-making.
Number of Pages: 320 pages | Dimensions: 8 x 1 x 10.25 inches | Weight: 2.2 lbs | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Publication Date: October 1, 2003 | Book Format: Paperback
Drawing doesn't simply mean sketching nature or still life; in fact, model building is one of the most interesting concepts covered in drawing fundamentals. You can read this book which focuses primarily on design and the various model processes of rotations, volumes, and ellipses.
We loved the images and video tutorials that made the different techniques easier to understand.
Number of Pages: 208 pages | Dimensions: 9.1 x 0.8 x 11.03 inches | Weight: 2.5 lbs | Publisher: Design Studio Press | Publication Date: December 15, 2013 | Book Format: Paperback
This is another book by Andrew Loomis that discusses the artistic techniques of drawing different body parts. To be more precise, he talks about the skills needed for drawing heads and hands by developing your perspective through the topics covered in the book.
All the methods are pretty simple, and you'll get a clear idea of how to sketch a proportionate human being with heads and arms that don't seem out of place.
Number of Pages: 160 pages | Dimensions: 9.2 x 0.8 x 12.3 inches | Weight: 2.19 lbs | Publisher: Titan Books | Publication Date: October 25, 2011 | Book Format: Hardcover
Although there are several books on figure drawing, very few tackle the subject from an anatomical standpoint. Michael Hampton understood this and believed that knowing about human anatomy would help people sketch life-like figures. The book discusses the mechanical techniques of sketching a human figure, and you can also transfer these techniques to other mediums.
It is divided into several sections for easy understanding and explores various skill sets for the benefit of budding artists.
Number of Pages: 235 pages | Dimensions: 10 x 7.5 x 1.2 inches | Weight: 1.89 lbs | Publisher: M. Hampton | Publication Date: December 27, 2009 | Book Format: Paperback
No, we aren't reviewing the same book twice - this is a different book by Steve Huston that explores figure drawing. You'll learn how to add detail to artwork, thanks to the author's instructions and advice to focus on the tiny things.
It's a comprehensive guide for intermediate and advanced artists discussing the importance of gesture, light, perspective, and structure. Most importantly, you'll find artworks by famous artists for inspiration.
Number of Pages: 192 pages | Dimensions: 8.63 x 0.75 x 10 inches | Weight: 1.5 lbs | Publisher: Rockport Publishers | Publication Date: June 1, 2016 | Book Format: Flexibound
As we have discussed earlier, it's crucial to know the human anatomy for figure drawing, and this is another book that believes in that school of thought. There are diagrams and photos, including translucent overlays, to help you understand the skeletal structure.
Sara Simbet explores the various muscle groups and encourages artists to capture the balance, poise, and grace of the human form. And all the illustrations are pretty detailed to help you draw a model accurately.
Number of Pages: 255 pages | Dimensions: 10.25 x 1.25 x 12 inches | Weight: 3.65 lbs | Publisher: DK Publishing | Publication Date: October 1, 2001 | Book Format: Hardcover
Beginners can read Andrew Loomis' book - Successful Drawing, which explores a realistic and clean style so that you can master 3D drawing. He discusses some pretty advanced skills related to proportion, planes, perspective placement, and patterns in the book.
We especially liked the emphasis on light and scale, the major components of three-dimensional drawings. After reading it, you should have a better idea about construction, character, contour, consistency, and conception.
Number of Pages: 160 pages | Dimensions: 9.3 x 0.9 x 12.2 inches | Weight: 2.3 lbs | Publisher: Titan Books | Publication Date: May 8, 2012 | Book Format: Hardcover
Whenever we think of people, we think about adults, but Barbara Bradley teaches us that even babies and teenagers can be intriguing and fun subjects. The professional artist was a Director of Illustration in San Francisco for the Academy of Art College. So, you can trust her when she discusses how to realistically draw people and their clothing in this book.
Particularly interesting is the attention to detail, with regards to the folds on clothing and how they respond to the environment.
Number of Pages: 176 pages | Dimensions: 8.7 x 0.7 x 11.1 inches | Weight: 2.15 lbs | Publisher: F+W Media | Publication Date: October 27, 2003 | Book Format: Hardcover
Circling round to anatomy again, this book talks about surface anatomy and how it's influenced by anatomical infrastructure. In short, Joseph Sheppard's book discusses figure drawing from the point of view of muscles and bones related to their position and movement.
It's pretty interesting, and artists get to examine the surface structure of live models. You can view a finished figure in two forms - its muscles and skeletons.
Number of Pages: 144 pages | Dimensions: 8.33 x 0.46 x 11.17 inches | Weight: 0.91 lbs | Publisher: Dover Publications | Publication Date: May 1, 1991 | Book Format: Paperback
Master artists need to be aware of their surroundings and how it holds their drawing together, believes Eliot Goldfinger in the book Human Anatomy For Artists. It's considered by many artists to be the definitive guide for drawing a human figure.
The author is a well-known sculptor and has experience drawing bones, muscles, and skeletons. This book analyzes the human form in detail and discusses all the essentials for drawing realistic figures.
Number of Pages: 368 pages | Dimensions: 12.32 x 9.32 x 1.11 inches | Weight: 3.79 lbs | Publisher: Oxford University Press | Publication Date: November 7, 1991 | Book Format: Hardcover
Even though the title may sound complicated, this is not a scientific or medical-themed book. It's pretty easy to read, thanks to the life-like illustrations of models in different poses, coupled with the position of their muscles.
Like the previous book, you also get to understand the surface anatomy of the human figure through photos and illustrations. Arthur Thomson has years of art experience and knows how to convey a thought easily.
Number of Pages: 624 pages | Dimensions: 5.5 x 1.25 x 8.5 inches | Weight: 1.36 lbs | Publisher: Dover Publications | Publication Date: November 24, 2011 | Book Format: Paperback
An often unexplored technique is drawing with pens, as it delivers a vibrant appearance unmatched by most pencils. But a valid concern among artists is that they won't be able to erase the lines, which is where this book proves useful.
It provides an in-depth view of using pens and has several beautiful drawings to awaken the artist in you. We read the book and found it thoroughly entertaining due to the lucid language.
Number of Pages: 166 pages | Dimensions: 8 x 0.38 x 11 inches | Weight: 0.9 lbs | Publisher: Three Minds Press | Publication Date: December 11, 2015 | Book Format: Paperback
To draw great characters, you need proper knowledge about body language, shape, facial expressions, and interactions between various elements. Beverly Johnson's book talks about all this by looking at a subject from different angles based on the setting. And there are plenty of practical exercises for much-needed practice.
Number of Pages: 144 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 0.5 x 11 inches | Weight: 1.42 lbs | Publisher: IMPACT Books | Publication Date: December 3, 2019 | Book Format: Paperback
Understanding the fundamentals of art involves having a working knowledge of the various theories, concepts, and conventions. But don't worry, you can refer to this book to become a successful artist, owing to its diverse topics, such as the rule of thirds and divine proportions.
You'll also find discussions on subtle nuances for depicting human emotions.
Number of Pages: 288 pages | Dimensions: 8.19 x 0.94 x 11.57 inches | Weight: 2.8 lbs | Publisher: 3DTotal Publishing | Publication Date: May 12, 2020 | Book Format: Paperback
Life drawing involves accurate representations of the human body on paper, for which this 100-page book comes in handy. There are detailed instructions about tone, texture, position, line, and shade. Beginners will love the step-by-step depictions, especially since it doesn't have complicated terminology to overwhelm them.
Number of Pages: 96 pages | Dimensions: 8.56 x 0.27 x 11.06 inches | Weight: 0.94 lbs | Publisher: Search Press | Publication Date: June 4, 2019 | Book Format: Paperback
We often get caught up with drawing a perfect landscape or a human face, but even drawing from imagination has its challenges. This book talks about sketching creatures and monsters and displays the work of 50 artists from across the world. You'll find the mechanical structures of dragons, fairies, etc., represented in black and white.
Number of Pages: 320 pages | Dimensions: 8 x 0.75 x 9 inches | Weight: 2.1 lbs | Publisher: 3DTotal Publishing | Publication Date: June 25, 2019 | Book Format: Paperback
Alongside figure drawings, one of the important techniques to learn for a serious artist is how to draw portraits. This book focuses on the essential steps of portrait drawing to make it easier for beginners by exploring different techniques and analyzing the subtleties of structure and facial expression.
Number of Pages: 112 pages | Dimensions: 5.25 x 0.75 x 8.2 inches | Weight: 0.55 lbs | Publisher: Rockport Publishers | Publication Date: April 24, 2018 | Book Format: Flexibound
Sometimes you need ideas for drawing practice, so this book has over 1,000 art projects to tingle the little gray cells in your brain. The primary concepts covered include sketching, line drawing, building up, and completing the finished figure. It also has topics discussing famous landmarks, buildings, vehicles, and nature.
Number of Pages: 504 pages | Dimensions: 9 x 1.5 x 11 inches | Weight: 4.14 lbs | Publisher: 3DTotal Publishing | Publication Date: October 30, 2018 | Book Format: Hardcover
Once beginners have grasped the concept of still-life drawings, they can focus on the gesture drawing process to bring human emotions to life. You should note that the entire book is a compilation of lectures by Walt Stanchfield, the famous Disney animator. Rest assured, it will help you capture the moment through sketches.
Number of Pages: 403 pages | Dimensions: 10.8 x 8.4 x 1 inches | Weight: 2.99 lbs | Publisher: Routledge | Publication Date: March 23, 2009 | Book Format: Paperback
If you aren't interested in drawing, you will be now, thanks to this book that teaches artists to draw their favorite Marvel characters. To sketch the superheroes that Stan Lee conceptualized, you'll learn about shot selection, composition, character dynamics, and perspective. All of these useful traits are depicted through vibrant color illustrations.
Number of Pages: 192 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 0.4 x 11 inches | Weight: 0.85 lbs | Publisher: Atria Books | Publication Date: September 14, 1984 | Book Format: Paperback
Figure drawing isn't as easy as it seems, and you can refer to this book to learn about drawing the head and body in perfect proportion. There are tons of illustrations and a step-by-step guide, which many artists believe is easier to follow than Andrew Loomis' methods. You won't face any shortage of helpful tips.
Number of Pages: 128 pages | Dimensions: 8.2 x 0.3 x 10.8 inches | Weight: 0.65 lbs | Publisher: TarcherPerigee | Publication Date: January 15, 1982 | Book Format: Paperback
Developing character traits is important to be well-known as an artist, and what better person to learn from than Stephen Silver, the designer of shows like Kim Impossible. This book details simple steps and explains the best drawing techniques for encouraging, guiding, and inspiring you to sketch a character.
Number of Pages: 248 pages | Dimensions: 12 x 1 x 9 inches | Weight: 3.1 lbs | Publisher: Design Studio Press | Publication Date: April 7, 2017 | Book Format: Paperback
Cartooning as concept art is an intricate form, and Christopher Hart will help you tap into your real potential through his brilliant book. You'll find simple methods to design cartoons but especially pleasing is the attention to bodies, faces, and backdrops. All these bring any cartoon to life.
Number of Pages: 160 pages | Dimensions: 8.51 x 0.44 x 10.87 inches | Weight: 1.42 lbs | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Publication Date: March 26, 2013 | Book Format: Paperback
For concept artists, one of the keys to drawing animations is to take inspiration from photos, storyboards, sketches, and paintings. This book by two well-known Disney animators, Frank Thomas, and Ollie Jonhston, talks about the 12 principles of animation while providing helpful tips to design your own characters.
Number of Pages: 576 pages | Dimensions: 10.66 x 1.4 x 11.39 inches | Weight: 6.28 lbs | Publisher: Disney Editions | Publication Date: October 19, 1995 | Book Format: Hardcover
To learn all the fundamentals of designing a graphic novel, you can read this book about sketching creatures and characters from your imagination. We found many projects and exercises that you can practice for drawing any creature to bring the novel to life.
You'll also like the beautiful illustrations and tips that the author offers from his own experience as an artist.
Number of Pages: 192 pages | Dimensions: 8 x 0.55 x 10.01 inches | Weight: 1.45 lbs | Publisher: IMPACT Books | Publication Date: October 12, 2016 | Book Format: Paperback
The best drawing books often talk about how to draw, but Anthony Ryder takes a different approach and discusses what you should draw. He builds on the idea of capturing what an artist sees rather than what they expect to see. You'll especially like the topics covering life, form, shape, and lines to create realistic drawings.
Number of Pages: 160 pages | Dimensions: 8.25 x 0.39 x 10.79 inches | Weight: 0.95 lbs | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Publication Date: June 1, 1999 | Book Format: Paperback
To apply the fundamentals of figure drawing in real life, Mike Mattesi talks about sketching the human body in its purest form. But he also discusses how attention to clothes can elevate the artwork to another level. This book is the perfect guide for people to convey emotions through art.
Number of Pages: 211 pages | Dimensions: 8.4 x 0.6 x 10.9 inches | Weight: 1.84 lbs | Publisher: CRC Press | Publication Date: March 29, 2017 | Book Format: Paperback
An important book for art study is A Foundation Course In Drawing, with university lecturers Terry Rosenberg and Peter Stanyer co-writing it. The book contains many realistic exercises to help students grasp the concept of different art forms and apply them to their projects. It's ideal for beginners to learn real-life applications of various drawing techniques.
Number of Pages: 408 pages | Dimensions: 7 x 1.5 x 9.5 inches | Weight: 2.15 lbs | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Publication Date: October 1, 1999 | Book Format: Hardcover
Any concept artist will find this book to their liking as it discusses visual development through various sketching techniques. It mostly deals with creating fantasy worlds comprising castles, forests, huntsmen, and monsters by encouraging artists to explore their creativity. However, some of the concepts about perspective might be a little complex.
Number of Pages: N/A | Dimensions: N/A | Weight: N/A | Publisher: N/A | Publication Date: January 1, 2008 | Book Format: Hardcover
This is a fairly new book published in 2007 and focuses on atmospheric perspective to explain how values and colors can add depth to any artwork. There are topics covering one, two, and three-point perspectives, while the author also deals with unique perspective-related problems like wheels, reflections, and stairs.
Number of Pages: 208 pages | Dimensions: 8.53 x 0.55 x 11 inches | Weight: 1.81 lbs | Publisher: North Light Books | Publication Date: June 12, 2007 | Book Format: Paperback
If you want to draw popular anime characters, you can't go wrong with this book. It's most suitable for beginners and will help you draw school girls and boys, villains, and fantasy characters. Most of all, it offers detailed insight into developing emotions and sketching accessories.
Number of Pages: 144 pages | Dimensions: 9 x 0.5 x 10 inches | Weight: 1.2 lbs | Publisher: Drawing with Christopher Hart | Publication Date: July 7, 2015 | Book Format: Paperback
This is another popular book for drawing Manga and other fictional creatures like Pokemon to help you capture figure poses quickly. The primary discussion revolves around accurately depicting their facial expressions, shapes, sizes, and unique character traits to leave a mark on the audience.
Number of Pages: 160 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 0.48 x 9.99 inches | Weight: 1.35 lbs | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Publication Date: November 17, 2009 | Book Format: Paperback
Both beginners and advanced Manga artists will enjoy the topics covered in this book, including character development and setting a scene. After reading it, you can expand your skill set and draw exquisite Manga characters, thanks to the detailed illustrations.
Number of Pages: 128 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 5.43 x 0.3 inches | Weight: 1.1 lbs | Publisher: IMPACT Books | Publication Date: March 8, 2012 | Book Format: Paperback
This is a classic drawing book for developing anatomical sense, thanks to the 800 illustrations depicting the movement of muscles and bones in the body. We found that it's divided into three sections - muscles and their actions, skeleton, and movement.
It's ideal for an intermediate artist, and the easy instructions make it convenient for you to quickly grasp the subject.
Number of Pages: 304 pages | Dimensions: 9.33 x 0.91 x 11.23 inches | Weight: 3.21 lbs | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Publication Date: December 23, 2008 | Book Format: Hardcover
You can buy this comprehensive book when you aspire to draw realistic figures of animals, humans, inanimate objects, and the environment. Co-written by Rick and Carrie Stuart Parks, this book takes a deep dive into the basics of drawing.
You'll find topics on anatomy, form, and structure with several helpful tips to improve your drawing skills. And both advanced and novice artists will like the friendly narration.
Number of Pages: 224 pages | Dimensions: 8.51 x 0.5 x 10.84 inches | Weight: 1.99 lbs | Publisher: North Light Books | Publication Date: June 13, 2009 | Book Format: Paperback
Out of all the books we have reviewed, this is one of the rare ones that only contains pictures of artistic inspiration. Various artists have shared their creations from their library, which makes An Illustrated Life unique.
As you can understand, it's not a tutorial on how to draw, even though there are certain helpful tips. This is down to the author's interviews with the artists, where they talk about their creative process.
Number of Pages: 272 pages | Dimensions: 10 x 0.6 x 8 inches | Weight: 2.2 lbs | Publisher: HOW Books | Publication Date: December 1, 2008 | Book Format: Paperback
Who knew that drawing the head could be so challenging? That's because William Maughan discusses Leonardo Da Vinci's chiaroscuro technique, which is the interplay between light and dark.
Artists will learn about using toned paper, and dark and white pencils to create shadow, light, and other interesting forms. There's even a detailed guide on drawing accurate facial features through soft pastels for visual awareness.
Number of Pages: 160 pages | Dimensions: 8.31 x 0.4 x 10.99 inches | Weight: 1.26 lbs | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Publication Date: January 1, 2004 | Book Format: Paperback
Buying Guide for the Best Drawing Book for Beginners
Now let’s look at the factors that will help you choose the best drawing books for novice artists. But before that, here are the answers to a few common questions that budding artists usually have.
A. Easy to Understand
The best drawing books are easy to understand despite the complex concepts and structures of shape, light, and form. This will help beginners grasp the concepts quickly and apply them to their painting projects.
It will help if you look for books that explain how to use different painting mediums to evoke subtle expressions. For instance, a slight tilt of the eyebrow can draw your attention to a person's face, which enhances their facial expressions.
B. Wide Range of Topics
To hold value for beginners, drawing books should cover a wide range of topics even when the book's primary focus is on a singular feature. You have seen in our reviews that many books deal with drawing the head or arms, but even then, they are pretty detailed.
They cover concepts of proportions, reflections, perspectives, etc., to bring your sketches to life. Moreover, search for books that discuss brush strokes, color gradients, and adding depth to the drawings.
C.Price
Although you would want to buy the best drawing books, we are not recommending that you spend a fortune on them. We understand that buying art accessories is pretty expensive, so you want to look for an affordable book.
Most of the books in our guide are reasonably priced, and books for the slightly advanced artist are priced higher. So, depending on your proficiency, you may have to spend a little extra to purchase a relevant book.
What should a beginner first learn in drawing?
As a beginner, you must first learn about perspective to skillfully portray 3D objects on 2D paper. There are different perspective techniques that visual artists use for life drawing to make their work stand out.
What are the five basics of drawing?
The five basics of drawing that complete beginners should know about are:
Perspective
Color schemes
Proportions
Edges
Putting thought into action
What are some important drawing methods?
The four most crucial drawing methods are:
Hatching and cross-hatching
Rendering light
Shading and blending
Adding highlights
Conclusion
That's all the drawing books we had to cover for beginners; hopefully, now, you can choose one based on the skills you want to develop.
It's essential to keep innovating and pushing yourself to learn about the latest techniques and trends in the world of art, so reading the best drawing books will be worthwhile. You can take inspiration from the pictures and illustrations in many of them to incorporate them with your unique sketching style.
Also, don't forget to try out pencil, pen, and brush strokes, as each medium adds something new to a drawing. With that, we will leave you to brainstorm for your upcoming project, so take care and read this guide before purchasing drawing books.
Are you searching for an incredible way to create a unique space in your home that caters to your personality and interests? Look no further than your basement: an often overlooked area that has the potential to be transformed into an impressive and personalized bar. By turning your focus to basement bar ideas, you can make your house truly feel like home.
In planning your dream basement bar, it's crucial to consider available space and any necessary improvements. Ensure your basement is dry and safe, addressing waterproofing, ventilation, and insulation to create an inviting environment. Don't forget that soundproofing and acoustics, particularly for the basement ceiling, are key aspects in achieving a comfortable and functional space. Effective ceiling soundproofing will ensure the fun in the basement doesn't disturb the rest of the house and vice versa.
With proper planning and optimization, your basement can be more than just storage or technical space, its natural soundproofing qualities make it a perfect location for an enjoyable and relaxing retreat. Take inspiration from the 43 insanely cool basement bar ideas featured in this article and let your imagination run wild. Incorporate a game room, and you've got yourself a fantastic bachelor pad or entertainment hub for friends and family — all while maintaining a peaceful atmosphere for the rest of your home.
Cool Basement Bar Ideas for Your Home
1. Simple and cozy basement bar idea
2. Using light to make the bar more inviting
3. Combining materials adds flavor
4. A black bar is always striking
The coolest basement bar ideas don't need to be big, but they all need to make justice to the space they occupy, they simply need to be capable of properly entertaining.
5. Space-efficient basement bar design
I love this idea because it makes use of a residual basement space that would otherwise be used as a simple storage space if not for nothing at all. A small bar opened in your basement will present new options, and it will lead to great opportunities when it comes to entertaining your friends and family.
6. Stunning rustic basement bar
Old buildings were made primarily of bricks. If that's the case for your basement, simply paint it or leave it natural and complement the whole with a wooden bar, the brick and wood combination will make the place charming.
Basement bars are cool by default but with exposed brick, rustic wooden accents, and industrial stools, your basement will go to a whole other level.
7. Make the bar more visible by using warm light
8. Lovely wine storage wood structure
If your wine collection is something that you cherish then the storage solution deserves special attention. Common rectangular storage units will always do the job but to make the place special you need something that catches the eye and removes the ordinary attribute.
Here the bar shelf displays the liquor while the splendid geometric shelves differentiate wine types in a pattern that can even be called wine art by enthusiasts.
9. White always suggests elegance
It's not just the color though. The proportions, the wooden frames, and small details, here, the shape of the handles, contribute to turning this into a very stylish basement bar idea. Also, imagine how surprised your guests will be when you open the doors to what looks like a normal cabinet to reveal an extraordinary basement bar.
Your entire bar and the bar shelves can be hidden in a cabinet to declutter your ambiance.
10. Choosing contrasting colors makes the bar stand out
While this home basement bar looks simple and neat do note that your bar shelf can have lights incorporated within. That not only enhances visibility but also puts great emphasis on the best bottles in your collection that might reside on these shelves.
11. Retro design is not something you see every day
12. Space-conscious bar design idea
You don't need an entire room to fit the home bar that you've always dreamed of having. Even a small wall will do. It's the design that counts more and the way it connects to the rest of the room. By fitting it with a mirror, you'll make the space feel bigger and the bar more interesting.
via The Creativity Exchange
13. An illuminated countertop is a must
The upper cabinet was fitted with small lights that illuminate the countertop, it is where the magic happens and the bar comes to life. It doesn't only look good but it's also very practical, helping you prepare any drink you want.
Storing different beverages efficiently might seem a difficult task in small spaces but with the right drawer, this changes rapidly, you`ll have all the drinks in sight, easily accessible, and the entire home bar in one place.
14. Small bar cart Ikea Hack
15. The black bar - a courageous and remarkable setup
If the home bar itself isn't special enough, then you can make it even more alluring by going for an all-black design. It's still pretty uncommon and people generally don't opt for it because it's a slightly unusual thing to have. It's very subjective though, for example, Holland nestles many black designs that look great. If you're gonna do it, do it properly, choose something unique.
via Summit Signature Homes, Inc. and Denise Hauser Design Co.
16. Epic bar built in Victorian-styled cabinet
17. Trendy drink serving table
18. Gorgeous mini bar cabinet for small spaces
19. Appealing built-in wall white bar
This great basement bar idea is perfect for adding a touch of style to your home. The confined space could have been a drawback but instead, it has led to a very clean and clear solution. The fact that the setup is contained just like a frame would constrain a picture makes the home bar look very intimate and inviting. It's the perfect example for supporting the idea that bigger isn't always better.
via Benjamin Moore Smoke Embers. & John K. Anderson Design
20. It's the surprise that counts - the great space-saving idea
And, on top of that, just look at it! It's so simple and yet fits so well in the room, making it so much more interesting. Every guest will be curious and intrigued by it. What makes this object look this good is the way the wood textures blend together, keeping the design looking unitary. The colors are different but don't vary much in tone and saturation. Too much contrast and you will lose the elegant, discreet effect.
21. Enhance the setup by adding a contrasting background
What if the wall was white? Would the home bar look the same? Definitely not. The chalkboard wall now highlights a powerful contrast and by adding a respectable amount of light into the scene the designer created a very appealing basement bar.
via Elle Decor
22. Get a smooth white cabinet for a discreet bar
23. Adding a stone pattern was never easier
24. Polished drink trolley for great flexibility
25. Bar - pool table combination is a definite thrill
This one speaks for itself. All we can do is admire and dream of having a basement like this for ourselves. I know where I'd spent most of my time. Notice the difference in color and materials between the bar, the pool table, and the rest of the room and the way the bar is built into the wall, making it a special place in comparison to the rest of the room.
26. Wonderful all-black modern bar design
via KraftMaid
27. Applying a different texture makes the bar stand out
28. Combine wood and marble for exquisite results
29. Add unique details for exceptional and personal designs
If you think about it, most people have access to the same materials and ideas as you. The designs can be very different of course but if you really want to personalize your bar you'll have to infuse your own personality. Something that was invented and, even better, created by you.
30. Amazing combination of wood, marble, metal, and light
This design is in a league of its own. Can it get better than this? Maybe yours will. The designer has definitely put a lot of thought into it by choosing the right materials and proportions for each element. Analyze it and be inspired.
31. Crafty wooden bar embedded in the kitchen cabinet
32. Fill that unused corner with a cozy bar
33. No better way of storing the fancy wine collection
34. Ingenious drink storage solution
via heidipiron.com
35. An all-white classy design
36. Awesome pipe design for storing wine bottles
This is what we mean by one-of-a-kind ideas that can personalize your home bar and make it special. You might have to put a lot of thought into finding the right idea but your bar will be the only one fitted with it.
37. Fresh bar design idea for a great relaxed atmosphere
It's all about the atmosphere that you wish to create. After all, that's the part that the visitors feel, and experience the most. Not everybody will notice the details or the color matching match but everybody will remember the way it made them feel.
via petitepassport.com
38. A secret bar for the spy in you
39. Add epic juicy-unique details
Your basement bar can have small epic details incorporated, unique details that will grant it authenticity and memory.
40. Build a frame for increased notability
There are several aspects that make this example brilliant. First of all, there's a combination of materials. Not just the right types but the right kind. Perhaps using the same dark wood for the horizontal glass supports would have looked good as well but by adding a third texture, the material becomes so much more luminous and charming. Secondly, there's the way the bar was built, not in the middle of the wall but in a special area that marks its position and makes it more noticeable, important, and special. Thirdly, there's the lighting that makes the whole feel welcoming and inviting.
41. Add colored lights for great special effects
42. Little details, big design
43. Add a darts board to your bar
Sometimes a drink isn't enough and you ought to combine it with another activity like watching a football game or playing something. Add a little flavor to your room with a dedicated dartboard area for a better atmosphere.
The designs above are covering an extraordinary range of designs, from small tricks to immense bars, they ought to inspire the individual to pursue the things that they love, things that they really like, from a good beer and a darts game up to a sophisticated cocktails, art venues, and classical music.
How are you using your space? We would love to hear from you!
The best way to soundproof a room is to use soundproofing materials and techniques along with sound absorbers like acoustic foam, acoustic panels, wall hangings, and furniture. Here it’s important to note that using sound absorbent materials alone is not enough, as they can’t guarantee actual soundproofing.
Getting time alone with your thoughts is a luxury that most people fail to enjoy because of unwanted outdoor noise. To avoid such situations and make your home a safe space to relax and reenergize, consider soundproofing the rooms in your house.
Today's guide looks at some popular techniques for soundproofing a room to help you live comfortably. Most of these are DIY methods, and you won't need many resources.
Usually, people think that the best way to soundproof a room is to block sound waves, but an effective technique to cut out unwanted noise is to absorb sound. To absorb noise in your apartment, you can implement one or more of the following methods -
Sound-blocking blankets over the bedroom door and other entry points
For the best results, it's important to install the sound-absorbing materials directly in the path of the source to dampen noise. But for a detailed idea of how to soundproof a room from the inside, check out the following points:
When thinking about how to soundproof a room, the most important consideration for absorbing sound waves is location. The reason it's recommended to soundproof a room from the inside is that it's easy.
But you must determine whether you are trying to minimize sound coming from just one source, like a TV, or multiple locations. Once you identify the source, minimizing noise by diluting or muting it will be convenient.
2. Point Of Entry
Knowing the point of entry is essential to stop noise from entering the room in the first place. However, to block noise, you need to determine whether the incoming sound comes from adjacent rooms or through the existing walls. This is usually the case in shared apartments or condos having the same wall.
Note that when the incoming sound enters the room, sound reflection occurs at an angle similar to the point of entry. That's why to cut out sound transmission, people sometimes opt for soundproofing walls at the end of the footboard and the entire wall of the headboard.
When the angle of entry is a straight line, the sound waves will bounce between the headboard and footboard until they dissipate. Therefore, to absorb sound waves effectively, make sure to soundproof a room based on these 3 points.
How To Soundproof Different Parts Of A Room
For maximum sound reduction in your apartment, there's no need to opt for expensive construction work. I have listed some effective Do-It-Yourself techniques to help cut down on outside noise and enhance absorption (acoustics) within the room.
1. Commercial Acoustic Foam
While many people prefer using egg crate foam for sound absorption, it doesn't possess the required mass to do a good job. That's why I suggest using commercial acoustic foam, which looks similar but delivers better results to reduce noise pollution.
In a music recording studio, it's recommended to have a minimum foam thickness of 2 inches. So, anything less or similar to this should prove ideal for normal soundproofing.
Moreover, the pattern of the acoustic foam panels doesn't impact the effectiveness of acoustic treatment. You can shape the foam in multiple ways, such as egg crate, wavy, mushroom, wedges, and scored squares.
To choose the best soundproofing materials, you need to check the Noise Reduction Coefficient(NRC). It’s a scale between 0 and 1, with 1 being the best soundproofing. In some cases though, I’ve seen results showing higher than 1 for some materials.
This effectively says that the material absorbs more than 100% of the sound. However, these results are usually due to anomalies caused by sample size in the reverb chamber during the test (such as edge absorption).
Depending on the purpose, such as soundproofing a room for watching movies or noise control for gaming, you should know that regular carpeting or foam doesn't absorb frequencies below 250 Hz. For such instances, it would be better to opt for a bass trap for lowering bass sounds, or you can install 4-inch foam.
2. Soundproofing Techniques For Windows
When you want to block sound from filtering into a room, I suggest cutting airborne noise by treating the windows first. Thanks to easy and cost-effective solutions, you can create a tight seal around windows to restrict sound coming from outside.
Although there are several options to choose from, thick curtains and drapes are ideal for soundproofing a room. It becomes easier to absorb sound when you hang heavy curtains with noise-canceling properties or opt for a blackout curtain.
Most importantly, heavy curtains make it easier to trap energy and maintain a comfortable room temperature throughout the year. Some consumers further prefer weather-stripping and use adhesive plastic or rubber to form a tight seal around window borders.
The goal is to block gaps or holes, so air and sound do not get through. You can cut soundproof foam into the desired shape and thickness to fit it into the window frame.
3. Soundproofing Interior Doors
The easiest way to cut out the noise and absorb sound coming from adjacent rooms or outside is to install a soundproof door. But for more affordable solutions, there are several DIY methods you can try.
A. Hardwood Door Slab
You can fit the room with a slab door that's durable, thanks to the solid hardwood construction. There are also hollow units available on the market that are highly cost-effective, but they have poor noise reduction ability compared to hardwood, which is denser.
B. Door Sweep
Another popular method to soundproof wood doors is installing a door sweep made of plastic or rubber at the bottom of the door. This serves the dual purpose of reducing sound and providing insulation, or you can fit door jambs to dampen noise while improving energy efficiency.
C. Caulk
For stubborn sound, an extra layer of caulk around the door frame helps seal the crevasses and seams.
D. Door Seal
You can use weather-stripping to seal the edges around the door frame, so be careful to take accurate measurements and angle the edges where they meet the corners. Moreover, the seal won't cause obstructions when closing the door without compromising on the fit.
Check whether you can install the door hardware or trim further
Once you are satisfied, install the hardware
Check if the door opens and closes as usual
4. Soundproofing Floors
Are your downstairs neighbors complaining about a creaky floor or excessive noise? This might be because you have hardwood floors, so a simple technique would be to use commercial floor mats, underlayment, and liners to reduce impact noise.
Carpets and rugs also serve a similar purpose, but a better option is using natural rubber gym flooring, foam tiles, and mats. Such soundproofing methods are most common in home gyms and theaters, lowering disturbance for you and others.
Therefore, it proves convenient to dampen the low frequencies of a sound system or absorb vibration and noise coming from a treadmill. For enhanced soundproofing, you can even add a rug for the second layer of protection against impact noises.
The best part is that rugs and carpeting are budget options that don't require a lot of money or resources. All you need is to use them with a liner, for which soundproofing rug pads and carpet liners come in handy.
But for hard surfaces, installing an underlayment that matches the lamination, hardwood, or foam tiles would be best. However, installing them during a renovation or new construction work would be ideal.
5. Soundproofing Walls
One of the most important things to consider when blocking noise in a room is how to soundproof the existing wall. Compared to other soundproofing methods, absorbing noise through walls is more labor-intensive, especially when you have existing drywall.
But here are some easy methods you should know about -
A. Furniture
Make use of the existing furniture, such as a bookcase or large wardrobe, by pushing them against the wall after locating the source. Since sound absorption increases depending on the mass, using large furniture is ideal.
B. Sealant
A sealant proves useful for tackling minor noise problems, for which you can apply a water-based acoustic sealant to fill the gaps or cracks in walls. You must also use a product with a color similar to the wall to maintain the quality of the interior décor or choose a sealant that permits repainting.
C. Wallpaper
Most people may not be aware, but applying wallpaper is just as good as other soundproofing techniques. Several soundproofing wallpapers are available on the market made from sound-absorbent foam to minimize noise.
You can hang a decorative tapestry or rug on the walls like a thick blanket. This technique has been used since ancient times to soften impact noise, keep the interiors warm, and prevent echoes, it is a sure way to add sound absorption, soundproofing to a room cheaply, probably the only free way to soundproof a room.
E. Acoustic Panels
Acoustic panels and soundproofing go hand-in-hand, and they are easy to install, thanks to impaling clips or adhesives. But there are a few things you need to keep in mind before using wall panels -
Removing acoustic panels often requires repairing the wall
Adhesives can damage the drywall or paint, but the panels won't be affected
Impaling clips take longer to install but don't require much maintenance
I must mention that impaling clips are metal fasteners with a flat shape, accompanied by metal prongs to hold the foam and attach it to the wall. If needed, you can also apply foam to the screws sticking out of the walls.
Usually, using impaling clips means you must only patch holes in the walls. But prior to that, apply packing tape on the panels and walls to remove the foam before applying the adhesive again to the shiny surfaces.
Note that you may still face issues with noise pollution but using this installation technique will allow you to take down the panels hassle-free.
F. Insulation
One of the best ways to make a room soundproof is by adding insulation to the walls, which isn't as difficult as it may seem.
The first step is removing the drywall to expose the wall studs
You can then apply fiberglass insulation, cotton batt, or other material between the studs
When you don't want to remove the drywall and reinstall it, you can add another drywall or wall frame to block the noise. This will make the room smaller but will provide a quality solution.
Fix the wall frame to the studs
You can also add resilient channels or sound clips to the studs
Finally, apply a new layer of drywall over them.
For those who don't know, resilient channels are metal frames, providing greater control over sound absorption.
6. Soundproofing Ceilings
Learning how to soundproof a room would be incomplete if you don't know how to treat the ceiling to reduce sound. But fixing ceilings is easier, thanks to insulation clouds and acoustic ceiling tiles available in multiple designs and colors to enhance the interior décor.
A. Acoustic Tiles
A simple yet highly functional solution for reducing noise is installing thick acoustic panels over the existing ceiling.
B. Cloud
A ceiling cloud is best suited for tall rooms, whereby the acoustic lining or canopy cuts out the excess noise. Moreover, given the shape of the hanging structure, it has the appearance of a cloud.
Given the multiple benefits of ceiling clouds, you will find them installed in recording studios. So, if professionals prefer to use them, you certainly can. However, once again, these will only absorb the sound, and not block it entirely from traveling across the walls.
C. Soundproofing During Construction
Most people don't think about soundproofing until later, but it never hurts to be proactive. Soundproofing during the construction stage is easier and reduces the hassle of making frequent alterations -
Before installing the ceiling, attach soundproofing material over the studs
Apply sealant to the gaps for maximum noise absorption
Install new drywall or patch the existing wall to cover the ceiling
7. Reducing Noise Reflection
Sometimes, the noise level increases in the entire room when you play music because it reflects off hard flooring and other surfaces. When sound bounces inside the room you need an absorbent material for sound masking the floor by reducing reflection. The thumb rule to go by is that for each doubling of absorption, the ambient sound levels will reduce by about 3dB.
So, cover the walls and ceilings with a soft material to muffle the sounds of barks, voices, or noise from a vacuum cleaner. This is where a shag rug for ceilings and rubber textile mats for the walls helps keep decibel levels down inside a room.
Most Affordable Ways To Soundproof A Room
I have highlighted several ways how to soundproof a room, but here are some affordable solutions that you can consider.
1. Window Treatments And Curtains
Curtains provide privacy while blocking outside noise, for which thick drapery and hanging plush prove useful. Moreover, they further absorb ambient noise inside a room for greater comfort.
2. Area Rugs
Area rugs are especially useful in main living rooms and or when there is much noise in an apartment. You can also add a pad under thick rugs to mask the sound further without compromising the available space.
3. Upholstered Furniture
The more upholstered furniture you have, the higher the chances of a quiet room because there are more areas for sound absorption. I have seen that sound doesn't bounce much in such rooms, so make sure to add plush pillows and thick blankets.
4. Background Noise
Even though it may feel counterproductive, there is some logic to this madness. Background noises are highly effective and affordable in making a room soundproof.
If there's something else you can listen to, such as white noise or instrumental music, you can mute or drown out other annoying sounds.
A. Sound Masking
Many people have sound machines that can produce various background noises, like rain, sounds of nature, or white noise; this is known as masking. But this is a temporary fix since such machines don't eliminate the noise entirely.
B. Air Purifier
Air purifiers help remove impurities from the air and produce enough noise to drown out surrounding sounds. You will need a medium-sized unit for the best results so that noise from the other room doesn't filter in.
C. Fans
Box fans, ceiling fans, and modular fans increase airflow and add white noise inside the room to dampen other sounds. Plus, you won't have to choose an expensive or fancy unit since the primary purpose is to generate more background noise.
How To Soundproof A Room Conclusion
After reading my guide, you can choose multiple techniques to soundproof a room effectively.
But based on your living situation, everyone may not enjoy similar results. For instance, if you live in a rented apartment, it might be difficult to get permission for construction or changes to the interior makeup of the room.
You can still use fans or sound machines to cut out unwanted noise. However, if you want a more permanent solution, ask the building contractor to add insulation to the walls before installing the drywall.
So, take your pick and make your home sound free with any of these easy methods!
Tip
When soundproofing a room, don’t forget to install air vents since they guarantee comfort and safety when working for extended periods. To make room for ductwork, you will need to measure a 6-inch hole in the wall for quiet ventilation.
To wallpaper around windows, start by measuring the wall and cutting the wallpaper to fit, allowing extra for trimming. Clean and prime the wall, and mark guidelines with a plumb line. Apply the wallpaper, smooth it out, and let it overlap with the window’s edges. Make diagonal cuts at the corners and adhere the flaps to the window's sides, trimming any excess with a sharp knife. Use high-quality adhesive and be precise with placement to ensure a seamless look. Remove any residual adhesive immediately.
Wallpaper, a decorative material sold in rolls, is used to adorn the interior walls of various buildings and is adhered with wallpaper paste. It can serve as plain lining paper to prime walls for painting or to mask imperfections, offering a refined surface. Wallpaper may be textured, like Anaglypta, bear regular repeating patterns, or, more rarely, portray a unique design spanned across multiple sheets. The smallest tiling rectangle to complete the pattern is termed the pattern repeat. However, the application can become intricate around windows due to the presence of sills, overhangs, and reveals, requiring precision and care to ensure a seamless finish.
What is a Window Sill?
A window sill is the horizontal base of a window frame, integral to the window structure, projecting outward from the wall at the bottom of the window, often serving to hold objects and protect the building fabric from water penetration, thereby playing a crucial role in water management and structural integrity.
What is a Window Overhang?
A window overhang, an architectural element found inside or outside a window, serves dual purposes. Externally, it shields and diverts rain, protecting the structure. Internally, it blends utility and aesthetics, concealing fixtures or hosting lights, adding an artistic flair to functionality.
What is a Window Reveal?
A window reveal is a structural element, it's the side of the window aperture, a surface between the outer wall surface and the window frame, highlighting the thickness of the wall. It plays a crucial role in the aesthetic finish of the window, providing depth and shadow, and enhancing architectural detailing, and it often interacts with light to create varying visual effects, subtly merging functionality and visual appeal.
How to Hang Wallpaper Around Windows
Recessed Window
1. Position the wallpaper length above the window, allowing an overhang into the window recess. Affix and smooth it several inches above the window recess top.
2. Execute a horizontal cut above the window reveal's edge.
3. Make a corresponding cut below the window sill, folding the paper to conceal the reveal’s side.
4. Use a smoothing tool or brush to adhere and smooth the paper onto the reveal.
5. Utilize a utility knife and a guide to eliminate excess paper.
6. Measure, cut, and attach the subsequent wallpaper piece to address the overhang and above wall. Install another strip for the wall below the window.
7. On the window's opposite side, adapt the wallpaper around the other reveal, replicating procedures in steps 1-5.
8. For the unpapered upper corners of the window overhang, measure, cut, and align an 'off cut' piece with an extra 20mm at each end, ensuring pattern continuity.
9. Secure and streamline the paper above the window recess, overlapping existing paper, and ensuring pattern alignment. Execute a double cut, remove the underlying layer, fix the new strip, and fold it onto the overhang, trimming the excess.
10. Repeat for any other areas of overhang needing wallpaper, ensuring precise application and trimming around the window areas.
Wallpapering Around a Flush Window
Wallpapering around a flush window is notably a less complex procedure. This guide will walk you through the streamlined process:
1. Position your wallpaper strategically above the window, smoothing and securing it to the wall, ceasing just above the window frame.
2. Remove the majority of the surplus paper in front of the window, retaining 1-2 inches of wallpaper protruding over the frames at the top, bottom, and side of the window.
3. Align the wallpaper onto the frame and employ your finger to discern the outer corner of the frame.
4. Implement a 45° angled cut into this corner, facilitating the accommodation of the paper around the external edges of the frame.
5. Affix the paper firmly to the wall, nesting it where the frame and wall converge, using a smoothing brush or a plastic smoother.
6. Trim the peripheral wallpaper around the frame utilizing a wallpaper edge trimmer and a utility knife or alternatively, score the wallpaper in the intersection of the frame and wall with scissors, peel back, and discard the excess.
7. Adjust the edges of the wallpaper back into their designated positions.
8. Progress on all sides until the wallpaper application around the window is impeccably accomplished.
Types of Wallpaper
Vinyl wallpapers, known for durability, are a top pick for kitchens and bathrooms, including variants like enduring solid vinyl and appealing vinyl-coated. Non-woven wallpapers are acclaimed for breathability and eco-friendliness, ideal for living areas and bedrooms due to their mold resistance and easy removal. Textile wallpapers imbue luxury with their fabric finish in low-traffic, dry areas, and traditional paper wallpapers, diverse and affordable, excel in environments with minimal moisture.
Diversity in wallpaper types extends to flocked wallpapers, offering velvety elegance; foil wallpapers, reflecting modern metallic brilliance; and bamboo wallpapers, infusing spaces with natural, sustainable charm. To further broaden the selection, there are also grasscloth wallpapers for those seeking a textured, organic appeal, and mural wallpapers that turn walls into visual narratives, each contributing to the expansive and varied world of wallpaper types, catering to a myriad of aesthetic and functional preferences.
Concluding, the variety in wallpaper types is extensive, each offering a unique blend of aesthetic and functional benefits, whether it’s for a bathroom, kitchen, or a cozy living room. So, what type of unique wallpaper are you considering? Whether your windows are recessed or flush, which wallpaper will you choose to breathe new life into your spaces today? We’d love to hear about your selections and experiences!
For those who are working professionally with tools or on a smaller scale as a home project, the rotary tool has now become a staple.
With all the attachments that a rotary tool offers, no wonder they are favored as a multi-purpose tool. The compact machines pack a punch to overcome any challenge you may come across while working on a project.
A well-known and respected brand for its rotary tools, Dremel offers two unique models of their Dremel rotary tool-the 4300 and 4000. Taking these model names at face value, it seems that one is just an upgraded version of the other.
However, while both models have their similarities, there are also unique features to each that merit a closer look. These differences can make or break the choice between the 4300 and 4000, so which is the right option for you? Find out!
A rotary tool with a 1.8-amp motor that can move at speeds of 5,000-35,000 rpm, the 4300 is powerful and versatile. The kit is bundled with a number of attachments for the 3-jaw chuck attached to the Dremel.
Using a 3-jaw chuck design has allowed the 4300 to have attachments without the need to use a collet. It is a new version of the previous collet lock designs, maintaining durability and ease in switching between attachments for the Dremel.
Utilizing a 360-degree ergonomic design is a staple of the Dremel brand, and the 4300 is not lacking in this department. With an all-around comfortable grip, it places the controls at your fingertips in a comfortable spot.
Now, when it comes to the kits available for this model, there are currently two in the market: the 9/64 and the 5/40. This means one kit has nine attachments with 64 accessories or five attachments with 40 accessories.
The number of attachments and accessories in a kit may not always equate to a superior kit. So, it is essential to know what these attachments and accessories are and whether they would be helpful in your projects.
Some useful accessories that the 4300 comes with are listed below.
Shield Attachment
This attachment protects you from any debris that may be thrown by the rotary drill. It is a great safety feature to have when working with dangerous materials that can cause harm.
High-Speed Cutter
A standard accessory when it comes to rotary drills - the high-speed cutter is a circular cutting wheel that can break down materials with minimal overheating. Additionally, the 4300 comes with cut-off wheels, a multi-purpose spiral cutting bit, and a lock-wood cutting wheel.
Cleaning Brush
An underrated accessory to have, a cleaning brush is helpful in cleaning the material being worked on. Be it rust removal or just a polishing finish; the cleaning brush accessories can bring a higher quality finish to your projects.
Sanding/Grinding Bit with Guide
Another common accessory, the sanding, and grinding bits make wearing away material a more accessible experience with a handheld machine like the rotary drill.
These bits are available in a range of various sizes to provide precision or a larger working area where it is needed. The range of bits included goes from ½” 60-grit sandpaper to a ⅜” aluminum oxide grinding stone.
Additionally, Dremel has included a guide that will enhance the precision you have while sanding or grinding. Utilizing this with the speed-control of the 4300 and any material you have will be easy to mold and wear away.
Flexible Shaft and Detailer’s Grip
The 4300 has excellent flexibility right off the bat to work at different angles. To extend this flexibility even further, the shaft can be extended to reach tighter areas for detailed work.
On the topic of detailing, the detailer’s grip will ease the comfort and stability when using the 4300 to have a steady hand. This is essential for the precise work required when detailing a piece.
Tool Sharpener
Having the ability to touch up the included bits in the kit is a helpful touch. By sharpening the bits, you can extend their lifespan and save money by replacing them when they get dull. What’s more, there is a specific sharpener accessory to touch up your gardening tools.
Pivot Light
Arguably the standout feature of the 4300, the included pivot light is a newer addition to rotary drills from Dremel. This light can illuminate darker areas to increase precision and navigate the drill better.
Additionally, the light can rotate around the drill, so it never obstructs your view in tight spaces. It is built into the drill itself, so there is no need to attach or remove it; it is always ready to go.
Drawbacks of the 4300
While the Dremel 4300 has many great features, it is not without its share of drawbacks. They may be few, but they are still worth noting to ensure a more informed decision can be made on which model to pick up.
One issue with the 4300 that some may have is the storage case provided for the drill and attachments. If compact storage space is a requisite for you, then this model may disappoint.
With a hard storage case, it does feel large when carrying around. This may not be a deal-breaker for many, but it can become a hassle to lug the bulky case around for those who need to move the drill regularly. However, it does offer the benefit of protection and more space to keep the bits and drill organized.
Another aspect that may deter some from the 4300 is the price point it comes at. It is definitely an investment, similar to any tool purchase. While the price may be steep for some, the value that it brings in performance is worth the expense.
The Dremel 4000 is admittedly an older model of the 4300, yet it still holds up in many ways to its newer counterpart.
It has many features that laid the foundation for the development of the 4300, such as the 5,000-35,000 variable speed RPM. On the other hand, some features are a slight step down from the 4300, for example, the 1.6 amps of power.
Furthermore, the attachment set-up on the 4000 model is an older collet lock system. This collet lock is more than adequate and ensures the attached bits are locked into the drill securely. An EZ twist nose cap with this collet lock makes removing and attaching bits and accessories easier to access.
Sporting an older system of attachment, the 4000 model offers a wider variety of bits and accessories. It comes with the standard attachments in the included kit, such as a right-angle attachment, shield guard, dust blower, and more.
If there is a particular bit or attachment you need for a specific project or material you are working with, a number of different kits are available. A specialized kit for cutting may not have the same bits as the carving and engraving kit.
These specialized kits may not have many attachments and bits. However, they have been curated by Dremel to provide all the necessary accessories you may need for a specific project or job.
Four kits are available for the Dremel 4000, with a varying number of attachments and specific catering to specific tasks for the rotary drill-a 2/30 kit, 3/34, 4/34, and a 6/50 kit are available. The first number being the number of attachments, and the second being how many accessories are included.
There is a customized kit with the attachments you need to get the job done no matter the job. Otherwise, the all-purpose kit has a range of bits to cater to any general task you may have for the rotary drill.
An ergonomic handle gives the 4000 rotary drills a comfortable fit in the hand even when used extensively or at various angles. The button layout has been made to keep the power and speed control separate. As a result, the adjustment of the drill’s speed can be made precisely and with little to no thought.
Another great feature is the ability to replace the motor brushes. By replacing the worn-out brush in the drill with a new one, the life of the 4000 rotary drills can be extended for many years.
Drawbacks of the 4000
As the Dremel 4000 is an older model than the 4300, there are bound to be a number of drawbacks that were improved upon in the newer model.
One such drawback is the collet lock attachment system. While it is able to accommodate a wide variety of bits and attachments, the collet lock is of a fixed size. This indicates that smaller or larger bits may not be able to be securely attached.
In order to fit bits of a different size than the collet lock, the entire lock must be removed and replaced with an adequately sized collet lock for the attachment. The whole process can be a hassle, especially when working with a number of differently-sized bits in succession.
Another area that the 4000 model suffers in is the air circulation within the drill. When used for an extended period, there is a considerable heat spike. The temperature is not so high as to be uncomfortable when holding the drill, but it is significant enough to be worrisome.
Of course, this rise in temperature occurs only if the drill is left running under strain for a more extended amount of time. For light users of the 4000 rotary drill, they should face no issues with overheating.
Comparing Dremel 4300 Vs 4000
Looking at both these rotary drills side by side, they share many similarities. Dremel has kept features that worked well in the 4000 model in their newer 4300 model. Similarly, there are some features that were improved upon or entirely new added to the 4300.
Build
The saying “Don’t fix it if it isn’t broken” is very relevant in the case of the Dremel rotary drills. Both the 4000 and the 4300 have the same ergonomic design for a secure grip no matter how you hold the drill.
Admittedly, the 4300 has a slightly thinner build than the 4000, but it is not a drastic change in design. This design choice makes the 4300 more comfortable to hold for extended periods of time.
Attachment System
An area where there is a drastic overhaul of the 4000 design in the 4300 is the attachment system design. With the traditional system of a collet lock, the 4000 was prone to regular dismantling to accommodate larger or smaller bits and accessories in the drill.
What’s more, it became necessary to purchase a separate differently sized collet lock just to use some attachment. The extra expense, along with the specialized accessories, can be a hassle just for a unique task or job.
Of course, switching out a collet lock for another size is not a regular occurrence but rather for specific tasks. Attaching and removing bits is made easy with the EZ twist nose cap system, giving fast transitions between different attachments while keeping them securely fixed.
Comparatively, the new three-jaw chuck design in the 4300 improved the collet lock system by removing the need for additional tools to change the attachments. There is no need to buy different-sized collets just to attach a specific bit to the drill with the 4300.
The three-jaw chuck design saves on not only money but also time and energy spent attaching certain bits. This can be especially useful for projects requiring different bits and accessories.
Furthermore, the strength and security that the three-jaw chuck design brings in securing attachments is on par with that of the collet lock system; easily a notable upgrade from the 4000.
Diversity of Attachments
Moving from the attachment systems to the attachments themselves, there are differences in the kits available for each model. As the attachment systems were overhauled in the 4300, the bits had to be reconfigured to accommodate the three-jaw chuck design.
Not only is the attachment design different, but the number of attachments in the kits has changed. In the 4000 model, the largest kit available is the 6/50 kit with 50 accessories and six attachments.
Comparing this to the 4300’s largest kit available, the 9/64 kit with 64 accessories and nine attachments. When it comes to Dremel rotary drills, the more available attachments, the more versatile your drill will be.
Of course, this is just an illustration as not everyone will be using every single attachment; you should get a kit that caters to the purpose you need the drill for. Any extra accessories included in the kit will become a safety net should you need them in future projects.
Power
Looking at the power of both models, there is not much of a difference on paper. The 4000 comes in at 1.6 amps, while the 4300 sports 1.8 amps. Despite the difference in power output, both models are capable of variable speeds from 5,000 to 35,000 rpm.
This incremental difference may not seem like much, but there is a noticeable difference in performance when each is pushed to its limit.
With a higher power output, the 4300 can operate at higher speeds for heavy-duty jobs for an extended amount of time. As opposed to the 4000 model, which is prone to overheat when used extensively for more extended amounts of time.
Due to the complex nature of the many jobs a rotary drill is used for, this slight difference in power between the 4300 and 4000 can make all the difference in getting a quality result.
Noise Level
A small difference that may be inconsequential to some is the noise level at which both models operate. If noise is a factor that you need to consider when deciding on a model, the 4300 is the better option.
The older 4000 operates with average noise levels for a rotary drill, but the airflow is not as ideal as the 4300. This causes the drill to make more noise compared to the 4300, which is quieter and runs cooler.
LED Swivel Light
Perhaps the most significant difference between both models is the built-in LED light in the 4300. This is a newer addition to the Dremel rotary drill design and brings an added level of efficiency when using the rotary drill.
By illuminating dark areas, the LED light can help guide the drill through tight spaces. Furthermore, it is battery-powered, so even if the drill becomes unplugged, the light will still function.
As it is built into the drill, the LED light can pivot around the tip to change the angle of the light on the piece being worked on. This is especially useful for close-up detailing work where the shadow of the rotary drill can obstruct the view.
The rotation of the built-in light is a feature that is lacking in the 4000 model. While not a deal-breaker, it is still a helpful feature to have and is a standout feature for the 4300.
Value
Pricing of each model is where the differences between features are made evident of whether it is worth it or not. The 4300, being a newer model, is priced higher than the older 4000; however, it does not require additional purchases of different collets to attach various sizes of accessories and bits.
Depending on what task the rotary drill is being used for, the actual value for money varies. If all the features are utilized extensively, then the investment can be worth the money. However, it is not necessary to splurge if you are not going to use the unique features offered by the 4300.
Choosing the Right Model for You
When choosing between the 4300 and 4000 models, there is little that sets them apart from each other. They both sport a six-foot cord and a comfortable ergonomic handle. Furthermore, the rotation speed is the same in both models.
To ensure the most informed decision can be made, different aspects of where each rotary drill model shines or falls short must be considered. Other aspects such as price and convenience are a consideration to be taken into account.
Unique Features
Having certain features in your rotary drill can change the entire experience you have working with it. If these features are what you need to elevate the quality of work or just to ease convenience, then the newer 4300 model is the clear winner.
It has an in-built pivot LED light that can help to guide your bit while working in dark areas. Not only useful for dark spots, but it is also a helpful feature to have to keep a clear view of what you are working on. Better visibility increases the performance capability.
Additionally, the newer three-chuck attachment system is an upgrade from the 4000’s collet lock system. It saves time and energy when using multiple bits by removing the need to constantly change collets to fit different-sized bits.
Power
For those who require more power from their rotary drill, the 4300 is the ideal choice. Having a 1.8 amp power output, this is only slightly higher than the 4000’s 1.6 amp power output.
Both rotary drills work at a speed of 5,000 to 35,000 rpm, so the performance of either model is dependent upon the power source. The slightly higher power output in the 4300 allows it to work at the maximum rpm for an extended period of time with no heating issues.
As the 4000 model has a slightly weaker power output than the 4300, it struggles when performing high-speed jobs consistently. This draw on power causes the drill to heat up considerably.
From this, it is evident just how far a little extra power goes in the performance of the drill. This extra power can go a long way when working with heavy-duty materials or for longer work sessions.
Attachments
Due to the multi-purpose nature of the rotary drill, any specialized tasks can be performed by the same tool, just with a different tip. The variety and number of attachments available can determine the range of tasks the drill is capable of.
On one hand, the new three-chuck attachment system in the 4300 allows for a faster transition between attachments with no extra tools necessary. On the other hand, there are currently only two kits available. However, the largest kit has a wide range of accessories included, more so than the largest 4000 kits available.
As it is an older model, the 4000 uses the old collet lock attachment system, requiring additional purchases of different-sized collets to accommodate specific specialized attachments. However, with this older system, you do get a wider variety of bits and accessories to choose from. Although, the time and energy that is needed to switch between attachments are considerably more significant in the 4000 model.
Comfort and Convenience
Using a rotary drill for extended periods of time can be a strain on your hand. The build of both the 4300 and 4000 models is almost identical, save for a slightly slimmer body in the 4300. This can be less strain on yourself when working on a big project; however, this difference in size is not immediately apparent.
Additionally, the attachments to aid in comfort and convenience, such as the detailer’s grip or the flex shaft, must be considered. These can negate any minor differences in the size of the actual rotary drill. The comfort of using the drill with either of these attachments can change the experience completely.
Pricing
The price tag of tools can be on the expensive side, so every purchase becomes an investment. As an investment, the value for money is a crucial aspect to be taken into consideration, especially for those on a budget.
Between the 4300 and the 4000, the 4300 is the more steeply-priced option of the two. Of course, this does not make the 4000 model inferior in any way. It is just a matter of whether or not you consider the added features of the 4300 worth the extra bit of cash or not.
Safety Attachments
Included in the rotary drill kit is a basic set of safety attachments to protect you and the drill from injury. However, when working with certain materials, you may need to purchase additional attachments explicitly made for that material.
It is important to take the necessary precautions to protect yourself from potential harm. Look into what safety attachments are available for a rotary drill model, and if it is suitable for the materials you are working with.
Which attachment kit should you buy?
Every rotary drill will have a general-purpose kit with a range of bits and accessories for every job you may need the tool for. As these are just the basic attachments, they are sufficient for the general public to use with no problems.
However, if you are working with a specific material or require a certain set of bits for a particular job, Dremel offers specialized kits. They are made with a particular task in mind. Be it cutting, sanding, engraving, or cleaning; there is a kit for every possible use of a rotary drill.
They include more detailed tools you would need to get the job done. It is a simple matter of finding the kit that relates to your specific task and attaching the bits to the drill.
Can the Dremel cut through metal, glass, and ceramic?
To answer this question briefly, yes, it is able to cut through these materials as both models have a motor capable of handling the strain.
However, special bits must be used in order to cut through glass and ceramic. Additionally, safety attachments must be used when working with glass and ceramic as they can cause injury or damage to the drill.
How do you use the collet lock to change attachments?
The standard collet lock mechanism can accommodate ⅛” shanks but sometimes falls short or is too large for certain bits and accessories. To remove the bit from the collet, simply twist the EZ nose and pull the bit free.
To replace the entire collet for holding a different sized attachment, press the button on the front of the rotary drill to release the EZ nose. Then, use a wrench to remove the entire collet and replace it with the appropriately sized collet and screw the nose back on.
Dremel 4300 Vs 4000 Conclusion - The Winner
After considering all the features that make each rotary drill model unique, what would be the best choice to get the most value for money?
Between the 4300 and the 4000 model from Dremel, the safe choice would be to go for the 4300 model. Although it has a higher price point, the unique features that it offers make up for the price tag.
That’s not all; the convenience of having the pivot light illuminate the surface, as well as the extra power, is what sets it apart from the 4000.
On the other hand, if a simple rotary drill with light use is what you require, or if you are on a budget, then the 4000 model is still a great option. It offers a more extensive selection of specialized accessories as it uses the older collet lock attachment system.
Both models do what they were designed to do. So, purchasing either will undoubtedly be a great decision to add to your workshop’s collection of tools.
After extensive testing, my top pick is the Frigidaire Window-Mounted Room Air Conditioner because of its ability to cool a 300 square feet room quickly and efficiently. Even the Midea AC and SereneLife AC are reliable options for cooling small to medium-sized spaces.
The perfect air conditioner is energy efficient, operates quietly, has a high cooling capacity, and is affordably priced.
But do all air conditioners on the market fit this description? Certainly not! And finding energy efficiency 8000 BTU (British Thermal Units) air conditioners among the zillions of AC units is tricky.
To save you from investing in the wrong AC unit, I bring to you the 14 tried-and-tested 8000 BTU ACs. Dive in!
Having been in the industry for more than a century, Frigidaire is known for pumping out premium-quality home electronic products. And its window-mounted room air conditioner is no exception.
On this window air conditioner, you can adjust the fan speed to 3 different settings to cool the room quickly and efficiently. In addition to that is the programmable timer integrated into the air conditioning unit that allows homeowners to turn it on or off in half-hour intervals for energy savings.
What’s more, this window AC unit maintains the preset temperature in every cycle, so you can rest assured that your space will remain comfortable. And if you like catnapping in the afternoon or catching forty winks during the evening, its “sleep” mode will help you sleep better. When set to “sleep” mode, the temperature slowly increases, allowing you to stay cool, no matter how hot it is outside.
Like modern window AC units, this air conditioner, which doubles as a dehumidifier, is energy star-certified, meaning it will save on energy costs.
As for adjusting the temperature, this 8000 BTU (British Thermal Unit) window air conditioner comes with a remote control, so you can increase or decrease the air temperature with ease. Using the remote, you can also adjust the fan speed from your comfort zone without having to get up.
Besides, its adjustable side panels are extendable, meaning this efficient unit can be installed on all types of windows. Another thing that I like about this AC unit is that the filter is easy to clean, meaning you can wash it to clean dust from it.
Floor Area: 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 55 dB
Supplied in multiple options, the Midea EasyCool Window Air Conditioner claims to reduce energy consumption, and its energy star status testifies to the same.
Unlike most window air conditioners, it comes with multiple custom settings that make it more energy efficient. Like, I found that this AC unit has an in-built EasyTimer that allows me to program my temperature preferences. And if someday I run the unit for long hours, I simply switch to EcoSave mode– as a result, the room is cooled without consuming too much electricity.
Compared to traditional air conditioners, this unit doubles as a dehumidifier, and that’s what makes it an excellent option for humid spaces. To reduce humidity levels in any space, all I do is switch to dehumidifier mode, and it sucks up moisture from the indoor air.
Unlike the Frigidaire air conditioner, the Midea unit has an intuitive LED display for switching between modes, adjusting temperatures and setting the time. But I like using the remote control that comes with the unit because of its convenience.
Like most newer window air conditioners, the air filter of this unit is removable and reusable. So, whenever the “clean filter” warning is displayed, you can remove it and get rid of pet hairs and dust by washing it.
I found that this AC isn’t easy to install; only people who are DIY experts will be able to mount it with ease. Installation instructions may appear simple, but they aren’t easy to follow. Although the brand sends all accessories with the unit, the screwdriver isn’t supplied.
Floor Area: 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 110 Volts | Noise Level: 55 dB
For someone who has to keep changing his lodging, portable AC units like the SereneLife Portable Air Conditioner make for an excellent pick.
With 900W-rated cooling power, this portable AC unit is efficient enough to cool 215+ square feet of space– that is why I prefer using it in my office space. Although it isn’t as energy efficient as window units, it has a 9.8 seasonal energy efficiency ratio, which is feasible.
Like window ACs, it comes with 3 operating modes– cooling, dehumidifier, and fan. For maximum air circulation, it also features an automatic swing mode with a moving wind vent. At times when my office space becomes humid, I switch to dehumidifier mode, which helps reduce excessive humidity from the room.
Despite being a floor-standing AC, it boasts a space-saving design, thanks to its sleek and lightweight body. Equipped with rolling wheels, it allows for easy portability and allows me to move this unit from the garage space to the living room with ease.
Towards the top of the unit is a digital control panel with touch buttons for turning the unit on/off, setting the timer, and adjusting fan speed settings and temperature. For user convenience, remote control is supplied in the package, and you can adjust all the functions with the touch of a button.
Since it’s a freestanding unit, installation won’t be much of a hassle– be sure to check the instruction manual after unboxing the unit. Although you can use it in your bedroom while sleeping, keep in mind it is noisier than most other units.
Floor Area: 215+ square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 120 Volts | Noise Level: 55 dB
The next entrant on my list is this window-mounted air conditioner from LG. This multinational South Korean electronics company has managed to earn loyal customers because of top-notch products.
Starting with its simple yet innovative design, this air conditioning unit boasts a modern profile with air louvers placed towards the top. Besides that is a simple control panel that allows easy adjustment of the temperature and fan speed.
Underneath the control panel and air louvers is the air filter that traps dust and pet hairs to keep your indoor air clean and fresh. Once in a while, I take it off and wash it because it is reusable, so you can also do the same.
This LG window air conditioner comes with an installation kit and easy-to-follow instructions, so installation won’t be challenging.
This Energy Star-certified air conditioning unit has 3 cooling and fan speeds, so you can customize the cooling experience. In addition, it has a 12.1 combined energy efficiency ratio, meaning you’ll save a lot despite running this unit.
Among the various features, I like the 24-hour on/off timer that allows me to turn it on and off the AC as per my needs. And when in low mode, I noticed that the air conditioning unit barely made any noise. Another interesting feature is the Auto Restart which automatically turns the unit on after it has been shut because of a power outage.
Like other window air conditioners, it comes with a remote control that makes it easy to adjust the settings without leaving your couch or bed.
Floor Area: 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 53 dB
Unit cannot be fully controlled by the front panel buttons
Delivering unique and innovative products since 1991, Tosot is yet another brand that excels in air conditioners.
What made me pick the Tosot window air conditioner was its quiet operation, as it has a maximum noise output of 42 dB and an improved drainage outlet. Although you may hear slight noises of fan flinging water, you can minimize that by removing the improved drain plug.
Mounting this window air conditioner is fairly easy because everything from side panels and foam is included in the package. Also, no technical jargon is used in the instructions; in fact, they are written in simple language.
Right after installation, when I turned the AC on, the room was filled with cold air within a few minutes. So, it’s safe to say that this window air conditioner is highly efficient and can be used in bedrooms, apartments, dorms, and living rooms that are approximately 350 square feet.
Above the air filter sits slanted air louvers that can be adjusted to blow cool air up to 20 feet. I prefer keeping the louvers above the head to cool a room quickly.
This quietest air conditioner is also energy efficient as it has an energy efficiency ratio (EER) of 12.0 and is Energy Star-certified.
As a bonus, this window air conditioner comes with a few bonus features that you won’t find in other ACs. Like, the filter reminder will remind you to clean the filter after operating for 250 hours. Just keep the remote safe because the unit can only be fully controlled with the remote control.
Floor Area: 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 42 dB
Designed with the latest technology, TCL aims to deliver meaningful experiences. And its Home Series Window Air Conditioner is one such offering from the brand that helps you stay cool no matter the weather.
Although it is an 8000 BTU window air conditioner, it has robust cooling power. Sure, it may not be an ideal pick for cooling larger rooms, but it cools a 350 square feet space quickly and efficiently. Even then, to my surprise, the unit is comfortably quiet, so you can sleep, read or binge-watch your favorite shows without disturbance.
With 3 fans, this window air conditioner features 4-way directional vents to adjust the direction of airflow as per your needs. The air conditioning engineers have thoughtfully designed the unit, as its 4-way directional vents have an 8-way cooling fan.
In the package, you will find an easy-to-use installation kit that will come in handy for installing the unit. Following the steps mentioned in the instruction manual will ease the installation process, and you will be able to DIY install it. So, I highly recommend you go through them thoroughly before installing the unit. Since it runs on the power cord, install it on a window with a power cord nearby.
Belonging to the line of energy-efficient ACs, this window air conditioner also consumes less energy, reducing electricity bills. The Energy Star rating testifies to its energy efficiency.
Furthermore, you can switch to “eco” mode and “sleep” mode to save energy while running the AC. What I didn’t like about this AC is that it doesn’t come with a remote control.
Floor Area: 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 42 dB
Equipped with R-32 refrigerant, the Koldfront Window Air Conditioner is one of those units that can cut down energy costs to a great extent compared to those with R-22. As for reducing energy consumption, this unit has a SEER of 12, so it consumes 10% less energy than a 10 SEER unit. Its claims of energy efficiency are testified by the Energy Star certification it has earned.
This 8000 BTU window air conditioner has a temperature range between 62°F and 86°F, which makes it ideal for spaces up to 350 square feet. I like the fact that the air filter of this unit is easy to maintain– you need not call a professional to clean it. Simply take it off, wash it, and reinstall it on the unit, and that’s it!
What makes it the best 8000 BTU air conditioner is that it’s equipped with an LED filter that blinks whenever the filter gets dirty.
Next to the air filter is a digital display with touch controls that makes adjusting the temperature and other settings easily. And for those moments when I don’t want to leave my comfort zone, I use the remote control to change the settings from energy saver mode to sleep mode.
Much like other energy-efficient units, this window air conditioner is integrated with 3 fan settings for convenience. Furthermore, its 4-way directional air louvers ensure even distribution of air, so no corner of your room will have hot air.
With a dimension of 13.3H x 18.5W x 15.75D, this window air conditioner fits higher than 14”.
Floor Area: 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: Not measured
Filter must be cleaned every 30 days to maintain efficiency
Rated as the number 1 window air conditioner brand in the US, GE is committed to offering the best solutions to homeowners, and its window-mounted air conditioner proves the same.
Before anything else, I would like to mention that this is an energy-efficient unit, meaning it offers comfort without racking up utility bills. Like most air conditioner units, it is Energy Star-certified, so there will be more energy savings and low electricity bills.
With this AC, you can save more on energy bills if you switch to “eco” mode. On “eco” mode, the unit automatically turns off the compressor and fan, which cuts down energy consumption.
From the get-go, what I liked about this unit is that it can be integrated with the SmartHQ app, through which this AC can be controlled. For instance, you can turn the unit on/off, adjust the temperature or keep tabs on its operation from anywhere in your home or the world.
Moreover, this energy-efficient unit has 3 fan speeds and 3 cooling modes to customize the cooling experience, so you can stay comfortable.
Coming with a fixed chassis, this air conditioner is easy to install, more so since it comes with an installation kit. Similar to other air conditioners, the filter is washable– for maximum efficiency, I suggest cleaning them every 30 days.
Beneath the 2 air louvers sits a control panel from which speed, mode, and temperature can be adjusted. But that’s not the only way to adjust the settings of this air conditioner. You can use the remote control or smart assistants to make adjustments.
Floor Area: 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 58 dB
Filters dust and other particles from the indoor air
What We Don't Like
Low SEER
If you are scouting for air conditioners for your workshop or a prefab guest house, the BLACK+DECKER Air Conditioner would be a sensible pick. That’s because its 8000 BTU cooling capacity cools rooms up to 350 square feet well.
Integrated with 4 settings– auto, low, medium, and high, this air conditioner provides relief from the scorching heat, no matter the weather outside. Furthermore, its programmable thermostat adjusts the temperature automatically based on the settings you feed into the unit– that’s what adds to its versatility.
On the fore part of the unit is a digital display that features all the settings from “check filter” to “energy saver” mode, so you can adjust them with ease. Or you can simply use the remote control to change the settings from time to time without getting up.
Upon reading the product manual, I discovered that the air filter is made of nylon– which means you can detach it and wash it to circulate air (fresh and clean air).
When needed, this air conditioner can reduce moisture from space by changing the mode to dehumidifier mode. Ideal forsmall to medium-sized rooms, this air conditioner weighs less than 50 lbs, so mounting it will be easy.
As is expected, this unit is Energy Star-certified, like most air conditioners, so it will definitely help you save a few dollars on utility bills. Although it is integrated with R-32 refrigerant, it has a SEER of 5.2, which is very low. And that is why I suggest this for spaces where it won’t be used for too long.
Floor Area: 300 to 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 59 dB
For small spaces, the TURBRO Greenland Portable Air Conditioner will be the best bet because of its cooling capacity. This 8000 BTU air conditioner may appear simple, but it offers robust cooling and cools a 300 square feet room within a few minutes, thanks to the turbo mode.
Unlike other portable air conditioners, it’s not just an AC; rather, it’s a multifunctional unit because it doubles as a fan and a dehumidifier. Whenever I have to remove moisture from my space, I simply switch to the dehumidifier mode. Meanwhile, the 2-speed fan mode generates a draft of fresh air.
As you’d expect with portable AC units, this one comes with 4 in-built wheels for easy movability. Therefore, moving it from the dining room to the bedroom wasn’t too much of a chore.
With this portable air conditioner, you won’t have to break a sweat to install it because it’s easy to set up. Just make sure to place the unit upright for a minimum of 4 hours before powering it on.
What’s more, this portable AC unit has a control panel, but even then, the brand supplies a remote control. Noteworthily, its remote control is integrated with a temperature sensor to detect the temperature of the corner where you’re sitting; hence, it cools the room accordingly.
Although it isn’t Energy Star-rated, its programmable timer function turns the unit on/off automatically as per your schedule, saving money on energy bills. Compared to other portable air conditioners, it features dual drainage methods, allowing bucketless operation. Besides the washable filter, it is integrated with the “auto restart” function.
Floor Area: 300 square feet | Number of Speeds: 2 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 52 dB
Want to beat the heat by keeping your space cool but dread energy bills? The Dreo Inverter Air Conditioner will cool your space with its low-power operation, so you won’t have to spend hundreds on utility bills.
This Energy Star-certified air conditioner has a 15.0 SEER rating, meaning it will save 35% on your energy bills compared to conventional compressors. Therefore, you can stay cool without worrying about electricity bills.
When it comes to cooling an office or other space of 350 square feet, this variable-speed air conditioner works well and cools it efficiently. Over and above that, it’s equipped with directional louvers which can be positioned in any direction.
I also appreciate the pre-assembled design of this air conditioner because of which installation doesn’t take too much time. The only thing you will have to do is slide the air conditioner inside an open window and fasten the screws to mount it securely.
Besides cooling a space efficiently, I noticed that the air filter purifies the indoor air by catching dirt and dust. Later, you can detach it and wash it to remove impurities.
Instead of 3 modes like most air conditioners, it comes with 5 modes– cool, circulate, dehumidify, auto, and sleep. Using the remote control, you can switch between modes and adjust the temperature between 61 and 88°F.
And if you find it difficult to read the settings because of the small screen of the remote, the digital panel on the unit will come in handy. A 24-hour timer is also integrated into the air conditioner.
Floor Area: 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: Adjustable | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 42 dB
Contains R-32 refrigerant, which is environmentally-friendly
Dehumidifies a space well
Self-evaporating operation
What We Don't Like
Filter requires frequent cleaning
Operating at 58 dB, the BLACK+DECKER Portable Air Conditioner is a fairly quiet device; therefore, you can carry on your chores without getting disturbed due to loud noise. And if you prefer the quietest environment when sleeping, switching to “sleep” mode will do the trick and reduce further noise.
Like other portable air conditioners, this one also is a floor-standing unit that cools a 150 square feet room quickly and efficiently. For this reason, I prefer using it in my cabin, although you can use it in the office, small bedrooms, and living rooms.
This portable air conditioner, as one would expect, comes with built-in wheels that allow me to move it from one corner of my office space to another without difficulty. Even these built-in wheels make the installation process relatively simple– wheel it to whichever room you wish to install, position it near a window, and attach the hose.
When not in use, simply unhook and store it wherever you have storage space.
Atop the unit is an LED display through which you can control the air temperature, mode, and other settings. Since the air filter traps dirt, dust, pet danders, and other particles, you will have to clean it twice a month to enhance its efficiency.
This portable air conditioner combines 3 energy-efficient functions in 1, meaning you get a dehumidifier, a cooler, and a fan in one unit. Although it’s a floor-standing unit, it is a self-evaporating unit. Rest assured, your space will remain dry, cool, and clean.
Lastly, you get a 5-year warranty on compressor parts and a 1-year warranty on other parts and labor.
Floor Area: 150 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 54 dB
1-year warranty on parts or labor and a 4-year warranty for a sealed system
What We Don't Like
Quite loud on high setting
Do you often go on long voyages on your travel trailer? Well, in that case, the Keystone Window-Mounted Air Conditioner is worth every cent to keep your trailer cool during hot summer afternoons.
Not just travel trailers, but this air conditioner is a reliable option for attics, home offices, small living rooms, bedrooms, and apartments.
Offering 3 fan speeds, this air conditioner allows you to customize the cooling experience as per your needs. With a built-in dehumidifier, this unit works well in humid spaces as it removes excess moisture from the indoor air. This way, it would prevent mold and mildew from thriving in the space.
On the low setting, this air conditioning unit runs at 49 dB; however, it is quite loud if you run at a high setting– so keep that in mind.
Furthermore, this small and compact air conditioning unit sports a digital display on the left-hand side. Using that, you can turn it on/off, switch between different modes, set a timer, or increase/decrease the temperature with ease.
And if you’re too lethargic to leave your couch or bed, simply make use of the remote control that comes with the unit. What I like about the remote control is that it has a built-in remote thermostat, allowing you to set the temperature from any corner of the room.
Keep in mind this unit isn’t Energy Star-rated, although the brand offers it in Energy Star style– so choose the style carefully. Still, if you go for the former option, you can turn on “energy saver” mode to save a few dollars on energy bills yearly.
Floor Area: 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 59 dB
Buying a separate air conditioner and a heating system is expensive for most of us. Instead of settling for either of the two, investing in the PerfectAire Air Conditioner will guarantee you comfort in all seasons.
Radiating 3500 BTU of heat and 8000 BTU of cold, this 2-in-1 air conditioner is a versatile unit that you can get hold of. With the touch of a button on the remote, you can program your desired temperature and switch to “sleep” mode, “energy saver,” or “follow me” mode.
And if it sits beside your office table, you can modify the settings using the control panel on the top left side of the unit.
This corded electric unit is available in multiple styles, from 8000 BTU to 12000 BTU– therefore, you’re spoilt for choices. Furthermore, it features an “auto restart” option, because of which the unit restarts itself in case of power outages.
However, unlike other air conditioners on this list, this unit isn’t Energy Star-certified, so definitely, it won’t cut down on energy costs. The brand, nevertheless, does offer an “energy saver” mode, so you can switch to that if your motive is to save money while running the unit.
Top rail, accordion panels, foam, screws, brackets, and seals– the brand sends all the necessary supplies that will be needed to install this air conditioning unit. So, installing it yourself won’t be a hassle; however, calling for professionals would be a better bet if you’re not confident in your DIY skills.
Professional installation is also recommended because the unit weighs about 71 pounds, which means it is too heavy.
Floor Area: 300 to 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 58 dB
Buying Guide for the Best 8000 BTU Air Conditioner
With so many options at your disposal, were you able to decide which one would be ideal for your needs? No? Well, I knew it, but you’re not alone– countless people get stuck in the decision-making process.
Knowing the pros and cons of the 14 best 8000 BTU air conditioners helps greatly, but choosing one remains a daunting task. That’s because there’s a lot to look for when buying an air conditioner for your home or office space other than the price.
So, if you’ve been looking for pointers on choosing the right air conditioner, this section will prove helpful. Ahead, I’ve discussed some important factors I’ve learned over the years that you must keep in mind while buying an 8000 BTU air conditioner. Let’s check them out!
Type of Air Conditioner
By now, you’ve learned that 8000 BTU air conditioners are of 2 types– window air conditioners and portable air conditioners. Out of the 2, which one you go for depends on your needs and requirements.
Window air conditioners are mounted on the windows, with a few of them mounted through the wall. Since they are immovable, they are considered a permanent cooling solution.
Furthermore, window ACs have a high cooling capacity and are larger and heavier than other air conditioners. An 8000 BTU window-mounted air conditioner makes for an excellent option for 300 to 350 square feet of space, like small to medium-sized living rooms, bedrooms, kitchens, and garages.
On the other hand, portable air conditioners are most popular when it comes to 8000 BTU air conditioners. That’s because they come with built-in wheels and can easily move from one space to another.
Instead of mounting them on the walls, you can simply place them in any corner of the room, plug the cord into the electrical outlet, and turn it on. It will start cooling your room. Nevertheless, you must keep in mind that they aren’t as powerful as portable ones.
Even when it comes to energy efficiency, window-mounted air conditioners have the edge over portable units.
Noise Level
Despite many manufacturers claiming that their AC units are the quietest, I’ve learned that not all of them live up to their claims.
For that reason, I highly recommend everyone check the noise level of whichever AC they are planning to buy. Deciding the noise level is especially difficult for first-time buyers, but don’t worry, for I’ll help you out.
Any air conditioner whose noise level falls between 44 and 56 dB (decibel) is considered less noisy or quiet. Go for a 40 dB air conditioner if you wish to have library-like silence in your home. Using an air conditioner that barely makes noise will help you sleep better and work better without distractions.
Remember that any air conditioning unit above 56 dB will be loud or noisy, which will make carrying out chores difficult, let alone sleeping.
Some ACs also come with a “sleep” mode and “eco” mode that further reduces noise levels, making them virtually silent. So, if you go for AC units whose noise levels are above 56 dB, look at whether they have these 2 modes or not.
Energy Efficiency Ratio
EER, or energy efficiency ratio, is the measurement of the efficiency of an HVAC (heating, ventilation, and air conditioning) system in terms of output vs. energy consumption.
When buying an air conditioner, you should always go for units whose EER ratings are high because the higher the ratings, the more energy-efficient the unit will be. That means you will save a lot of money annually on your energy bills.
Nevertheless, units with high EER come with an expensive price tag, but it’s a one-time expenditure.
Dehumidifier Mode
Today, almost all air conditioning units come with a dehumidifier mode that makes it easy for homeowners to remove excess humidity from the space. When you switch to this mode, your room will feel less humid or muggy and a more comfortable space.
So, I highly recommend you go for air conditioners that come with a dehumidifier, especially if you live in places with humid climates. By dehumidifying your room, you can even eliminate the problems of mold and mildew.
Wi-Fi Enabled
When you’re upgrading to a new air conditioning unit, it’s wise to go for models that are Wi-Fi enabled because of the convenience it offers.
A Wi-Fi-enabled AC can be paired with a smartphone, and you can control the settings from anywhere in the world. Such ACs are also compatible with smart assistants like Alexa and Google Assistant.
One of the perks of owning a Wi-Fi-enabled AC is that you can program daily cooling regimens to turn the unit on/off as needed. However, a smart AC would cost a lot more than a regular one. So, go for it only if you can afford to spend that much money; otherwise, a standard unit would be feasible.
Installation
Installation is another factor you must consider when buying an 8000 BTU air conditioner.
Generally, portable ACs have the edge over window AC units because you don’t have to do much to install them. After unboxing them, you only have to place them in the right spot near an electric outlet, attach the hose and turn it on.
On the other hand, window-mounted air conditioners aren’t easy to install. Only if you are a pro at DIY tasks should you attempt installing such ACs inside the window. Even a seasoned DIYer should refrain from installing such ACs because even the slightest mistake could damage the whole unit.
Price
From affordable units to luxury ones, 8000 BTU air conditioners are available in various price ranges. Therefore, I suggest you prepare a budget before shopping so that you don’t end up overspending.
Most people think that affordable units aren’t of good quality and expensive ones are of premium quality. However, that’s not the case– what I suggest is to weigh down the features of the unit against the price because that will help you make a sound decision.
How much space can an 8000 BTU air conditioner cool?
Ideal for small to medium-sized spaces, 8000 BTU air conditioners work well on spaces up to 350 square feet, equivalent to 1600 cubic feet.
Will more BTUs cool my small-sized room better than an 8000 BTU air conditioner?
No, adding a unit whose BTU exceeds 8000 in a small to medium-sized room won’t be a sensible decision. In regard to air conditioners, more isn’t always better. Although the higher BTU unit will cool the room quickly, remember the room will become overly humid.
At the same time, units with fewer BTUs won’t cool the room at all but consume a lot of power.
Does an 8000 BTU air conditioner consume a lot of electricity?
Mid-size 8000 BTU air conditioners use about 715 watts of energy. At times, it may even consume less than 715 watts, so your electric bills won’t be high.
Will an 8000 BTU air conditioner be ideal for cooling a living room?
This totally depends on the dimensions of your living room. As 8000 BTU air conditioners are among the smallest units, they are highly efficient in cooling spaces of 250 to 350 square feet.
So, if your living room is about 350 square feet, an 8000 BTU air conditioning unit will be an excellent addition. Meanwhile, you will have to look for other options if your living room is spacious.
What size inverter do I need to run an 8000 BTU air conditioner?
An inverter of 6000-watt DC to AC will be efficient for running 8000 BTU air conditioners. In fact, such inverters can also be used to run 15000 BTU air conditioners. However, before you go ahead to purchase an inverter, make sure to check with the manufacturer’s recommendation in the manual. As that will give you a clear picture of the inverter you will need to run your AC efficiently.
Conclusion
To survive hot days, an air conditioner is an absolute necessity because it makes your space cooler, making summers bearable. However, you can reap these benefits only if you choose the right unit for your space.
Still unable to decide which one should you pick? Let me ease your confusion by letting out my top picks.
Amongst all the options, the Frigidaire Window-Mounted Room Air Conditioner takes the crown because of its 3 adjustable fan speeds that allow users to customize the cooling experience. Other than its washable air filter, I like the fact that it is energy efficient and helps me save a few dollars every month on my electricity bill.
And if you’re looking for an air conditioner that comes with an intuitive LED display, you can never go wrong with the EasyCool Air Conditioner from the Midea Group. Besides being energy efficient, the unit is covered with a 1-year warranty on labor and parts.
On that note, I shall call the curtains for the day. Adios!
The Hoome window seal for portable air conditioners stands out because of its cheap cost, dual hose suitability, and universal fit. The next best is the Jeacent and Gulrear window seals, with their easy installation and durability. And if you have a casement window, the Airly window seal kit is the best option.
Portable air conditioners offer a practical and cheap cooling solution to the intense summer heat. But their efficiency is affected by their ventilation and the window gaps. To avoid hot air from the exhaust hose coming back inside, it is important to give the window an airtight seal.
Window seal kits are a temporary and cheap solution to this problem of a portable air conditioner. And today, I’ve curated a list of window seals to help you decide the best one for your portable AC unit.
Best Portable AC Window Seal Kits
Here is the list of the 5 best portable AC window seal kits that you can use to improve the efficiency of your portable air conditioner unit.
Adhesive too durable to remove during the non-AC season
The Hoome portable air conditioner window seal helps keep a closed environment and prevents the warm air inside the AC hose from getting into your room. It seals around your window and then wraps around the nozzle of the hose, blocking the return flow of hot air. This protects the efficiency of your own mobile air conditioning unit.
This window seal is pretty easy to install as well. You just need to apply the adhesive hook tape to the inside of your window frame and the window itself. Hence, installation is a piece of cake. It has two zippers, so it will work even if your portable air conditioner has two hoses.
Additionally, the window seal is suitable for most portable air conditioners. They are also suitable for most windows, whether they open to the left or the right, whether it's a bottom-hung window or a skylight. Just note that the maximum allowed perimeter of the window is 400 cm or 157 inches.
The Jeacent window seal for a portable air conditioner is easy to install and comes with two different fixing methods. The product box includes most of the things you need for the installation, making it a quick and easy process.
Its exclusive bottom panel joint leads to a seamless design, keeping all the hot air out and leaving no gaps. It uses durable and thick PVC to help you keep your room cool for longer, leading to savings on energy costs.
Additionally, since it helps to regulate the air exchange efficiently, it helps keep out dust and rain. So, not only does it keep the hot air out, but it also helps to keep the indoor air clean.
Note that the seal supports hoses with an external diameter between 5.1 and 5.9 inches.
The Gulrear window seal for portable air conditioners is pretty easy to install, with the panels being easily adjustable due to their slider nuts. It’s designed specifically for exhaust hoses with a diameter of 5 inches so it won’t be compatible with all AC units.
The product box includes most of the tools you need for the installation, along with the user manual, making installation a breeze. The sealing tape is also provided and is posted at the connection between the sealing plate and the window. This helps to effectively avoid hot air coming in.
This window kit is designed for sliding windows that open either horizontally or vertically. Additionally, it supports two hoses. So, you can easily use it with your dual hose portable air conditioner.
Most of the window seal kits on this list support all kinds of windows, but casement windows are very different. This Airly seal is one of the best options for window seals if you have casement windows.
Casement windows, though popular, don’t have a lot of options when it comes to window seals. So, this Airly window seal is specifically designed to fit any casement window. It is also very easy to install since all the tools you need are included in the product box.
Just note that the window seal will support casement windows measuring less than 158 inches. So, measure the perimeter of your window before purchasing to make sure it’s compatible.
Also, you don’t need to worry about bugs or insects creeping in. The sturdy zipper makes for easy hose access as well as keeping the insects and the hot air at bay.
Type: Single hose | Window Size: 158 inches | Window Type: Casement windows | Price: $22.84
The Sikadeer window seal for a portable air conditioner comes with an instruction manual and is very easy to install. It is suitable for sliding windows as well as sliding doors. The boards included in the seal kit allow you to adjust the size of the kit freely. Thus, it supports windows measuring between 17 and 60 inches.
Make sure the diameter of your hose is 5.1 inches before purchasing to ensure compatibility. The window seal kit is made using PVC material, making it high-temperature resistant, non-toxic, and pollution-free.
The window seal can also be embedded in the window rails, leading to a tight sealing effect. This helps effectively prevent hot air from coming inside the room.
Type: Single hose | Window Size: 17 - 60 inches | Window Type: Sliding window/Sliding door | Price: $23.99
Buying Guide for the Best Portable AC Window Seal Kit
Any portable air conditioner is bound to send some hot air back inside the room, reducing the efficiency of your portable air conditioner and also hiking up your energy bills. Window seals are an effective solution to this problem.
Here are a few things you should remember to buy the perfect window seal to meet your needs.
1. Types of Windows
You’ll obviously need to know what kind of window you have before you buy a window seal for it. Unfortunately, window seals don’t work with all kinds of windows. They only work with windows that slide or crank open, like:
Sliding windows
The most popular window style, sliding windows can be single or double-hung windows and might open horizontally or vertically.
Sliding doors
Most window seals that are compatible with sliding windows will also be compatible with sliding doors as well. Just make sure to get the measurement right.
Casement windows
Casement windows are windows that crank open. And though they offer an unobstructed view of the nearby scenery, they are pretty difficult to seal completely. So, your best option with this window type is to buy mesh kits with zippers.
Thus, windows become very important for the effective functioning of a portable air conditioner. In case you don’t have windows available, through-the-wall window conditioners are also available, which don’t require any window to cool air.
2. Window dimensions
Window dimensions are a significant measurement you need to keep in mind while purchasing a window seal. Measure all the sides of your window to get the perimeter, and then check the window dimensions for the window seal you are purchasing to make sure it is compatible.
The perfect size match will ensure a tight seal and lead to the higher efficiency of your portable air conditioner.
For sliding door seal kits, like the Sikadeer window seal for portable air conditioners, you don’t need the exact measurements. This is because you usually get a sliding door seal bracket to make the installation easier.
3. Installation
The installation process of window seals mostly depends on the type of window you have, as well as your portable air conditioner. To make sure the instruction process is as hassle-free as possible, check whether the product box comes with everything you need.
Adhesive tape, adhesive fasteners, and hose connectors are some of the things the product box absolutely needs to include. So, check the product details carefully before going all in. You can also look for installation instructions or user manuals.
For casement windows, mesh kits with zippers are the best option. You can find step-by-step instructions for the installation of this kit in the user manual or on videos online.
Installing a window seal on a sliding window is even easier as long as your measurements are correct. You can also find step-by-step instructions or video tutorials for these online to make installation an easy process.
The complete installation process of the window seal kit should not take more than 15 minutes.
4. Style of Window Seal
Many portable air conditioners are dual-hose models. In case you have a dual hose model, make sure your window seal supports that particular portable air conditioner. On the other hand, most window seals are suitable for single-hose models.
If you don’t want to go through the hassle of dual hoses, vents, and window seals, you can check out some window fans for another effective cooling solution.
What is a portable air conditioner window seal kit?
A portable air conditioner is an effective solution to the intense summer heat. But it cannot perform at its maximum efficiency without proper ventilation. Hence, a window seal is a perfect temporary solution.
The window seal helps you to seal the gap created by the exhaust hose, helping to prevent hot air from coming back inside the room. Without a proper window seal, it is like you’re basically running a window air conditioner with the windows open. This really reduces the cooling of your portable air conditioner and also drives up your energy bills.
So, after checking the type and dimensions of your window, you should buy a window seal to make the window airtight.
How do I install a portable AC window seal?
The installation of window seals for a portable air conditioner is a pretty easy task. Most of the tools you need are already included in the product box. The user manual also contains instructions to make installation an easy process. You can also find video tutorials online if needed.
Just make sure to correctly measure your window before purchasing the window seal kit to ensure a smooth installation process.
Will using a portable air conditioner window seal affect my electricity bill?
Yes, it will. But it’s all good news! Because a window seal for portable ACs is meant to drive up the efficiency of your portable air conditioner. If the efficiency goes up, your room gets cooled at a much quicker rate. This means you will need to use the AC for lesser time, leading to savings on your energy bills.
Can I use a portable AC window seal with any brand of portable AC?
Yes, you can. You can use a portable air conditioner window seal with any brand of portable air conditioner. You just need to make sure the dimensions of the window and the type of window match the window seal you’re buying. Make the measurements and calculations beforehand to make sure there is compatibility.
Your portable air conditioner can also have two hoses, so make sure your window seal is dual-hose compatible if that’s the case.
Can I still open my window with a portable AC window seal installed?
For some window seal kits that don’t block the opening of the window, yes, you can open your windows. However, for some, you might have to remove the window seal before opening the windows. However, opening the window with the window seal installed would be quite counterproductive, given why you are installing it in the first place.
Can a portable AC window seal kit be used with sliding windows?
Yes, a portable air conditioner window seal kit can be used with sliding windows, whether they open horizontally or vertically. Just make sure you get the measurements of the window and the outlet hose right before making your purchase.
Conclusion
Having a portable AC window seal kit is an excellent accessory to keep your environment temperate and energy-efficient. These kits prevent the return flow of warm air, thereby augmenting the working of your air conditioner and saving on energy bills. However, not all kits bring the same quality, support, and adaptability.
From the above 5 best portable AC window seal kits, here are the top three expert recommendations:
The Hoome Window Seal for Portable Air Conditioner, due to its versatile compatibility with various windows and easy-to-install design, emerges as the best overall and is an ideal option for those looking for maximized performance and value.
Next, for people looking for longevity, the Jeacent Window Seal for Portable Air Conditioner stands out as the best for durability. Its robust and thick PVC design makes it a good option offering extended service and more bang for your buck.
Lastly, for easy installation and user-friendly adjustments, the Gulrear Window Seal for Portable Air Conditioner takes the crown. If you happen to prioritize convenience and simplicity of setup, this product is the right choice.
To make the most out of these fantastic products, ensure you check out the specifications of each seal kit to match your window and hose sizes before making a purchase. Enjoy the comfort and energy savings that come with having the right seal kit for your portable AC unit.
Looking for the best cooler ice packs can be difficult as many options are available in the market.
Thankfully I’ll discuss various food and ice packs so you can make the best decision for your refrigerator and cooling needs.
This guide has gathered the best ice packs, and we will explain how each pack can be your best pick for your individual needs.
Best Ice Pack for Coolers Picks
Each one of these is available at Amazon, eBay, or any other online retail shop of your choice to choose your brand of ice pack manufacturers.
There is no better way of keeping drinks cold than the Cooler Shock reusable ice packs 3X against heat.
One of these triple-insulated 12-ounce bags can keep their cooler cold for 20 hours with a very tight lid and can even replace 18 pounds of ice.
The five-pack of bags contains a non-hazardous coolant powder which you can unscrew and add water to turn the powder into a cooling gel mixture for a gel pack.
Afterward, you can make gel ice packs with the provided five bags by filling them with the mixture and placing each bag into the freezer for 12-14 hours at 18 degrees Fahrenheit.
These gel-based ice packs also act as reusable ice packs with high-performance, plastic exteriors that are fit for any food, preserving them long and cold.
These Cooler shock packs are also for large coolers, but in turn, these few ice packs take up a lot of room in the cooler but stay cold longer than my other ice packs, for twenty-two hours.
Here’s the BEST PART! It is affordable and perfect for keeping drinks ice cold for the many parties I hosted for close friends and family.
A flat ice pack, when frozen, expands into a bulbous mass, sometimes too large to fit onto small coolers, but this Arctic Ice Chillin' Brew pack has a pattern for keeping its shape intact.
The design of the Arctic Ice Chillin Brew also expands the overall surface area of the pack allowing you to keep more of your food cold, helping me keep my larders cool on the go.
The moded design of these ice packs also allows each pack to interlock and stock amongst themselves for maximizing keeping my food and drinks chilled.
Its low 28-degree Fahrenheit freezing point keeps drinks cold and meat fresh for any event or travel for eight hours
Note
This is fifty percent longer than using ice.
The flat shape and the six size options would have this small ice pack fit into most coolers and even have a handle for convenient removal.
The ice packs' sizes, from small to extra large, are designed with leakproof caps and UV-stabilized color containers for extended use and a melting point of 15 degrees Fahrenheit.
However, some of the larger ice packs were too large to fit into my cooler, and I need to use my 12 x 9-inch for one to barely fit, so keep this in mind as you use these ice packs.
Rather than invest in ice packs, you would want more solid but expendable cooler packs; you should instead invest in Nordic Ice reusable gel packs.
The company is famed for its solid cooling technology in multiple industries, even for medicine shipping, and its cooling power is more than enough.
You can trust the gel pack to keep barbeque and beverages cold.
This gel pack also keeps medicines cold and stops condensation due to the temperature-sensitive material.
This reusable cooler ice pack is insulated with multi-layered polymer plastics and a patented gel, encouraging multiple uses in the short term as they are sold as a set of three.
They even freeze quickly in about two hours and last about 12 hours while not taking too much space in a lunch box or a large cooler by their lightweight 7-by-3-inch design.
The hard plastic exterior of this Yeti ice pack can be considered one of the most scientifically developed ice packs out there due to its non-sweat, re-freezable, and reusable.
All the while keeping the cold all day long as the YETI ice pack also comes in different pound options, 1-4 pounds, while also being able to mix and match them.
These Yeti ice packs boast durability and convenience, with their rectangular donut shape making freezing easier than others.
Indeed, the superior durability makes this ice pack the best-suited option for camping and hiking trips to protect your food from any animals while not leaving any sweat.
Although these refreezable and reusable cooler ice packs are considered expensive and only sold individually, the benefits provided may justify the price and quantity.
The FlexiFreeze ice reusable packs are very flexible in various ways, from how you can cut the sheet to fit your needs and how flexible they are for insulating items.
The very ice sheets are water-based and chemical-free for the eco-minded, but also this translates into how you can twist the sheets to fit anywhere.
You can reuse these expensive ice packs to freeze yourself a fresh batch of 44 ice cubes overnight from your refrigerator with every ice cube creation like an icemaker.
However, due to their water-based construction, this ice sheet does not have the same refrigeration abilities as a gel pack despite being able to keep solid for a few hours.
One test during a 60-degree temperature day tested the sheet wherein refrigerated snacks kept their cool for three hours but melted in about eight hours.
Should the sheets be damaged, there will be barely any mess or toxicity exposure.
Overall, these sheets are perfect for any outing, from an afternoon picnic to a beach trip, as you can cut them for any container to keep.
The LARGEST ice pack among the most popular ice packs for those looking to replace using regular ice cubes for their drinks.
Due to its sheer size, this high-quality ice pack produces a large bulge in the middle due to the moisture inside expanding as it freezes, but its structure remains intact.
Although it must be within large containers, you can reliably place it within hard or soft coolers to keep the chill at any temperature.
The large set also can keep frozen for twelve hours or more, even on a hot day, while being easy to carry due to its ridges.
However, this would cause the thicker ice packs to be difficult to stack on top of each other while also needing to be hand-washed instead of using a dishwasher to clean them.
As you store many cans and bottles, ice is paramount as it can easily sneak into any crevice and create more contact with your drinks, but ice can be messy.
To avoid this mess, this ice pack uses gel and has three grooves on each side to accommodate drinks of any size, and this is doubly so for providing four packs.
These four packs can also create multiple rows to hold your drinks while they keep cool for hours on end.
The extra weight won't break the hard shells because the polyethylene makes up the pack, resulting in thicker ice packs that won't deform.
The Tourit ice packs act as a sleek cooling system as they are sold as packs of four, each weighing 0.5 pounds, and are small enough for smaller coolers or while traveling.
These freezer packs can remain frozen for eight to ten hours and can be mixed and matched for minimum or maximum cooling capacity.
They can also be mixed in with your food and beverages for even cooling and come with many ice packs to make your cooler colder.
They are suitable for outdoor trips due to their Bisphenol A (BPA)-free plastic durability.
Are you packing a lunch bag or mini-cooler to store your fruit and sandwich snacks on the go? Then consider the compact Fit&Fresh ice packs to keep your snack cool.
The compact ice pack won't take up too much space within your cooler while having enough cooling power to keep things cold and your snacks cool in your lunch bags.
These slim ice packs can keep their cold temperatures for up to twelve hours and come with four ice packs.
For coolers with limited space, you can even stack the slim ice packs amongst themselves for larger coolers to keep the cooler chilled.
However, the small ice packs are not enough to keep food or even a beer bottle for 3 hours or in large containers with a single ice pack.
The packs don't last as long frozen as similar packs and would need multiple ice packs to stay cold.
When choosing the best ice packs for coolers, there are still other factors to consider for what you want in your kitchen.
You might be inclined to ask the following questions:
How many ice packs did this brand give?
Is it dishwasher-safe?
There are also always online communities to check, such asDIY sites for repairs orhow to move your appliance safely.
The top ice packs should ALWAYS have the following.
Size
Always consider the size of the pack s storage capacity is not the only factor, as you still would want space within your cooler for anything.
The type of container also counts as a pack and should be the same size as its container, which ranges from 5-by-5 to 10-by-13 inches.
Material
The typical price is $5-20 for the average ice pack, and the reason for such fluctuating prices is due to what the packs are made from.
The outer and inner materials for ice packs differ with the type of ice pack, such as how hard types are made of hard plastic while soft types are made of similar polymers.
Cleaning and Storage
Almost all ice packs are easy to clean and maintain, needing only a rinse to be cleaned with warm soapy water.
Although you must let the packs dry before freezing them to limit condensation and ice crystals.
Type
An ice pack can be divided into the following kinds;
Soft Packs: These kinds of packs can conform around items like a lunch box
Hard Packs: These kinds of packs are more rigid-shaped and fit easily into structured containers
Longevity
There is a strong correlation between size and how long-lasting an ice pack would be, as a five-pound pack can last up to two days.
Also, thicker packs would last significantly much longer than softer packs.
How do you discard ice packs?
The good thing about gel in ice is that they are capable of biodegradation and have no toxins, with the only issue being the plastic covering, which you can dispose of into a recycling center.
Why should you use an ice pack instead of regular ice?
Although packs and typical ice function the same, cooler ice packs work better as they freeze quicker and still keep their frozen elements contained than water-based ice
However, loose ice cubes can better surround items in a cooler than a single pack can.
Do ice packs go on the top or bottom of your cooler?
There is no official consensus; either answer depends on your current needs and concerns.
People recommend placing packs on the top as cold air sinks and extend the chill, while the bottom is convenient for getting items.
A Recap of the Top Picks
Among the best ice packs for coolers, here are the ones I personally like the most.
Nordic Ice is my pick for being the cheapest for being priced at $9 for three ice packs and being able to still do its job of cooling your food for 12 hours despite being fragile.
The biggest drawback is that the ice pack can be damaged easily due to its expendable design.
Cooler Shock is considered the best overall because of the reusable nature of the ice pack while having excellent freezing power that lasts for 20 hours and being affordable.
However, the pack is rather bulky when traveling and needs some assembly by the customer.
Conclusion
The best ice packs for coolers are unique to each customer's circumstances.
Each can provide hours' worth of cooling for your food and beverages, but some are made of gel to contour to any size or are durable enough to prevent theft.
Although the Cooler Shock is our preferred choice, there are still other options for you to consider first.
Buying an airgun is a cakewalk in the land of the brave; it’s just the subsequent maintenance that puts everyone in dire straits.
Any pneumatic tool demands frequent and top-class maintenance, and that’s why you shouldn’t settle for anything less than the most reliable air tool oils to maintain its performance and longevity. And that raises a very common question - how difficult can it be to buy air tools oil?
Well, it’s not easy, given how thousands of variants are launched in the market regularly. But don’t worry, we’ve personally handpicked 8 of the best oils for the buck so that you find the one that fits your needs precisely.
So, without beating around the bush, let’s get down to the biz!
Best Air Tool Oils
Here’s the list of the 8 best air tool oils to help you find the perfect maintenance solution for your pneumatic tools, ensuring optimal performance and longevity.
The first and unarguably the editor’s pick on our list is the best-selling Marvel Mystery oil. This brand has already established a wide reputation with its leading innovations. The MM080R 4 oz. Air tool oil is said to deliver nothing but sheer quality under a bargain-basement price range. That said, let’s check out what’s all that buzz about!
It’s fair to say that this unit has been manufactured keeping customers in mind, provided how efficiently it caters to almost every consumer’s needs under a fair budget. It works best with piston-type air tools and line/rotary lubricators, and the credit goes to Marvel Mystery’s state-of-the-art technology behind its formulation. Not only that, but it’s also an appropriate supplement to eliminate rust formation, which defines total value for money.
Moving on, we’ve also found this oil to deliver positive lubrication, which comes quite handy in minimizing power outages. As a bonus, it also stands eligible to dissolve any gum/sludge formation that often hampers the tool's power and speed. So, if you’re looking for an oil that maximizes your tool performance without costing an arm and a leg, then the MM080R should be your go-to pick.
Not to forget, this product is also pretty appropriate for protecting hoses, as we found that it does not have any adverse reaction on rubber. Besides, it’s also suitable for dressing motor compartments, so that’s another win-win!
One of its most significant limitations is in the name itself, have you noticed? Yes, the size and quantity of the oil bottle are 4 oz, which is quite less. The price, on the other hand, is higher than most other recommendations, so that’s a bit upsetting.
What We Like
Appropriate for spray bottles
Suitable with multiple air tools
Protects rubber hoses
Premium quality oil
What We Don’t Like
High price
Volume: 4 fl oz | Dimensions: 7.2" x 5.8" x 5.4" | Weight: 4 oz | Water Dispersal: Yes | Rust Protection: Yes | Corrosion Protection: No
Next on our list, the Lucas Oil air tool lubricant is unarguably the one-stop solution to your professional tool maintenance needs. This product has been specially formulated to offer world-class performance, and its excellent ease of use makes it even better. That said, let’s check out its core specs and functions!
This product easily stands out to be a smart solution to double the efficiency of your pneumatic tools, as its brilliant formula enables the devices to have a longer lifespan. First and foremost, this tool comes off as an efficient rust-resistant oil, allowing you to protect the tools for a more extended period. Furthermore, the oil has been tested to be weatherproof, which is quite incredible for professionals that often work in extreme temperatures.
When it comes to metallic tools, water becomes a prevalent issue that threatens its longevity. Be it rust or just any other performance issue, water inevitably deteriorates the overall life of the tool in a jiffy. However, this oil also acts as an efficient water dispersal agent, which gives it a tremendous advantage over its critical alternatives in the same category. This feature prevents water jamming from extending the tool’s longevity.
Furthermore, we’ve noticed that the oil also provides the utmost help in preventing the tools from facing a blowout. Air tools are frequently prone to blowouts when the insides get rough, which can be serious trouble in the long run. Last but not least, this product comes in a 16-ounce bottle, providing sufficient oil for long-term use.
Although the product is quite good at what it does, it’s disappointing that it fails to prevent corrosion. To be precise, oil might not be the best option to consider if your air tool is eroding due to acidic components.
What We Like
Efficient tool lubrication
Ample size and quantity
Easy-to-use nozzle
Value for money
What We Don’t Like
Ineffective against corrosion
Volume: 16 fl oz | Dimensions: 9.38" x 2.47" x 2.47" | Weight: 15.7 oz | Water Dispersal: Yes | Rust Protection: Yes | Corrosion Protection: No
For those looking for a long-lasting solution to their frequent tool maintenance needs, the Lucas Oil 10200 1-quart air tool lubricant is a smart budget-friendly alternative. The oil has been specially formulated to deliver nothing less than top-notch performance and defines value for money at its finest. Let’s find out more!
This one is quite a smart solution featuring a unique formula to safeguard your pneumatic tools from early rusting. If you’re observing any damage due to rust in your devices, applying this oil will help in eliminating the risk of significantly extending its longevity. Like our previous pick, this tool is resistant to extreme weather, which allows you to use the device at any temperature without being damaged by heat.
We’ve also tested this product to be an excellent water dispersal agent, which appears to be a common Lucas oil feature at this point. This feature prevents any scope of water jamming in the tool, which lessens the chances of rusting by a fair deal.
Not to forget, it also prevents the possibility of a blowout, which is very common amongst pneumatic tools while being used roughly. Consequently, you can enjoy a smooth and uninterrupted working session.
There isn’t much difference between the 10200 and the 10216 units, except its size and quantity. Likewise, this product isn’t also very efficient at handling damages caused by acidic components. But apart from corrosion prevention, it’s a best-value product to consider.
What We Like
Prevents damage caused by moisture
Ample size and quantity
Can protect from extreme heat
Rust-resistant material
What We Don’t Like
Can’t prevent acidic corrosion
Volume: 32 fl oz | Dimensions: 14" x 14" x 10" | Weight: 32.48 oz | Water Dispersal: Yes | Rust Protection: Yes | Corrosion Protection: No
When it comes to premium automotive accessory protection, Sta-Lube is a brand that we can rely upon with our eyes closed. The SL2531 15 fl oz lubricant has everything you’d need from a professional air tool oil, and its sufficient size makes it a deal we can’t afford to miss. That said, let’s find out whether it suits your requirements.
First, this product redefines ultra-smooth performance with its excellent formula, which gives a significant advantage over its competition. It is quite efficient at lubricating the harshest and roughest of pneumatic tools, which makes it very suitable for heavy-duty commercial usage. For those who don’t mind spending a little extra for sheer quality, this product stands out to be a brilliant option to consider.
One thing about this oil that we’re in love with is its compliance with almost any pneumatic tool. This product can lubricate the machine with sheer precision, whether it’s an air motor, air ratchet, grinder, hammer, or drill. Not to forget, this product also prevents any scope of rust formation on the tool surface, enhancing its overall life by a considerable amount.
Unlike most of our budget-friendly picks, this oil provides 100% protection from corrosion that occurs through acidic components. Last but not least, this product comes packed in a large 15 oz bottle, so be assured that it’ll last for a lifetime.
As you’ve guessed, this oil is a little more expensive than the standard alternatives, which may restrict some from making the purchase. We’ve also acknowledged that this oil isn’t VOC compliant in California, so that’s bad news for many.
What We Like
Suitable for heavy-duty use
Incredible rust protection
Can be applied on any pneumatic tool
Large size and quantity
What We Don’t Like
A little pricey
Volume: 15 fl oz | Dimensions: 1.63" x 3.75" x 9" | Weight: 16.16 oz | Water Dispersal: Yes | Rust Protection: Yes | Corrosion Protection: Yes
If you have any experience in pneumatic tool maintenance, you’re most likely not a stranger to Ingersoll Rand. The brand has a rich history of developing brilliant innovations to stay one step ahead of the game. Its 10P Edge air tool oil has been recently making a buzz, so let’s find out whether it lives up to the hype!
The main reason this product never fails to be a fan favorite is that it’s extremely easy to use. We’ve faced zero viscosity while using this product on almost any tool category, which adds an advantage. You can use this oil with the utmost smoothness and absolutely no interruptions. It features a unique formula that is guaranteed to enhance your tool’s life through continuous use.
Moving on, the product also comes with a redcap for quick snipping, which makes it a lot easier to use. We are also impressed by its compatibility with hydraulic tools, which further enhances its versatility by a great deal.
Not to forget, it manages to provide optimal protection against rusting, safeguarding the surfaces from early damage for longer life. Many users have further suggested that using it every 48 hours is ideal for the best results.
Coming to what’s in the box, you get a pack of four 1-pint oil bottles in this package. In other words, this product is assured to outlast every other recommendation on our list. Last but not least, this product can be availed at a very affordable price, which is pretty impressive.
Quite frankly, there isn’t much to complain about this product, as it’s pretty reliable and affordable. However, numerous users have frequently complained that although the nozzle can be snipped easily, it can be a little difficult to open it accurately and may cause spillage.
What We Like
Substantial quantity
Affordable price tag
Compatible with any tool
Supports hydraulic tools
What We Don’t Like
Snipping the cap can be difficult
Volume: 16 fl oz | Dimensions: 3.25" x 2" x 8.75" | Weight: 16 oz | Water Dispersal: Yes | Rust Protection: Yes | Corrosion Protection: No
BOSTITCH is a brand that thousands of American families trust blindly, as this brand has always changed the game with its world-class innovations. The PREMOIL 20 oz air tool oil defines premium efficiency at its best, and the credit goes to its ultra-high performance and beginner-stage ease of use. Let’s find out more!
For those who are looking for an oil that can restore industrial-grade strength in their tools, the PREMOIL unit is an efficient option to consider. This product works best with nail guns, and offers nothing less than optimal performance upgrade and extended longevity, once applied. This oil is also available at a very pocket-friendly budget, giving us another reason to buy it for maintenance. Also, the product is guaranteed to last for a lifetime.
For the price, you get a 20-ounce bottle that offers sufficient oil quantity for long-term usage. We’re also quite impressed by the fact that this oil is a non-detergent solution, which raises its value even higher. To put it simply, the product formula doesn’t involve any added chemicals and comprises 100% pure oil. The purity that it offers at such a reasonable price makes it a deal that can’t be missed at any cost.
We’ve noticed that a prevalent issue among numerous air tool oils is being consolidated during colder temperatures. However, the BOSTITCH product is tested to be reasonably weatherproof, which saves it from any damage by cold temperatures. Last but not least, this product offers 100% protection from rust formation and acid corrosion.
Unfortunately, this product fails to dissolve any sludge formation inside the pneumatic tools, which gives it a significant disadvantage against our top picks on the list. Furthermore, we’ve also found it to be a subpar water dispersal agent, which further restricts its versatility.
What We Like
Suitable for heavy-duty use
Incredible rust protection
Can be applied to any pneumatic tool
Large size and quantity
What We Don’t Like
Average water dispersion
Volume: 20 fl oz | Dimensions: 4" x 2.3" x 7.9" | Weight: 8 oz | Water Dispersal: No | Rust Protection: Yes | Corrosion Protection: Yes
The penultimate pick on our list is the Super Lube 12004 air tool lubricant, a product that has been making waves in the market with its versatile applications. Most importantly, this oil is recommended by professionals due to its incredible rust-protection qualities. Let’s have a more in-depth look at its core features!
First and foremost, this product is one of the best anti-rust agents that we’ve tested till now, so big ups for Super Lube. This product starts showing visible results against any sort of rust formation within its first few uses, which makes it a complete value-for-money product. This unique formula extends your product’s life by a great deal, which is incredible for its price.
Not to forget, the model also ranks very high in terms of user comfort and convenience. To break it down, you get a smart nozzle that makes handling a lot easier for the users. In this sense, the model ensures very low spillage and can be very handy for beginners with zero prior experience at tool maintenance. Also, we’ve noticed that the oil doesn’t lose efficiency under colder temperatures, enhancing its versatility a notch.
We’re fans of its brilliant formulation that eliminates any sort of sludge buildup inside the pneumatic tools. This way, using this tool can help in keeping the tool’s speed and performance intact for a more extended period.
It’s a little upsetting that the model doesn’t offer sufficient size and quantity, as 4 ounces is too low for many. Furthermore, the product isn’t also very resistant to extreme heat, which makes it a little inconvenient to work with. Last but not least, the model fails to stop any scope of acid corrosion.
What We Like
Ergonomic nozzle for optimal handling
Doesn’t consolidate in cold temperatures
Fairly affordable price
Extends the tool’s life greatly
What We Don’t Like
Ineffective against acid corrosion
Volume: 4 fl oz | Dimensions: 1.7" x 1.7" x 6.5" | Weight: 0.24 oz | Water Dispersal: Yes | Rust Protection: Yes | Corrosion Protection: No
We’re ending our list with an incredible treat to bargain hunters, as the CLI-Syntec premium air tool oil delivers nothing less than industrial-grade efficiency at a fraction of its cost. This product is also compatible with almost any pneumatic tool, which defines best values like nothing else. Let’s check out its core features!
When it comes to the best values, this product takes the cake, as it offers quite a lot for its price. First and foremost, it arrives in a 16-ounce bottle that contains sufficient oil to last for months of continuous usage. Furthermore, this unit features an incredible formula that helps in maintaining the tool’s longevity within its first few uses only. As a bonus, it offers optimal protection from heat and moisture.
This product takes the cake for out-of-the-box convenience with its elasticity preservation technology. Simply put, the oil can last for a considerably long time after it is applied to a tool, which defines value and efficiency at its best.
You only need to use a few droplets at once, and you’d be good to go for months. It also helps in minimizing friction inside the tool that’s caused by jamming and drastically enhances the motor’s performance.
Although this product is pretty efficient at preventing rust formation, its ability to eliminate acid corrosion is utterly disappointing. We’re also upset about how this oil can get consolidated in colder temperatures, which is pretty disadvantageous compared to our other recommendations.
What We Like
Suitable for heavy-duty use
Incredible rust protection
Can be applied on any pneumatic tool
Large size and quantity
What We Don’t Like
Ineffective against acid corrosion
Volume: 16 fl oz | Dimensions: 6.42" x 2.4" x 2.28" | Weight: 15.2 oz | Water Dispersal: No | Rust Protection: Yes | Corrosion Protection: No
Before we take your leave, here are the most important factors to keep in mind before putting your money in a pneumatic tool oil. As these products are selling like hotcakes, it’s best to be well informed to avoid being fooled into buying an unreliable one. That said, make sure to include these factors while shopping for an air tool oil.
Lubrication Quality
Let’s be practical here; it’s just oil, and its primary motive is to lubricate the tools. Let’s not forget that different tools come with distinctive mechanisms and not every oil can adhere to all of them. That’s why it’s imperative to make sure that the product comes with sufficient lubrication characteristics. For instance, thinner oil is always more appropriate for thorough lubrication.
Rust/Corrosion Resistance
Resistance to toxicity is a universal need, whether it’s your personal life or your workspace tools. That said, pneumatic tools are also popular as rust/corrosion-resistant agents, which broadens their versatility. However, not most of the products in the market offer optimal protection from corrosion developed due to acidic components. But then again, it can be availed if you’re willing to slide in a little extra cash for superb quality.
Heat/Cold Temperature Resistance
Most of the users are mostly frustrated because the oil turns out to be ineffective against moisture, or it becomes consolidated under colder temperatures. That said, if you’re looking for cheap oil for temporary fixes, neither of these should bother you. But, if you’re a professional looking for a reliable long-term solution, it’s vital to keep these factors in mind while choosing your oil.
Can I use any type of oil for my pneumatic tools?
It is recommended to use air tool oil specifically designed for pneumatic tools. Regular household oils or automotive oils may not provide adequate lubrication and could potentially damage the tools. Air tool oils have properties that make them suitable for the unique requirements of pneumatic tools.
How often should I apply air tool oil?
The frequency of oil application depends on the manufacturer’s recommendations for your specific tools. Some tools may require oiling before each use, while others may need it after a certain number of hours of operation. Refer to the tool’s user manual or the oil manufacturer’s instructions for the recommended oiling schedule.
Can air tool oil be used for other applications?
Air tool oil is formulated specifically for pneumatic tools and may not be suitable for other applications. It is designed to provide the necessary lubrication and protection required by pneumatic tools’ unique mechanisms. For other purposes, such as general lubrication or household applications, it’s best to use oils specifically intended for those purposes.
How should I store air tool oil?
Air tool oil should be stored in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and extreme temperatures. Ensure the container is tightly sealed to prevent moisture absorption and contamination. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for any specific storage requirements mentioned on the product label.
Can I mix different brands or types of air tool oil?
It is generally recommended to stick to one brand or type of air tool oil to maintain consistent performance and avoid potential compatibility issues. Mixing different brands or types of oil may affect the oil’s properties and performance, leading to inadequate lubrication or other problems. If you need to switch to a different oil, it’s best to thoroughly clean the tool and follow the manufacturer’s guidelines.
Can air tool oil improve the performance of my pneumatic tools?
Yes, using the right air tool oil can improve the performance of pneumatic tools. Proper lubrication helps reduce friction, heat, and wear, resulting in smoother operation and increased efficiency. Regular maintenance with high-quality air tool oil can extend the life of your tools and ensure optimal performance.
Conclusion
We’re hoping that you’ve enjoyed going through our extensive guide to the 8 best air tool oils in the market. Here’s a brief highlight of the few products that we personally found to be the best in the game:
The Marvel MM080R unit is our editor’s pick, as its overall performance is unparalleled. However, if you’re looking for a more budget-friendly option, then the Lucas Oils are a good enough choice. Last but not least, the Sta-Lube oil serves correctly to those who don’t mind spending more for professional-grade performance.
Have you found your pick yet? Let us know in the comments below. That said, we’ll see you soon with more interesting articles, so stay tuned!
It keeps your food fresh and prevents it from spoiling too early. Sometimes, you might also need it for food prep, especially if you need to keep something cool overnight.
Investing in a new refrigerator can be complicated and overwhelming, especially when you're not sure it'll be worth it. After all, they're not the cheapest appliance to have.
Here are the best refrigerators on the market to help you find the best one for your needs, budget, and preferences.
The 8 Best Refrigerators of 2023
Besides coming in different brands, refrigerators differ significantly in their styles and technologies. It can be overwhelming to look at and experiment with this type of technology.
Luckily, you don't have to do that anymore. I've tried and tested many to learn which are the best refrigerators.
I've considered the different features of these refrigerators, from configurations and styles to their capacity and notable features.
Here are the top 8 refrigerators you can consider for your home.
When it comes to refrigerators, this 27-cubic foot refrigerator from LG has to be the best one. It's functional, aesthetic, and organized. It comes complete with shelves and crisper drawers for all your organizational needs.
It even features the Glide N' Serve, a drawer specifically designed to set different temperatures in certain sections.
It can form a specific compartment to be cooler than others, and these deli drawers are perfect for meat products and other kinds of produce.
It's also easy to see what's inside thanks to its InstaView Door-in-Door window on its right refrigerator door. You don't even have to open your fridge to see what's inside.
The refrigerator features a fingerprint-resistant stainless steel finish, giving it a sleek and stylish look that can easily fit your kitchen.
While it's not a smart refrigerator, it does have all the necessary features to do what a fridge should. I highly recommend this, especially for families who spend a lot on food and don't want that to go to waste.
Dimensions: 36 D x 38 W x 73 H inches | Style: French door | Total Capacity: 27 Cu. Ft | Dispensers: Ice maker | Available Finishes: Stainless steel | Energy Star Certified: Yes
If you're looking for something that goes above and beyond what a typical refrigerator can do, this 27.7 cubic foot refrigerator from Samsung is for you.
It's high-tech and has ample storage space, which is excellent for families and large households. It also features a sleek stainless steel finish to match your other appliances.
Its Ice Max is one of the best ice makers on the market, storing up to 4.2 pounds of ice! It's great for gatherings and families who love to add plenty of cold drinks to their gatherings.
The best part about this smart refrigerator is how it can help you in the kitchen. It can create shopping lists, search for recipes online, and even play music while you work!
You can easily see the inside through the screen on the right door without opening the fridge door, letting cold air out.
It's one of the best smart fridges on the market, and worth the price. Not only will it keep your food fresh, but it even serves as an intuitive kitchen assistant.
Dimensions: 37.5 D x 72 W x 37.5 H inches | Style: French door style | Total Capacity: 27.7 Cu. Ft | Dispensers: Ice and water dispenser | Available Finishes: Stainless steel and black stainless steel | Energy Star Certified: Yes
If you're looking for the most affordable refrigerator possible, this 13.9 cubic foot top freezer model from Frigidaire is one of the best options.
It features two adjustable glass shelves and a half-sized deli drawer, which can help you easily retrieve the contents of your refrigerator. You can easily access the food you need, depending on how you organize it.
On top of being affordable, it's also an energy saver. It's estimated to consume only about $40 of electricity annually. It lessens your carbon footprint and your bills.
Given its price, however, it has a smaller capacity than the other models on this list. It also lacks smart features and an ice/water dispenser, limiting it severely.
That said, it does excel in keeping your food fresh for a small price. It's an excellent choice for those who do little grocery shopping and only need minimal refrigerator size.
Dimensions: 28 D x 29.37 W x 59.87 H inches | Style: Top freezer | Total Capacity: 13.9 Cu. Ft | Dispensers: Ice maker | Available Finishes: Black, white, brushed steel | Energy Star Certified: Yes
4. LG LFXS26973S - Best for French Door Refrigerators
What We Like
Easy to organize
Dual ice maker
Fingerprint-resistant
Wi-Fi enabled
What We Don't Like
Lacks smart functions
Water dispenser is not automatic
This 21.8-cubic foot LG refrigerator has to be the best French door refrigerator on the market, thanks to its features and functions.
These include four adjustable glass shelves, including the Glide N' Serve. You also get a full-width shelf above the double crisper drawers for your vegetables and other fresh goods.
Its storage space and included shelves are exceptional for easy organization. You can even dedicate a tray for snacks, appetizers, and more.
It's Wi-Fi enabled, letting you control the fridge's temperature from the LG ThinQ App. However, it's not as high-tech as other similar refrigerators.
All these features make it one of the best French door refrigerators. They're worth adding to your kitchen if you want a sleek French-door refrigerator.
Dimensions: 30 D x 69 W x 36 H inches | Style: French door | Total Capacity: 21.8 Cu. Ft | Dispensers: Ice and water dispenser | Available Finishes: Stainless steel | Energy Star Certified: Yes
When it comes to counter-depth refrigerators, you might automatically think about their small capacities. However, this 20.8 cubic foot refrigerator from Bosch breaks that stereotype.
Despite being a counter-depth refrigerator, the upper part is filled with a deli drawer and compartments with an integrated FarmFresh System, keeping your food in tip-top shape.
It has a built-in ice maker known for creating unique pyramid-shaped ice. Personally, this is just an adorable feature that I enjoy. Since the ice/water dispenser is inside, it will keep your drinks cold.
Temperature can easily be tracked thanks to its Wi-Fi connectivity and the Bosch Home Connect App. You can control your refrigerator with a simple tap.
The downside of this refrigerator is that its freezer is smaller despite its large capacity. Its storage is half a typical French door fridge, making it more limited than expected.
If you're the type who needs more in the refrigerator department but doesn't want to sacrifice aesthetics, consider this reliable and sleek counter-depth refrigerator from Bosch.
Dimensions: 31.13 D x 35.63 W x 72 H inches | Style: French door | Total Capacity: 20.8 Cu. Ft | Dispensers: Ice dispenser and water dispenser | Available Finishes: Stainless steel | Energy Star Certified: Yes
If you're looking for a reliable side-by-side refrigerator, try looking into this 27.4 cubic foot model from Samsung.
This refrigerator addresses the common issues faced by these types of fridges. Thanks to its multi-vent system, cold air is evenly distributed throughout the refrigerator.
Its built-in ice maker and water dispenser are accessed through the door, making it easier to get into the proper hydration routine of drinking eight glasses daily.
The best part about the ice/water dispenser is its child lock and safety features. You can also choose between having cubed or crushed ice.
It has a fingerprint-resistant stainless steel finish, making it easier to clean and maintain. This refrigerator is sure to stay sleek for a long time.
However, the biggest downside of this refrigerator is its lack of Energy Star certification. It might raise your energy bills slightly, depending on how you use it.
Dimensions: 76 D x 38 W x 36 H inches | Style: Side-by-side | Total Capacity: 27.4 Cu. Ft | Dispensers: Water and ice dispensers | Available Finishes: Stainless steel | Energy Star Certified: No
7. LG LRDCS2603S - Best for Bottom Freezer Refrigerators
What We Like
Compact
Large capacity
Fresh air filter
What We Don't Like
Expensive
Less longevity than competitors
If you need a larger freezer compartment, check out LG's 26-cubic foot bottom freezer refrigerator. It provides more storage space designed explicitly for your freezing needs.
Besides storage, this bottom freezer refrigerator was designed to be durable with its industrial handles. It also has auto-closing hinges for safety and energy efficiency.
Its interior features tempered and spill-protected glass shelves, which are adjustable, depending on your preferences. The freezer drawer contains an ice maker that can be stocked with lots of ice.
While it's not a smart refrigerator, this bottom freezer refrigerator does the best to maintain freshness. It has an air filter that must be replaced every six months to keep the fridge clean and fresh.
It's pretty expensive for a bottom freezer. However, since it's Energy Star certified, you're sure it'll save you a lot of money in the long run.
This bottom freezer model is specially made for those who like to stock up on frozen goods.
Dimensions: 35 D x 38 W x 73 H inches | Style: Bottom freezer | Total Capacity: 26 Cu. Ft | Dispensers: Ice maker | Available Finishes: Stainless steel and black stainless steel | Energy Star Certified: Yes
If you're looking for a more luxurious and classic-looking refrigerator, this 20.5-cubic foot French door refrigerator from Bosch is a welcome addition to any stylish home.
It features a flexible configuration, allowing the owner to adjust temperatures according to their needs easily. It makes up for its major downside so that you can maximize the available storage space.
Its middle drawer is usually dedicated to wines and other drinks, keeping them cool when you need a drink. However, you can easily change it as required.
It has an ice/water dispenser located inside to maintain its sleek outward appearance. Since you'll get an internal water dispenser, it's more likely to keep everything cold.
However, the downside of this model is its storage space. Unlike the classic French door fridge, this is a counter-depth type, meaning it's not as efficient in the storage department.
If you're looking to invest in this French-door refrigerator, it's best to consider its positives and negatives.
Dimensions: 28.8 D x 35.6 W x 72 H inches | Style: French door | Total Capacity: 20.5 Cu. Ft | Dispensers: Ice maker, water dispenser | Available Finishes: Stainless steel and black stainless steel | Energy Star Certified: Yes
There's a reason for certain refrigerators to have more doors or shelves than others. There's also a reason for freezer compartments to be in various locations.
These configurations are what differentiate one type of refrigerator from another. They all have pros and cons, depending on their design and your needs as a customer.
Here is a comparison of the different types of refrigerators to know which would best fit your home.
French Door Refrigerator
The French door refrigerator is often known for its price. However, French door models also tend to be one of the most preferred by people.
Its top part is a two-door refrigerator compartment that features wide and adjustable shelves for your food. This feature makes it easier to see and get your food.
The freezer compartment isat the bottom. You can pull it out like a drawer, depending on the design of the refrigerator. You can even find a French door model with 4 or 5 doors for various cooling options.
They usually include an indoor ice and water dispenser. Some also have more smart features to help you adjust your refrigerator with a tap on a smart device.
They're known to be extremely spacious and aesthetically pleasing, making them the preferred choice, especially for those who can afford them.
However, its freezer space is often limited, and you'd have to adjust to the space given. Additional features can also raise the price.
Counter-Depth Refrigerator
Counter-depth refrigerators have front edges aligned with the kitchen's cabinets and countertop. It makes them look like they're specifically built for their spot in the kitchen.
Some people prefer a counter-depth refrigerator because they're more stylish and easily blend in with the rest of the appliances.
A counter-depth refrigerator isn't as deep as the other types on this list. On top of having a smaller structure, it also tends to be more expensive than a standard-sized refrigerator.
The counter-depth style is usually combined with other types as it focuses more on the depth of the refrigerator rather than the configuration of the two kinds of compartments.
Side-by-Side Refrigerator
A side-by-side refrigerator is less expensive than a French-door refrigerator. They're known as space savers and will help keep items within sight.
The left door is for the freezer, while the right is for the refrigerator. You wouldn't have to bend down to access one of these anymore.
Another positive is that you get more freezer space than the other types since you'll have a whole side dedicated to it.
Its fridge and freezer compartments are different in size, with the freezer being more narrow. As a result, it might not be easy to put pizza boxes and baking trays because of their width.
If you decide to get a side-by-side refrigerator, it's important NOT to overfill your freezer because it would be bad for the shelves. Your overall cooling system might also get overworked.
If you still need more freezer space, you might want to consider a chest freezer or an upright freezer, depending on how much space you need.
Top Freezer Refrigerator
The top freezer refrigerator features a freezer on top of a single-door fridge. It allows the freezer compartment to be at eye level, making it easier to access it.
However, top freezer refrigerators have fewer features than the previous three. They also tend to have fewer aesthetics and can appear bulkier than the previous ones.
You would also have to bend down to get to the lower shelves of the refrigerator.
Bottom Freezer Refrigerator
The bottom freezer refrigerator is the opposite of the previous type, with the freezer compartment at the bottom.
It keeps your refrigerator at eye level while its freezer is at the bottom. The downside is you'd have to bend down to access this compartment.
Instead of a door, you get a freezer drawer that you pull out to access your freezer, much like a French door design. It does provide more storage space in this section.
These are best for people who rarely use freezers. That way, they don't have to worry about the occasional defrosting needed to maintain that compartment.
How to Find the Right Refrigerator for You
Nowadays, refrigerators come in different sizes and feature different technology. It can be overwhelming to look into these features, especially with how much can go on with one appliance.
It's best to narrow them down to help you know which features would help you daily.
You need to consider these factors to find the right refrigerator for you.
Type/Configuration
As previously mentioned, refrigerators come in different types and configurations. Some may have doors or freezers placed differently from others.
Some might prefer a French door model, while others might prefer a side-by-side. You might need a specific type of refrigerator because of what you buy and the number of people in your household.
These types vary in cost and features, affecting a person's preference. Some might have to settle for a specific type because of their budget.
It's best to know the type of refrigerator you want and what would best fit your lifestyle.
Size/Exterior Dimensions
When choosing a refrigerator, take note of its size, both inside and out.
You'd need to measure the space in advance, taking note of the height, depth, and width dedicated to the appliance.
Adding a few inches of clearance is best so your refrigerator won't be wedged into the space. The space also helps the fridge work better, letting heat dissipate as it works.
The interior space would also affect how much you put into it. You can dedicate a bigger space for groceries or adjust your purchases to get a smaller refrigerator.
Finish
The refrigerator's finish is another factor to consider since it will affect the appearance of your kitchen.
It can come in stainless steel, black, white, and other colors. You can choose one that best fits your other appliances and your kitchen's décor.
Some may even have a glass door option that lets you choose what to take out without opening the fridge. However, this may require you to organize your refrigerator more to keep everything nice and presentable.
Choosing the finish that best fits your kitchen is ideal, especially with the variety available. Refrigerators tend to have different finishes for one model.
Brand
Appliances come in different brands, including refrigerators. Some can specialize in certain types of refrigerators or can excel with their cooling technology compared to others.
The best refrigerator brands you can consider are LG, Bosch, GE, Whirlpool, Samsung, Frigidaire, and KitchenAid. They are the best in terms of functions, designs, and longevity.
These brands can also have smaller and more compact refrigerators for dormitories and apartments.
The brand you choose can affect the features you get. Some brands are more high-tech or high-end than others. It would also affect the cost as others tend to be more expensive.
Researching the specific brand of your refrigerator can affect how you choose your new appliance.
Refrigerator Space
This space can vary depending on the design and style you purchase. Those with a deeper and wider fridge would automatically have more space.
Normally, a fridge compartment can hold more cubic feet (cu. ft.) than a freezer. However, it can also depend on the model and the brand itself.
Different models can have their unique ways of keeping this space organized, from shelves to refrigerator drawers. There would even be compartments specifically for fresh food storage.
Check the build of the refrigerator shelves to see how much they can hold.
Its door shelves also tend to be affected by the price. Some can have a higher capacity than others.
Freezer Space
The size of your freezer tends to be affected by the refrigerator space and its model. Some freezers tend to be smaller than others
When getting a new refrigerator, it's best to consider how much space you'd need for the freezer. Check how many cubic feet (cu. ft.) it can hold and compare it to other similar styles if required.
You can also check the freezer door for any extra compartments you can use.
Ice Maker/Water Dispenser
Dispensers tend to be more of a luxury feature commonly found in a French door refrigerator or a side-by-side refrigerator.
Some people might find this feature necessary, while others can have separate appliances for them. The benefit of having an ice maker and water dispenser is that you have everything in one machine.
It's usually easier to forego the ice maker since you could always get an ice tray. It would take up more space in the freezer, but it's a lot cheaper.
Know your preference in advance. It's best to skip these features if you think you're not going to use them, especially since they do add to the cost.
Additional Features
Refrigerators can come with extra features besides dispensers. These can add to the things your refrigerator can do to make life easier or improve how you manage it.
These are some of the additional features you can get, depending on the kind of refrigerator you get:
Water Filtration System: Some built-in water dispensers can come with a filtration system to provide more refreshing water.
Flexible Compartment: If you notice that your refrigerator has an extra door or drawer, it can be used as extra storage space for fresh and frozen foods. Its temperature is easily adjusted to match the type of food you'll be putting in.
Smart Functions: These additional functions are usually what make refrigerators more high-tech. You can adjust and monitor your refrigerator from a phone or tablet using Wi-Fi connectivity.
Swiveling Door Bin: This feature is usually found in refrigerators with a door-in-door design, allowing access to some of the contents without opening the main doors
Inventory Trackers: Some of the smarter refrigerators can note if you're running low on certain items in your refrigerator to help you come up with a shopping list.
Through-the-Door Ice Dispensers: This type of ice maker makes it more convenient for you to get ice. Most through-the-door ice dispensers tend to be combined with the water dispenser for easier convenience.
Door-in-Door Shelves: This design allows you to easily access shelves without opening the whole door. Having a door-in-door would also limit the cool air escaping.
While these features may sound fantastic, it's best to ONLY get those you're sure to need daily. They can be the reason why your refrigerator is expensive.
Energy Star Ratings
Appliances are required to have their energy ratings listed, as these affect the environment and your electricity bill.
If you notice that a refrigerator is Energy Star Certified, they're sure to be energy-efficient, as tested by professionals.
It can lower your electricity bill and lessen your carbon footprint, making it an excellent investment in the long run.
Retailers
You can opt to purchase your refrigerator from the manufacturer itself or through a local retailer. It usually depends on what is more convenient for you.
If you're looking into retailers, comparing prices and the service they provide is best. Some retailers may offer more for a product at a more affordable price.
It's also best to go to retailers trusted by the manufacturer to ensure that you only get the best models. These would also include the warranties and accessories that normally come with buying from the manufacturer.
Price
While entry-level models would cost around $400, I recommend going for the more expensive basic models if you're looking for something cheap. These should be about $750.
The standard models can cost from $1,500 to $1,800. However, it can go up to $4,000, depending on the brand, design, and features.
Additional features tend to heavily contribute to the price of the refrigerator. Know which features are necessary for your daily activities.
It's best to set a specific budget so you'll know which refrigerators can be considered for your home. This will prevent you from overspending on the appliance.
Warranties
The usual warranty for a refrigerator is one year. However, it can also depend on the manufacturer.
It's best to look into the warranties provided, as this ensures the craftsmanship of your appliance. If something happens, warranties can cover damages as per terms and conditions.
Some manufacturers can offer expanded or extended warranties for an additional price. However, these tend to be more expensive than repairs or even replacing your refrigerator.
How long do refrigerators last?
On average, refrigerators usually last around 10 to 12 years.
Many factors can affect the longevity of your refrigerator. You’ll have to consider its make and quality, how well you maintain it, and how much you use it.
Its environment can also affect its longevity. Refrigerators that are moved a lot or are exposed to garages and environmental changes can easily break down.
To extend your refrigerator’s lifespan, it’s recommended to have the coils and compressor cleaned every six months. Do it more regularly if you have pets or lots of dust at home.
What is a standard-sized refrigerator?
A refrigerator’s size usually depends on the type of fridge you’re getting. You’ll also have to look into the model of the refrigerator.
In terms of width, a standard-sized refrigerator would usually fall between 24 to 40 inches. Of course, wider refrigerators won’t fit in smaller spaces.
The standard height of a refrigerator falls between 62 to 72 inches. Bottom freezer and top freezer models tend to be on the smaller end of the spectrum.
Depth for standard refrigerators tends to be between 24 to 40 inches. It can provide more space for your food, beverages, and other cold storage needs.
These are all relative and can change according to the model and style of your refrigerator.
My Top Picks
Now that you know more about choosing the best refrigerators based on what your kitchen needs, you might want to know the stand-out options on this list.
Here's a recap of my top picks for the best refrigerators in the market.
If you don't mind splurging a little for your refrigerator, I recommend this 27.7-Cu. Ft. smart refrigerator from Samsung.
It has many reliable features, like the ice dispenser, deli drawer, and more. On top of that is its ability to help you in the kitchen with its smart technology.
Whether it's to store food or search for a recipe online, this high-tech French door refrigerator is one of the best in the market.
Suppose you're looking for the best refrigerator, this 27-Cu. Ft. French door fridge from LG is the one for you.
It has an internal ice/water dispenser, a door-in-door design, and all the needed accessories to keep your food fresh and ready to eat.
Conclusion
Finding the best refrigerator for your kitchen doesn't have to be tricky as long as you know your budget and the features your home will need.
Know which will be best for your household, especially with this large investment.
Cartooning is so much more than simply drawing a few figures - without good writing, the best of artwork has no value.
And similarly, if the cartooning characters aren't expressive enough, even the wittiest of one-liners and jokes fall flat.
Drawing cartoons isn't just about exaggerating a few facial features or comedic timing. Every artist has a style of their own, which they display in their stories and characters and their perspectives on the goings-on of the world around us.
Such a complicated craft requires a deft master and someone you can look to for advice. If you have to reach the top, you have to stand on the shoulders of giants first.
Without further ado, the best cartooning books follow!
Best Cartooning Books
Do you want to learn how to create your own cartoon characters and comics? Cartooning is a great way to express yourself creatively and tell stories. Here is the list of 8 best cartooning books to help you get started:
If you're new to the game and you don't know where to start, this is it. This book isn't exactly a step-by-step guidebook rather, it's about the art of cartooning itself and what it's all about.
This book takes an in-depth look at how storytelling works, what's most important when conceptualizing characters, and all the types of media and tools you can experiment with. But it also delivers solid knowledge of all the fundamental elements of comic book design.
This is the ideal book for forging your personal style and discovering your own design and virtual language. In the beginning, you'd be in dire need of some perspective, and there's no better person to learn from than Ivan Brunetti, who has been featured several times in the NY Times and the New Yorker.
Contents
Ivan Brunetti presents 15 distinct lessons on cartooning and its progression through the ages. All these lessons are very wittily worded and have a lot of detail on common terminology, popular techniques, helpful tools, and of course, theory.
Brunetti's own illustrations make this a very lively book -and you will start with spontaneous drawings and then move to single-panel strips and ultimately, complicated multi-page stories. Simple exercises and assignments will help you move past your fears and will help you become more confident in your skills.
Author: Ivan Brunetti | Publication Year: 2011 | Format: Paperback | Page Count: 128 | Target Audience: Adults, Art Students | Skill Level: Intermediate | Key Topics Covered: Cartooning concepts, exercises, history
Everything about a cartoon begins at the face -all emotions are conveyed through the face, and the comic panel starts with a cartoon character's facial expressions.
This book focuses on all the elements of a cartoon character's face and how it can be painted to elicit specific emotions from the characters and the readers. Christopher Hart is one of the best in the business when it comes to writing art books, and this one is no exception.
If the last book on our list was about getting an overall perspective, this is the step-by-step guide.
Contents
This book is the ultimate tutorial on the head, face, and expressions. This book has detailed sections on the eyebrows, mouths, and eye shapes so that you can cover a wide spectrum of emotions.
If that's not enough, there are also chapters on both male and female faces, from newborn babies to adults, in differing shapes and sizes.
It's not enough to know just how to draw a face, you will also need to learn how to turn that face in different directions, all the while maintaining the visual integrity of the character. There is also a chapter on shading the face and a bonus chapter on how to draw body parts conforming to the face.
This book is geared towards absolute beginners who have no background in art but have a knack for coming up with comic situations and witty words.
The caricature is the only form of the comic which have real-life people as their inspirations. Most celebrities and world-renowned people have a unique set of facial characteristics, which are then exaggerated to comic effect.
It can be hard to teach someone to distort facial features while still keeping the rest of the features proportional. Thus it can only be taught by someone like the award-winning Tom Richmond, who draws on three decades of experience as a caricaturist, in various fields such as books, advertising, video games, film, television animation, and even MAD magazine.
Contents
Every chapter focuses on something different, and it will teach you how to notice subtle differences in everyone, and then you can decide on what to exaggerate.
You'll be taught how to observe faces and people and then what to exaggerate to make for a successful caricature. You'll learn about all the different types of caricatures depending on what you're drawing for.
Put simply, "The Mad Art of Caricature!" is the Holy Grail of the book drawing caricatures. It is the most comprehensive and complete book on the art of caricature to ever be published with over 500 illustrations, laid out in a very reader-friendly way.
This book is regarded as one of the classic art books and is one of the most popular cartooning books available for sale online. If Cartoon Faces only covered the face, this book provides a more holistic and all-around approach to drawing cartoons.
This book is targeted to everyone regardless of age or artistic talent or experience. The only requirement is that you are a fan of doodling and you want to get better at it.
Contents
It's hard to find a book that simplifies things to a greater extent than this one. The whole human anatomy is broken down into a series of very easily realizable shapes. It has over 3000 illustrations, to teach you how to draw everything from facial muscles to postures to motion.
The best feature about this book is that it is designed so that you can go at your own pace from one chapter to another. You can also very easily pick up where you left off, even if you took a months-long break.
However, the only drawback is that the painting style feels like the Sunday comics in a newspaper. It might feel a little dated and old-school, but it is still an excellent book for beginners.
This is the second book by Christopher Hart that's on our list. Anthropomorphizing animals is nothing new and has been around since Tom and Jerry. Early MGM Studios and Disney did a lot to make animal cartoons popular.
This book regularly makes the top 50 Art Books lists and is super popular online, in no small measure due to its immense simplicity and the sheer number of different animals you will learn to draw with the help of this book.
Contents
This book is divided into chapters depending on the kind of animal you wish to draw. Each of these chapters has in-depth information on how to capture every different emotion and how to draw each body part of that animal like faces, paws, feet, wings, and tails. In total, this book numbers more than 200 pages.
All the popular animals are present - which includes cats, dogs, horses, lions, penguins, bears, tigers, and elephants. Apart from that, you also have all the sidekick animals like pigs, kangaroos, giraffes, and turtles.
Simple, guided tutorials show you how to portray every emotion from cutesy-sweet with huge eyes to begging to scheme with malicious eyes. There are similar instructions for drawing animals that fit certain roles from baby animals to villains to completely clueless animals and much more.
Leaving the generic title aside, this book does have a lot of cool stuff in it. At its heart, it is a very simple drawing book aimed at teachers and students. As a result, it's mostly suited for children and early beginners.
If you've got some amount of experience as an artist, it's better to buy a more advanced book. In fact, this is a series of books. If you want a more advanced book, you could consider purchasing the other, more focused installments in this series.
Contents
Each chapter of the book starts off with a small introduction to the technique, fundamentals, and how to start your paintings with an end goal in mind.
However, right after, it wastes no time diving right into step-by-step illustrations. This book teaches you the basic principles of illustration by showing you how to draw simple shapes that eventually turn into complex drawings.
The best feature of this book is that, at the end of every chapter, there is a series of fun and hands-on exercises. These exercises will help you look at an object or a figure as an artist would - as a series of interconnected lines, shapes, and other elements. Also, these exercises will ensure you retain whatever you learned in that chapter.
From hyperrealistic portraits to holiday themes and tropes to drawings of tattoos, How To Draw Cool Stuff makes everything a cakewalk and explains everything as you would to a 5-year-old, literally.
Author: Catherine V. Holmes | Publication Year: 2014 | Format: Paperback | Page Count: 253 | Target Audience: Kids, Teens, Adults, Art Students | Skill Level: Beginner/Intermediate | Key Topics Covered: Optical illusions, 3D shapes, shading, textures
This is the third book by the same author on our list and is one of his best-known titles. This one takes an in-depth look at character creation for illustrators.
Creating a likable and engaging character is the most important facet of creating a cartoon character. Before you get started with telling your stories, you first have to make up an enigmatic character.
Contents
This book takes away all the guesswork and uncertainty when it comes to creating a cartoon character by simply providing the reader with a very fresh and easy approach. This book is highly influenced by the most popular cartoon characters of our times and aims to show certain similarities among them.
It's s 160 pages long and is full of lively illustrations that provide a guided approach to conceiving and creating interesting characters. Chris's guides are super detailed, and he teaches the reader to observe a drawing and then improve upon it with their own ideas.
This book is chock-a-block full of useful tips and hints, and it will give you all the help you need to let your imagination run riot.
Author: Christopher Hart | Publication Year: 2013 | Format: Paperback | Page Count: 160 | Target Audience: Teens, Adults, Art Students | Skill Level: Beginner/Intermediate | Key Topics Covered: Cartooning styles, character design, storytelling
All the other books on this list either focus on certain types of cartoons, like faces, people, animals, etc. or they are beginner's guides to getting started.
None of them are complete or all-around books, though, which cover every aspect of creating cartoons. This book aims to accomplish the hardest task of all - give the reader an artistic vision so they can give their cartoons their own distinct style and shape.
It's the most all-around cartooning book you can buy, which has a huge amount of depth and covers almost everything in today's world of cartoons, making it great value for money.
Contents
This book has over 200 pages and teaches you how to draw almost everything from fantasy characters to background designs to common pop icons.
This book has step-by-step guides on how to draw cartoon people and cartoon animals, retro-style "toons'," and even robots like Wall-E. These guides are detailed and complete in every respect from the design to the composition to explaining exactly what is appealing about the cartoon.
The Humongous Book of Cartooning isn't just big, it has a huge number of tips and hints that Chris is famous for. The eye-catching characters and extensive visuals pack with them more instructions and guidelines than any Chris Hart book before it. In short, if you want to buy one book that covers most of everything about drawing cartoons, this is it!
Author: Christopher Hart | Publication Year: 2011 | Format: Paperback | Page Count: 256 | Target Audience: Kids, Teens, Adults, Art Students | Skill Level: Beginner/Intermediate | Key Topics Covered: Cartooning techniques, character design, storytelling
Cartooning techniques, character design, storytelling
Are there any free online resources for learning cartooning?
Yes, there are many free online resources for learning cartooning, including tutorial videos on YouTube, blogs, and forums where artists share tips and advice. However, keep in mind that not all online resources are of equal quality, and it can be difficult to gauge the accuracy and reliability of information found online.
Can cartooning books help me develop my own style?
Yes, while cartooning books typically teach a specific style or approach to cartooning, they can also provide a foundation for you to develop your own unique style. By learning the fundamentals of character design, anatomy, and composition, you can experiment with different techniques and create your own cartooning style.
Do I need to have drawing experience to read cartoon books?
No, you don’t necessarily need to have drawing experience to read cartooning books. Many books are geared toward beginners and provide step-by-step instructions for drawing basic shapes, characters, and expressions. However, having some basic drawing skills and familiarity with art supplies can be helpful.
How long does it take to learn to cartoon?
The time it takes to learn cartooning can vary depending on your level of commitment and dedication, as well as your natural talent and artistic abilities. Some people may pick up the basics quickly and be able to create simple cartoons within a few weeks, while others may need months or even years of practice to develop their skills.
Are there cartoon books specifically for children?
Yes, cartooning books specifically designed for children use simple language and illustrations to teach basic cartooning skills. Some popular options include “Cartooning for Kids” by Mark Bergin, “How to Draw Cartoons for Kids” by Christopher Hart, and “The Kids’ Guide to Drawing Cartoons” by Mark Kistler.
Can cartooning books help me make a career as a cartoonist?
While reading cartooning books can certainly help you develop your skills as a cartoonist, there are many factors that go into building a successful career in this field. In addition to artistic talent and skill, you may also need to develop business skills, build a portfolio, network with other artists, and seek out professional opportunities in the industry.
Conclusion
Thank you for taking the time to read through our article on the best cartooning books! It's evident that there are several amazing choices out there, each addressing different aspects of the art. We hope that the insights provided in this article have fueled your excitement for cartooning and will assist you in taking your skills to new heights.
Out of these 8 best cartooning books, here are our top three recommendations:
Ivan Brunetti's Cartooning | Philosophy and Practice is an ideal option for those who want to forge their personal style and discover their design and visual language. With Brunetti's lively illustrations and engaging lessons, this book is perfect for intermediate artists who want to deepen their understanding of the cartoon world.
Cartoon Faces | How to Draw Heads, Features, and Expressions by Christopher Hart is a good option for absolute beginners or intermediate artists who want a step-by-step guide on drawing cartoon faces. The detailed sections on various facial features and the coverage of different age groups make this book an essential resource for mastering the ability to convey emotions through cartoon expressions.
The Mad Art of Caricature | A Serious Guide to Drawing Funny Faces by Tom Richmond is the right choice for those who are passionate about caricature art. This book offers a comprehensive guide to observing real-life people and their features, teaching you how to exaggerate them effectively for the perfect caricature. If you want to level up your skills in this specialized form of cartooning, this book is the one for you.
As you continue to explore and develop your cartooning skills, remember that practice is key. Keep experimenting with new techniques, learn from these excellent resources, and most importantly, let your imagination run wild. Stay passionate about your art and have fun on this exciting journey! Happy cartooning!
Children from the 90s' and earlier times had a lot of fun watching those spectacular superhero movies and cartoon shows.
But to get an action figure inspired by their favorite hero, they had to wait till their parents took them to a toy store, that too a 'good' one.
All this now seems a thing of the distant past, as online toy stores have come into the picture. There are a plethora of such stores right now, each, in turn, having hundreds of options. It's just about logging on to a suitable store and choosing the toy. Then on, it's a matter of minutes, and your toy is booked!
Selecting the right store is the only difficulty you might face, with such a huge number of websites available. This lone task will also become easy for you, as we've picked the 33 best online toy stores from the unlimited choices available.
As one of the biggest online stores and perhaps the most obvious inclusion in the list, Amazon needs no introduction. It has a collection of millions of toys of a wide variety as well and hence is evidently the largest available online source of toys.
With great variety comes the difficulty in making the right choice, which is where several filters of Amazon can help you out. The site also lets you check best-sellers and new releases in separate sections, which are updated on a daily basis.
Amazon offers several perks, including free two-day shipping to those who have subscribed to Amazon Prime. For the rest who do not have a Prime subscription, a shipping fee is mostly applicable.
Toy Wiz
For a child who loves to own new collectible toys such as fidget spinners, and special action figures, there is no better place than ToyWiz. You may even find those rare Pokemon cards available in their collection.
Besides, if your little one is waiting for a toy scheduled to release soon, you can book one of the first of the lots through a pre-order sale. There are lots of exciting pre-orders featured on the site.
The company has been in the e-commerce business for more than a decade and hence is a trustworthy name. It is also loved by buyers for the excellent customer service it offers. As for the shipping fees, the standard costs are $5.99 for a seven to ten-day delivery and $29 for a three to five-day one.
Toy Universe
True to its name, this store is indeed a separate world of toys, with thousands of different items available on the website. Despite having started in Australia, it is now delivering orders in New Zealand and the United States as well.
Besides popular brands and new arrivals, you will also find a whole lot of creative and educational games and toys on this website. For instance, the range of art and craft games would help to instill creativity by fueling a child's imagination.
A uniform shipping charge of $9.95 is applicable for orders across Australia, excluding bulky ones. The international charge is calculated during the checkout of an item. It depends upon the location, the items in the order, and the delivery service you choose.
The renowned retail store chain in the United States also offers a large online collection of toys to its consumers. By browsing through the toys section of the website, you will discover a lot of offers applicable to many of the items.
This store has several interesting categories of toys available, which will appeal to any child who has that creative streak in him or her. For instance, the pretend-and-play section has toys that let children dress up to be their favorite cartoon or fairytale character.
The website offers free shipping facilities for orders of $35 or more. For purchases less than that amount, a flat fee of $5.99 is charged. But additional charges may be associated with products not bought and sold directly through Walmart.
Toys R Us
An iconic name in the world of Toys, this store went through a tough time in the last few years due to the growth of online toy shopping sites.
Quite recently, it was revived by a partnership with another leading toy company. The Toys R Us website is currently alive and well and is much loved by consumers.
The large variety of toys offered by the store can give tough competition to the leading online e-commerce platforms. Besides, the website also brings you toys from the most sought-after brands such as Disney, Marvel, and Mattel.
Toys R Us has different websites dedicated to different delivery regions and ties to maintain a moderate shipping rate for consumers. The charge is calculated on the weight and dimensions of the items, the shipping method you choose, and the delivery location.
Another online e-commerce platform that offers an immense variety of toys to choose from is Fish Pond. It has dozens of categories for the toy section, with each category listing hundreds of thousands of options. So there remains little doubt about whether you will get what you are looking for.
Also, you can find the most interesting collectible toys on the website, including exclusive Hot Wheels models and rare DC collectible action figures. For the little Marvel and DC comic lovers, this site has quite a lot to offer!
The icing on the cake is that Fish Pond offers free shipping to its consumers worldwide, which is a rare phenomenon indeed! Thus, gifting a toy to that little cousin of yours who lives far away won't be expensive at all.
The most interesting aspect of this store is that it specializes in toys that facilitate brain development in children. As such, Fat Brain Toys has carved its own niche in the toy business and is quite popular among consumers.
Each educational learning game and toy available in the store is designed to focus on the intellectual growth of a child. Also, the website has separate sections featuring its new releases and best-sellers, which cater to two different sets of consumers.
The store has a flat shipping rate for its consumers within the United States which is as low as $3.99. The items are shipped via UPS Ground. Whereas, international shipping costs include the standard shipping rate plus the customs fees for the destination country.
One of the earliest names in the world of toys, this store started its journey as early as in the 1700s in London with the name 'Noa's Ark'. Without a doubt, it is one of the best in the business and never fails to impress its customers.
Besides a wide variety of toys, the online store offers innumerable options that come at quite affordable prices, making it all the more popular. Also, the store offers quite a convenient return policy if the toys fail to meet your expectations.
Till now, the online toy store delivers products to 27 regions within Europe. A shipping charge of £3.99 is applicable to items shipped within the UK, while a fee of £9 is charged for delivering to 27 destinations in Europe.
A department store with a diverse and fun-filled toy corner, Kohl's online toy collection has an assortment of some of the finest games and toys available.
The particular categories of toys that impress Kohl's customers are its outdoor toys, children's bikes, wagons, and pools. Also, the filters available on the website are quite convenient, helping customers get just the toy they are looking for.
As for the shipping charges, orders above $75 are eligible for free standard shipping, whereby the product is delivered within 3-6 days. The store also offers a free ship-to-store option. For orders below that amount, a shipping fee of $8.95 is applicable. The 2-day shipping charge for products priced at below $100 is $19.95.
This is another online store that offers a variety of products, including toys, and is quite popular among customers. The affordable prices of all the goods sold here have played a major role in increasing its popularity.
The online store has a huge variety of toys which range from the newest in the market to the antique collectible ones. And all of these come at prices hard to believe!
Target offers free shipping for orders above $35, another factor that contributes to its popularity. Besides, with a Target Red Card, you are eligible for free two-day shipping on the majority of items on the website. The store allows consumers to pick up their orders from their nearest Target store.
eBeanstalk
Are you looking to buy toys suitable for a child of a particular age? In that case, this store will be the right place to search in. There is also a great variety of toys in the store.
A great shopping tool on this site classifies the toys available according to the age and gender they are fit for. This is achieved with the help of experts in child psychology. Interestingly, this store has a collection of attractive furniture for children such as little cabinets, table and chair sets, and school house tents.
Ebeanstalk offers free shipping for orders above $49 and the delivery generally takes two to five days. The store also arranges overnight shipping or international expedited shipping for specific orders, which can be availed by calling on the toll-free number.
This is another great online store based in the United Kingdom and belongs to the Entertainer, the largest independent retail company of the country. You can get any The updated stock of the latest toys offered ensures that you get any new arrival.
Besides, a unique present finder feature on the website helps consumers to come up with a perfect toy to gift for a special occasion. Furthermore, they can also sign up for free to an email newsletter on the latest toys and hottest deals available.
As for shipping within the UK, it is free for orders above 39.99£, while a fee of 3.99£ is charged for those below that amount. The Toy Shop also delivers its products worldwide, with shipping charges depending upon the location.
The company to come up with world-famous toys such as Barbie and Hotwheels, Mattel can well be called a toy connoisseur. It is another trustworthy name in the business, which has had a steady loyal consumer base.
The online store consists of toys from reputed brands such as Jurassic World, BTS, and Disney's Toy Story. You can also find several rare collectible toys on the website, including action figures, animal figures, and classic playsets. In short, it is a wonderland for toys!
The standard shipping rate for the US is $9.95, while for Canada it is $10. The international shipping fee is as high as $60 for orders of less than $170. Signing up as a VIP member would make you eligible for free shipping offers, discounts on first orders, and many more rewards.
The online store based in the UK has as much as three decades of experience in toy production, a rare distinction indeed. As the name suggests, the website brings children toys designed to make learning a playful journey.
Categorized according to a child's age, the toys help to build the intellectual ability fit for that age. Each toy is interesting in its own way and would keep a child absorbed, in addition to the fun they would get out of it. Besides, the customers are also guaranteed that the toys are proven safe for the kids.
Apart from the UK, the online store delivers toys to 80 countries across Europe, Africa, Asia, and the Middle East. The shipping charge depends upon the location. For delivery within the UK, free shipping is applicable for products priced at more than 50£.
If your little one is a huge Marvel or DC fan, then this is the number one online store to browse through for toys. The store exclusively focuses on action figures inspired by the favorite comic superheroes across generations.
Interestingly, you can find a pre-order collection consisting of some of the best upcoming toys in the block. Among the currently featured toys are a Transformers 2.0 Starscream masterpiece and a statue of the popular Harry Potter character Rubeus Hagrid.
The website offers worldwide shipping, with the charges being calculated based on the product weight and dimensions. The international shipping rates do not include any taxes or customs fees that might be charged in the destination country.
This massive online retail store also features a vast collection of new toys and games at quite affordable prices. Over the years, it has become one of the most famous and well-performing online retail platforms.
There is also immense variety in the toys that the site offers. The collection includes some rare categories such as pretend and play and outdoor gaming equipment. You are sure to find some of the most exciting new arrivals as well.
The website offers standard free shipping daily on orders over $45 in 48 states of the US, excluding Alaska and Hawaii. For orders below $45, a charge of $4.95 is applicable.
The online store also delivers to 180 countries across the globe. The international shipping rates depend on the delivery service, the product type, weight and dimensions, and the destination postal code.
Over the ages, Disney has won the hearts of children and adults alike through its legendary animated shows on t.v and grand big-screen ventures. Besides this, its online store has an ever-attractive collection of toys.
The online Disney store is heaven for kids in the true sense as it features all the legendary action figures from its television shows and animated films. It also includes toys, games, and other merchandise from popular franchises such as Marvel, National Geographic, and Star Wars.
The Disney store offers several attractive deals on toy prices, and the shipping rate varies according to the price range. As for international shipping, the charges depend upon the size of the product and the destination.
Though this online store is well known for its range of industrial products, it is also a dominant name in the toy business. There are various categories of toys and games on offer in the toy & collectibles section of the website.
The toy vehicles category particularly draws the attention of visitors to the website. This category offers plenty of amazing and rare options to choose from. Some examples are toy tractors of different types, wagons, and remote-controlled monster treads.
To date, the online store delivers products to all states within the US. You will be delighted to know that it offers free shipping for any order worth more than $50. The charge applicable for orders of $25 to $49 is $11, while a fee of $8.5 is charged for orders below $25.
The online store is named after the renowned comic creator Todd McFarlane who is also its founder. Hence, it goes without saying that the store features many toys based on some of the incredible characters from McFarlane comics.
The online site brings forth toys that would appeal to different age groups. For instance, while it has action figures of characters from the Batman comics, it also includes a collection of toys based on The Game of Thrones.
Currently, the McFarlane store is featured as a separate toy store on Amazon's website. It also sells its products through many other online e-commerce platforms. The shipping charges applicable for the toys would hence depend on the e-commerce site which you are using.
Imagine Toys
This online toy store based in Michigan has gained a prominent place in the toy industry. It offers a fresh collection of toys to consumers, different from the bulk that is present in mass-market toy stores.
The store offers a vast range of toys that can be plenty of fun for kids and at the same time have great educational play value. Also, the toys have been tested with children of the appropriate age to ensure psychological and educational development.
Furthermore, the store offers a hundred percent guarantee to take back a product you are not pleased with. Currently, the store delivers toys to locations within the US only. The shipping costs are calculated in the weight and dimensions of the items ordered. Deliveries are mostly completed within the next business day.
A niche online store dealing exclusively in baby toys, Fisher-price is undoubtedly one of the best few out there. The variety of baby toys you will find in this subsidiary of Mattel is immense.
Ranging kick and play piano gyms for infants to play and crawl toys for toddlers, this store has it all. Moreover, the site categorizes its toys according to the age range in months. In this way, it can be all the more easy for you to select the right baby toy for a child.
As regards the shipping charges, Fisher-Price ships order worth more than $50 for free. This offer excludes orders to Puerto Rico, Alaska, and Canada. You can also sign up as a VIP member to be eligible for various offers.
Kmart is one of the biggest online retail stores in the US and has gained immense popularity over the last few years. Evidently, the toy collection is huge and encompasses all the toy categories that you can think of.
Every kid cannot like the same kind of toy, and that's something you must always remember while you are getting a toy as a gift. This is why Kmart offers you lots and lots of different types of toys for boys and girls.
Moreover, the online store offers free shipping on orders over $49. Items sold through third-party sellers may be excluded from the free shipping list, so make sure you check the finer details.
Another iconic company dating back to 1932, LEGO is one of the world's leading toy manufacturers. The automatic building brick or the LEGO brick, a basic unit of every building game available now, is their very own product.
Apart from the regular categories of product type, price, and popularity, the online store lets you shop by themes and interests as well. This makes the process of choosing the right toy a lot easier.
Also, LEGO often has special sales on the online store where toys are sold at slashed prices. Toys are available on the site even before they reach the shelves of the LEGO stores. Products are shipped all over North America, with standard free shipping on orders above $35.
This popular online store features several categories of attractive merchandise for children, including toys and games. The products sold on the site are all listed at affordable prices and hence suit the budgets of one and all.
Apart from having a variety of options for toys, the site also has a classification of party themes where customers can pick their preferred toys for a particular event. The different toys available for each theme can help children explore their creativity.
You can get free shipping for toy orders worth more than $35 at the US Toys online store. For purchases of less than $35, a handling charge of $4.99 is applicable which will automatically apply during checkout.
Kiddlestix Toy Store
This leading toy store in the United States Oklahoma has a quite popular online shopping platform offering an appealing collection of toys.
Toys on this site help to foster the developmental growth of a child while encouraging them to have fun by engaging with the world. The cognitive and emotional well being of the child is also ensured in the process. Besides, there are toys available for several age groups including teens and young adults.
The site ensures a fast, fair, and efficient system of processing and shipping for you. The charges depend upon the shipping method you choose. Accordingly, the shipping cost is determined and the delivery rate is estimated during checkout.
The renowned toy store in Denver has an efficient and popular online store with all kinds of toys that you can think of. There is hardly any toy which you won't be able to find here.
Moreover, the online store offers quite pocket-friendly prices for the items sold here, which makes it hugely popular. Also if you are confused between the innumerable options while choosing a gist, the gift suggestions page is the perfect solution. It has gift certificates, play sets, and many more options featured.
The shipping rates for products on this online store vary with the items ordered and the shipping method chosen. Also, some products may be available through specific methods of shipping such as store pick up.
In an age when online toy stores are flooded with new arrivals and pre-order collections, Rogue Toys brings you an assortment of collectible and vintage toys.
The look and feel of the website induce nostalgia, taking you back to the times when the Simpsons and Star Wars were a rage. Apart from iconic cartoon characters and television series, toys are inspired by superheroes and villains from timeless comic books as well.
The online store ships its orders via postal services such as USPS, UPS, and FedEx. You have to choose the service you prefer, and the charge varies accordingly. The shipping rate charged by such services depends upon the weight of the items ordered.
The iconic brand that started its journey back in 1858, is currently one of the biggest online fashion retailers. Its online store features a vast section of all sorts of toys available at quite affordable prices.
You will be able to narrow down your search for toys with the help of a number of filters such as age range, toy or game type, characters, and brands. Apart from this, there is also a section that features the top-rated toys by customers.
Macy's ships its products to as many as 100 countries across the world, allowing foreign customers to get hold of their amazing toys. For international shipping, it has partnered with global e-commerce company Borderfree which calculates the cost during checkout.
Voted the best toys store in New City by the New York Magazine, this store has the perfect toys collection that any child will just love! The website of this store is equally amazing, with its user-friendly interface and the intact collection put forward online.
All the toys that you will find in the store are carefully chosen and organized for suiting a wide range of ages and preferences. Interestingly, the home page of the online store features the top toys on offer under the title "staff-picks".
Kidding Around ships its products within the United States via UPS or USPS. As such, the shipping costs for these postal service companies are applicable.
Labeled as one of the top toy stores in the world in an article by USA Today, this famous toy store offers toys of hundreds of different kinds. The online toy store can be accessed via Amazon.
OP Taylor has three toy stores at different locations in the United States. Interestingly, many of the toys sold are produced in its store located in downtown Brevard which covers an area of 6000 square feet. The website which is featured on Amazon includes most of the products available at the store.
Amazon's shipping charges and services are applicable for this store's orders. The shipping rate is dependent on the product weight and dimensions and the delivery location.
This impressive online store for gifts and stationery also houses an attractive collection of handmade toys. A variety of colorful toys for different age groups are present in the store.
A unique aspect of Tantrum's toys is that they showcase a fusion of the classic and mid-century styles with the best of modern art. Also, all the toys are curated within the theme of a lively old-fashioned circus.
Any visitor to this online store would be transported to a time of nostalgic beauty and fun. Instances of toys sold on the website are French dolls, Danish mice, and a toy tea set designed in France by Djeco.
The online store ships its products to locations within the United States. The shipping charges vary with the toy being bought and the delivery location.
Buy Buy Baby
A one-stop shop for all baby care products, this online store offers a wide range of toys as well. Its user-friendly interface makes the site easily navigable by anyone.
You shall also find a number of useful filters in the toy section, such as product type, price, ratings, brands, and book themes. Besides, the online store also has a provision for a "price match promise." Consumers are offered similar prices to other stores if they can show proof of getting a better price at another store.
As regards the shipping rate, the online store provides free standard shipping on orders above $30. For orders worth less than that amount, a fee of $5.99 is charged. Currently, the store ships products within the United States only.
This online toy store based in Los Angeles has become a leading name in the business due to its rising popularity. Recently, it was voted the best alternative for Toys R Us in a poll conducted by LA Weekly.
You will find it all in this online store, whether it's a unique toddler toy, a building kit, or a dollhouse. There are even some great antique toys available on the website. Furthermore, the online store lets you sort the results based on a number of options such as popularity, price, rating, and the latest items.
Currently, the store delivers products within the United States only. The shipping method and subsequent costs are calculated before checkout based on the destination postal code.
Conclusion
With this, we come to the end of our comprehensive list of the 33 best online toy stores. We hope the task of choosing a suitable store will be much easier for you now.
Before we sign off, we would like to put forward the options we consider noteworthy among these online toy stores for their different useful features. Target will be a good website to log on to for someone on the lookout for pocket-friendly options.
Toy Universe offers a greater variety than many other options on the list, making sure that you find the one toy you are searching for. Niche toy stores such as Big Bad Toy Store and Fat Brain Toys will be ideal places if you are sure about the kind of toy you want.
Do let us know whether you agree with our choice in the comments section. Till next time!
In every kitchen spices and salts are being used, they add flavor and taste in an unmistakable manner. Cooking is nothing without spices and most of us would love to have them at hand during the cooking process. Showcased below an organized creative kitchen storage idea has been envisioned to shelter your spices in line, at you grasp, ready to be used at any given time. The idea follows the same thread of thought as in "How to Build a Hidden Cabinet Knife Drawer Safe For Children ", article published a few days ago on Homesthetics.
In the search of incredible we have found under the cabinet spice racks that you can purchase directly if crafting is not an option, cast a glance over the items showcased below:
The small simple solution uses natural wood, comes at a very affordable price, and uses no mechanisms, sacrificing comfort to boost resilience a great deal, you can easily nestle the item in your kitchen design by painting it.
Handmade Hardwood Under Cabinet Mounted Spice Rack
A great ergonomic design defines this storage option. The rack is handmade and the materials used are of a very high quality. Mechanisms are making it very practical and comfortable to use throughout the day.
What do you think? Would you like to make these creative kitchen storage ideas your DIY project for this weekend or will you purchase custom storage solutions for your household? We would love to hear your opinion in the comment section below.
In order to not ruin your doors and walls to hang garlands, use adhesive hooks, ribbons, garland hangers, and twisty ties. You can also use fishing lines, zip ties, and floral wires to secure your garland in its place.
Christmas décor is incomplete without a hanging garland around the front door. They help complete the look of the holiday season, like spring, fall, or Easter. It provides that cheery and merry feeling that makes a special occasion actually special. So, hanging a garland is one of my favorite things to do around Christmas.
Yet, hanging a Christmas garland usually means drilling or hammering holes to put nails on the door frame, wall, or mantels. These permanent holes really ruin the look of your wall or door, and destroy its original look. Some people are also not so handy with the required tools.
To avoid this exact problem, I have a few solutions here to help you hang a garland or a Christmas wreath without damaging your walls, doors, or mantels.
Materials You Can Use
Adhesive hooks
Decorative ribbon
Garland hangers
Twisty ties
Nylon fishing line
Craft/Floral wire
Zip ties
How to Hang Garland Around Front Door
1. Using adhesive hooks
Adhesive hooks, or command hooks, are a great way to hang a Christmas garland or wreath. They come in different varieties of strength and hold up your garland without leaving any mark on the wall or door. There is no permanence of position either. You can move the hooks around to get the exact desired look.
You can use hooks for walls, doors, and staircases as well.
Hang garland on a door/wall using adhesive/command hooks
Follow the following instructions to get the perfect garland look on a wall.
Clean and dry the surface before applying the adhesive/command hooks
Apply the adhesive/command hooks at the desired positions
Hang garland on the hooks
Helpful Trick
Check the adhesive hook’s weight limit to make sure it can support your garland for extended periods of time.
Hang garland on a staircase using adhesive hooks
Clean and dry the surface of the staircase railing
Stick the adhesive hooks at the desired positions
Hang your garlands on the hooks
Add extra hooks in between to support the garland’s weight
Spread out the garland’s foliage to hide the hooks
Helpful Trick
Use clear wire or zip ties to organize your holiday garland further.
2. Using a decorative ribbon or twine
Decorative ribbons or twines add just the right amount of cheer to any holiday décor. So, they are the perfect option to help secure your garlands and wreaths.
Hang garland on a door/wall using decorative ribbons or twines
Tie the ribbon or twine to both ends of the garland
Tie the remaining ends of the ribbon or twine to a hook or any supportive place
Make the knot as elegant and crafty as possible to enhance the look
Hang garland on a staircase using decorative ribbons or twine
Wrap the garland around the staircase railing in the way you want
Now wrap the ribbon around it
Tie the ribbon or twine around the railing to secure the garland in place
Helpful Trick
Use a Christmas-themed ribbon to enhance the look of the holiday garland.
3. Using a garland hanger
Hanging a garland is made so much easier by using a metallic garland hanger. Since it uses spring tension to secure the garland in place, there is no use in drilling or hammering holes. Garland hangers are available for both single and double doors.
How to hang a garland using a garland hanger
Mount the garland hanger and adjust it according to your door’s width
Loop the garland over the center and the corner of the hanger
Adjust and fluff the foliage of the garland to fit your doorframe
Helpful Trick
To know how much garland you need for your door, double the length of the door and add the door’s width to that.
4. Using twisty ties
Twisty ties are an easy and colorful way to secure your garland to your staircase railing. Give your hallways Christmas cheer using these.
How to hang a garland on a staircase using twisty ties
Wrap the garland around your staircase railing in the style you want
Place a twisty tie every two feet to secure the garland in place
Make sure the twisty ties are twisted enough to ensure extra support
5. Using a nylon fishing line
Nylon fishing lines are an efficient way to tie a garland around the railing of your staircase since it helps to secure its place tightly.
Hanging garland on a staircase using a nylon fishing line
Start wrapping the garland around the railing from the bottom of the staircase
Wrap the nylon line around one end of the garland and the top of the banister
Tie a knot in the nylon line to make sure the garland stays in its place
Repeat the same method at the top of the staircase
Fluff the foliage of the garland to keep the nylon line out of view
Helpful Trick
Tie the center of the garland to the railing of your staircase to showcase a draping effect.
6. Using zip ties
Using a zip tie is pretty similar to using floral wire.
Hanging garlands on a wall/door using zip ties
Tie loops onto the garland using zip ties
Hang the loop of the zip tie to existing hooks on your wall
Alternatives to garlands
Apart from a Christmas garland, you can also charm up the holiday season by hanging wreaths as well as ribbons. Christmas laser lights are also becoming extremely popular these days as Christmas and holiday décor.
You can follow the following step-by-step instructions to hang a wreath around your house this holiday season.
Hanging a wreath using adhesive hooks
Follow the same method as for the garland
Hang your wreath on the hooks in the desired position
Hanging a wreath using nylon fishing line
Place a hook on the inner side of your door frame, with the part with the hook facing downwards
Tie one end of the nylon line around the hook and make a knot to secure it in place
Make sure the nylon line can go over the top of the door and is long enough to hang your wreath from the desired height outside
Tie the other end of the nylon line tightly around the wreath
Now, suspend your wreath from the inside of your door
Hanging a wreath using ribbon/twine
Loop one end of the ribbon/twine through the center of your wreath
Secure the ribbon/twine in place by making a knot with the two ends
Find any hook in your desired location to hang the wreath using the ribbon
Helpful Trick
Bind the ribbon using an elegant knot to add a style element.
Hanging a wreath using craft/floral wire
Loop the craft/floral wire through the back of your wreath
Use the loop to hang the wreath from a hook or a peg
Twist the wire to secure it in place
Add some decorative ribbon to hide the craft wire
Hanging a wreath using an over-the-door wreath hanger
Most over-the-door wreath hangers are made to fit standard-size doors and are made using a metallic frame. Thus, they are an excellent option in case you wish to hang a heavy wreath on your front door.
Place your wreath hanger over your door
In case you have an adjustable wreath hanger, check the hanging height
Hang your wreath on the hanger
Fluff the foliage of the wreath to showcase the Christmas spirit
Helpful Trick
Use a level to ensure the wreath hanger is installed straight.
Hanging Christmas lights
Hanging Christmas lights is the best way to kickstart your holiday season. Whether you hang them from your Christmas tree or you hang them outdoors, they definitely add to the Christmas cheer.
Hanging these lights around your staircase, on your front door, or around your Christmas tree mainly uses those same methods that any Christmas garland requires. But you need to remember to exercise safety and caution while hanging any garland since it can be very easy to hurt yourself.
How do I determine the length of garland I need for my front door?
As already mentioned in a helpful trick above, you can determine the length of garland you need for your door easily. Just measure the length and width of your front door using a measuring tape. Now double the length and add it to the width of the door. This is the amount of garland you need to wrap around your door once.
If you want to tie the garland around your front door more than once, adjust the length and width accordingly to get the needed length.
Can I use suction cups to hang a wreath/garland around my front door?
Yes, you can. There are several suction cup hooks that are designed specifically to hang garlands and wreaths. Make sure to check the weight limit on the suction cup against the weight of your garland or wreath. After that, it’s pretty much the same as using an adhesive hook.
Clean the area before attaching the suction cup. Give the cup a tug, and you are ready to attach your garland or wreath.
How do I store the garland after the holiday season is over?
After the holiday season comes and goes, and the garland is done spreading its cheer, it is time to store it away safely. Follow these steps to store your garland securely. After all, you might require them during the next holiday season.
Remove any of the added ornaments, ribbons, bells, etc.
Lay the garland flat and fold it in half
Gently align all the stems in the same direction
Layer all of it in a large Sterilite bin
The Sterilite bin helps to keep the bugs and the moisture away, protecting your precious garlands from getting ruined. It also helps to preserve the shape of the garland so that you can reuse it next year.
Will the garland be secure if I use tape to hang it around my front door?
You can technically use a few pieces of scotch tape to hang a garland around your front door. But don’t expect it to stay in place for longer than a few hours. This is because the adhesive power of scotch tape is not powerful enough to secure the garland in place for a long time.
Duct tape might be powerful enough to ensure longevity. But it will surely ruin the look of your perfect Christmas garland with its dull gray color.
Can I reuse the materials I use to hang the garland next year?
It depends on what material you’re asking about. You can definitely store away the adhesive hooks, wreath hangers, garland hangers, and ribbons and use them for decoration next year as well.
However, in the case of twine, floral wire, zip ties, nylon fishing line, and twisty ties, it is best to throw those away. Buy them afresh next year to make sure they perform their functions properly.
How do I ensure that the garland hangs evenly around my front door?
You can use a leveler to ensure the garland hanger is secured in a straight line. You can also use a scale or ruler to ensure the adhesive hooks or the suction cups are attached in a straight line. Additionally, make sure the length of the garland is enough to be wrapped around your front door. All this will help ensure that the garland hangs evenly around your door.
Conclusion
Who doesn’t like to add some Christmas cheer in the form of decorations? Plus, you don’t have to ruin your precious walls or doors to hang these decorations. Whether it’s a festive garland or a charming wreath, there is no need to ruin your freshly painted walls or your newly varnished doors.
Just use all these super easy methods to hang your garlands and wreaths without using nails. Save your walls and save your doors. And have a very Merry Christmas!
The Lyhope Christmas Net Lights are waterproof and have an auto turn-on/off feature, which makes it convenient to use them. Meanwhile, the Joomer Net Lights come with 8 different lighting modes and are UL-certified for easy installation.
Christmas lights offer endless possibilities to customize your holiday décor. Classic incandescent lights and delicate string lights are also available to add a traditional or subtle touch to your indoor or outdoor décor.
Decorative lights can instantly transform any space, creating an enchanting atmosphere, while adding a warm and inviting glow to your home. So, let’s check out 13 amazing net lights available in the United States.
13 Decorative Best Christmas Net Lights
1. LYHOPE: Best With Timer & Memory Function
What I like
Safe voltage of 30V
ETL certification for outdoor and indoor use
End to end connector that can connect up to three sets of lights
Eight lighting modes to choose from
Waterproof with an IP44 rating
What I don't like
The adapter is not waterproof
The Lyhope Low Voltage & Connectable Multi-Colored Christmas Net Lights are an excellent choice, thanks to their safe voltage of 30V. This is lower than the standard safe voltage of 36V, so these lights are perfect for indoor and outdoor use. The net lights come with an end-to-end connector that can be connected to up to three sets of lights, making it easy to decorate larger areas.
These lights are also waterproof with an IP44 rating, ensuring that they are protected from water splashes and dust. But note that the adapter is not waterproof, and a waterproof receptacle cover should be used when using the lights outside.
They come with a timer function, which is activated by long-pressing the button for three seconds until the green electric light comes on. This feature allows the lights to automatically turn on for six hours and turn off for 18 hours, saving you the hassle of manually turning the Christmas string lights on and off. Moreover, the built-in memory chip saves your last mode setting, so you don't have to reset it every day.
In total, there are 160 bright LED lights on a 6.6ft x 3.3ft clear wire, along with a 9.8ft lead cable, providing plenty of mini lights to decorate your home. These outdoor lights feature LED and come with a green wire, making them perfect for blending in with trees and foliage in your garden.
Meanwhile, the warm white lights offer a traditional look, with the added benefit of being energy-efficient and long-lasting compared to traditional incandescent lights.
Color: Multicolor | Size: 6.6 x 3.3 ft. | Wattage: 6 Watts | Number of Light Sources: 160
2. Joomer: Best With Replacement Bulbs
What I like
200 super-bright LED lights with a UL-certified adapter
7ft by 5ft mesh panel with 16.4ft lead cable
End-to-end connectable, up to 3 sets
8 flashing electric light modes for versatile decoration
Safe, easy installation
What I don't like
No memory function
These top-quality Christmas net lights will be the perfect addition to your holiday lighting setup since it contains 200 super-bright LED lights. The lights have a UL-certified adapter and the net light bulb measures 7ft by 5ft and comes with a 16.4ft lead cable. Plus, its clear extension cord makes it easy to blend with any holiday décor.
One of the best features of Joomer Christmas Net Lights is its eight lighting modes, comprising Combination, In Wave, Sequential, Slo-Glo, Chasing/Flash, Slow Fade, Twinkle/Flash, and Steady on lighting. But this 200 LED net light does not have a memory function and will need to be reset to the desired mode each time it's turned off.
Safety and ease of installation are of utmost importance, and this product has been certified by UL to ensure maximum safety. The net lights can be placed or hung on trees, bushes, grass, or any other surface in seconds, making it convenient to get into the holiday spirit with minimal effort.
These net lights are also waterproof, with both wires and LED mesh lights having an IP44 waterproof rating. Hence, they are perfect for both indoor and outdoor decorations but keep the adaptor away from water, as it's not waterproof.
Additionally, the lights are versatile and have a wide range of applications, making them suitable for holiday lighting needs. They are perfect for outdoor bushes, trees, fences, Christmas, parties, windows, festivals, holidays, shows, restaurants, hotels, commercial buildings, shopping centers, and more.
Color: White | Size: 7 x 5 ft. | Wattage: 6 Watts | Number of Light Sources: 200
3. KNONEW: Best For Dimmable Feature
What I like
8 lighting modes to choose from
Timer and dimmable function
Connectable up to 3 strands with a waterproof end-to-end connector
Energy-efficient and long-lasting LED lights
Safe to use around children and pets
What I don't like
May not be suitable for larger areas
Looking for outdoor Christmas lights that are both beautiful and energy-efficient? Look no further than the 360 LED Net Lights as they come in a 13ft x 6.6ft size and are connectable to up to 3 strands. This makes them perfect for decorating large or small areas, while the waterproof end-to-end connector ensures these lights can be used in any weather.
One of the best features of these lights is the variety of lighting modes available. With 8 modes to choose from, including In Waves, Sequential, Slo-Glo, Chasing/Flash, Slow Fade, Twinkle/Flash, Combination, and Steady on, you can customize the ambiance to suit your preferences. Plus, the built-in memory function means the lights will remember your previous mode even if the power is turned off.
Another great feature of this 360 LED Net Lights is the timer and dimmable function. With the remote control included, you can set the lights to turn on and off at a specific time and adjust the brightness levels to your liking (100%, 75%, 50%, or 25%). This is not only convenient but also helps save energy and money on your electricity bill.
I recommend using the lights in the porch area as they will illuminate the entrance.
Compared to traditional incandescent light bulbs, LED lamps are much more energy-efficient and long-lasting. According to estimates, these lights can save over 90% of electricity, making them an eco-friendly choice for holiday decorations. Additionally, the lights are UL-approved and safe to use around children and pets, having a low-voltage plug and green wire.
Color: Cool White | Size: 13 x 6.6 ft. | Wattage: 6 Watts | Number of Light Sources: 360
4. BlcTec: Best For UL-Approved Plug-In Transformer
What I like
UL-approved plug-in transformers
The dark green insulation is durable
Larger coverage area when hanging
Can connect up to three units simultaneously
8 different lighting modes
What I don't like
The adapter is not waterproof
For those looking to brighten up their outdoor spaces during the Christmas and holiday season, BlcTec Christmas net lights are a fantastic option. These net lights feature a net design that allows for easy installation on trees, bushes, and buildings and provides better stability compared to traditional string lights.
With a measurement of 9.84ft x 6.56ft and 360 high-brightness LED lights, these net lights provide a warm white glow that is perfect for illuminating courtyards, shrubs, windows, balconies, and more.
These net lights are designed keeping durability in mind, featuring dark green insulation that is twice as thick as its competitors. They come with a UL-approved plug-in transformer that ensures low consumption and voltage, making them safe to use outdoors.
The net design also reduces the likelihood of entanglement, making them easy to use and you can connect up to three units simultaneously to cover a larger area.
These outdoor lights offer eight different lighting modes that can be chosen directly from the product transformer box. They are further waterproof with an IP44 rating, allowing them to be used both indoors and outdoors in any weather condition.
However, please note that the adapter is not waterproof and should be used with a waterproof socket cover if used outside.
If you're someone who decorates with multiple lights, using these net lights will save you time as you only need to put them up once! Meanwhile, the customer service team is always ready to assist you, and the manufacturer offers a 100% satisfaction guarantee.
Color: Warm White | Size: 9.8 x 6.6 ft. | Wattage: 6 Watts | Number of Light Sources: 360
5. FUNPENY: Best For UL588 Certification For Safety
What I like
Transparent wire design for seamless integration
8 different lighting modes for a variety of ambiance options
Low voltage and UL588 certified for safety
Waterproof for indoor and outdoor use
Versatile and suitable for many different occasions
What I don't like
Can only connect up to four strings of lights
Introducing these transparent wire Christmas net lights, the perfect addition to your holiday décor. Measuring 12ft x 5ft, with a 16.5ft lead cable, these lights are designed to seamlessly integrate with your Christmas tree and bushes, thanks to the transparent wire.
With male and female safety plugs, you can connect up to four strings of lights, allowing you to cover most spaces. Moreover, these lights come with eight different lighting modes, including combination, wave, sequential, slo glo, chasing/flash, slow fade, twinkle/flash, and steady on. With so many options to choose from, you can easily find the perfect mode to fit your desired ambiance.
Safety is always a top priority, which is why these lights are designed with a 29V low-voltage plug and are UL588 certified. This voltage is lower than the human body's safe voltage, ensuring there is no danger of electric shock. Additionally, these lights won't overheat, even when used for an extended period.
Funpeny Transparent Wire Christmas Net Lights are also waterproof, with both the string light and transformer carrying an IP44 waterproof rating. You can use them indoors or outdoors, and they will continue to function even if it rains or snows suddenly, such as on terraces, yards, gardens, bushes, lawns, patios, and cafes.
Color: Warm White | Size: 12 x 5 ft. | Wattage: 6 Watts | Number of Light Sources: 360
6. Led Christmas Decorations Lights: Best For Multiple Color LEDs
What I like
UL certified for maximum safety
Connectable design
Waterproof with an IP44 rating
Versatile and easy to use
Includes two spare bulbs
What I don't like
Brightness could be better
As an avid decorator and lover of all things festive, the best recommendation for you is the UL Certified Outdoor Christmas Lights by Dirnun. These string lights have undergone rigorous testing to meet US safety standards and ensure maximum safety for indoor and outdoor use.
With 160 multicolor LED lights and a 4ftx7ft net design, these lights are perfect for adding a touch of holiday cheer to your yard, balcony, garden, pergola, gazebo, or even indoor spaces.
One of the standout features of these lights is their durable and sturdy design. Unlike other mesh net lights with weak wires that easily break apart when used in Christmas trees or bushes, these lights are made with high-quality green wires that can withstand long hours of usage without overheating or breaking apart.
The strong construction ensures that they will provide years of high-quality lighting, and the package even includes two spare bulbs and two spare fuses for easy repair.
Another great feature of these lights is their connectable design. Each light has an end-to-end connector that allows you to connect up to 10 sets for maximum coverage. The long leading and tail wire also makes it easy to lead the power from indoor to outdoor spaces.
As an outdoor decoration, it's important that these lights are waterproof, and the IP44 waterproof rating ensures they can be used both indoors and outdoors without the worry of rainy weather. However, it's important to note that the plug is not waterproof, so it's important to keep it away from water.
Color: Multicolor | Size: 4 x 7 ft. | Wattage: 7 Watts | Number of Light Sources: 160
7. Dazzle: Best For IP44 Waterproof Rating
What I like
Features 8 different lighting modes
Connectable with an end-to-end connector
Operated with a low-voltage transformer
IP44 waterproof rating
Perfect for creating a romantic and comfortable festival atmosphere
What I don't like
Power adapter missing in some instances
The Dazzle Bright Christmas Net Lights are perfect for your holiday decorations. This net light comes with 200 LED lights, measuring 9.8ft x 6.6ft in size, and a lead wire length of 16.5ft, providing ample coverage for your outdoor or indoor decoration needs. The horizontal distance between each lamp bead is 4.7 inches.
This net light comes with a 29V UL safe plug powered, lower than the standard safe voltage to ensure your safety. It also features 8 different lighting modes, including combination, in waves, sequential, slo glo, chasing/flash, slow fade, twinkle/flash, and steady on, giving you the freedom to choose the mode according to your preference and different occasions.
Additionally, this net light is connectable with an end-to-end connector, which can be connected up to 5 strands, for a larger illumination space. It is operated with a low-voltage transformer, ensuring that it will not overheat even after long-time use. The LED Christmas net lights are IP44 waterproof, which makes them perfect for outdoor decoration, even on rainy or snowy days. However, please note that the adapter is not waterproof.
The Dazzle Bright Christmas Net Lights are perfect for creating a romantic and comfortable festival atmosphere. They are ideal for courtyards, shrubs, Christmas, Halloween, Valentine's Day, parties, weddings, festivals, Christmas trees, curtains, bushes, gardens, patios, homes, windows, bathrooms, balconies, bars, restaurants, hotels, commercial buildings, shopping centers, and more.
Color: Multicolor | Size: 6.6 x 3.3 ft. | Wattage: 6.5 Watts | Number of Light Sources: 160
8. Sylampow: Best With Corded Electric Power Source
What I like
UL certified
End-to-end connector
Waterproof construction and IP44 rating
Long leading and tail wire
What I don't like
The plug is not waterproof
The Sylampow Multicolor LED Christmas Net Lights are a great way to add some colorful and festive lighting to your home or garden during the holiday season. With 120 LEDs arranged in a 6.2ft x 4.4ft net, these lights are perfect for covering large areas with ease.
They are designed for both indoor and outdoor use and come with several special features such as energy efficiency, waterproofing, and linkability. The corded electric power source ensures a reliable and steady power supply, while the durable and sturdy design makes them last longer.
Overall, the Sylampow Multicolor LED Christmas Net Lights are a great choice for those who want to add festive lighting to their home or garden during the holiday season. With their energy efficiency, waterproofing, and linkability, they offer a lot of value for their price. They are also versatile, making them suitable for use on different occasions and events.
Color: Multicolor | Size: 6.2 x 4.4 ft. | Wattage: 6 Watts | Number of Light Sources: 120
9. Maojia: Best For 8 Modes With Memory Function
What I like
Versatile for indoor and outdoor use
Waterproof design
Easy to install
Multiple lighting modes are available
What I don't like
May twinkle out of sync
The Maojia Clear Wire Extra Large Christmas Net Lights, are the perfect addition to your holiday decorations. These upgraded net lights come in three different sizes with 200 LEDs, 600 LEDs, or 900 LEDs, and are flexible and lightweight, making them easy to install and customize to your liking.
One of the standout features of these net lights is their IP65 waterproof rating and low voltage output of 29V, which ensures your safety while using them. The wire and LED beads are also waterproof, making them suitable for both indoor and outdoor use. However, please keep in mind that the adaptor is not waterproof and should be kept away from water.
Maojia net lights also come with eight different lighting modes to choose from, including steady on, wave, sequence, chase, flash, flash/flash, slow flash, and slow fade, all of which can be easily controlled with the included remote control. Plus, with the memory function, you won't have to reprogram the settings each time you use them.
These net lights are perfect for a wide range of applications, from decorating bushes, trees, and walls to parties, patios, and even bathrooms. Their net shape allows for easy wrapping and expansion to fit any space.
Color: Warm White | Size: 9.69 x 9.84 ft. | Wattage: 6 Watts | Number of Light Sources: 600
10. Pooqla: Best For 16 Colors Mesh Lights
What I like
16 different colors to choose from
Four different light flashing modes
The end-to-end connector allows you to connect up to three sets together
Waterproof, making them suitable for outdoor use
Suitable for a range of occasions and locations
What I don't like
The lights are corded, which may limit their placement
The Pooqla Color Changing LED Net Lights, perfect for both indoor and outdoor use. These lights are ideal for a range of occasions, including Christmas, Halloween, and weddings.
The lights feature 16 different colors, including warm white, cold white, purple, blue, and pink. With a remote control, you can choose from four different light flashing modes, including FADE, JUMP, ASYN FADE, and ASYN JUMP, and even control the speed of flashing and set up the time.
The net lights are powered by corded electricity, making them energy efficient and easy to use. They also come with an end-to-end connector, allowing you to connect up to three sets together.
These lights are waterproof and feature 204 LEDs, making them durable and perfect for outdoor use in places such as your garden, deck, yard, drive, outside wall, and fence. They are also suitable for use in restaurants, hotels, commercial buildings, shopping centers, and more.
Color: White | Size: 9.8 x 6.6 ft. | Wattage: 8 Watts | Number of Light Sources: 204
Incandescent bulbs might not be as energy-efficient as LED bulbs
The Joiedomi Incandescent Net Christmas Mesh Lights is a great value pack consisting of 150 bright Warm White mini incandescent bulbs on green wires, with spare bulbs and fuses. Measuring 4 x 6 feet, the light area operates on high voltage, making it easy to use by plugging it into the power socket directly.
You can connect up to 5 sets on 1 outlet without affecting the rest, and the bulbs are removable and replaceable.
However, some users may not prefer the high voltage or Warm White color, and incandescent bulbs may not be as energy-efficient as LED bulbs. Overall, it's an excellent choice for anyone looking to add some festive cheer to their space.
Color: White | Size: 6.6 x 3.3 ft. | Wattage: 6 Watts | Number of Light Sources: 150
12. Heceltt: Best With Advanced LED Technology
What I like
Convenient and easy-to-use design
Comes with eight different modes and a remote control
Energy-efficient and safe to use with advanced LED technology
Waterproof and certified for outdoor use
Comes with a timer and adjustable brightness levels
What I don't like
Cable lead is shorter than expected
Introducing the Heceltt 900LED Multicolor Net Lights, the perfect addition to your Christmas decorations this year! With a convenient design and versatile usage, these lights will make your holiday season brighter and more magical. Here are some of the features and benefits of the Heceltt 900LED Net Lights:
The Heceltt 900LED Net Lights come in a size of 9.8ft x 29.5ft and have a cable lead of 16.5ft, making it easy to set up on bushes, grassland, fences, walls, hedges, shrubs, railings, balconies, and anywhere else you can think of.
It takes just one second to set up, and you can choose from eight different modes, including Combination, Steady On, Slow Fade, In Waves, Slow Glow, Chasing/Flash, Sequential, and Twinkle/Flash. You can use the remote control or the button on the plug to set the mode you want.
These Christmas lights are waterproof and have passed UL588 and IP44 certifications, ensuring that they are safe for outdoor use, even in heavy rain or snow. With advanced LED technology, these lights will keep 90% of the electric energy turned into luminous energy, making them energy-efficient and environmentally friendly. Additionally, they do not produce any heat energy after long-time use, so you can enjoy the lights without worrying about overheating.
The Heceltt 900 LED Net Lights also come with a remote control that allows you to set a timer for 6 hours on and 18 hours off, ensuring that they turn on and off automatically each day. You can also adjust the brightness levels to suit your preferences using the +/- button.
The manufacturers provide a 2-year warranty and promise a 12-month replacement or refund if there is anything wrong with these string lights, and commit that all emails will be replied to within 12 hours.
Color: Multicolor | Size: 29.5 x 9.8 ft. | Wattage: 6 Watts | Number of Light Sources: 900
13. ZAIYW: Best With Weather-Resistant Feature
What I like
Multi-functions remote controller
Low voltage and UL Listed
LED bulbs always remain cool to the touch
Weather-resistant and energy-efficient
High-quality LEDs
What I don't like
May require additional extension cords for larger outdoor displays
The Strand of 660 LED Bush Net Lights by ZAIYW - is the perfect addition to your festive decorations. Measuring 6m x 4m (20ft long, 13ft drop), this transparent cable curtain icicle net mesh string lights will create a stunning display for festivals, backdrops, holidays, and Christmas.
With its multi-functions remote controller, you can choose from 8 light modes and set a timing program for 6 hours on and 18 hours off, making it easy to customize your lighting display. You can also adjust the brightness of the lights to your liking.
These lights are UL Listed for safe use indoors and outdoors, with a low voltage design that ensures LED bulbs always remain cool to the touch, making them very safe for children and pets. The weather-resistant net lights with energy-efficient LED bulbs will save you time and money while enhancing the value of your Christmas lights.
The high-quality LEDs in a warm white hue result in a brighter and more brilliant light, creating a superior lighting display. Whether you use them for a wedding or Christmas, these beautiful lights will create a calming and festive atmosphere.
Color: Warm White | Size: 20 x 13 ft. | Wattage: 8 Watts | Number of Light Sources: 660
Consider the type of bulbs used in the net lights. LED lamp is energy-efficient, last longer and emit less heat, while incandescent bulb offers a warm and classic look.
2. Color
Decide on the color of the net lights that will match your Christmas décor. Options include warm white, cool white, multicolor, and other festive colors.
3. Size
Determine the size of the net lights that will fit the area you want to decorate. Measure the length and width of the area before purchasing the lights to ensure they fit properly.
4. Number Of Bulbs
Look at the number of bulbs on the net lights. A higher number of bulbs means more light and coverage. However, it also means a higher wattage and electricity consumption.
5. Power Source
Determine the power source of the net lights. They can be powered by batteries, solar energy, or an electrical outlet. Options from the solar power category are more convenient, while electrical-powered options are generally brighter.
6. Waterproof
If you plan to use the net lights outdoors, make sure they are waterproof to avoid damage from the weather.
7. Durability
Look for a net light with sturdy construction to ensure it will last for many Christmases to come. Check the material of the bulbs, wiring, and the net itself.
8. Safety
Ensure that the net lights have safety certifications and meet the safety standards for your region.
9. Warranty
Check if the net lights come with a warranty. A warranty can protect your purchase and give you peace of mind.
What types of decorative lighting options are available for the festive season?
There are various types of decorative lighting options available for the festive season, including multi-colored string lights, warm white LED lights, lights with classic incandescent light bulbs, delicate string lights, and connectable designs with a variety of lighting modes.
Are these decorative lights suitable for both indoor and outdoor use?
Yes, most of these decorative lights are waterproof and durable, making them suitable for both indoor and outdoor use. You can use them to decorate trees, fences, balconies, or create a stunning lighting display for your home or garden.
How can I customize my holiday decor with connectable designs and lighting modes?
With connectable designs and various lighting modes, you can customize your holiday decor according to your preference. You can connect multiple strands of lights to create a longer strand and choose from different lighting modes, such as twinkle, flashing, or steady, to add a unique touch to your decor.
Are there any traditional or subtle options available for those who prefer a different style of decoration?
Yes, there are traditional or subtle options available for those who prefer a different style of decoration. For instance, you can choose from Joiedomi Incandescent Christmas Lights for a classic touch or Heceltt Christmas Lights for a more delicate and subtle glow.
Conclusion
With so many options available, the possibilities for creating a festive and inviting atmosphere are endless this holiday season. But if you are still confused about which option to go for here is a selection of my top picks.
The Lyhope Christmas Net Lights are the best choice, owing to their durable and waterproof construction, backed by a timer and memory function. A close second is the Joomer Net Lights which don’t have a memory function but feature multiple light modes for decorating any room.
Also, feel free to conduct your own research and refer to the buyer’s guide before making a choice. With the options mentioned in my guide, you won’t have any trouble lighting up your home for Christmas!
Decorating your home with Christmas lights can be fun. However, it can also pose some safety risks if not done properly. Therefore, it is crucial to take certain precautions regarding assessing the space, choosing the right equipment, planning the layout, and installing lights properly.
There's nothing quite like the warm and inviting glow of Christmas lights!
However, while hanging lights can be fun and exciting, it can also be hazardous if not done correctly. According to the US Consumer Product Safety Commission, during the holiday season, there is an increase in the number of accidents related to electric shocks and fires.
In this blog post, I will provide you with tips on how to safely hang lights for a merry holiday display.
How to Safely Hang Lights For Holiday Display
Choosing the Right Location and Lights
Before starting the process of hanging Christmas lights, it's essential to take a close look at the space where you plan to hang them. Assessing the area will help you identify any potential hazards and ensure that you have the right tools and equipment for the job.
Check the area for hazards like power lines, trees, or uneven terrain.
Choose safe lights and outlets for the location.
Select lights suitable for the intended location.
Use outdoor extension cords with ground fault circuit interrupters.
Consider different styles and colors for desired aesthetics.
Use secure attachments to prevent fire hazards.
Think about the overall aesthetic you want to achieve. String lights come in various styles and colors, from classic white to multicolored and even themed designs like a winter wonderland or holiday decorations.
Once you have selected the appropriate lights, it is important to use light clips or other secure attachments to ensure that the icicle lights stay in place and do not pose a fire hazard.
Choosing the Right Equipment
Selecting the proper equipment is crucial to ensure a safe and enjoyable holiday lighting experience. Here are some tips to guide you in choosing the right Christmas lights and extension cords:
A. Selecting Lights
When choosing net lights for your holiday display, it's crucial to select those that are specifically designed for heavy snow. Outdoor Christmas lights are weather-resistant and can withstand the elements such as rain, snow, and wind. They also have safety features like waterproof connections and thicker insulation to protect against electrical shocks.
When it comes to DIY, safety should always be your top priority, especially when working with electricity and AC power plugs and sockets. Look for certification marks like the UL (Underwriters Laboratories) or ETL (Electrical Testing Laboratories) seal on the packaging of the lights. These marks indicate that the lights have been tested and approved for safety.
Before installation, test the lights to make sure they're working correctly. Plug them in and inspect for any damage or defects. Replace any faulty bulbs or strands to avoid electrical hazards.
B. Selecting Extension Cords
Extension cords are essential for outdoor holiday lighting displays. They provide additional length and flexibility to power your lights from a distance. However, not all extension cords are suitable for outdoor usage.
When selecting the proper equipment for your holiday lights, ensure it's rated for outdoor use and has a grounded plug to minimize the risk of electrical shock. Look for wires with a thick insulation layer that can withstand the weather and prevent tripping hazards.
Consider the length of the extension cord needed for your display, but be careful not to overload it with too many lights or electrical devices. Overloading an extension cord can lead to overheating and cause electrical fires.
C. Investing in a Surge Protector
A surge protector is an electrical device designed to protect your lights and extension cords from voltage spikes and surges. It's recommended to use a surge protector to avoid electrical damage and protect your investment in Christmas lights.
Choose a surge protector rated for outdoor use with enough outlets to accommodate all your electrical devices. Also, be sure to read the instructions carefully and follow the manufacturer's guidelines for proper usage.
You can ensure a safe and successful holiday lighting display by selecting the right lights, extension ladder, and surge protectors.
Planning the Layout of Christmas Lights
To ensure that your outdoor Christmas lights display is visually appealing and safe, it's important to plan the layout carefully.
Before you start hanging lights, it's a good idea to create a sketch of the display to help visualize the final result. This can help you determine the placement of the lights and identify any potential issues before you start decorating.
Start by measuring the length of the area where you plan to hang the lights using a tape measure. Identify how many light strands you'll need. Ensure to account for any corners, bends, or obstacles in the area. This can help you avoid running out of lights or buying too many.
When planning the placement of the lights, avoid overloading circuits. The United States Consumer Product Safety Commission recommends that you only connect up to three light strands per extension cord. If you're using larger bulbs, be aware that they may generate more heat and require more electricity than smaller bulbs.
Consider using cable ties to secure your Christmas tree lights in place, and make sure to check your rain gutters for any moisture buildup before starting your installation. Zip ties are also a great tool for securing your lights, especially in windy areas or on uneven surfaces.
By taking the time to plan the layout of your Christmas lights display carefully, you can create a beautiful and safe decoration that brings joy to you and your loved ones.
Installing the Christmas Lights
Once you have planned the layout of your Christmas light display, it's time to start the installation process. Here are some tips to ensure a safe and successful installation:
Following the Manufacturer's Instructions for Installation
Each set of lights may come with its own set of instructions for installation. Be sure to carefully read and follow these instructions to ensure that hanging the lights is safe and effective. This will also help you avoid any potential electrical hazards or damage to the lights.
Also, if you're planning to hang lights on the roof shingles or eaves, be sure to use proper safety precautions and consider using a residual-current device to prevent electric hazards.
Ensuring that the Lights are Secured Properly and Won't Fall or Move
It's important to ensure that your hanging Christmas lights are secured properly to avoid any accidents. Use sturdy hooks or clips to attach the lights to the surface you're hanging them from, whether it's the roof or walls.
Metal columns and porch railings would make a great place to hang lights, just be sure to use appropriate clips and hangers to avoid damaging the metal. Also, try and use clips that won't damage the surface or paint, and avoid using nails or screws.
Using Hooks or Clips to Avoid Damaging the Roof or Walls
When attaching your incandescent lights to the roof or walls, be sure to use hooks or clips that won't damage the surface. Avoid using nails or screws, as they can leave permanent damage. There are many types of hooks and clips available that are specifically designed for holiday lights and can be easily found at hardware stores or online.
By following these tips, you can ensure that your holiday lights are installed safely and securely, creating a beautiful and festive display for all to enjoy.
Keeping Your Holiday Lights in Top Shape Throughout the Season
Now that you have successfully hung your string lights, it's vital to ensure that they stay in top shape throughout the season. This means regularly checking for damage or wear and replacing damaged incandescent light bulbs or cords as needed. It also means removing the light clips promptly after the holidays are over to avoid any potential hazards or damage to the light clips.
Regularly Checking the LED Lights for Damage or Wear
It's essential to regularly check your Christmas lights for any signs of damage or wear. This includes inspecting the incandescent bulbs, cords, and plugs for any cracks, breaks, or other damage. If you notice any damage, replacing the damaged parts or the entire set of lights is important to avoid any potential hazards.
Always be aware of the temperature when hanging Christmas lights, as extreme heat or cold can affect the performance of your LED lamps.
Replacing any Damaged Bulbs or Cords
If you notice any damage or wear on your holiday lights, it's essential to address it promptly. This means replacing any damaged bulbs or cords before using the lights again. The correct replacement bulbs and cords are essential to ensure the lights function correctly and safely.
Removing the Christmas Lights Promptly After the Holidays are Over
Once the festive season has come to an end, it's important to remove your holiday lights promptly. Leaving the led lights up for an extended period of time can not only be a potential hazard, but it can also lead to damage or wear on the lights themselves. Taking the time to carefully remove the lights and properly store them for next year can help ensure they stay in top shape for years to come.
Adding Some Flair
Now that the light strings are up, it's time to add some flair to your holiday display! To add an extra festive touch to your Christmas decorations, consider adding light-up LED stars or other holiday-themed items. With a few creative touches, you can take your display to the next level and make it truly unique. Here are some ideas to consider:
Adding garlands, bows, or other decorative elements to the light strings
Using colored lights or alternating colors for a fun and festive look
Adding light-up figurines or lawn ornaments to the display
Creating a themed display, such as a winter wonderland or Santa's workshop
Incorporating music or sound effects to enhance the atmosphere
Get creative and have fun with it! Remember, the possibilities are endless when it comes to adding some flair to your holiday display. Just follow all safety guidelines and manufacturer instructions when incorporating any additional elements.
What tools do I need to hang holiday lights safely?
The tools you need to hang holiday lights safely include a ladder, power source, clips, hooks, power strip, electrical tape, and a circuit tester.
Can I hang Christmas lights in rainy or snowy weather?
If you plan to hang Christmas lights outdoors, use light strings designed for door frames that can withstand rainy or snowy weather. However, it's best to avoid hanging lights during extreme weather conditions.
How do I safely hang lights on a roof?
When hanging Christmas lights on a roof, use a sturdy ladder and have someone assist you. Secure the light strands with clips or hooks, and avoid overloading the circuit.
How do I store my outdoor Christmas lights safely after the season is over?
To store your Christmas lights safely after the season ends, wrap them around a cardboard or plastic spool, and store them in a dry and cool place.
How do I avoid overloading my electrical circuits with LED lights?
To avoid overloading your electrical circuits with LED lights, avoid connecting too many lights to a single circuit. Also, use a circuit tester to ensure that the circuit is not overloaded.
What are some common mistakes to avoid when hanging mini lights?
Some common mistakes to avoid when hanging mini lights include using damaged or worn-out light strands, overloading the circuit, using indoor lights for outdoor displays, and running cords across walkways or high-traffic areas.
Conclusion
The holiday season is a time for joy and celebration, but it's important to remember the potential hazards that come with hanging holiday lights. By taking the time to assess the space, choose the right tools and equipment, plan the layout, and properly install and maintain the lights, you can create a beautiful lighting display that lasts all season long.
Whether you’re going with incandescent lights, warm white lights, or icicle lights, these safety rules hold true for any type of festive lighting. So, no matter how many Christmas lights you’re hanging, keep these points in mind for a safe and merry experience!
Pallets are known to be quite an extraordinary resource when it comes to DIY projects or any activity around the household that requires wood as they're relatively easy to find, inexpensive and quite modular, easy to disassemble, and easy to scale at the same time. They usually contain a mix of hardwood essences filled with grain making them quite graphic yet rustic in look and in outdoor furniture and indoor rustic interior design they really shine; they're really sturdy, and resilient. An extensive gallery of epic pallet bar ideas follows to showcase how this wooden resource can be used indoors and outdoors as a bar that can emphasize your event easily and rapidly.
The DIY pallet bar is a project that in theory you would be able to realize alone in a few hours, It requires simple power tools to craft swiftly and all safety precautions and protection gear ought to be used at all times.
Cast a glance at the gallery below and find the bar able to suit your event and needs!
Pallet Bar Ideas
Here a simple bar stick-wood has been used, Stick-wood is a very graphic finish that can be purchased and applied everywhere as a sticker, it contains natural wood and the result is flawless yet easy to use, no tools or DIY skills needed. The pallet above contains no pallet wood indeed yet the same principle of embellishing a bar with wood you can realize in a DIY project, plank by plank.
Three pallets can be used as they are, two-three nails can keep them together in a U-shape while counters can be realized in a matter of minutes constituted out of OSB or MDF or any other piece of wood wide enough. The simple pallet bar design can be used indoors for various celebrations yet outdoors the design makes great sense, surrounded by greenery and possibly emphasized by string lights to create a really air, surreal design.
A small portion of pallet can emphasize your entertaining experience rapidly, it can hold your liquor and special glasses in flashy, dedicated shelf behind the bar, at your grasp.
An experienced DIY enthusiast will see wooden pallets as an extraordinary wood resource and with the right tools this can be brought to perfection. The farmhouse-look is cozy and warm despite its neutral colors.
The great benefit of the wood in pallets is their diversity, you never know what you're gonna get! Use this to your advantage and shape a patchwork look ready to emphasize.
via s-s-pallet-creations-llc.myshopify.com
Three pieces of wood angled can help you form a connection between wooden pallets rapidly, the transverse pieces of wood can now become shelves, counters behind the bar with no effort, you obtain a pallet bar within minutes, ready to use, ready to entertain !
Wooden pallets components can be treated differently within a pallet bar, here the bottom half that consists of pallets used as they are have been painted-only while the counter-top features a ceramic finish that gives the project a really exquisite look.
One could craft the pallet bar for his man-cave in the workshop or garage to reduce waste. The rough looking pallet above is a great fit for a man-cave !
Use two wooden pallets with a simple counter to create a pallet bar cart that can be moved around. Two three shelves can be constructed within the pallets too.
via mypinterestinglife.com
Your entire yard could receive a make-over powered by wooden pallets, an entire bar area can be constructed, a terrace is an option too. Anything that wears wood can be translated into quality, embrace it.
Source Unknown
A pallet bar can contain a fish tank, a really nice feature that could enhance your setting and space.
via Pinterest
Wooden crates and simple pallets make a great team, here the white piece of cloth creates the illusion of suspension for this diy wine bar. A really sensible setting.
An L-shape pallet bar can be achieved quite rapidly with minimum effort and the wood's sturdiness vouches for the item's resilience. How do you see this bar?
Source Unknown
Two pallets tied together by a few nails use concrete tiles as a counter to serve drinks in style, a very fast and rewardful craft to take on for your next event !
You can create a cocktail pallet bar with a really professional look by treating the wood contained as a resource, use the right tools, you have something extraordinary at hand.
via Pinterest
The simplest pallet can become a pool bar rapidly, get the party started !
Tiles on the counter of two pallets can bring a really elegant look to an otherwise rustic element. The color chosen complements the design beautifully.
Source Unknown
Use light sources within simple pallets overlapped, finished off with a sheet of glass as a counter and you'll have the simplest, the most inexpensive, and the coolest pallet bar in town in a matter of minutes.
Source Unknown
Wooden pallets with exposed concrete shape a brilliant combination with following.
The simplest pallets can shape the coolest bar, bring in a countertop that looks exquisite and you're all set.
via Pinterest
An outdoor pallet tiki bar might require 5-6 pallets yet the extraordinary result is definitely worth the effort invested; here string lights contribute greatly.
All bars ought to be illuminated in a special way, find your own balance!
Source Unknown
You can use the patchwork surprise of wooden pallets in a portion of your pallet bar; here the countertop receives new wood with the grain carefully aligned thus creating contrast with the bar's vertical plane.
via furnishlyst.com
Use stone and a special resin to obtain something unique. Iron pipes have also been used to give one the chance to rest his feet while he enjoys a drink at the bar.
Source Unknown
Chevron patterns, chevron patterns everywhere. They're here for a reason, they simply work. Above in a setting that uses concrete and wood the pattern adds a certain dynamic.
Intricate custom pallet bars can be designed too, the project takes more time than the craft itself but the result is extraordinary, worth considering.
via jackplanwood.net
A contemporary take on the pallet bar, it looks modern, premium, and flawless thanks to the light that emphasizes it. The rustic component remains at a really small scale thanks to the wood's grain. Simple and cool.
One old fridge can become your super cool outdoor bar, fitted with a chalkboard to present the menu, an immense cool box and sufficient counter-top to serve anything, the bar above is nothing short of extraordinary.
Bamboo on the edges can really highlight the "tiki bar" title. A really beautiful and exotic lemonade stand for your little one.
via palletsdesigns.com
Blue paired with wood might not be everyone's cup of tea yet the design above looks remarkable and the color of the LEDs involved is surely controlled by a remote behind the bar.
The grill bar with pallets can take many shapes yet the graphic design above is one of the simplest methods you can adapt, highly rewardful craft.
Source Unknown
A pallet garden bar can serve as a potting station providing you with the counter-space and shelving that you need in your garden operations.
via recycled-things.com
A pallet's structure is quite sturdy making it easy to use as it is in bar projects. Here the counter has been beautifully finished thus greatly enhancing the quality of the end item.
Pallet carts can help you a great deal, rolling around for all the right reasons, sharing drinks and joy.
via drewnolot.pl
Last but not least pallet bar in our collection showcases an extraordinary balance using all kinds of wood and typography to its advantage.
via Pinterest
The pallets are epic. Pallets are brilliantly used even to shape epic DIY chicken coops and a pallet bar is a bargain honestly, one that you actually tailor for the perfect fit.
Your next celebration might require a bar, What diy project do you use to obtain it?
We would love to hear your thoughts in the comment section below!
The holiday season might seem like a tough gift-giving competition when you are strapped for cash. But just because you can’t buy everyone in your family $20 gifts doesn’t mean you have to give them bad gifts. Expensive doesn’t always mean good, right?
So, here is a list of 7 inexpensive gifts for Christmas this year for less than five bucks.
Best Unique Gifts Under $5
1. The Original Slinky Walking Spring Toy - Best Classic Toy Gift
What I like
Classic gift
Ideal for party favors and stocking stuffers
Great for kids as well as adults
Durable
What I don't like
Poor packaging
Apologies in advance if this gift makes you nostalgic about your childhood. I am sure you have already heard about this one. Drawing from experience, no one can say no to the jiggly-wiggly fun you get with the slinky. Whether it is a child or an adult, this is a super cute and fun gag gift to give to someone to lead to a lot of laughs from the entire group.
This classic toy walks downstairs, alone or in pairs, and makes a slink-ity sound. Anyone would be happily singing this old jingle while enjoying this small gift and after seeing it in person.
It stretches and walks, it wiggles and jiggles. And it’s just for five bucks. Who could say no to such a fun little gift?
Buy it for the nostalgic adult or the uninformed kid, and you’ll surely be thanked for your traditional yet unique gift.
Number Of Coils: 77 | Item Material: Metallic | Item Weight: 6.1 ounces
2. Makeup And Cosmetic Bag - Best For Makeup And Skincare Lovers
What I like
Cute patterns
Ideal for daily use
Soft fabric
Durable
What I don't like
Feels quite thin
Ask any woman around you, and she will surely be in need of a good makeup bag at all times. Thus, the WANDF makeup and cosmetic bag is a very thoughtful gift for someone who loves makeup.
Made up of soft fabric with a smooth zipper, this makeup bag is very durable. The fabric is water-resistant and has a 0.2 cm thickened foam to protect makeup products from getting damaged.
It is of ideal size and can fit most of the daily makeup accessories like makeup brushes, eyeliner, lipsticks, foundation, etc. Thus, not only can one use it as a daily makeup bag but also take it on trips with them to store their daily essentials.
Additionally, anyone can store their toiletries, art supplies, and typical stationery in this bag too. After trying out this product, I’ve found that this is a perfect accessory for a woman!
On top of that, you can get extremely cute patterns in a variety of colors when you buy this makeup bag. Pretty patterns on a useful gift under $5 that you can easily carry around? I’m sold!
Product Dimensions: 8.7 x 5 inches | Item Weight: 1.45 ounces | Colors: Variety of colors to choose from
3. Mr. Pen Card Holder - Best For Organization
What I like
Cute patterns
Locking clasp
Rounded corners
It can hold a lot of cards
What I don't like
Somewhat flimsy
Know someone who’s always losing their cards? Then this high-quality and lightweight Mr. Pen card holder is a perfect gift for that person. The locking clasp on the card holder prevents anything from falling out accidentally. Additionally, the rounded corners will save you from any potential cuts or scrapes.
With 7 accordion slots, this cheap card holder can hold more than 9 credit cards or more than 20 business cards. A perfect way to hold your cards and a delightful replacement for a boring wallet, this card holder will not disappoint anyone who receives it.
Number Of Accordion Slots: 7 | Pattern: Floral | Item Material: Metallic
4. Yemianju Rose Gold Elephant Keychain - Best Design
What I like
Rose gold color
Sophisticated elephant design
Can fit all kinds of bags and keys
Great size
What I don't like
Not very durable
A perfect small gift for your friends and family is a keychain. And the Yemianju rose gold keychain is an extremely stylish keychain to give someone. With a fashionable elephant design, this keychain can also double as a beautiful ornament.
The key ring can fit all kinds of keys, handbags, purses, and bags. On top of that, you can also use it on a car key. So, this is a great gift the recipient can use in all aspects of their life.
After getting a feel for the product, I can assure you that this is a great gift you can get for this price, with a sophisticated design and finely crafted details.
Additionally, the brand offers great customer service. Although, I fail to see why someone might require customer services for the purchase of an inexpensive key chain. But it is a good point, right?
Color: Rose gold | Closure Type: Lobster clasp | Item Dimensions: 5.91 x 3.94 x 1.97 inches
5. Rebel Alliance Millenium Falcon Metal Keychain - Best For Star Wars Fan
What I like
Finely detailed
Lightweight
Durable
Has nostalgic value
What I don't like
Small size
Made in a galaxy far, far away, this Millenium Falcon Metal keychain is the perfect gift for a Star Wars fan. With its solid zinc alloy construction, it covers all of the actual features present in the Millenium Falcon. So, a real Star Wars fan will definitely not be disappointed.
Moreover, this keychain will also function as a great bottle opener. Definitely a great gag gift for when you’re going to have a trilogy marathon with your friends in the holidays.
Star Wars used to be all the rage before, and thus, this would serve as a perfect gift for someone who was a child when the original trilogy came out. Other than that, kids even today are big fans of the Star Wars movies. So, what could be a better gift than Star Wars merchandise?
The OstWony silicone stretch lids are an extremely practical gift to give someone. The 6 pieces of stretchable silicone covers are made up of 100% food-grade silicone. They have enough flexibility to ensure a sealed container and can also tolerate high and low temperatures. Basically, they will keep your food fresh and safe for a long time.
After using them for the first time, use boiling water to clean and disinfect the stretchable covers. Be careful not to use anything sharp to clean the covers to prevent damage.
After putting it to the test, I found that the stretchability of the covers ensures that they will be able to fit most bowls, cups, jars, bottles, and pots. Additionally, you can also use it for cut-up fruits. No more brownish apples. With these stretch lids, be assured of eating fresh fruit every time.
Everyone has had problems with socket compatibility before. So, this HTWORGE universal socket is an amazing gift to give someone. This grip socket can adjust to grip hex nuts, hooks, eye and lag screws, bolt heads, and other various sizes and shapes.
It can fit the standard ¼ inch to ¾ inch and the metric 7 to 19 mm nuts and bolts.
With its stainless steel construction and 54 individual hardened steel spring pins that retract to the shape of most objects, this durable and universal wrench can be applied to the automotive industry, manufacturing industry, construction industry, and household maintenance.
Additionally, the package also contains a power drill adaptor which can be attached with a socket wrench, power drill, and ratchet driver.
You might think that giving inexpensive gifts come off as cheap, or you can only give bad quality gifts that will inevitably end up in the trash. But that’s not true at all! You can buy practical and unique gifts for your friends and family for under $5.
Whether it’s special occasions, Father’s or Mother’s Day, or it’s Christmas season, whenever you are on a tight budget, this holy grail of inexpensive gifts can always come to your rescue.
Apart from that, here are a few points you can keep in mind before you go on your budget shopping spree.
1. Personalized Gift
The best part of giving a gift to someone is the personal happy touch. You know the person you are giving the gift to. Then why give a generalized gift when you can cater to the person’s preferences? A makeup bag for a makeup lover or Star Wars merch for the Luke Skywalker fan. This is how you can get fun gifts for people while staying within a budget.
Other ideas for personalized gifts are a gift box, scented candles, wine bottle holders, coffee filters, cookie cutters, skin cosmetics, and beer or coffee mugor cup holders. You can even gift a house plant to your friend on their birthday if they’re a plant lover. The point is to personalize the gift according to the person.
2. Utility
Just because you are getting a gift for under $5 doesn’t mean it can’t have any utility. In my opinion, the best gifts are the ones that are fun and provide utility at the same time, like scented candles or quirky keychains. So, keep in mind that the gift you are giving to someone has some utility for them.
You can give a bound book to an avid reader or vitamin E capsules to a skincare addict. A box cutter with indie patterns on it. Essential oils or a fun bath bomb for a person who loves to take long baths. These gift ideas are great for making sure the gift you are giving is personalized and has utility at the same time.
3. Quality
I highly recommend against giving something that you think is unique but is of low quality just because you are shopping on a budget. Giving a $5 gift might not come off as cheap, but giving a low-quality gift definitely will. So, go for gifts that are cheap but also have high quality.
Basically, go for gifts that are normally available within the set budget. Yes, you might find a gorgeous dress for under $5, but what about the quality of its fabric and its final look? You can’t compromise on that. So, better give a good quality product than an expensive-looking low-quality product.
4. Setting
The gift you’re giving to someone also depends on the setting. If it’s a White Elephant party, a Christmas party, or a birthday party, the types of gifts you give will change with each occasion. A gag gift is the best option for a white elephant party, while a personalized and thoughtful gift is the perfect option for a birthday party.
Can I buy gifts under $5 for stocking stuffers?
Yes, you absolutely can. The point of stocking stuffers is to fill the stocking with small gifts. So, apart from being given as individual gifts, you can definitely use these gifts as stocking stuffers on a special occasion like Christmas.
Will I come off as cheap giving gifts under $5?
Absolutely not, unless the person you are giving a gift to is quite snotty. With gifts, it’s always the thought that counts. The price tag does not matter as long as the recipient is satisfied with the gift you’ve given them. Now be it a lip balm for dry lips or a papaya conditioner for the hair, it is definitely the thought that counts.
This is why I advised you before to make sure the gift is personalized. Maybe the person won’t like the $20 shirt you bought for them, but they will definitely love the ceramide moisturizer you bought for them because you know they struggle with dry skin. This is how you make the gift personalized and thoughtful.
How do I make sure I am giving a high-quality gift for under $5?
As explained before, go for gifts that are normally available in this price range. For instance, a good quality dress isn’t usually available under $5. So, if you find one that is within that budget, you know it is going to be of low quality.
On the other hand, keychains, bath bombs, and card holders are readily available within that price range. This way, you can make sure that the gift you are giving to someone is of good quality and won’t end up in the trash anytime soon.
Verdict
Coming to the end of this affordable gifts list, the original slinky stands out as on the top of the list just because of how silly and fun it is. I mean, who wouldn’t love a fun and classic toy on a special occasion?
The makeup and cosmetics bag is another great gift for someone who loves makeup. Since skincare is a trendy topic these days, this bag will also function as a great organizer for a newbie skincare addict in your life. Talking about organization, another great option is the Mr. Pen card holder. Now you’ll never lose track of a card again!
So, hopefully, this list helped you get some ideas about inexpensive gifts. I also hope it made you feel better about buying gifts on a budget again. I have said it several times, and I’ll say it again, it’s the thought that counts. Have a great holiday season, folks!
Piece by piece, branch by branch, and twig by twig the wood texture dominates the entire world through an extraordinary allure, coziness, and warmth. Driftwood in particular is something different, something on which water has done its deed, it purified and smoothed the superb texture, slowly shaping it into an organic final form that can really highlight the world originally in your decor. Cast a glance at the gallery showcased below and pick your favorite craft, These DIY driftwood vintage decorations can serve as a starting point in your DIY endeavors but keep in mind that your solution should exude authenticity, being tailored to your own design line and furniture setup.
DIY Driftwood Decorations
#1 Tree Wooden Log Transformed Into a Beautiful Chandelier
Driftwood can be a real resource as the gallery above has beautifully showcased. In just a matter of minutes, an item purified by water can become an extraordinary centerpiece in your interior design line. We would love to hear your opinion in the comment section below on these DIY driftwood vintage decorations.
There is nothing more classic than simple colors like black and white as far as bathroom décor ideas go.
Granted, there are many more modern colors and abstract design patterns that people tend to opt for. However, when used in the right way, even black and white décor can be elegant and very royal. Plus, it is essential to understand how these colors should be used to create the best possible look.
That being said, to remove the predisposition that black and white is dull, we have a few décor ideas for you to peruse. If you have been looking for ways to upgrade the look of the bathroom, this is the guide to fall back on.
Now, without further ado, let’s jump right to the good part!
Black And White Bathroom Inspiration Ideas
One of the best things about the black-and-white color combination is that it can be used to make a statement in a suitable manner. Additionally, it is possible to completely change the mood of the room - from light and airy to moody and regal.
The best part about this color is that finding black and white tiles for the bathroom is easy. This way, you can fully explore all the different designs without spending too much time hunting for the materials.
Let’s look at some of the popular designs for black and white bathrooms that people are giving a shot.
1. A Modern Outlook
While black and white have always been considered a traditional color scheme, who says the designs have to be traditional? If you are looking to create a modern design in the bathroom, why not steer clear of the traditional all-white bathroom designs? Instead, look at all-black bathrooms with minimal white elements.
Another widespread contemporary design we have taken note of is using the right fixtures. Even if you have a white interior, using the right kind of fixtures (and in darker colors) always seems to do the trick. Additionally, you can accentuate the look of the room by adding accent walls or a glass shower door instead of shower curtains.
2. Minimalistic Scandinavian Styles
If you are not too big on the designs and do not want a dark-looking bathroom, we suggest looking into Scandinavian designs. Usually, these types of designs are based on the practicality of the bathroom and are simple. This is why a lot of white is used in the forefront, like on the walls, cabinets, and floors.
However, you can make this a bit more modern or add a dramatic touch with black elements. We have seen plenty of homeowners add a black frame around the mirror, or install black fixtures to make it look less monotonous. Furthermore, the sudden splash of darker colors adds a bit of depth to the room without stripping it from its functionality.
We are also big fans of adding wooden elements when it comes to minimalistic designs. If there is a white bathtub in the bathroom, why not pair it with black floor tiles and a wooden table next to it. Plus, even wooden countertops look great and tie in well with the minimalistic interior design.
3. Add A Bit Of Gold
One of the colors that go really well with white and black is gold. Hence, many homeowners are adding gold accents to the bathrooms to create a more luxe look.
Additionally, we feel it is a great idea to incorporate in smaller spaces as it gives a warmer look to the room. The only thing you need to remember is to add it in moderation to maintain a balance.
Some of the best examples we can offer are adding golden fixtures or wall tiles with minimal gold patterns. Many people also like to have drawer pulls and towel holders in gold, especially against a white background for contrast.
But if the idea is to have a very prominent golden feature, there is nothing better than a gold accent wall.
4. Traditional Designs
We know that not everyone is looking to create something out of the box. Considering that black and white as a combination is a classic, there is a lot that can be done from a traditional standpoint as well. Moreover, it is not always easy to create something luxe or modern if there is not enough space in the bathroom.
This is why we have made it a point to incorporate this point into our list. We feel the best way to utilize both these colors is to have an elegantly designed black floor in combination with a white wall. Additionally, you can add a mix of black and white fixtures to create the right balance of colors.
A design of this sort will allow you to maintain that traditional look and still keep the bathroom looking big and bright.
5. Luxe Bathroom Ideas
For the people who love spending time in the bathroom, we understand the need for proper aesthetics. The right bathroom interior can change anyone’s mood, and besides, who wouldn’t want a luxurious bathroom in the house? Hence, adding the right elements along with a balance of both colors is essential.
We suggest using black marble, white subway tiles, and plenty of decor items to make the bathroom look more luxe. Some of the commonly used elements are lamps, flowerpots, and wall fixtures. What’s more, if budget and space permit, many homeowners like to add a freestanding tub, chandeliers, or furniture in the bathroom to give it a more regal look.
Alternatively, you can opt for an all-white interior with black granite elements like countertops for a bit of contrast. The idea is to keep a balanced black-and-white theme with additional features to tie in the luxurious feel.
6. Transforming The Master Bathroom
When it comes to the master bathroom, everyone likes to transform it into the best possible space. This is especially the case when the bedroom has an excellent look, so the bathroom needs to match up. Usually, homeowners who like the black-and-white combination tend to keep it simple, but not this time.
If you are struggling with décor ideas, we suggest going with something bold. One of the most popular design ideas is mosaic tiles. Now, the size of the patterns depends on the size of the bathroom.
The rule of thumb indicates that a bigger bathroom space requires bigger mosaic tiles. Plus, these floor tiles look exceptionally great with a plain wall of the opposite color.
So if the floor is black, opt for a white tile for the walls in a less obvious design. Alternatively, white floor tiles look amazing with black mosaic walls but the choice is yours.
7. Making The Most Of A Small Bathroom
Quite a few homeowners believe that small bathrooms are difficult to style since there is a lack of space. But, that is far from the truth. We believe that the best way to create a stylish bathroom is by using just two colors. Furthermore, the fewer colors used, the cleaner the interior looks.
In fact, you can even create themes in a tiny bathroom as very little is needed to get it done. Some of the popular themes people tend to go with are vintage, floral, and even industrial.
Additionally, you can opt for different patterns when it comes to floor and wall tiles while remaining in the black-and-white color scheme. The main idea is to create a simple, monochrome layout in the bathroom by balancing out the colors.
For that purpose, if you are using a black tile for the walls and the floor, make sure that the tub, mirror, sink, and every other aspect are white. This will allow all the elements in the bathroom to pop out more.
8. Add A Focal Point
One of our personal favorite bathroom décor ideas is adding some sort of focal point in the room. Freestanding tubs are the usual go-to idea when it comes to drawing attention, but there are tons of other ways to achieve the same result. If your bathroom is predominantly dark, then we suggest adding a white vessel sink.
However, if you are keen on using a tub, there are several things you can do. If there is space, why not get a European-style freestanding tub that can sit in the center of the room? Also, if the bathroom is primarily white, you can create a dark focal point by having black cabinet doors and fixtures.
9. Tiled Black And White Bathrooms
We have mentioned using tiles in the bathroom time and again but let’s focus a bit more on subway tiles or traditional square tiles. While most bathrooms come with tiles like these, those can often be too traditional and boring. Hence, take a look at what the industry has to offer, as there is so much versatility in tile designs these days.
One of our favorites is chevron pattern tiles, as those give the bathroom a more appealing look than some traditional tiles. On the other hand, simple plain black or white tiles give the bathroom a neutral backdrop allowing you to experiment with the rest of the look.
We particularly like the use of mosaic tiles, or tiles with any geometric pattern, since it can offer a timeless appeal without spending too much money.
10. Using Lights
When it comes to having dark bathrooms, lighting is key. Since many people tend to use the bathroom as powder rooms as well, it is necessary to have appropriate lighting without spoiling the look of the bathroom. Hence, we suggest using skylights with dark accent walls and adding small light fixtures near any wall-mounted mirror on a black tile wall.
However, it is not just adding the light but also matching it to the room’s aesthetic. If the bathroom has a modern, moody vibe to it, then we suggest adding silver light fixtures with a metallic finish. On the other hand, if the room is bright and regal, you can choose to contrast it with dark fixtures or go for gold!
For more oversized bathrooms, adding big lamps will help utilize the space and become the highlight of the room. On the other hand, if you have to work with a small space, adding just a chandelier is a smart choice for lighting and aesthetics.
11. Black Brick Tiles in Luxurious Bathroom
Sometimes it is all about the nitty-gritty when it comes to designs, and that is what we want to explore in this idea. What most people do is they opt for single-color tiles which provide a uniform look. Additionally, some might even go with white tiles that have black grout. But we know that is not what you want.
This is why we urge you to try black tiles with white grout instead. Not only are they better to look at, but they can also even provide the illusion of the room being bigger when placed in the right way. Our personal favorite is the chevron pattern, as it acts as a bold backdrop for simple mirrors or a white countertop.
12. Creating A Split
One very interesting design we once came across was a split between the colors in the bathroom. Think “his and hers” but in the form of black and white, where each color takes a half. Now, this is something that can be done on the walls as well as the floor and is ideal for smaller bathrooms that have less space to experiment.
So, the next time you are looking at potential designs, why not create a diagonal split on the wall between white and black tiles. If the bathroom is big enough, you can do it on the wall behind the sink to create that ideal his and hers split.
13. Adding A Border
The next design we were quite intrigued about had to do with borders. Now, there are a lot of people who do not want to cover the bathroom with tiles; after all, they can be difficult to clean. But, they still want to use tiles. And so, for them, we suggest creating a border on the side walls or around any large window.
The idea is to use subway tiles, preferably in both black and white, to create a toothed edge. However, this will only work in contract with the rest of the room. So, if the bathroom is dark, make sure to use bright white tiles and vice-versa for white walls.
14. Pattern-Heavy Walls
Who said patterns only have to be in bold colors? Thanks to the number of options on the market, creating a bold statement with just black and white designs is easy. If you like having patterns on the wall, why not look at some geometric or floral prints? These are excellent when the idea is to get more done with less effort.
We also suggest looking at more abstract designs if you really want the bathroom wall to stand out. Additionally, in terms of a color scheme, it is always best to have a bit of a contrast from the floor tile. We found lighter geometric patterns on the walls paired with a black tile floor to be more appealing than when the colors were reversed.
15. Powder Room Ideas
Now that we are done with bathroom ideas, let’s move on to something similar: powder rooms. These are not too different from bathrooms but are more for guests and other family members. Also known as a half bath, a powder room usually has just a sink and a toilet with no space for a shower.
If you are the kind of person who has lavish-looking bathrooms, it would be unfair if the powder room does not follow suit. After all, that is what the guests are going to be using the most. The only issue is a powder room does not have as much space as a regular bathroom, and so the design options are limited.
However, if you are smart about it, a well-designed black-and-white powder room can make the space look much larger. To make this a possibility, we suggest using black tiles in stone for the walls. Alternatively, you can have a bright white powder room with black marble and granite countertops. And, as mentioned earlier, dark rooms mean ample lighting fixtures.
Tile Designs For The Bathroom
With the advancements in the interior design industry, there is so much versatility in terms of tile designs too. Whether you are looking for something that is more traditional or eye-catching, there is an ideal tile design for everyone. Take a look at some of these patterns if you’re still unsure:
A. Herringbone
The Herringbone pattern is one of the most common ones done with a subway tile. Resembling the skeleton of the herring fish, this pattern has V-shaped tiles angled at 45 degrees. Since it is a classic, it is found in plenty of commercial spaces and hotels.
B. Brick
If you are looking to make the room look wider, we suggest going with a brick pattern. The tiles are placed like bricks and hence aren’t precisely one on top of the other. Instead, they are a bit offset which is why any room with this pattern looks much bigger.
C. Stacked
This one is for people who love traditional designs and clean lines. The stacked pattern in tiles is when one tile is placed directly on top of the other. Furthermore, it is a clean look that many homeowners opt for when tiling walls. These can either be placed in a grid-like style or horizontally, depending on preference.
D. Hopscotch
A very popular floor pattern is the hopscotch pattern, where smaller tiles are placed in the corner of larger tiles to mimic the image of a spinning wheel. While it is not very common with black and white tiles, this can be seen on neutral-colored ceramic or marble tiles.
Additionally, the hopscotch pattern is a random pattern for tiles, and if you are looking to use your creativity, random tile patterns are the best. Some of the best random patterns have one color, say white, as the base with a beautiful black tile placed randomly in various shapes.
E. Versailles
While this one is a bit difficult to do by yourself, the pattern is a classic. The Versailles tile pattern is made when different sizes of square and rectangular tiles are placed together. Additionally, this is the ideal pattern to follow in a black-and-white theme and looks great on shower walls.
F. Geometric
We have already mentioned how great a geometric pattern is when creating something modern. If your powder room or shower walls need a makeover, adding geometric tiles is the answer. Not only can they be done in black and white but many other colors too.
G. Chevron
Finally, we have the chevron pattern, which is also a favorite. Similar to the herringbone pattern, this one is basically V-shaped tiles, one on top of the other. This zig-zag pattern can be considered cleaner than the herringbone and is ideal for black and white bathrooms.
To Sum It Up
On that note, we finally come to the end of our guide on black-and-white bathroom ideas. We hope that we were able to help as you look for more inspiration and daily tips.
Remember, black and white bathrooms don’t always have to be traditional or super eccentric. Find a middle ground and let your personality come through.
We will be back soon with more advice and décor ideas. Until then, keep exploring and stay creative!
A ducted air conditioning system comes with a high price tag and installation costs, which can range from $3000 to $10,000 in total. However, the overall cost of one depends on factors like buying price, installation, running cost, usage, and product specifications.
Ducted air conditioning has the benefit of cooling multiple rooms through vents or ‘ducts,’ unlike conventional air conditioners.Besides circulating cool air throughout the house, some ducted air conditioning systems have ‘zones,’ meaning you can set different rooms to different temperatures.
And to help you understand them better, I will walk you through how ducted systems work and how much they can cost. Let’s dive in!
Factors Affecting Ducted Air Conditioning Costs
Before you install ducted air conditioning, there are several factors you need to consider to get a better insight into the potential overall expenditure–short and long-term. Even professional ducted air conditioning installation services look into these facts before giving you a quote.
1. Property Size And Layout
Considering the layout and size of the room is very important to find the right spot for installation. This will also help you determine the right size and wattage required, which will play a crucial role in influencing the overall cost of installing the ducted AC.
For example, if you want to add central heating or cooling to an apartment or single-story home with three to four rooms, you will likely require a 7-10 kilo-watt system, costing $5,000- $7,000.
Likewise, if you have a two-story house and require ducted air conditioning units on both floors, you will require a 14-16 kilo-watt system with an expenditure ranging from $7,000 to $9000. However, it is important to note that if the central air conditioning is installed below the floor or above the roof space, there may be an additional expenditure of $500-$1,000.
2. Location Of Your House
Since the U.S. has different types of climates and weather conditions, several factors may lead to the corrosion of your air conditioner. If you live on the coast or near the sea, there is a high chance that salt water might corrode the condenser, the external split systems, or even your entire air conditioning unit. This usually leads to blocked airflow and higher energy consumption, leading to high electricity prices.
However, some reliable brands like Daikin or Fujitsu have an anti-corrosive outer coating and stainless steel mounting for protection and efficient energy use.
3. Control Features
It is no surprise that the ducted air conditioning cost will be higher if there are more features. And modern air conditioning systems have more efficient features, especially when it comes to control and operation, making them easy to use yet pricier. Here are the most common types of control features found in ducted air conditioners:
Standard Control- It has the most basic settings (on/off and timer) required for everyday operation
Zoned Control- This is an additional feature that lets you control the temperature in different, individual units or ‘zones’ for greater energy efficiency
E-Zone Control- The E-zone controller app helps manage the temperature in your home all year round from your phone screen. You can also restrict the airflow to empty rooms, thereby reducing your energy bills.
Amazon Alexa or Google Assistant- Most WiFi-enabled ducted air conditioning units are compatible with Alexa or Google Assistant, which will help you set the temperature from anywhere.
Voice Activation feature- a ducted air con system with its own smart app can have the voice activation option, which you can use to control the air flow or temperature.
4. Brand
Some brands cost more than others; however, you usually pay for better quality and energy efficiency in these cases. You can also find ducted air conditioning systems at low prices, but they might end up costing more in the long run.
Quality issues and warranty are the main reasons why it is always better to go for branded companies with high ratings, such as Daikin, Mitsubishi, Samsung, etc. However, I recommend talking to your ducted air conditioner installation professionals to help decide which brand will suit your needs.
5. Installation And Maintenance
The installation cost is one of the major contributors to the overall expenditure required for heating, ventilation, and air conditioning. If your unit is difficult to install, you’ll likely spend more on installation, so it is better to go for an easy installation split system.
Moreover, if your ducted aircon system has easy-to-clean, removable air ducts, you can maintain the unit at home without hiring professionals. From my experience, hiring air conditioner cleaners can be quite expensive, especially for ducted systems with a larger surface area to clean.
How Much Does Ducted Air Conditioning Installation Cost?
Installing ducted air conditioning is more expensive compared to other types of air conditioning systems. To give you a better idea, I’d say it typically costs 20-30% more than installing a split system or evaporative AC units.
For instance, covering an average one-story home with three or four bedrooms will cost $5000-$7000 in total. And if you have multiple stories, the overall installation cost will be substantially higher, so you must be prepared for a bill ranging from $7,000-$18,000.
Tip
If you live in an apartment with only one or two rooms, you should consider going for mini splits or other cooling systems to reduce installation and running costs.
The exact price you pay to professional suppliers may vary depending on a few factors such as property size, number of floors, electrical outlets, building insulation, construction types, etc. Thus, these price approximations are general, and only professional suppliers or air conditioning experts can give you the right quotes to help you understand and compare prices.
On that note, here are some of the factors that will influence the installation costs:
1. Zoning Systems
Even though categorizing the ducted air conditioning into different systems may seem to be unreasonably adding to your costs, it can actually save you money in the long run. It is an energy-efficient way to install your ducted air conditioning since you won’t need to have the entire ducted system on at all times.
2. Location
Professional installers usually charge more if they have to commute to places that are harder to reach and get transport. So, you might need to pay a higher-than-average installation fee.
3. Roof Size
For installing the ducts for the air-con system, the installers need to access the roof; however, it might be quite challenging if you have less roof space. If you have a small roof, chances are that they might install or adjust the roof trusses, further adding to the bill.
4. Distance Between Units
The distance between the outdoor and indoor air conditioning units can largely determine the installation cost. If the distance between the two is less, the technicians will require fewer materials for installation, thereby lowering the total cost.
Tip
Always look for multiple installation quotes from different installation services to be aware of the price range you’re dealing with. If there is a huge difference between them, ask them about the materials they’re providing for the ductwork.
Ducted Air Conditioning- Running Costs
It is quite difficult to come up with a decisive amount regarding the running costs of a ducted air conditioning system. These costs will largely depend on how many zones you regularly operate since your electricity and maintenance bills are directly proportional to this factor.
However, most air conditioning units nowadays have inverter technology, which is extremely energy efficient. Unlike their non-inverter predecessors, these air conditioning systems promptly go into the energy-saving mode or simply turn themselves off when it reaches the ideal temperature. This has further closed the enormous expenditure gap between ducted ACs and other cooling systems.
On average, ducted air conditioning costs a household around $170 to $350 per year, which is quite affordable, especially if you have a large house. However, it can vary depending on the electricity provider and energy taxes, which you can figure out by asking an electrician for a site visit. If you want to save more energy, there are plenty of energy-efficient ways, such as inverter compressors, temperature timers, insulation, etc.
Reasons To Choose Ducted Air Conditioning
Even though ducted air conditioning costs higher, there are several reasons why they might be more efficient in the long run:
Firstly, a ducted air con can serve as a central air system providing cooling, heating, and ventilation to larger homes with different layouts, making it quite cost-effective. They can even cool or heat hard-to-reach corners with superior airflow and circulation, unlike split systems that limit themselves to specific zones. These are great air conditioning solutions, as they won’t require multiple compressors and wall units, which can ultimately increase the upfront costs. So, even if you’re paying higher installation costs, you’re guaranteed full home coverage.
Secondly, many interior designers prefer hidden air conditioning units to achieve a cleaner, minimalist aesthetic. However, other systems like mini splits, window units, etc., cannot be completely hidden since their indoor component needs to be mounted on full display to produce cool or warm air.
Thirdly, most ducted AC air conditioning systems today come with a ducted reverse cycle, meaning it can produce both hot and cool air in the same capacity. So, going for a ducted AC unit is the best way to avoid purchasing a separate gas heating system. It is a versatile and one-time investment for homeowners who want their air conditioning to do it all through the different seasons.
Final Thoughts
Besides these variable factors, you must consider the future repair costs before buying a ducted air conditioning system. However, a ducted unit is appropriate if you have more rooms and require maximum output for heating and cooling.
Another thing I should mention is that though choosing the lowest installation quote may seem like the right thing to do, don’t forget to look into the details and check whether you’re getting durable and quality materials. And as a thumb rule, always ask for ductwork that doesn’t overheat or isn’t prone to grease so as to reduce the need for frequent maintenance services.
On that note, I’ll be signing off for now. Stick around for more such guides!
We all need a wall clock in our homes, be it as a statement piece or for knowing the time.
In this digitized era, we rely on digital technology for very much everything. Be it calling someone, performing daily chores, and even knowing what time it is. However, we all want a traditional wall clock not only for keeping accurate time but also to add a focal point to the room.
Besides, some wall clocks display helpful information like the day of the week or temperature, while others add stylish and classy design elements to your home.
And you’ve thought of purchasing a wall clock, you have some decisions to make. Do you need a digital or an analog clock face? And do you need additional features or will a simple and classy-looking watch be adequate?
In this review-based guide, we’ll review the 10 best wall clocks out there and provide a detailed buyer’s guide to help you make a viable decision.
Bernhard Products is a well-known analog clock manufacturer and is committed to delivering quality pieces for its consumers. Likewise, this black wall clock is great for any work office, home, or classroom. Its classic frame is sure to align with any room decor, and with 1-year protection, you can get one with complete confidence.
10 Inch clock. Large black bold numbers against white face...
Silent non-ticking mechanism with sweeping movement. enjoy a...
Why Did We Like It?
This classy-looking Bernhard wall clock is sure to grab everyone’s attention. As mentioned, you can keep it anywhere in your room, and it will merge in with the rest of the decor. The black-colored minute and hour hands, the red-colored seconds hand, and the large numbers on the white dial make it easier for anyone to read the clock from a distance.
With a dimension of 10.25 x 10.25 x 1.75 inches and weighing 8 pounds, it's very lightweight, portable, and easy to hang. It’s made of sturdy plastic and a glass lens, which keeps dust away from the dial and is easier to clean.
Interestingly, thanks to its sweeping movement, this battery-operated clock doesn’t make a disturbing ticking sound. So, you can sleep and relax in silence. Plus, their precise Quartz movements always tell you the right time.
What Could've Been Better?
The only setback with the product is that it doesn’t come with AA batteries to operate and show accurate time. But these batteries can be purchased from any local retail store, so that wouldn’t be a significant problem per se..
The 12-inch non-ticking wall clock by Jomparis is considered one of the best wall clocks on the market. Its simple and modern design is suitable for any space, be it a kitchen, bedroom, office, or any other room. And it guarantees to display time accurately and maintain a quiet environment.
Completely Silent: Precise quartz sweep movement guarantees...
Modern and Simple Design:stylish modern cement grey dial...
Why Did We Like It?
Firstly, this modern clock can be a quality addition to your space, thanks to its looks as well as the features it presents. Similar to the Bernhard wall clock, the precise quartz movement ensures no-ticking sound and accurate time. So, you can concentrate on your tasks without getting irritated.
Design and quality are considered absolutely important for a wall clock, and this unit doesn’t disappoint whatsoever. It boasts a stylish modern cement gray dial and 3D white numbers, making for an easy time-viewing experience. Plus, the frame is made of lightweight and sturdy ABS plastic, for optimum durability and longevity.
Moreover, its back slot design includes a hook, so you can hang it anywhere without dropping a sweat. Other than that, these analog clocks are available in several colors for you to select from. And you only need only one AA battery to run this piece for a whole year.
What Could've Been Better?
The white-colored numbers might blend with the dial of the silver clock, making it a bit difficult to read time in poor lighting. It would’ve been better to maintain a contrasting color for the numbers. But aside from this minor inconvenience, we didn’t find any other substantial limitation.
Pros
Completely silent
Sturdy and lightweight
Easy to hang
Looks great
Cons
Time-viewing might be difficult in poor lighting for silver ones
Design: Modern | Material: Plastic | Dimensions: 12"W x 1.77"H | Weight: 1.32 Pounds | Featured: Silent Clock
The Foxtop FT-12JMSRG1 is an elegant-looking analog, battery-powered wall clock that aligns perfectly with your space, irrespective of its decor. It’s easy to install and use with an easily readable face. And it runs smoothly in both dry and wet conditions, so you can get your hands on a high-quality clock.
Upgraded Movement: Compatible with alkaline battery, with a...
Elegant Design: Rose gold color frame makes it the perfect...
Why Did We Like It?
If you wish to add a glamorous accent to your interior decor, this metallic analog clock by Foxtop is an ideal choice. Like our previous models, this wall clock also comes with a precise quartz sweep movement, guaranteeing accurate time display.
In terms of design, the sleek clock, with its silver, gold, and rose gold shades with large numbers, makes it easy to read. The frame is made of durable plastic, making the clock lightweight and long-lasting. Also, the clock background is made of solid plastic, keeping it dry in humid conditions.
Apart from that, it features a front glass cover that makes for convenient viewing while keeping dust away from the dial. And its easy-to-see hands and large numbers ensure easy readability. Lastly, the unit comes with a hook and a back slot for easy installation.
What Could've Been Better?
This unit makes a ticking sound which can be a bit disturbing if the room is extremely quiet, although you might not hear anything in a busy or noisy space. So, it can be a minor setback for some customers who prefer a silent room environment.
Yoobure, with a “high precision” principle for their product design, has developed this precise analog wall clock. With an easy-to-read and traditional clock face, silent dial movement, and sturdy frame, it becomes the perfect choice for users looking for a high-quality unit for their homes. Apart from that, its elegant design adds an aesthetic look to your interior decor.
Concise Style: Special and elegant design with classic black...
Why Did We Like It?
This unit features everything one wishes for in a wall clock. To start with, its built-in sweep movement ensures it doesn’t create a ticking sound, thereby establishing a totally silent working or sleeping environment. It’s a standard feature you’ll witness with most products on our list.
Besides telling accurate time, it boasts a classic style, which suits most interior decor. Also, its black-colored numerals are huge and align perfectly with its background design, making it easier to read the time. So, you can install it anywhere you need it most.
The 10-inch clock weighs 11.6 ounces, making it a lightweight option. Furthermore, the back slot and hook allow you to hang it quickly and complete your daily tasks on time.
What Could've Been Better?
The primary issue that we faced after using the unit for some time was that it started lagging after a few months and required a reset. This is primarily because of the faulty battery holder design, twitch doesn’t allow the battery to last long.
Halfway through the list, we have a vintage-looking wall clock by Hylanda. Its elegant and classy design adds up beauty to your interior decor. What’s more, its sturdy build, superior silent hand movement, easy readability, and other user-friendly features make it a worthy option for almost any space.
🕗【SOLID & LIGHTED & STAIN-RESISTANT】 - The Sturdy...
Why Did We Like It?
There are several things that we love about this product- it’s a 12-inch round-shaped clock with a pale yellow dial face and a brown frame. Anyone who’s a fan of mid-century design and loves adding vintage-themed items in their living room will love the look on offer.
Similar to previous models, this unit also has a superior sweeping movement that ensures true silence, leaving you undisturbed. At the same time, its precise movements ensure accurate time display. Furthermore, its large numbers and HD glass lens make it easy to read and repel the dust falling on it.
Moving on, this unit is powered by one AA battery, which means operating it won’t make you scratch your head. And lastly, it comes with a 1-year warranty, where the company will replace any physically damaged parts resulting from manufacturing defects.
What Could've Been Better?
The issue we encountered with this product was its small back hole which made the overall installation process somewhat problematic. It took us an hour to set it up, as the hole wasn’t visible from the side.
Up next, we bring you a classic timepiece by Hippih that has a silent mechanism and an easy-to-read dial. With this clock, not only will you be able to add aesthetics to the living room, but you can also ensure to always stay on time. And being lightweight, you can easily hang it anywhere.
Easy to Read: The large black numbers of this 10-inch wall...
Easy to Use: 1 AA ordinary Carbon Zinc battery(not...
Why Did We Like It?
To begin with, this Hippih wall clock boasts a classy and elegant look with its round shape and black border frame. Hence, it makes for a perfect gifting option for your loved ones on any special occasion.
Its hands are made of aluminum, which further adds to its classy look. Aside from that, the bold black numbers on the white dial face make it easy to read.
As with most clocks on our list, it features a silent quartz movement. Hence, it doesn’t make any ticking sound and shows precise time so that you won’t get late anywhere.
Furthermore, the frame weighs a mere 1.5 pounds, meaning portability won’t be an issue. And last but not least, the package comes with a simple mounting kit that aids the installation process.
What Could've Been Better?
Our primary disappointment with the unit is its construction. The clock body is made of very lightweight plastic, which might appear flimsy to your hands. So, we didn’t find the price justified according to the construction and material being used.
Stonebriar has this gorgeous vintage wall clock that brings an aesthetic look to your living room, and anyone can hang this clock without breaking a sweat. It’s battery-operated and can even be a perfect gift for elderly people on their special occasions.
This unique clock measures 14" in diameter and is the...
Rustic clock features a vintage worn blue and white clock...
Why Did We Like It?
This Stonebriar wall clock measures 13.98 x 13.98 x 1.1 inches and weighs 1.92 pounds, making it a lightweight model and perfect for any room. And it comes with a keyhole hanger making it easy to hang on any wall.
Its design makes it a standout amongst other products on our list. Featuring a vintage worn blue color, a white clock face print, and lightly distressed black numbers, it gives out an antique farmhouse feel. Its unique look makes it a perfect gift for your loved ones on any special occasion, be it Christmas, birthdays, weddings, or others.
The unit is made from medium-density fibreboard, making it durable and long-lasting. Apart from that, you can just use a damp cloth to clean it, and it needs a single AA battery to run.
What Could've Been Better?
Unlike other models on our list, this wall clock produces a ticking sound, which might irritate many. Apart from that, distressed black numbers on a blue dial make reading difficult in some situations. You might have to get closer to it to read the time.
Bringing you another round-shaped wall clock by Hippih that features a concise style and large black numbers, making it easily readable, even from a distance. Its simple design makes it a suitable fit for any room, and its sturdy frame makes it last longer.
Similar to its sibling product, it features a round face design with large black numbers, making it easy to read. Its elegant and unique design fits beautifully with any of your interior decors. Plus, its sturdy frame and high-quality aluminum pointer make it durable and long-lasting.
Its second-hand doesn’t make a ticking noise, ensuring a quiet and non-disturbing working environment. Apart from that, it comes with a 12-month manufacturer’s warranty so that you can purchase the unit with complete confidence. In case you are somewhat bothered by the clock, you can directly contact the company for their assistance.
The unit also includes a hook that ensures an easy installation. Plus, it needs an AA carbon battery to run, which is readily available.
What Could've Been Better?
The clock by Hippih is not as quiet as advertised by the manufacturer. It makes a murmurous sound, which some might find inappropriate. Apart from that, it started to lag after a few months, which was a critical issue with the unit.
Now that we’ve almost reached the end of our list, we present you with a classic wall clock by Bekith. It has an antique, wooden look with hands that move without ticking noise. Also, it features a practical design that allows easy installation.
Classic style suitable for classroom, office, living room,...
Why Did We Like It?
To start with, this wall clock is made of plastic and has a bronze frame with an off-white clock face contributing to its vintage, antique, and classic look. The unique designed clock aligns with any interior decor and any room that demands a peaceful environment. Thanks to its non-ticking mechanism, you won’t have to worry about it making any ticking sound.
It weighs only 1.05 pounds and becomes one of the most lightweight options to have it hung. Its 12-inch round dial and large black visible numbers make it easy to read.
Apart from that, coming with a wide back slot ensures that you can hang it anywhere easily. Plus, you’ll need 1 AA battery to run the clock. Make sure to change it on a periodical basis to avoid any time lag and risks of you getting late to work.
What Could've Been Better?
We found the battery slot to be a bit tight with this wall clock. So, getting the batteries in and out of it can sometimes be challenging. Apart from that, the battery holder seems to be faulty and a new battery seems to stop working after a few days of its use.
This gorgeous-looking wall clock by Epy Huts is a beautiful piece to keep as a centerpiece of your living room. Made of crystal-clear glass lens, solid plastic case, and metal hands deliver the most value for money. Also, its precise quartz movement doesn’t make any ticking sound.
Clear View-The large numbers are clear to read and the front...
Why Did We Like It?
This classic-looking clock has some handy features that make it suitable for our list. For one, it ensures a silent non-ticking sound owing to its accurate quartz clock movement. And, it shows the accurate time at all times of the day, so you miss nothing.
In terms of design and looks, it features a graphic dial with baton hands and a minimalist straight-cut case, making it suitable for any room. And it comes with a range of dial colors to choose from.
It showcases white Arabic numerals on a black dial, making it easier to read. Apart from that, it’s operated by a single AA battery and is much easier to clean. All these features make it a perfect gift to loved ones on any occasion.
What Could've Been Better?
The major setback of this product is the material it is made of. Because it’s made of plastic, it is not considered a durable clock and can be damaged if it falls to the ground. Apart from that, the battery holder is also much smaller, and you have to struggle to fit in a battery.
For wall clocks, it is challenging to select one from a range of options. We bring you this detailed buyer’s guide, which will help you navigate the market. This section will guide you through features you should look out for when going clock shopping. So, let’s start.
1. Analog Or Digital
First of all, it’s essential to decide which kind of clock you want, an analog or a digital one. Both need to be set up properly before you’re manually using them.
Analog clocks are traditional and typically have three hands, an hour hand, a minute hand, and a second hand. To tell the time, you need to read and interpret the clock face, divided into 12 (for 12 hours) divided into 5 (12 × 5 = 60 minutes).
On the other hand, a digital clock usually comes with a screen that displays the exact time, eliminating the need for interpretation and making it easy to read. Also, you can have an atomic clock to yourself to get an accurate time interpretation every time.
2. Ticking Or Silent
The ticking sound in clocks is mainly due to their second-hand movement. It typically applies to analog clocks. Some people might feel unbothered by the ticking sound, while others find it soothing. However, it can be irritating for some, worse when it's placed in places like a library or bedroom.
Luckily, most wall clocks on the market (many we have discussed on our list) come with silent quartz movement and eliminate the ticking sound.
3. Size
Another factor worth considering is the clock size. A wall clock is helpful only when visible from every corner of the room, and size plays an essential role in this respect.
4. Readability
Apart from its size, other factors come into play where readability and visibility are concerned. This includes:
Contrast between numbers and clock face
Numbering style of the clock (numbers or Roman numerals)
Contrast between face and hands of the clock
Material of the face cover, such that it doesn’t reflect light
Visible in dark
5. Power Source
The way a wall clock is powered is another factor to consider. Most wall clocks use AA batteries, which are easily available in local retail stores. However, some models use power chords to run. We’d suggest avoiding the latter one, as having a cord means the clock needs to be installed near a power source, which might not be accessible easily.
It’s best that clock batteries are changed frequently as weak batteries can stop the clock altogether.
6. Additional Features
Apart from traditional timekeeping, many clocks come with additional functions, especially digital clocks. These functionalities include date keeping, alarm, humidity, and temperature measurement.
7. Style
We’ve already mentioned that a clock is more than just a timepiece, they are a decorative item, and you should treat them as such. And so, when putting on your shopping glasses, pay attention to what it looks like. You have many styles to choose from, like the classical style, modern style, or vintage style.
It’s essential to consider factors like its color, design, and build material.
8. Durability
As for any products you’re purchasing, you might want them to last long. So, it's essential to pay attention to the material of the clock, the manufacturer’s warranty and online reviews posted by customers.
Do you need a wall clock?
It’s not an absolute necessity but is an excellent addition to any space.
Should you purchase an analog or digital clock?
It entirely depends on what you need in your space. They both work equally well, as long as you’re purchasing a reliable and high-quality brand.
How high should a wall clock be hung?
An optimum height for a wall clock is 57-60 inches above the ground. But, you can hang it anywhere you find comfortable and visible from other rooms.
How do you fix a wall clock?
Based on what’s broken, it might be helpful to call for a professional horologist, a specialist in diagnosing and fixing a broken clock.
Conclusion
Whether you’re looking to stay on time or want to add a new item to enhance the look of your room, a wall clock is always an option. So, whatever your reason for purchasing a wall clock, we hope to have helped get your hands to an ideal one.
Before leaving, we’d like to help you further by mentioning our favorites from the list. Bernhard wall clock will be the best wall clock you can get. Apart from its straightforward design with easy-to-read numbers, it doesn’t have any potential issues you have to worry about.
Our next favorite is the Foxtop modern wall clock which comes in a beautiful rose-gold frame that adds up to your wall decor. And, it doesn’t make any sound, and the installation is very straightforward.
With this, we’d say goodbye. See you later and take care!
The Whynter ARC 14S stands out as the best dual-hose portable air conditioner available in the market due to its high cooling capacity and energy-efficient features. Close behind is the Honeywell dual hose portable air conditioner unit, with its unique features and effective mobility.
The new year is here, and the summer months are approaching fast. While the prospect of sunny beaches and cold ice cream is enough to make summers a favorite, you definitely need a good air conditioner to stay cool during these hot months.
Too confused about which portable air conditioner to purchase? Don’t sweat it!Here is a list of the 10 best dual-hose portable air conditioners available in the market in 2023. Go through them to make an informed and effective decision.
Award-Winning Portable AC Unit: Awarded Good Housekeeping's...
Powerful Yet Quiet: The ideal AC unit for bedrooms, this...
What I like
Eco-friendly features
24-hour programmable timer
Easy installation
3-in-1 functionality
What I don't like
Noise levels
Whynter portable air conditioners are one of the most popular portable air conditioner units available in the market these days. The Whynter Arc 14S portable air conditioner makes it easy to go green and remain cool with its eco-friendly and efficient design. This multipurpose machine comes with three modes: fan mode, conditioning mode, and dehumidifier mode.
The cooling power of 14,000 British Thermal Units, or BTUs, and a CFM of 253 will help you effectively cool down an expansive area of 500 square feet. Additionally, the evaporative cooling will ensure that you will never have to drain or empty the AC unit yourself. This will make the cleaning process extremely easier.
The dual hose model helps recycle the moisture collected during the cooling process. On the other hand, the dehumidifier features an excellent capacity of 101 pints per day.
As for going green, this eco-friendly air conditioner features the CFC-free Green R-32 refrigerant, along with lead-free RoHS-compliant components. These inclusions have made this air conditioner one of the best eco-friendly options available in the market. Subsequently, this portable AC unit will also help you cut down your energy consumption levels.
The air conditioner even comes with a protective cover, a window installation kit, a remote control, an activated carbon filter, and a user manual. The attached caster wheels provide portability, while the activated carbon filters help avoid unwanted odors. The conditioner also features a 24-hour programmable timer, which makes operating it simpler.
Moreover, the Whynter ARC-14S is one of the most cost-effective portable air conditioners present in the market. Despite the brand’s popularity and its very unique specifications, this model still remains extremely affordable.
Item Weight: 73 pounds | Noise Level: 56 dB | Cooling Capacity: 14000 BTU | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER): 7.69
INNOVATIVE DUO HOSE DESIGN - Midea's industry-first dual...
INVERTER TECHNOLOGY - Engineered with the variable-speed...
What I like
The 3-in-1 comfort
Easy installation process
Low noise levels
Smart controlling through Alexa/Google Assistant
What I don't like
The app can face issues sometimes
The Midea Duo dual-hose portable air conditioner features the efficient technology of a hose-in-hose air conditioner, which helps with effective air circulation and cooling. Coupled with the air duct system, this air conditioner provides speedy cooling. It blows out cold air up to 26 feet, quickly cooling any room you’re in.
The 3-in-1 functionality makes this portable AC usable all year round. The in-built fan system sends out hot air and brings in serene cool air. Cooling, dehumidification, and circulating modes provide perfect comfort in any season. Besides, the efficient airflow rating of 388.82 CFM allows for fast cooling.
The AC unit runs on the powerful Duo hose system, as well as an optimized air duct system. This ensures a quicker and better cooling experience on the whole. The dual hose model provides better air circulation, helping you cool your room in no time.
An air conditioner that is as quiet as a library? Yes, that’s right. The sound level of Midea Duo goes as low as 42 dB while cooling, allowing you to enjoy the coolness in silence.
Furthermore, the superb inverter technology helps save more than 40% of energy compared to the U.S. federal standards, using the variable speed technology to the fullest. In fact, it uses less electricity to provide more cooling compared to traditional portable AC units.
Talking about technology, the air conditioner works with Wi-Fi, enabling you to connect it to your Alexa or Google Assistant. This feature makes this portable AC unit one of the easiest to use on this list.
Item Weight: 77.2 pounds | Noise Level: 42 dB | Cooling Capacity: 14000 BTU | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER): 12.3
Dual Hose, Double Effect: The hose-in-hose innovation...
Customize Your Comfort: With 5 powerful modes...
What I like
Easy installation
Low noise levels
5-in-1 functionality
Available remote control
What I don't like
Slight delivery issues
The Dreo Twin Cool dual hose air conditioner boasts 5-in-1 operational modes. With just a simple touch of a button, you get to avail yourself of the cooling mode, fan mode, dehumidifier mode, auto mode, and sleep mode. The button is present on an elaborate all-in-one touch panel, along with a handy remote control, providing many useful functions.
This dual hose portable AC unit blows out cold air with the cooling power of 12000 BTUs, pushing the heat out of any room efficiently. This cooling efficiency gives you a temperature range of 60°F - 86°F.
Additionally, the dual hose technology provides efficient air circulation, with the air conditioner blowing out cold air as far as 28 feet. This makes the air conditioner ideal for rooms up to 450 square feet.
Moreover, the installation process is extremely simple. The installation kit makes it easy to attach the air conditioner to any hung or sliding window. The kit also includes a 47-inch pre-assembled exhaust hose, which allows for easy maneuvering. Besides, the variability in the conditioner speeds helps save over 40% in energy costs.
However, there are certain window requirements you need to keep in mind. For a sliding window, the optimal width should be between 26.8 - 49 inches, while the sill level height should be between 4 - 47 inches. In the case of a hung window, the length should be 26.8 - 49 inches, while the sill level height should be between 4 and 47 inches.
Item Weight: 72.9 pounds | Noise Level: 42 dB | Cooling Capacity: 12000 BTU | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER): N/A
Award-Winning Portable AC Unit: Awarded "QUIETEST PORTABLE...
Powerful Yet Quiet: The ideal AC unit for bedrooms, this...
What I like
CFC and lead-free components
Hassle-free installation
Improved air quality due to filters
4-in-1 functionality
What I don't like
Slower airflow compared to other units
The Whynter Elite Arc dual hose portable air conditioner comes with a feasible auto-drain technology, providing you with a dehumidifying capacity of 82 pints per day. This automatic technology allows for the continuous operation of the 4 available modes: air conditioning, fan, heating, and dehumidifying.
The dehumidifier mode works efficiently, along with the auto pump, with a dehumidifying capacity of 82 pints a day. The auto pump itself helps in the seamless and continuous operation of the 4 different modes. On the other hand, the full thermostatic control opens you to the temperature range of 61°F - 89°F.
With a cooling power of 10000 BTUs and the usage of CFC-free Green R-410a refrigerant and lead-free RoHS-compliant components, this portable AC will give you powerful and energy-efficient cooling at the same time. The cooling capacity enables effective cooling in spaces up to 400 square feet.
Furthermore, the Noise Dampening technology included in this portable AC helps keep the noise levels extremely low. In fact, the highest noise level of this AC unit is only 52 dB.
The product includes a protective cover, an easy window installation kit, remote control, an activated carbon filter, an exhaust hose, a washable pre-filter, and a user manual. The exhaust hose measures up to 60 inches, with the window kit measuring 6.5 inches in width and 20-46 inches in length.
This makes the installation process very easy for you. Even the usage is made easy with the handy remote control, automatic restart post power outage, and a 24-hour programmable timer.
Item Weight: 70 pounds | Noise Level: 52 dB | Cooling Capacity: 12000 BTU | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER): 6.88
COMPACT, POWERFUL, & PORTABLE—Ideal for areas up to 700...
PEACE OF MIND FROM A BRAND YOU TRUST—Thermal overload...
What I like
Hassle-free installation
Washable filters
Strong airflow and circulation
Elegant mirage display for readability
What I don't like
Comparatively more expensive
The Honeywell Portable Air Conditioner is a powerful dual-hose AC, which can cover a large area of over 725 square feet. The efficient cooling capacity of 14500 BTUs will not only provide effective cooling but also help you become energy efficient.
This compact AC comes with an inbuilt dehumidifier and dual hose design, allowing for faster and more efficient cooling.
Additionally, the thermal overload protection provides you with an added level of safety, while the dual dust filtration mechanism helps extend the product life and enhance performance by keeping the internal parts clean. Hence, you can roll around this unit from room to room using the mobile wheels without worrying about the product's longevity!
Moreover, the easy installation kit allows for a hassle-free installation, providing you with cool air in no time. Thus, you can easily start the cooling process immediately, since the window brackets and the exhaust hose are already included in the installation kit.
And that’s not the only advantage this AC provides. The elegant mirage display allows for easy readability, while the handy remote control allows you to change settings in comfort.
Due to its energy efficiency and effective technology, this AC unit is definitely on the costlier side of units on this list. However, you will find that the utility of the product will justify the price in the long run.
Item Weight: 59.5 pounds | Noise Level: 51 dB | Cooling Capacity: 14500 BTU | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER): 2.6
The Cooper & Hunter dual hose portable air conditioner is loaded with a variety of features to help you cool your space with ease. The Super-Silent Evaporative System, Auto Restart Function, Refrigerant Leakage, Self Diagnosis, and Auto Protection are some helpful features you will find on this air conditioner.
The dual hose technology provides better cooling efficiency, with the exhaust hose and the intake hose working together to create effective airflow. This also helps coordinate the 4-in-1 functionality of this dual hose air conditioner, namely cooling, heating, dehumidifying, and ventilation. However, the heating function ceases to perform if the ambient temperature is lower than 61°F.
The powerful cooling power of 14000 BTUs will provide an operational temperature of 61°F - 89°F. This makes the air conditioner extremely efficient to use, along with the ease of washable filters and filter alerts.
Moreover, the installation is pretty simple, with everything you need to be included in the product box. The window brackets will fit vertical as well as horizontal windows with a width range of 20 to 46 inches and a minimum opening of 5.9 inches. The air conditioner comes with the standard three-prong plug, which fits most outlets.
Even more so, the product provides you with an ensured 2-year warranty, as well as a US-based customer support team, which will provide you with any assistance you might need.
Item Weight: 83.8 pounds | Noise Level: N/A | Cooling Capacity: 14000 BTU | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER): 5.93
Powerful Yet Quiet: The ideal AC unit for bedrooms, this...
Built-In Dehumidifier: This dual-hose portable air...
What I like
Auto drain design
Eco-friendly components
Handy remote control
Efficient humidity control
What I don't like
Relatively high noise levels
The Whynter ARC- 131GD dual hose portable air conditioner comes with an effective patented auto drain technology. This helps automatically exhaust all condensate in most environments, with an optional upper gravity drain port. With a dehumidifying capacity of 91 pints per day, this air conditioner helps with effective temperature and humidity control.
The powerful cooling capacity of 13000 BTUs (ASHRAE) will cool any mid-size room while being quiet and peaceful at the same time. The noise levels produced by this AC unit remain around 56 dB at all times, which can be quite a disturbance.
The multi-functional design provides you with 4 operational modes: cool, fan, dehumidifier, and automatic mode. Additionally, the full thermostatic control gives you a temperature range of 61°F- 89°F. You can enjoy this expansive temperature range within the sizable area of 420 square feet.
This dual hose portable AC includes a handy remote and washable pre-filters, making the usage extremely simple. The washable filters also make the cleaning process easy, providing you with a relatively simple cooling experience.
The AC is also eco-friendly and will enable you to save on your energy costs. It uses the environmentally friendly CFC-free Green R-410A refrigerant. Furthermore, the activated carbon air filter will leave your area with cooler and cleaner air.
The product box includes many parts that will help make the installation process simple for you. The AC comes with an extendable exhaust hose (up to 59 inches), a large exhaust hose (5.9 inches in diameter), and a small intake hose (5 inches in diameter).
The width of the kit is 6.5 inches, and it can support window lengths between 20 - 46 inches.
Item Weight: 70 pounds | Noise Level: 56 dB | Cooling Capacity: 13000 BTU | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER): 5.88
GE 10,000 BTU PORTABLE AIR CONDITIONER is designed to...
3-IN-1 PORTABLE AIR CONDITIONER- Built-in air conditioning,...
What I like
Automatic draining design
Easy window installation kit
Effortless mobility
LED controls
What I don't like
Not eco-friendly
The GE dual hose portable air conditioner is equipped with a cooling capacity of 10000 BTUs, providing efficient cooling to rooms up to 450 square feet in size. The air conditioning features, the dehumidifying design, and the three fan speeds will give you comfort in any room of your choice.
And if you’re too tired of draining your ACs, with this model, there’s no need because of the automatic evaporation of cooling water. You can even add additional equipment to this model, like the RAP02 kit, which will provide you with two hoses, leading to an overall faster and more uniform cooling experience and ambient temperatures.
The simple window installation kit will help start the cooling process in no time. Even the remote control is equipped with LED controls, enhancing readability and making it extremely easy to manage the AC settings. No need to walk over to the unit every time. You can control the settings from anywhere in your room.
Additionally, the 24-hour programmable timer, washable filters, easy-roll wheels, and automatic restart post-power outage give efficient usage and mobility.
Item Weight: 71.3 pounds | Noise Level: 53 dB | Cooling Capacity: 10500 BTU | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER): 2.6
【❄EFFICIENCY COOLING & DUAL HOSE SYSTEM】Built in the...
【❄SIMPLE & EASY TO USE】Features including Cooling...
What I like
Compact size
Effective sleep mode
Simple installation process
Easy portability
What I don't like
Lesser cooling coverage
The EENOUR Q750 dual hose portable air conditioner is different from the others in this list, as it is one of the best portable air conditioners available in the market for the outdoors. This portable AC unit is excellent when you want to have a family get-together or a BBQ party out in the summer heat.
Operating on a powerful twin-piston compressor of 4.6 CC/R, this portable AC generates strong cooling with 2900 BTUs. Additionally, the cooling model offers a lucrative temperature range of 60°F - 86°F, along with 3 levels of fan speed. This makes for an optimal cooling experience and ambient temperatures.
Made for a quick getaway, this portable AC is extremely compact and lightweight. It even comes with an attached handle, ensuring maximum portability. You just need to connect it to a 100 - 240V power supply, providing effective cooling in closed areas up to 40 square feet.
This air conditioner also comes with a unique sleep mode, which can be controlled through the easily readable LCD panel. The sleep mode will stop the cooling automatically, switching on only the fan mode. Hence, you will be undisturbed in your sleep, enjoying the cool air.
The installation kit includes an exhaust hose, duct, and simple instructions, so no extra tools or supplies are needed to get the cooling process started.
Item Weight: 22.05 pounds | Noise Level: 58 dB | Cooling Capacity: 2900 BTU | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER): 2.6
Condensate Drainage: Friedrich’s portable air conditioner...
Auto Swing Louvers: The unit comes standard with auto swing...
What I like
Even air distribution
4-in-1 functionality
User-friendly display and controls
Easy installation
What I don't like
Not eco-friendly
A unique feature you need to know about the Friedrich ZoneAire portable air conditioner is its Auto Swing Louvers. This feature means that this portable AC unit comes with auto-swing air louvers for even air distribution. It also includes 3 levels of fan speeds.
You will find this portable AC unit to be equipped with 4-in-1 system options, enabling you to control cooling, dehumidifying, heating, and a fan. The heating is done using a heat pump, whereas the dehumidifier works at a capacity of 72 pints a day.
This air conditioner is also equipped with a self-evaporation system, so you won’t be required to drain the AC unit from time to time. What makes this AC even more user-friendly is its extremely simple installation process. You just need to plug it into a suitable electrical outlet, and the cooling process starts immediately.
Furthermore, the AC unit helps ensure fresh air inside whatever room you keep the unit. And the washable dual filters help keep that breath of fresh air inside your cooling space.
This air conditioner displays the set-point temperature both on top of the unit near the controls and on the front display panel. And in case there’s an interruption in the power supply or a power outage, the air conditioner restarts itself according to the set temperature.
Item Weight: 88 pounds |Noise Level: N/A | Cooling Capacity: 12000 BTU | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER): N/A
Dual Hose Portable Air Conditioners Comparison Table
Buying Guide For The Best Dual Hose Portable Air Conditioner
Dual hose portable air conditioners are best for when you want a compact and efficient portable AC unit you can carry around. The AC unit will help dehumidify and provide cooling to any area where traditional AC units might not be able to help. However, you need to make sure you understand the various features and components before you purchase one. This is a handy buyer’s guide that will help you make an informed decision.
1. Dual Hose or Single Hose? Which is better?
As apparent from the name, dual-hose and single-hose AC units work quite differently. Single hose models draw in the air via gaps built into the system, mainly at the bottom of the unit. The one hose only serves a single function: as an exhaust hose for hot air. So, the end result is a cooling effect on the indoor air. This happens, however, at the cost of negative indoor pressure.
The dual-hose AC units, on the other hand, solve this problem by using two hoses. The two hoses serve two different functions:
The intake hose brings in the fresh outdoor air
The exhaust hose removes the hot indoor air.
Thus, a perfect equilibrium is formed, which helps cool the room more efficiently than a single hose unit. Here are some other benefits that dual-hose AC units have over single-hose AC units:
Dual hose air conditioners provide increased cooling ability without overheating the AC unit.
Further, avoiding overheating ensures the product’s longevity.
The two hoses allow for better airflow of both cool and warm air and thus lead to better cooling.
The indoor air quality is also better since there are two filters in place instead of just one.
Dual hose ACs are more energy efficient than single hose ACs, and hence, have a better SEER rating.
Dual hose air conditioners help avoid negative pressure problems, as they don’t have to pump air against the direction.
So, even though dual-hose AC units are costlier than single-hose AC units having the same cooling power, the long-term benefits overshadow the slight difference in price. Dual AC units will help you save on energy costs and product replacement in the long run. This is why they are preferred over single-hose AC units.
Why is a dual-hose air conditioner not as efficient as a window air conditioner?
A dual-hose portable air conditioner uses an intake hose and an exhaust hose to maintain continuous air circulation. However, the intake hose keeps on bringing a steady intake of warm outside air into the room. Even though the warm air is not released into the room, it still has a warming effect on the air inside the room.
Window air conditioners, on the other hand, bring the warm air only into the back of the unit, which is outside the room. So, they help avoid the warming effect of dual hose AC units and provide more efficient cooling. Obviously, dual hoses are still better than single-hose models.
So, the choice of the perfect air conditioner depends on your needs. You can also check out some of the other best portable air conditioners. What matters, in the end, is your needs being met.
2. Cooling capacity and area coverage
Since dual-hose portable air conditioners can reach high levels of BTUs, in the range of 12000 BTUs to 14000 BTUs, you need to keep in mind the area coverage you require while purchasing the air conditioner. This is because the cooling capacity will determine the square footage covered. Larger rooms will benefit from AC units having higher BTU ratings, while you can make do with an AC unit having a lower BTU rating for a small room.
However, there are certainly other factors that affect the cooling of a portable air conditioner. You will have to increase the power of your dual hose portable AC unit if:
The room receives a lot of sunlight
The room has a lot of windows
The room has high ceilings
The room has poor insulation
3. Noise levels- Keep in mind the disturbance
Any portable air conditioner is bound to make noise. But you need to keep in mind the noise level that might be optimal for you. Go through the noise levels mentioned for each AC unit and make your decision accordingly.
4. Energy-efficient air conditioners- Reduce the electricity bills
Power consumption level should be the first thing you should check in an electric appliance. Dual-hose portable AC units have the advantage of having higher SEER ratings, so make sure to check them out before you make your purchase. The higher the rating, the more the energy efficiency and the lesser the power consumption.
5. Installation compatibility
You will most likely install the dual hose portable AC unit near or on your window. So, you need to make sure that the AC unit you are buying is compatible enough to be installed in relation to your window. Confirm the height and width of the window installation kit, as well as the dimensions of your own window.
Make sure you have satisfactory knowledge about AC hoses and AC vents so that the installation process is made simple for you. You can also gain more insight into the best air conditioner vents available in the market for a better decision.
Remember to check the warranty as well to get more detailed information on what parts and services might be covered.
6. Maintenance
Since you’re the one who has to use the portable air conditioner as well as clean it regularly to ensure maximum performance, make sure the cleaning process is simple enough. Several of the dual-hose portable ACs mentioned on this list have washable filters as well as filter alerts.
A dual-hose portable air conditioner also acts as a dehumidifier when it cools indoor air. Hence, make sure you are familiar with the drainage system of your portable air conditioner, i.e., whether it's self-evaporative or uses a gravity drain.
7. Programmability
As mentioned above, all air conditioners come equipped with their own unique programs and features. Sleep timers, automatic condensate evaporation, 24-hour programmable timers, Wi-Fi-enabled controls, etc., are some of the features usually found in portable AC units.
Some units can also be controlled using smart assistants like Amazon Alexa or Google Assistant. So, you need to figure out which one of the dual-hose portable air conditioner models works best for your needs.
8. Other unique features
Everybody’s needs and wants are different. Hence, what you may want from a dual-hose portable air conditioner might be different from what someone else wants. Some might prefer single-hose air conditioners over double-hose ACs.
That is why you need to go through all the features of the AC unit to make an informed decision. Whether it’s Wi-Fi compatibility or automatic condensate evaporation, or low noise levels, the AC unit should satisfy your own personal needs.
Many portable air conditioners also come along with a heating mode. That can be a good option if you are living in a place with both severe summers and winters.
What is a portable air conditioner?
A portable air conditioner unit helps to cool your room, just like a window air conditioner. But instead of being fitted into a window frame, it has wheels and can be moved from one place to another. These units usually come with easy installation kits and exhaust hoses to ensure maximum efficiency.
Can I carry the portable AC around my room?
Although these AC units are referred to as portable AC units, they can actually be quite heavy to lift and move. This is why you should ensure that your portable AC has easy-to-glide wheels to help locomote it around your room. Though you might definitely require assistance carrying it up or down a staircase.
Are portable air conditioners only beneficial during the summers?
Although the primary function of portable ACs is to cool a room, they can also be used as a dehumidifier. This is extremely helpful if you live in a place that experiences cold and wet winters. It will help you to reduce the humidity in your room. Some portable AC units also come with a heating element, which will obviously make it beneficial during the winter as well.
Can I use a portable air conditioner in a room without a window?
No, unfortunately, you cannot. The functioning of a portable AC depends on the exhaust hose. The heat needs to leave the room through the exhaust hose and out the window to ensure proper cooling. Otherwise, all the hot air will just be released into the room. This is why venting is necessary.
Can I lengthen the exhaust hose?
Generally, you should not lengthen the exhaust hose on your own. Not only might it affect your warrant,y but also cause overheating in the air conditioner.
How do I maintain my portable air conditioner?
Clean your portable AC regularly to ensure it works perfectly. Wipe down the front of the AC using a damp cloth to remove any dirt or grime that might have accumulated. Try to clean the internal condensation collection tank weekly as well to prevent the growth of any bacteria.
Depending on the filter used in your portable AC, you might need to clean it every few months as well. In case your AC has filter alerts, keep in mind to clean them regularly.
Conclusion
The bottom line is if you are looking for an energy-efficient and cost-effective dual-hose portable air conditioner, the Whynter ARC 14S dual-hose portable air conditioner is the best available option. Its high BTU rating, as well as eco-friendly components, make it one of the best portable air conditioners available on the market.
If you are willing to invest in a slightly more expensive but similar alternative, the Honeywell portable air conditioner is another good choice, with its efficient portability. On the other hand, if you prefer lower noise levels, the Midea Duo dual hose portable air conditioner is the best option for you.
Still confused? Make sure to assess your needs and read the buyer’s guide carefully to make an informed decision!
The holiday season brings lots of joy and decoration, but once it's over, the clean-up can be overwhelming. In this article, I review the best Christmas tree bags available to help store the tree and other decorations efficiently.
We've all been there, trying to squeeze our Christmas tree, but once you take the Christmas tree out of the original box, there is NO WAY it is going back in!
That's where Christmas tree storage bags come in. These bags are designed to make storing your tree easier, so you don't have to struggle with cramming it back into its box every year. In this article, I'll guide you through the best Christmas tree bags and find the perfect one for your needs.
Best Christmas Tree Bags
Looking for a tree-mendous way to keep your holiday decorations in tip-top shape? Whether you have a towering Tannenbaum or a petite pine, read on to find the perfect storage solution for your needs.
1. Zober ZCP-101-rd:Best for Storing An Artificial Christmas Tree Up To 9ft Tall
What I like
Comes with an identification card slot
Can accommodate a 9ft tree
Three stitch-reinforced handles
Dual zipper
What I don't like
The plastic material may not be as durable
Meet the Large Zober Christmas Tree Storage Bag. This storage bag is like Santa's magic sack but for your tree. This waterproof polyethylene plastic bag will shield your tree from pesky pests and unwanted moisture so it stays looking its best year after year.
This Christmas tree storage bag's durable construction is reinforced with three stitch-reinforced handles, making it a breeze to transport even the heaviest of Christmas trees.
But the real magic of this Christmas tree storage bag lies in the dual zipper. It opens wide, so you don't have to worry about wrestling with your tree to get it inside. And the attached card slot makes it easy to identify which tree is inside, in case you have more than one.
The Zober Christmas Tree Storage Bag is an excellent solution for anyone looking to store an artificial Christmas tree up to 9ft tall. This storage bag measures 65” L x 15” H x 30” W, providing ample space to hold disassembled trees.
Material: Plastic | Product Dimensions: 65" L x 30" W x 15" H | Specialty: Dual Zipper | Tree Size: 9 ft.
2. Handy Laundry 5035:Best for Tear Resistance
What I like
Two reinforced handles on each side
Heavy-duty tarp material
Designed to be tear-resistant
Has a loop for pulling
What I don't like
May be difficult to clean if it becomes soiled or stained
The Christmas Tree Storage Bag by Handy Laundry is made from a durable, waterproof material that ensures your tree will stay safe and dry while stored. It can accommodate a 7.5-foot disassembled artificial Christmas tree, garland, and even Christmas lights.
This strong, roomy, zippered tarp storage bag is 48 inches long by 15 inches wide by 20 inches high, providing ample space for even the largest artificial trees. The zipper is easy to use and glides smoothly.
In addition to its durability and protection, this Christmas tree storage bag also comes with two reinforced handles, which make it easy to carry and transport your tree from storage to setup. The handles are well-positioned and securely attached to the bag, making it easy to lift and maneuver even a fully-loaded bag. With its heavy-duty handles, durability, and zipper, this storage solution offers unbeatable value and peace of mind.
Material: Trap | Product Dimensions: 48" L x 15" W x 20" H | Specialty: Durable | Tree Size: 7.5 ft.
3. Primode: Best for Hassle-free and Space-saving Storage
What I like
The rectangular shape fits trees well
Sturdy and durable polyethylene
You can actually wear it like a backpack
Doesn't require you to smash the tree when storing it
What I don't like
Does not come with a wheel
The Primode Christmas Tree Storage Bag is a perfect solution for those who want to save time, hassle, and room while storing their Christmas tree. This holiday tree storage bag is made of durable polyethylene material and is designed to protect your Christmas tree from dust, dirt, and moisture when stored during the spring and summer seasons.
This Christmas tree storage bag is spacious and measures 45" L x 15" W x 20" H, making it large enough to store a disassembled 7 ft tree. The holiday tree storage case is equipped with a pair of reinforced handles for easy handling, making it easy to move your tree from one place to another.
With its spacious design, durable material, and convenient features, the Primode Christmas Tree Storage Bag is an excellent investment for anyone who wants to keep their Christmas tree safe and organized for years to come.
Material: Polyethylene | Product Dimensions: 48" L x 15" W x 20" H | Specialty: Durable | Tree Size: 7.5 ft.
4. Elf Stor: Best for Organised Packaging
What I like
Woven heavy cording handles
Folds flat when not in use
Durable, tear-resistant material
Full-length zipper
What I don't like
Not suitable for outdoor storage
With this set of two Christmas tree storage bags, you can store not one but two 4 to 6-ft artificial trees or one 7.5-ft disassembled tree! That's more space for all your jolly decorations!
Made of durable woven polypropylene and nylon, these Santa's bags will protect your tree and decorations. The full-length zipper ensures that your tree is securely stored, and the credit card slot on the front of the Christmas tree bag allows you to label what's inside. The reinforced nylon handles make it easy to transport your Christmas cargo from the living room to the garage or from hallways to storage rooms.
Plus, they fold flat when not in use, so you can easily store them on shelves or garages or in your holiday storage closet.
Overall, the Elf Stor Christmas Tree Storage Bag is a convenient, durable, and reliable organizer. It helps protect your Christmas decoration items against dust and insects and is a space-saver.
Material: Woven Polypropylene, Nylon | Product Dimensions: 48" L x 15" W x 20" H | Specialty: Durable | Tree Size: 7.5 ft.
The HOLIDAY SPIRIT Christmas Tree Storage Bag is made using a dual layer of Oxford canvas material. This helps resist tears and ensures that your tree is safe from water, dust, mildew, and rodents.
In addition to being sturdy, this storage bag also has reinforced handles easing transportation, even if it's heavy. It's like a cozy little bed for your tree, protecting it from all the yucky stuff that can accumulate in storage. The material is also 100% waterproof, guaranteeing that your belongings stay dry and protected from moisture.
Overall, this Christmas tree storage bag is a wise investment that will keep your tree safe and ready to save the holidays year after year.
Material: Canvas | Product Dimensions: 47" L x 14.6" W x 19.7" H | Specialty: Durable, Waterproof | Tree Size: 7.5 ft.
6. Sattiyrch: Best for Sturdiness
What I like
Affordable Price
Moisture-resistant material
Durable reinforced handles
Wide dual zipper
What I don't like
Requires efforts to fold and pack
The Sattiyrch Christmas Tree Storage Bag is a great solution to keep your artificial Christmas tree protected and secure until the next holiday season. This storage bag has dimensions of 48” x 15” x 20”, making it a perfect fit for up to 7.5 feet tall disassembled Christmas trees.
Made from waterproof polyethylene plastic, the Sattiyrch Christmas Tree Storage Bag is moisture-resistant, ensuring that your tree stays dry and protected. This Christmas tree storage bag also features 2-stitch reinforced handles for easy carrying between storage and your living room.
The festive, bright red color of this storage bag makes it easy to identify in storage, and an attached card slot lets you know exactly what’s inside the storage container.
Plus, the two-way/dual zipper makes it easy to place and remove your tree without any assembly required. It's durable, easy to carry, and easy to access, making it a convenient and practical solution for your holiday storage needs.
Material: Plastic | Product Dimensions: 48" L x 20" W x 15" H | Specialty: Sturdy | Tree Size: 7.5 ft.
The Covermates Keepsakes Christmas Tree Duffel Bag is the perfect solution for storing and transporting your Christmas tree hassle-free. Made with tough-as-nails 600D polyester, this Christmas tree storage bag is built to withstand even the most determined tree branches from poking through and wreaking havoc.
With dual zipper pulls, you can easily access your festive fir, and the reinforced handles and wheels make it a breeze to cart your tree from storage to center stage. Plus, the nifty inside pocket and ID window help you stay organized and on top of your decorating game.
Measuring in at a spacious 48W x 24D x 18H, this Christmas tree storage bag can accommodate a tree up to 3 feet tall (depending on its thickness, of course). And with its sturdy construction and oversized wheels, moving your tree around has never been easier.
But wait, there's more! The Covermates Keepsakes Christmas Tree Duffel Bag comes with a 3-year manufacturer warranty, so you can enjoy worry-free storage for many holiday seasons to come.
Material: Heavy Duty Polyester | Product Dimensions: 48" L x 24" W x 18" H | Specialty: Durable | Tree Size: 3 ft.
The first thing to consider when buying a Christmas tree storage bag is the size of your tree. You'll need to measure the height, width, and depth of your tree to ensure you choose a Christmas tree storage bag that fits it properly.
If your tree is a bit on the smaller side, you'll want to look for a storage bag that's designed to hold smaller trees. And if you have a towering giant of a tree, make sure you find a Christmas tree storage bag that's large enough to accommodate its size.
Make sure you pick a brand with a wide Christmas tree storage bag opening for easy loading and unloading. You can even find storage bags specifically designed for upright storage, saving you valuable floor space in your basement or attic. This makes it easier to load your tree into the Christmas tree storage bag and also makes it easier to remove when it's time to set up your tree again next Christmas.
2. Material
Now, let's talk about materials. You want a Christmas tree bag that can handle the weight of even the heaviest Christmas trees, like a steel frame or heavy-duty polyester. And don't forget about those pesky pests, like mites or rodents- so make sure to choose tear-resistant materials that will keep your tree protected all year round.
For those who prefer an upright storage bag option, the heavy-duty canvas is a popular choice. Canvas is known for its strength and durability and can be made moisture-resistant to ensure the tree remains protected during storage. Rubbermaid containers are another durable option, providing a sturdy and protective home for your disassembled tree.
Other materials to consider for Christmas tree storage include tarpaulin and reinforced plastic. These materials are moisture-resistant and provide an extra layer of protection against dust and pests. Compression strap, cinch cord, etc., are additional features to look for when choosing a storage option to ensure a tight and secure fit around the tree.
3. Durability
It is recommended to opt for bags with strong and sturdy construction to ensure that they can withstand the weight and pressure of the tree. When searching for the best Christmas tree storage bags, there are several durable options available in the market, including upright storage bags, rolling Christmas tree storage, canvas bags, and polyester bags.
There are several factors that can impact the durability of a storage bag for a Christmas tree. One of the most important is the material used to make the Christmas tree bag. Polyester bags, for example, are known for their durability, while canvas bags are often preferred for their strength and tear-resistant properties.
Another factor that can affect the durability of a storage bag is its design and construction. Santa's bags with reinforced handles, compression straps, and a cinch cord can help to keep the tree secure and prevent damage during transport.
4. Waterproof
You'll definitely want to make sure your tree stays dry, so why not go for a waterproof option? And if you're feeling extra fancy, go for a hermetic seal to really lock in that moisture resistance.
A Christmas tree storage bag that is not waterproof can result in water damage to the tree, which can cause it to deteriorate and potentially become unusable. To avoid this, it is important to select bags with waterproof materials that can protect the tree from moisture and the elements.
Sealed seams can prevent water from entering the Christmas tree storage bag and protect the tree from moisture damage. Additionally, some bags are designed with a completely waterproof material, which can provide extra protection and ensure that the tree remains dry and in good condition during storage.
How does the material of the bag affect tear-resistance and durability?
The material of the bag greatly affects its tear-resistance and durability. Santa's bags, made of tear-proof and heavy-duty materials such as polyester, are more likely to last longer and withstand heavy trees and other holiday decorations.
Can a cardboard box be used as a Christmas tree storage bag alternative?
While a cardboard box can be used as a temporary solution for storing an artificial Christmas tree, it is not an ideal long-term storage solution. Cardboard boxes are not tear-resistant or waterproof, and they do not provide adequate protection for the tree or its accessories.
Can I store things like a wreath, tree stand, tree skirt, etc., in a Christmas tree storage bag?
Yes, most Christmas tree storage bags are designed to hold not only the tree but also its accessories, such as the tree stand, tree skirt, and even wreaths.
What are the benefits of using an upright Christmas tree storage bag?
An upright Christmas tree storage bag allows for easy storage and transport of the tree while also taking up less space in a garage or storage area. It also helps to maintain the tree's shape and protect it from pests and other damage.
Are Tiny Tim Totes a good choice for Christmas tree storage?
Tiny Tim totes are a popular choice for Christmas tree storage due to their tear-resistant and waterproof polyester material, reinforced handles, compression straps, and dual zipper design.
Is it better to store an artificial Christmas tree in an upright storage bag or lay it down?
It is generally recommended to store an artificial Christmas tree in an upright Christmas tree storage bag to help maintain its shape and prevent damage to its branches. Laying it down flat may cause the branches to become misshapen and may make it more difficult to transport.
Why do Christmas tree storage bags come in only red and green colors?
Red and green are traditional holiday colors, which is why most Christmas tree storage bags come in these colors. However, some manufacturers do offer bags in other colors as well.
Final Verdict
If you're like me and dread the annual task of taking down and storing your Christmas tree, investing in a good-quality Christmas tree bag can be a game-changer.
For the first position, I've got the Primode Christmas Tree Storage Bag for hassle-free storage. Its spacious design and reinforced handles make it easy to move your tree from one place to another.
But if you're in need of a storage bag for an artificial Christmas tree up to 9ft tall, the Zober Christmas Tree Storage Bag is an excellent solution. This waterproof polyethylene plastic bag will shield your tree from pests and moisture so it stays looking its best year after year.
With the right bag, storing your tree can actually become a stress-free task (yes, it's possible!). So, don't let post-Christmas blues get the best of you. Grab yourself a top-rated Christmas tree bag and enjoy a hassle-free storage experience.
The Yinuo Christmas light projector is the best projector on this list, with its Christmas patterns and impressive coverage. The Itoeo light projector comes second with its varied smart features and holiday patterns. Another good option is the Yuegang light projector due to its easy installation and durability.
It’s the most wonderful time of the year. And it is time to decorate your houses with some festive cheer! Whether it’s garlands, icicle lights, or light projectors, your house deserves the best decoration. But are you confused about which light projector would work best for you?
No need to worry! Here is a list of the 9 best Christmas light projectors you can find in 2023. All these are easily available to order on Amazon.
Top 9 Best Christmas Laser Lights
1. Yinuo Christmas Light Projectors - Best Overall
What I like
6 different patterns
Energy efficient
Weatherproof
The package includes the necessary hardware for installation
What I don't like
Not very bright
The Yinuo Christmas light projector is a great option for a laser lighting display this Christmas. It has 6 different patterns, including Santa Claus, Bells, Snowflakes, Christmas Trees, Pentagrams and Dots, and more. These different patterns are projected in 3 colors, namely red, green, and blue.
These lights can cover up to 3900 square feet from a maximum distance of 33 feet without any effect on the clarity of the festive display. Additionally, being made from aluminum alloy, this light projector is durable and IP65 waterproof. So, you can use them outdoors, even during the rain and snow.
What’s more, the projector comes with a 180° adjustable projector head, meaning all corners of your house will be lightened up by the red, green, and blue Christmas patterns.
Moreover, these Christmas lights also come with a remote control and a built-in timer function. The signal of the RF remote can provide control through 40 feet of unobstructed distance.
The package includes a round base and a long ground stake, which means you can use the projector both indoors and outdoors. However, the power cord provided is just 10 feet long, so you will have to use an extension cord to use it outdoors.
Coverage: 5000 sq. ft. | IP Rating: IP65 | Colors: RGB
2. Y Yuegang Christmas Projector Lights - Best Christmas Patterns
What I like
300° adjustable projector head
Timer function
3800 square feet of coverage
33 feet distance for clear patterns
What I don't like
Low adaptor waterproof rating
This Y Yuegang Christmas laser light projector is compact but impactful at the same time, with the ability to cover 3800 square feet from a maximum distance of 33 feet. The projector head can rotate 300° so you can find the angle that works the best for you. The light projector displays 5 different Christmas patterns, including Christmas trees, bells, snowflakes, and Santa Claus.
The light projector also comes with an RF remote control, using which you can change the movement speed and the timer mode of the RGB color model, i.e., red, green, and blue lights. The projector has three motor speed settings and 4 timer settings: 2 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, and 8 hours. You can also reset the timer function using just a button on the remote.
Additionally, you can put the light projector to both indoor and outdoor use by using the round base, and long ground stake included with the set. However, the adapter has a waterproof rating of just IP44, so you will have to be careful while using the projector outdoors. Usually, some sort of cover will make do.
Moreover, this Christmas laser light has a temperature-sensing system that will shut down the projector if it gets a bit too hot. So, this projector will definitely last you many holiday seasons.
Coverage: 3800 sq. ft. | IP Rating: IP44 (adaptor) and IP65 (outer body) | Colors: RGB
3. Itoeo Christmas Laser Lights- Best Coverage
What I like
3800 square feet of coverage
Timer function
Remote control
33 feet distance for clear patterns
What I don't like
Short power cord
The Itoeo Christmas laser lights also showcase 5 different Christmas-themed patterns, including a snowflake, jingling bells, a Christmas tree, and Santa Claus in red and green lights. The projector has a coverage of 3800 square feet from a maximum distance of 33 feet. It also has an adjustable projector head, so you can easily aim the Christmas holiday wall light show wherever you want.
Like the previous projector, this one also comes with a remote control through which you can set a timer function of 2, 4, 6, and 8 hours on. This helps improve energy efficiency and save you dollars on your energy bills.
With the included round base, long ground stake, and extension cord, you can use this light projector both indoors and outdoors. However, the power cord only measures 16.4 feet, so you will probably have to use an extension cord.
Additionally, the light projector supports a temperature-sensing system, which automatically turns off the projector if it gets too hot. This one also has a low waterproof rating for the adapter, i.e., IP44 but a good waterproof rating for the outer body of the projector, IP65.
Coverage: 3800 sq. ft. | IP Rating: IP44 (adaptor) and IP65 (outer body) | Colors: RGB
4. Minetom Christmas Laser Lights Projector- Best Lighting Modes
What I like
Durability
Waterproof
3 lighting modes
Easily portable
What I don't like
No included remote control
The Minetom Christmas laser lights might be more expensive than the other light projectors, but they make up for the cost in their durability. The light projector is durable and portable. Made from ABS plastic and aluminum alloy, it is quite strong. Additionally, it has a waterproof rating of IP65, so you can use it both indoors and outdoors.
Additionally, you get 3 lighting modes: breathing, dynamic, and static mode. However, all these light patterns are showcased in red and green lights. So, you don’t get a lot of variation in colors.
You also don’t get a remote control along with the projector, so you will have to use the buttons on the projector to control it. But it does come with mounting equipment, which will help the projector withstand any strong winter winds.
Coverage: NA | IP Rating: IP65 | Colors: RGB
5. MHAZDZE Christmas Laser Lights- Best Light Features
What I like
Adjustable settings
3541 square feet of coverage
Timer function
Waterproof
What I don't like
Flimsy construction
The Mhazdze Christmas laser projector provides a lot of control over the color display. You can adjust the rotating speed, flash frequency, step speed, and light color according to your preferences.
The projector head has an area coverage of 3541 square feet from a maximum distance of 41 feet, after which the patterns will start to get blurry.
The projector also supports the timer function: 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 hours. Additionally, the projector has a waterproof rating of IP65, so you don’t have to worry about the weather elements either.
However, the projector is quite lightweight and would not be able to withstand strong winds on its own. So, you will have to provide it with some support to continue using it outdoors.
Coverage: 3541 sq. ft. | IP Rating: IP65 | Colors: RGB
6. Caiyue Christmas Laser Lights- Best Color Combinations
What I like
7 color combinations
Timer function
3541 square feet of coverage
Weatherproof
What I don't like
No memory function for the timer
The Caiyue Christmas light projector displays red, blue, and green lasers in 7 different color combinations. You also get three different lighting modes for the three colors: moving firefly effect, moving speed control, and static mode. With these variations, you can produce some interesting light settings.
You get an expansive coverage of 3541 square feet at a maximum distance of 40 feet before the elaborate patterns start to get blurry.
Additionally, you can format the timer function to automatically turn off after 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 hours. With the indoor base and outdoor pile extension, you can use this light projector outdoors as well. You don’t have to worry about the weather since the projector is IP65 waterproof and cold-resistant.
Coverage: 3541 sq. ft. | IP Rating: IP65 | Colors: RGB
7. Lunmore Christmas Laser Lights- Best For Easy Installation
What I like
Firefly effect
Easy installation
Remote control
Waterproof
What I don't like
Small coverage area
The Lunmore Christmas laser lights emit fireflies (yellow-green) and blue lights, which would act as amazing Christmas decorations. Although it does not have dedicated Christmas light patterns, the firefly effect of the yellow lights would surely add to the holiday cheer. You can also choose to turn the individual colors on or off to get only specific colors.
It is very easy to install as well. You can install it on the wall or in the ground using the ground stake included in the package. Additionally, you also get a remote control along with the light projector, so you can easily control the colors, speed, and timer functions.
With a waterproof rating of IP65 and maximum coverage of 900 square feet, you can use this laser projector for both outdoor and indoor use. However, as you can see, the coverage is quite small.
Coverage: 900 sq. ft. | IP Rating: IP65 | Colors: Yellow, Green, and Blue
8. Sunyao Christmas Laser Lights- Best For Durability
What I like
Waterproof
18 feet Long power cord
12 months warranty
Durability
Refund policy
What I don't like
No Christmas-themed patterns
Comparatively costly
The Sunyao Christmas laser projector is a classic RGB laser light projector, having both moving and static firefly options for the Christmas display. Although it doesn’t have any specific Christmas patterns, you can use the three colors to create your own unique Christmas decoration.
Having a waterproof rating of IP65 and an 18 feet long power cord, you can easily channel your Christmas spirit using this projector both indoors and outdoors. Additionally, the projector is pretty easy to install as well. You can use the remote control included in the package to control the light displays and timer functions (2,4, and 6-hour durations).
Moreover, Sunyao provides a 12 months warranty and a 30-day return and refund policy. So, you can always return the light projector if it doesn’t meet your needs.
However, the light projector is quite pricey for not having any Christmas-themed patterns. You can buy it for durability and high quality if you don’t necessarily need a Christmas light project.
Coverage: NA | IP Rating: IP65 | Colors: RGB
9. LedMall 8 Patterns Christmas Laser Lights- Best For Varied Patterns
What I like
Sturdy metallic construction
Weather-resistance
Easy installation
Remote control included
What I don't like
High price tag
The LedMall Christmas laser projector can create beautiful light displays in eight patterns in red, blue, and green colors. Although you can’t select any one individual pattern to play, you can choose the speed and the brightness level of the light patterns using the remote control.
You can install the light projector both indoors and outdoors pretty easily. It is just a simple matter of screwing and unscrewing the ground stake or the round base of the projector stand.
Additionally, the projector is quite weather-resistant. Its metallic construction can withstand any harsh winter winds or snowfall. Even more, it comes with a security kit to ensure your projector stays where you install it.
Moreover, the coverage area is also one of the largest on this list, so this is the projector for you if you have a big house or surface to cover. So, you can easily enjoy the beautiful and twinkling RGB patterns on any surface.
However, the projector is the most expensive on this list. The high durability and weather resistance surely hike up the price.
Coverage: 3500 sq. ft. | IP Rating: IP65 | Colors: RGB
Quick Comparison Of The Top Laser Lights For Christmas
Most people opt for traditional Christmas lights to decorate their houses during the holiday season. But more and more people are starting to choose laser lights for the festive season because of how easy and convenient they are to install.
Since this is such a new trend, you might be confused as to which points to look out for when buying a laser projector. Hence, this buyer’s guide. Hopefully, you will be left more informed about which laser projector to go for.
1. Patterns
The best advantage of using a laser projector instead of traditional string lights is that you can get many different patterns. Whether it’s a Christmas-themed or Halloween-themed image, you can get a variety of patterns with laser projectors. Some projectors only have a few twinkling or dot patterns, while others have up to 10 patterns.
2. Weather Resistance and Durability
You will most likely be installing the laser projector outside your house, and it will most likely be during the winter season. Keeping that in mind, you should be sure about the durability of your light projector depending on the climate in your area. Will it be able to withstand the strong winter winds? What if it rains or snows? Is it dust-resistant?
Be sure to get a laser projector with a minimum waterproofing of IP65. However, if you experience harsh weather conditions in your area, you might require an even higher rating.
3. Remote Control
It’s a cold Christmas night, and you wish to turn on your laser projector to get the Christmas cheer started. Surely, the thought of walking out into the cold weather and turning on the projector manually would be too deterring. So, projectors with remote controls help save a lot of time and energy.
A remote can allow for all kinds of adjustments from the porch or even inside the house, depending on the range of the remote. So, if convenience is a top priority for you, be sure to buy a projector with an included remote control.
4. Installation Process
The whole idea behind using a laser projector instead of traditional string lights is ease and convenience. So, what’s the point if the installation is too tricky? Most laser projectors on this list use a ground stake for outdoor installation, which is pretty easy to use. All you need to do is plug in the electrical cord, which only takes seconds.
5. Extra Features
Many laser projectors on this list are laden with multiple features like speed changes, lighting modes, timer functions, etc. All these will help increase the utility and performance of your laser light projector. Speed changes and different lighting modes offer variation. The timer function will help you save time and money in the long run.
At what distance should I install a Christmas light projector?
The best distance at which you should install a Christmas light projector varies from model to model. For some projectors, it is around 15 to 20 feet, while for others, it is 30 to 40 feet. If you place the projector beyond the given range, the light displays will start to lose clarity.
For the clearest and most defined patterns, place the projector within the given range. So, check the required distances and range before you purchase the projector.
Do Christmas light projectors work on trees?
A Christmas light projector works best on flat surfaces. But, with proper angles and placement, you can project some patterns onto a tree. Different projectors offer different levels of success with trees.
Try to project most of the patterns on the trunk of the tree than the individual branches since the trunk is obviously more broad and flat. Place the projector at the base of the tree and angle it upwards towards the trunk for the best results.
What is the advantage of using a Christmas light projector?
Christmas light projectors are becoming a popular alternative to traditional string lights. This is because they are so convenient and easy to install. No need for a ladder or anything, just place the light projector at the right place on your lawn, and you are good to go.
You don’t have to plan out where each individual light strand would go or pin the light strands in place. Additionally, you can get different Christmas-themed patterns without any extra effort.
Verdict
So, which ones are the best Christmas light projectors on this list? The Yinuo Christmas light projector stands out as the best Christmas light projector with its festive patterns and impressive coverage. It is also pretty affordable for the expansive features it offers.
Hopefully, this helped you figure out how to decorate your house the best way. Have fun light projecting, and have a very Merry Christmas!
Transform your outdoor space into a festive wonderland with the best outdoor Christmas lights of the season. Discover the best outdoor Christmas lights to create a festive and magical atmosphere.
Are you the type of person who starts counting down to Christmas as soon as Halloween is over? Do you deck the halls with twinkling holiday lights before Thanksgiving dinner is even served? Well, my friend, you're not alone.
In fact, you might just be one of us Christmas fanatics who can't wait to turn our homes into winter wonderlands. So, put on your favorite Christmas sweater, and read about the best outdoor Christmas lights that will make your house the envy of the neighborhood.
Best Outdoor Christmas Lights
1. PREXTEX Christmas Lights ESD-100/2F: Best for Those Who Prefer Incandescent Lights
What I like
Up to five sets (500 lights) can be connected
Includes flasher bulbs for a twinkle effect
Long-lasting and high-quality bulbs and wire
Comes with extra bulbs and replacement fuses
What I don't like
Limited color options
With 20 feet of clear white lights on green wire, this set includes 100 bulbs and comes with 2 extra bulbs and 2 replacement fuses. The mini lights are designed to be long-lasting and waterproof, making them suitable for use in a variety of settings.
One unique feature of these white lights is the inclusion of 2 flasher bulbs that can be used to create a twinkle effect. Simply replace one of the regular bulbs in the string with the flasher incandescent light bulb and wait a few seconds for the incandescent lights to start twinkling. Another convenient feature of the PREXTEX Christmas Lights is the ability to connect up to five sets of 500 incandescent lights end-to-end using the included plug. This makes it easy to illuminate larger spaces and create a cohesive look across multiple areas.
Overall, the PREXTEX Christmas Lights seem like a good choice for those looking for affordable and versatile Christmas string lights that can be used for a variety of occasions. The inclusion of the flasher bulbs and the ability to connect multiple sets are both nice touches that add to their value.
Light: Incandescent | Power Source: Corded Electric | Number of Lights: 100, 20 feet | Control Method: Remote
2. YIQU MLS-D29V6WUC-O: Best for Versatile Lighting Modes
What I like
8 different lighting modes to choose from
Memory function
Can be extended up to 5 light chains
UL certification for safe low-voltage use
What I don't like
Limited placement options
The Upgraded LED Christmas String Lights by YIQU are a great choice for anyone looking to add a festive touch to their home. With a total length of 82 feet, these LED Christmas lights come with eight lighting modes to choose from.
The LED lights are designed with a memory function that allows them to remember the previous mode or settings used, making them more convenient to use. Additionally, they come with a low voltage plug and are UL safety organization certified.
You can easily extend these outdoor Christmas lights up to a maximum of 5 Christmas light chains, with a maximum of 1000 LED lights. These Christmas string lights are made with a waterproof feature, which makes them suitable for outdoor and indoor use.
Light: LED | Power Source: Corded Electric | Number of Lights: 200, 82 feet | Control Method: Remote Control
3. Albelt SSLGW: Best for Environmentally Conscious People
What I like
Automatic on/off function
Built-in lighting sensor
Energy-efficient solar-powered lights
Adjustable heads
What I don't like
May not be suitable for large events
The Albelt Super-Long Solar String Lights Outdoor is a great option if you're looking to add some warm and cozy ambiance to your outdoor space. With a total length of 170 feet, the package comes with 2 sets of 85 feet LED lights, making it long enough to decorate a wide range of areas.
One of the best features of these solar string lights is that they are energy-efficient and do not require any electricity or wiring. They are powered by a rechargeable 1800mAh NI-MH battery, which charges quickly with solar power. These outdoor Christmas lights turn on automatically at dusk and have a working time of up to 10-12 hours, depending on how long they are charged.
Another great feature of these solar string lights is that they are waterproof, made of durable PVC-coated copper wire, and bright LED lights that can withstand extreme weather like rain, snow, and frost. This makes them ideal for use in your garden, roof, lawn, fence, or any outdoor space that you want to decorate.
The eight lighting modes and memory functions allow you to choose the perfect lighting mode for your occasion. You can easily switch between the modes with the mode button, and the built-in memory chip saves the last mode setting, so you don't have to reset it again. Additionally, the solar energy panel can be adjusted to face direct sunlight for optimal charging.
Light: LED | Power Source: Solar Powered | Number of Lights: 480, 170 feet | Control Method: Button Control
4. Ollny HG-29V801C:Best for Wide Range of Lighting Possibilities
What I like
Super long length of 800 LED lights
Timer function with memory chip
4 brightness levels
8 modes with a remote control
What I don't like
Being corded limits its placement options
The Ollny Christmas Lights are an impressive set of holiday lights that will make your house stand out during the festive season. With a total length of 272 feet and LED Christmas lights length of 262 feet, this super-long artificial Christmas tree light can easily meet your need to decorate every corner of your house. The extension cord length of 10 feet provides you with more flexibility in positioning the outdoor lights.
These lights have 8 modes, which can be adjusted easily using the remote controller, and choose your favorite one to create a lively atmosphere.
These outdoor Christmas lights have 4 brightness levels, which you can control using the remote controller. You can dim the holiday lights to 100%, 75%, 50%, or 25%, depending on the level of brightness you prefer.
The timer function allows you to set the Christmas lights for 6 hours on and 18 hours off. The built-in memory chip of the Christmas lights indoors & outdoors saves your last-time setting. These outdoor Christmas lights are also IP44 waterproof, and the controller is also waterproof, effectively blocking rainwater from entering. This makes the brand a perfect choice for outdoor/indoor decoration during the holiday season.
Light: LED | Power Source: Corded Electric | Number of Lights: 800, 262 feet | Control Method: Remote Control
5. Kwaiffeo:Best for Beautiful Meteor Shower Effect
What I like
Beautiful meteor shower effect
High-quality and durable PC material
360-degree lighting angle
IP65 waterproof
What I don't like
Need to replace the first set in case of malfunction
The Kwaiffeo Outdoor Christmas Lights are a beautiful and romantic way to decorate your home or yard for the Christmas and holiday season. The meteor shower lights create the illusion of falling snow or a shooting star, providing a stunning visual effect that is sure to impress.
One of the standout features of these outdoor Christmas lights is their high quality and energy efficiency. Made of premium PC material, these outdoor lights are dust-proof, corrosion-resistant, aging-resistant, and more durable than many other options on the market. They also feature 192 LED beads attached on both sides that provide 360-degree lighting, ensuring that your entire space is filled with beautiful and bright light. Additionally, the Kwaiffeo Outdoor Christmas Lights are UL certified, meaning that they are powered by a 7V low voltage.
These string lights are ideal for both indoor and outdoor use, as they are waterproof with an IP65 rating. However, it's important to note that the plug is not waterproof, so you should be careful to keep it away from water.
Light: LED | Power Source: Corded Electric | Number of Lights: 192, 8 tubes×12 inch | Control Method: Touch
6. Jmexsuss EXS-S-0600: Best for Adding a Warm And Cozy Touch
What I like
Easy to put up and take down
Timer function
Made of durable polyvinyl chloride material
Automatically turns on and off
What I don't like
Not compatible with some types of controllers
The JMEXSUSS LED Outdoor Christmas Lights are an excellent choice during the holiday season. With a length of 168 feet and 600 warm white LED bulbs, these string lights are super long and super bright.
One of the standout features of these outdoor Christmas lights is the storage wheel design, making them more suitable for outdoor use and daily decorations. The reel makes it easy to put up and take down, ensuring the outdoor Christmas lights don't get tangled up while unrolling a few feet at a time. This convenience makes it easy to use them again for the next Christmas or party.
These outdoor Christmas lights have eight different lighting modes, each controlled by the button on the plug. There is also a timer function that automatically turns on for 6 hours and turns off for 18 hours.
Additionally, these string lights are waterproof and designed to withstand heavy rain and snow, making them durable and suitable for both indoor and outdoor use.
Light: LED | Power Source: Electrical Cable | Number of Lights: 600, 168 feet | Control Method: Touch
7. QUWIN: Convenient Christmas Lights With a Timer Function
What I like
Durable and weather-resistant design
End-to-end connection of up to 3 strands
Intelligent memory function
UL certified for safety
What I don't like
"Remote” is not remote, it’s attached to the lights
The QUWIN LED String Lights are durable and weather resistant, making them perfect for outdoor decorations. Plus, the wintergreen wire blends in nicely with the greenery.
You can easily switch between modes with the button on the adapter, and they even have memory technology to remember your last setting. The 24V output voltage makes them safe for children, and they have been tested to meet all safety standards.
What's great about these outdoor Christmas lights is that they're really long, coming in at 115 feet with 300 individual LED bulbs. Plus, you can connect up to 3 strands end-to-end for even more coverage.
Overall, the QUWIN Waterproof LED Outdoor Christmas String Lights are a great investment for anyone who wants to add a touch of warmth and elegance to their special events or daily decor.
Light: LED | Power Source: Source Cord Plug | Number of Lights: 300, 115 feet | Control Method: Mobile App
8. KiflyTooin JT-EL/FC300V0200: Best for Illuminating Small Areas
What I like
75 drops to create a beautiful display
Built-in timer function
Energy-efficient due to low voltage
Easy to install using zip ties or cup hooks
What I don't like
Only 2 sets are recommended to be connected together
The KiflyTooin LED Christmas Lights are made of high-quality copper and plastic designed to withstand rain, heat, and temperature, making them suitable for both indoor and outdoor use. With 400 LEDs and 75 drops, these colorful Christmas lights are 32 feet long and come with 8 different lighting modes.
One of the unique features of these outdoor Christmas lights is that they have a built-in timer function that allows you to set these indoor outdoor lights for 6 hours on and 18 hours off each day by long-pressing the button on the plug.
Additionally, they can be connected up to 3 sets end-to-end, which is enough to cover a larger area. Furthermore, they are constructed with 30V low voltage certified by UL, which makes them safer and less power-consuming.
Light: LED | Power Source: Corded Electric | Number of Lights: 400, 32 feet | Control Method: Touch
9. Ollny Icicle Lights HG-29V487BC: Best for Icicle Light Lovers
What I like
Waterproof design with IP44
Saves the last mode settings
UL588 certification
Dimmable with 4 brightness levels
What I don't like
The price may be a bit high for some customers
This 40-foot Christmas light set features 486 cold white LED lights arranged in 81 drops, which creates an impressive visual effect.
One of the key features of these icicle lights is that they are IP44 waterproof, which means that they can withstand rainy, snowy, or stormy days. This makes them ideal for outdoor use, and the UL588 certification ensures that they consume less power and are safe to use with a 29V low-voltage power plug.
These icicle lights are also connectable to up to three sets, and the clear white wire is durable and resistant to pull. You can easily adjust the eight modes using the remote control that comes with the set.
The four brightness levels and three timer functions are also easy to adjust, and the built-in memory chip saves your last mode setting, making it easy to turn on the icicle lights each day.
Installing these icicle lights is easy, and they come neatly packed to avoid tangling. Overall, the Ollny Icicle Lights are an excellent investment for your Christmas decoration needs.
Light: Icicle | Power Source: Electrical Wiring | Number of Lights: 486, 40 feet | Control Method: Bluetooth
Quick Comparisons Of The Top Outdoor Christmas Lights
Firstly, energy conservation is really important when it comes to outdoor Christmas lights because it helps to save energy and reduce our carbon footprint. It means using lights that consume less energy to light up your outdoor Christmas trees, lighting displays, and your home.
Non-energy-efficient light may use more energy and drive up your electric bill, and may require you to have an outdoor outlet nearby. Also, if they're incandescent bulbs, they may not last as long and can be more expensive to replace.
When you're purchasing outdoor Christmas lights, be sure to look for the ones that are designed for efficient energy use and fit within your budget. You can also consider solar-powered lights, which are great for outdoor use and can save you even more energy.
2. Power Source
When it comes to powering your lights, you have three main options: battery, solar, or electrical outlet.
Electric Battery powered lights are a great option if you don't have access to an outdoor electrical outlet or if you want to avoid running extension cords outside. Solar-powered lights are another option that can save you energy and money on your electric bill.
Electric lights are a traditional option that requires an outdoor electrical outlet. They can be very bright and have a longer lifespan than battery or solar-powered lights. However, they may use more energy and cost more on your electric bill.
If you want to save energy and avoid cords, solar or battery-powered lights may be a better option. If you want brighter lights and don't mind plugging in, electric lights may be the way to go.
3. Control Method
When it comes to controlling your outdoor Christmas lights, you have a few options. Many of the best outdoor Christmas lights come with a variety of control methods to choose from. The most common control method is a simple on/off switch, but you can also find lights with multiple lighting modes for more flexibility.
The remote control is another control method for outdoor Christmas lights that has become increasingly popular in recent years. With a remote control, you can easily turn your lights on and off, change the lighting mode, adjust the brightness, and set a timer without having to interact physically with the lights.
Another good option is automatic timer control, your lights will turn on and off according to a pre-set schedule. This can be done with a timer or a smart device that allows you to control your lights from your phone or Wi-Fi tablet.
4. Durability And Waterproofing
Outdoor Christmas lights will be exposed to harsh weather conditions, such as rain, snowflake, and wind. It is important to choose lights that are durable and waterproof and are specifically designed for outdoor use.
This ensures that the lights will not short-circuit or become damaged if they get wet. In the United States, lights with UL or ETL certifications are more likely to be durable and waterproof.
Investing in durable and waterproof outdoor Christmas lights will not only ensure that your lights last for many seasons but also provide a safe and enjoyable lighting display for the holiday season.
5. Length Of The String Lights
When choosing outdoor Christmas lights, the length of the string lights is an important consideration. The length of the string lights you need will depend on the size of the area you want to decorate.
For smaller areas such as balconies or small trees, a shorter rope light of around 20-30 feet may be sufficient. However, for larger areas such as the roofline of a house or a long fence, a longer string light of 30-48 feet or more may be necessary.
Therefore, it is important to choose a string light with the appropriate length and LED lamp spacing to achieve the desired lighting effect for your outdoor Christmas display.
FAQs Related To Outdoor Christmas Lights
How does hanging outdoor Christmas lights on the rain gutter or eaves work?
You can hang outdoor Christmas lights on your eaves or rain gutter using clips, hooks, or adhesive tape specifically designed for outdoor use. Be mindful of the electrical connector and lead. Make sure to use a sturdy ladder and have someone hold it steady while you work.
Can I use indoor Christmas lights for outdoor use?
It is not recommended to use indoor Christmas lights for outdoor use. Indoor lights are not designed to withstand the elements and may be a safety hazard. Instead, choose lights specifically labeled for outdoor use with an IP code indicating resistance to moisture and weathering.
What is a diode, and how does it affect outdoor Christmas lights?
A diode is an electronic component that allows current to flow in only one direction. In outdoor Christmas lights, light-emitting diodes (LEDs) are used to control the direction of current flow, resulting in efficient and long-lasting lights.
How can I conserve energy when using outdoor Christmas lights?
Consider using laser LED lights, which use less energy than traditional incandescent lights. You can also use a timer or smart plug, such as the ones offered by Walmart and Amazon, to control when the lights are on and make sure to turn them off when not in use.
What are quick clip Christmas lights, and how can I use them for outdoor Christmas decorations?
Quick clip Christmas lights are designed to easily attach to gutters, shingles, glass, doors, and other surfaces without the need for hooks or other hardware. To use them for outdoor Christmas decorations, simply clip the fairy lights onto the desired surface and plug them in.
How do I ensure that my outdoor Christmas lights are moisture-resistant?
To ensure that your outdoor Christmas lights are moisture-resistant, look for lights with an IP code indicating resistance to moisture and weathering. Avoid placing the lights in areas prone to pooling water or where they may come into contact with the soil.
Final Verdict
As you can see, there's a whole world of outdoor Christmas lights out there, from the flashy and flamboyant to the cozy and classic. It can be easy to get tangled up in the different features and specifications. But don't let that dim your holiday cheer!
If you're someone who cares about the environment and wants to add a cozy ambiance to your outdoor space, the Albelt SSLGW is perfect for you. It's energy-efficient, solar-powered, and comes with a memory function, allowing you to easily customize it to your liking.
Ductless mini split air conditioners consist of small-sized compressor outdoor units, air handlers, and indoor evaporators that combine to form a wall-mounted unit. Their lack of ducts makes them easier to install and handle. They can be installed on the wall, ceiling, or floor units; and can be paired with existing air conditioning systems to save on energy bills.
On that note, here are the best energy-efficient ductless mini split AC I found on the market.
Best Mini Split Ductless AC
Here's the list of the 11 best mini split ductless AC, offering energy-efficient cooling without the need for ducts for easy installation and energy savings.
[ENERGY EFFICIENT COOLING] This 18000 BTU/h, 17 SEER,...
What I like
18000 BTU/hour cooling capacity
Pre-charged air conditioning
Wi-Fi-enabled control
Quiet mode
Affordable
What I don't like
No installation instructions
The Della brand has manufactured this mini split air conditioner with an 18000 BTU/hour cooling and heating capacity for efficient energy use. It has a pre-charged air conditioning outdoor unit with proper certifications that has a ductless inverter, including heat pumps and dehumidifiers to help in heating, ventilation, and air conditioning. I have tested this AC to find that it has a cooling and hearing coverage of up to 650 square footage.
Moreover, these mini splits can be fully functional in cooling or heating multiple rooms, even on low temperatures such as 5 degrees Fahrenheit. While set to the cooling mode, this mini split AC unit will adjust the room temperature and show the updates in the remote control instead of the indoor unit. You can use the Wi-Fi-enabled control to adjust the temperature and airflow to your preference for improved efficiency and comfort.
What’s more, the DELLA 18000 BTU Mini Split Air Conditioner works at 40 decibels only, making it incredibly silent in quiet mode. Providing equal airflow to the entire space, its air handler can adjust itself from 60 to 90 degrees quickly. It also comes with an installation kit that can help you undertake a Do-It-Yourself installation easily.
Cooling Power: 18,000 British Thermal Units | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 17 | Voltage: 230 Volts | Dimensions: 8.82"D x 37"W x 12.44"H | Power Source: Corded Electric
Cooper&Hunter Mia Series 12,000 BTU, 20 SEER, 20.8 SEER2,...
Comes with a smart port adapter to easily turn your units ON...
What I like
AHRI-certified and ETL Intertek-approved
12,000 BTU/hour capacity
Whisper technology
Long-lasting warranty
Budget-friendly
What I don't like
Requires professional installation
AHRI-certified and ETL Intertek-approved, this ductless mini split system from Cooper & Hunter evenly cools and heats the room with its WiFi-friendly mechanism. It has a 12,000 BTU/hourcapacity, and its whisper technology ensures noise reduction, making it ideal for bedrooms, living rooms, and even commercial spaces.
Running on a massive cooling power, Cooper & Hunter’s ductless mini split air conditioner evenly heats and cools down the rooms in the entire house, thus increasing its energy efficiency. It comes with pre-charged refrigerant, which easily circulates through the indoor air handlers in less time while reducing energy costs.
Moreover, the indoor and outdoor units are ready to install with their 16 feet copper line set, drainage extension, and communication wires. However, I highly recommend going for a professional installation instead of a DIY one for this product.
Lastly, Cooper & Hunter’s ductless mini splits have a 7-year warranty on the compressor and a 5-year warranty on the other parts. So, you can count on using this ductless air conditioner for a long time!
Cooling Power: 12,000 British Thermal Units | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 20 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Dimensions:31.6"D x 7.4"W x 11.7"H | Power Source: Corded Electric
High Efficiency Diamante Ductless Mini Split Inverter Heat...
Use for both cooling and heating: 12000 BTU/hour with 20...
What I like
Targeted performance
Double-directional air handlers
Remote control
Dimmable LED display
Strong outdoor unit
What I don't like
Requires sturdy building insulation
Pioneer’s mini split air conditioners from its Diamante Series are specifically designed for single-zone use and bring individualized comfort to the targeted areas. Ideal for residential and light commercial cooling experience and home automation, Pioneer’s ductless mini split air conditioner has a remote control operation for a wireless temperature adjustment. Its 12,000 BTU/hour capacity and automatic double-directional air handlers can control variable airflow and reduce energy costs.
These mini-split ACs deliver cooling, dehumidification, heating, and ventilation at just the touch of a button. With its large LED dimmable display, flat panel, automatic dual swing cooling system, and air louvers, the unit aims for energy efficiency and high performance. What’s more, its washable air filters make it easy to maintain while the multi-speed fan operates quietly.
Pioneer’s mini split system has a DC power inverter outdoor compressor with high efficiency in maintaining variable speed. Moreover, its galvanized metal construction coupled with electrostatic epoxy paint helps it withstand extreme climates and protect the thermostat. This unit from Pioneer also comes with different modes, including turbo mode, follow-me, ECO, sleep mode, and Freeze Protection.
Lastly, this mini split AC comes with a 16 feet line set, installation kit, free vibration absorber, and other accessories for easy professional or DIY installation.
Cooling Power:12,000 BTU/hour | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 20 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Dimensions:8.12"D x 32"W x 11.5"H | Power Source: Corded Electric
MRCOOL is one of the leading brands in the ductless mini split system industry in the United States and is highly rated by customers on most shopping platforms. Equipped with heat pumps and Wi-Fi-engineered remote control, the MRCOOL DIY Ductless Split System is easy to set up with just a few settings from your smartphone. These mini split air conditioners are a part of the Energy Star series, which can be installed anywhere without expensive installation equipment.
Furthermore, its 12000 BTU/hour capacity can easily heat or cool a room up to 750 square footage in dimensions. I observed that MRCOOL’s ductless mini splits are their own SmartHVAC App, compatible with Alexa and Google Assistant, so you can control them from any Android or iOS smartphone. Its leakage detection alarm is another smart feature that makes it stand out among other mini-split systems.
This ductless mini split air conditioner can be an ideal energy-efficient solution for greenhouses, server rooms, and other spaces that require cooling all year round. It can improve air conditioning with low ambient cooling even in low temperatures such as 5 degrees Fahrenheit.
Lastly, it has a 25-inch pre-charged line set that allows DIY installation without special tools or professional help. And MRCOOL’s shipping, which divides the outdoor and indoor units into two packages for reduced chances of damage, is quite innovative.
Cooling Power:12,000 BTU/hour | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 20 | Voltage: 230 Volts | Dimensions:16"D x 30"W x 22"H | Power Source: Corded Electric
Klimaire promises an energy-efficient solution to modern problems of indoor air quality with their ductless mini split air conditioner with a high SEER rating of 20.8. Another unique technology I have been looking for in mini split ACs is the self-cleaning function which can be activated through the remote control. Here, it cleans and carefully dries the evaporator, preventing mold, mildew, and bad odor while operating.
Similar to the best mini split ACs, this product also has a specialized design for its outdoor compressor, which allows defrosting the unit even in very low temperatures. Moreover, the outdoor unit is pre-charged and includes a base pan and space heaters to improve the performance of the capacitor. It also has a built-in anti-corrosive Golden Fin, which helps the indoor units perform with noise as low as 25 decibels.
What’s more, the mini split system series from Kilmaire has low ambient heating and cooling, which can be operated via a remote. And unlike window air conditioners, this ductless mini split AC has multiple modes, including customizable infrared settings, auto-restart, sleep mode, turbocharger, follow-me, etc.
Kilmaire’s single-zone ductless mini splits are ideal for detached or small rooms with minimal floor space or where the ceiling or attic is not suitable for ductwork. It also comes with a 15 feet installation kit with cables, mounting brackets, and other accessories to minimize installation costs. And finally, Kilmaire provides a 5-year manufacturing warranty on their mini splits.
Cooling Power: 12,000 British Thermal Units | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 20.8 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Dimensions:Not Specified | Power Source:DC
OLMO Alpic 9,000 BTU, 110/120V Ductless Mini Split Air...
UL Listed, AHRI Certified. Works for heating with ambient...
What I like
Toshiba internal compressor
Programmable smart remote
Leak detection ability
Warranty
Multiple modes
What I don't like
Requires professional installation
This is a small-sized mini split AC with a ducted system suitable for bedrooms and living rooms that require energy-efficient heating and cooling all year round. I find this mini split AC reliable due to its built-in sturdy internal compressor from the trustworthy brand Toshiba. Moreover, its heat pump and indoor air handler can maintain both hot and cold temperatures for a long time, even during cold weather.
Its outdoor unit is designed to improve comfort and decrease labor costs during cleaning and maintenance. The OLMO Alpic Ductless Mini Split AC has a programmable smart remote for precise temperature control and mode navigation. You can choose the sleep mode for overnight air conditioning or the Turbo mode for fast conditioning.
Besides these, there are other modes, including intelligent defrosting, 24-hour timing, etc. Its leak detection alarm is also helpful in resolving internal damage or installation issues before it severely affects the living comfort. This mini split system comes with a pre-flared line set with accessories such as nuts and communication wires for a speedy installation. However, the company OLMO recommends professional installation over DIY.
Lastly, the Toshiba internal compressor has a 5-year limited warranty, while the rest of the air conditioner has a two-year limited manufacturer warranty.
Cooling Power: 9,000 British Thermal Units | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 16.5 | Voltage: 120 Volts | Dimensions:20"D x 7"W x 7"H | Power Source: Corded Electric
With its 9,000 BTU capacity, the ROVSUN Mini Split air conditioner can quickly circulate the cold air in bedrooms, living rooms, offices, or apartments up to 450 square feet. Its high-quality compressor unit and multiple air handlers are AHRI certified and, therefore, have higher efficiency. With its efficient 19 SEER rating, ROVSUN’s mini splits can help you save more money and energy, making it an eco-friendly option.
I found this ductless mini split air conditioner from ROVSUN quite easy-to-use since it comes with clear instructions and an easily programmable remote. You can enjoy a cooling experience ranging from 61-88 °F along with various modes, including mute mode, 24-hour timer, turbo, sleep mode, and fan speed selection. Besides, it can add an elegant touch to your space due to its minimalist, sleek design while working with noise as low as 32 dB.
Equipped with a four-Way Swing technology, it can evenly distribute hot or cool air according to your preference in just a few minutes. Further, I have noticed that this mini split AC is speedily delivered within two to six business days, while the other central air or single zone ACs take quite a long time. ROVSUN also has responsive customer service that prioritizes accurate and timely assistance.
Cooling Power: 9,000 British Thermal Units | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 19 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Dimensions:31.92'' W x 8.07' D' x 11.49'' H | Power Source: Corded Electric
WiFi AND ALEXA COMPATIBILITY: Ductless mini split system...
SUPERIOR PERFORMANCE HEAT PUMP: Delivers 12,000 BTU/hour...
What I like
Toshiba or GMCC Compressor
10 Heating Seasonal Performance Factor (HSPF)
Alexa-enabled
Thermostat protection
PTC strip
What I don't like
WiFi connection problems
Classic America is a small business brand that manufactures energy-efficient mini splits delivered in simple, eco-friendly packages. Their One-Ton Ductless Wall Mount Mini Split operates with the help of an ETL-approved Toshiba or GMCC compressor, which makes it durable and resilient. Powered by 110-120 VAC electricity and 12 amp minimal current draw and with a 20 SEER rating, these mini split air conditioners can reduce your energy consumption.
This air conditioner also comes with a Wi-Fi, Alexa-enabled remote with easily controllable settings, including auto, heat, dry, cool, and fan speed levels. Besides, the timer function and dimmable display screen are other energy-saving features that can reduce the electric load on the mini split AC. Plus, the built-in air louver sends the airflow evenly throughout the room rather than in a single direction.
With its timer, automatic air swing, switchover, and three-speed fans, you save up to 30% energy with Classic America’s mini split ductless AC. What’s more, you need to worry about damage during low temperatures as the temperature monitor and thermostat protection prevents the air handler and compressor from freezing. Further, the additional PTC strip allows the unit to release hot air even in extremely low temperatures.
Classic America provides 16 ft. insulated refrigeration tubing, pipe wrap, and interconnecting wires for easy installation.
Cooling Power: 12,000 British Thermal Units | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 20 | Voltage: 120 Volts | Dimensions:8"D x 32"W x 11"H | Power Source: Corded Electric
5 Modes for Your Comfort – You can choose among Auto,...
What I like
Easily washable air filter
Extra groove teeth
Reliable golden fin
Multiple accessible modes
Product Warranty
What I don't like
No installation instructions
This all-in-one ductless mini split AC has a high-performance DC fan motor with high-speed levels ranging from grade 2 to grade 10. When set to the heating mode, the high number of groove teeth on the tube increases the heat transfer area and efficiency by 7.3% while keeping the air clean. Moreover, the heat exchangers have a unique anti-corrosive golden coating which prevents damage from rain, air with high salt content, and other corrosive elements.
I found this mini split AC to be very functional and easy to maintain because of its easily washable air filter, which removes any hassle during maintenance. The ‘golden fin’ also removes any changes of interlopers, such as birds or pests, from breeding in the outdoor unit. Its backlit LCD remote with proximity sensor further allows you to access different AC modes, including auto, heat, dry, and fan modes, and also utilizes the Self Diagnosis function with just the touch of a button.
ApooDr provides a free installation kit and other accessories, including communication wires and a copper line set. ApooDr also offers a 5-year warranty on the compressor and a 2-year warranty on the other parts. However, the mini split AC unit requires professional installation to avoid system issues and wiring damage.
Cooling Power: 9000 British Thermal Units | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 16.5 | Voltage: 110 Volts | Dimensions:7.64"D x 28.15"W x 11.22"H | Power Source: Corded Electric
Cooling and Heating：The Muse Series advanced compressor...
Powerfully Efficient：With an innovative inverter...
What I like
High SEER rating
Withstands extreme weather
Anti-corrosive copper pipes
Easy installation
Innovative compressor
What I don't like
No technical assistance
TOSOT’s ductless mini split AC has a higher SEER rating than most mini splits on the market and saves up to 62% on energy costs. Besides, its powerful and sturdy compressor can provide even airflow during extreme temperatures such as 115-degree heat or -13 degrees cold.
Equipped with innovative inverter technology, TOSOT’s mini split has a variable speed feature that automatically adjusts itself to achieve the preferred temperature. Since this is a split system, the indoor and outdoor units are separate, reducing the working noise, unlike window units. You will barely realize the indoor unit is there since it works with noise as low as 24 dB. Moreover, the TOSOT Muse series is AHRI and ETL-certified for high-quality construction, such as anti-corrosive copper pipes that can withstand high pressure.
Since it targets a single zone without wasting energy in heating the entire house, this ductless mini split can also help the space heat up better in winter. Lastly, if you know how to do electrical work and install refrigerant, the 16.5 ft. copper line set, power cord, and signal cables will equip you to perform a DIY installation. If you’re unsure, I recommend getting professional help for installation.
Cooling Power: 9000 British Thermal Units | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 21 | Voltage: 230 Volts | Dimensions:Not Specified | Power Source: Corded Electric
For most people, technical home appliances and HVAC terms like SEER, HSPF, BTU, or cooling capacity are not common knowledge and are seldom talked about. However, knowing these terms is very important when purchasing ductless mini splits. To help you make an informed and correct decision that will suit your family’s needs, I have carefully curated a buyer’s guide that can be followed. Here are a few parameters to research and consider:
Cooling Capacity
The capacity of ductless mini splits is usually measured in BTU, or British Thermal Unit, which measures the energy it takes to change your home temperature. Unlike central heating and cooling systems, mini splits can fully function with low BTU as they mostly focus on a single zone instead of multiple rooms. Usually, the high BTU in split air conditioners is 24,000; however, mini splits for a single room range an average of 9,000 to 12,000 BTU.
Smaller rooms, such as the nursery or study, can function with an8,000 BTU mini split. You can save energy even further by using a 5,000 BTU mini split for smaller, closed spaces or garages.
Energy Savings
The energy efficiency of each HVAC system is measured by the SEER and HSPF ratings; the more the ratings, the higher the energy-saving percentage. So, before purchasing a ductless mini split, check if the product falls below the EnergyStar listing and meets the ratios mentioned above.
Price
Of course, it is important to find products that will fall into your budget and save money in the long run. The price usually depends on the system size or ton; however, the bigger it isn’t always, the better. For a pocket-friendly purchase, consider the amount you’ll be saving in energy and the overall cost of the AC unit.
Installation
Most ductless mini splits come with full installation kits and instructions that enable you to install them yourself. However, some AC units might require professional installation, which will further cost you money. Besides, it is recommended to opt for professional services to ensure it doesn’t lead to damage.
Ductless Split AC FAQs
What Are The Benefits Of Ductless Mini Splits?
There are various benefits of ductless mini splits but the main advantages are their flexible zoning ability, size, and precise cooling of individual rooms. Moreover, you can find many ductless ACs that allow up to four indoor air handling units for one outdoor heat pumping system. So, you can cool up to four rooms with a single ductless mini split – how cool is that?
And if you have more rooms or zones to cover, you can simply add more mini splits to support more indoor air handlers. We recommend consulting your AC installer to best indoor handler configuration to optimize the temperature of your home.
Are The Ductless Mini Split Components Connected To Each Other?
Regardless of whether you have one or more than one indoor air handlers, they’re all connected to the outdoor unit by components called the ‘line set.’ To form this connection, your AC installer will drill a hole (about two or three inches in diameter) in the exterior wall. This helps the line consisting of copper tubes and electrical wires run between the components.
You can also find tubes and casts in local hardware stores to hide these lines in case you’re worried about messing up the aesthetics of the exterior wall.
Are Ductless Mini Splits More Energy Efficient Than AC Units With Ducts?
Air conditioning systems with ducts are responsible for significant energy loss during the cooling process. Central air conditioners that utilize multiple ducts for circulating cool air often face this issue, and require frequent sealing of the ducts to maintain efficiency. Using ductless splits will eliminate AC ducts altogether, so you won’t need to worry about high energy bills or sealing them every other year.
Ductless units are also constructed with energy efficient components and technology that further help you save money and energy while cooling your home.
How To Control Ductless Mini Splits?
All ductless mini splits come with built-in control panels that allow you to seamlessly adjust the temperature and utilize different settings. They also have remote control technology with each indoor air handler unit, so you set each zone at a different temperature remotely.
These methods of control are much more efficient than the traditional thermostat control found in central air conditioning systems.
Do Ductless Mini Splits Make Noise?
Compared to central HVAC units and portable systems, ductless mini splits are pretty quiet. Air moving through multiple ducts at high speeds can make a loud noise, but since these units are ductless, there’s no chance of that happening. That’s why people who prefer a quieter home environment most often go for ductless splits.
Conclusion
Despite its growing popularity and advanced technology, many people find themselves asking: is a ductless mini split worth it? Why not just install a window AC or normal split units? For one, they are much cheaper than traditional heating and cooling machines, and they also reduce energy bills in the long run. Besides this, there are various benefits of a mini split, and all the products on this list offer some of them.
After testing various options, I’d say the Della mini split tops the list with its massive cooling capacity, area coverage, and ultra-silent mode. Coming to a close second, both the 12,000 BTU models from Cooper & Hunter and Pioneer’s Diamante Series stand out for their targeted performance, warranty, and advanced ambient air conditioning.
That said, I’ll be signing off now. Stick around for similar product reviews and guides.
Goodbye!
The Midea EasyCool is a small air conditioner capable of cooling up to 150 square feet at an affordable price that may suit many. That said, it is up to user preference that predicates the best option for them.
Beating the summer heat without an air conditioner is tough, especially when the days only seem to be getting hotter.
For smaller spaces, you will need a smaller air conditioner, as larger ACs consume too much power for what is effectively unnecessary. And when looking for smaller ACs, you’ll be sifting through the window and portable air conditioning options.
So, wondering which smallest portable air conditioners make for the best cooling devices? Check out my recommendations for the best air conditionersto get a better idea of the best choice at the best price.
Best Smallest ACs Reviewed
Here’s the list of the 9 best smallest ACs of 2023 to help you beat the summer heat in smaller spaces efficiently and cost-effectively.
PERFECT FOR SMALLER ROOMS - Midea's Affordable Window AC...
ENERGY EFFICIENT- Midea's 5,000 BTU window air conditioner...
What I like
Quiet operation
Easy to install
Energy efficient use
Affordable pricing
What I don't like
No included remote control
The Midea EasyCool Window Air Conditioner is a compact and affordable cooling device aimed to be an option for small rooms.
This is a 5,000 BTU air conditioner that can cool down a 150-square-foot room, along with several settings to alter the cooling experience. These settings include seven temperature settings, as well as two cooling and fan-only speeds. Additionally, the device has two-way air directions to cover as much area as possible.
The Midea EasyCool Window AC has a Combined Energy Efficiency Rating of 11, which makes its energy-saving capability quite high. It comes with a filter that can be removed and washed, eliminating the need to replace them frequently. On top of this, the AC is reasonably quiet and capable of removing moisture from the air at the rate of 1.27 pints per hour.
I found that the Midea EasyCool operates quite easily with mechanical controls. The buttons on the on-device console respond quickly, allowing time, temperature, and mode adjustments once pressed.
Lastly, the Midea Group AC is covered by a one-year limited warranty for parts and servicing. The device is easy to install and suitable for windows that are 23-36 inches wide and 13 inches high.
Floor Area: 150 square feet | Cooling Power: 5,000 BTUs | SEER Rating: 11.0 | Number Of Fan Speeds: 2 | Noise Level: 57 dB
Compact Cooling: Don't let the miniature size of this 5,000...
Special Features: Digital display to easily control your...
What I like
Highly energy efficient
Responsive AC controls
Extending side panels
Low fan noise
What I don't like
The remote control lacks a backlight
This window-mounted Frigidaire entry in the segment is a cooling device that is designed to fit many window sizes using extending side panels. It is an Energy Star-certified air conditioner, meaning that the AC is certified to consume very little power during operation, lowering your utility bills.
The Frigidaire model is a 5,000 BTU small window AC unit that can cool air in a 150-square-foot room with little trouble. To do so, the appliance makes use of programmable temperature presets that maintain the chosen room temperature.
In addition to the on-console panel, the air conditioner can be operated using a remote control. The buttons are responsive and react quickly to each button press, meaning that you won’t have to wait for the settings to change.
The dust filter can be removed for cleaning without any hassle to speak of. Periodic maintenance allows for effective and malfunction-free operation for a long time.
I found that the Frigidaire window AC is about as quiet as the Midea EasyCool, sitting at around 50 decibels on the lowest fan setting. Even at the highest fan setting, the window unit makes very little noise that can easily go unnoticed.
And lastly, in the event of a power outage, the AC can restart automatically at its previous settings once the power is restored. You won’t have to worry about fine-tuning the settings all over again in such cases.
Floor Area: 150 square feet | Cooling Power: 5,000 BTUs | SEER Rating: 12.0 | Number Of Fan Speeds: 2 | Noise Level: 52 dB
HANDY AND PORTABLE: The SereneLife Portable Air Conditioner...
THREE OPERATING MODES: The compact floor AC indoor cooler...
What I like
Powerful 8,000 BTU air conditioner
Lightweight and sleek design
Built-in dehumidifier
Freestanding room air conditioner
What I don't like
The water drainage hose is not included
The SereneLife Portable Air Conditioner is one of the smallest portable air conditioners that is primarily meant to be used in small spaces. It boasts a lightweight and sleek design that is intended to blend seamlessly with all aesthetic sensibilities.
This 8,000 BTU air conditionersystem has no less than four operating modes that include dehumidifier, cooling, heating, and fan modes. Additionally, it features an automatic swing mode with a moving wind vent to cover as much of the room as possible.
The built-in dehumidifier removes moisture from the air during particularly humid nights at the rate of 290 cubic meters of moisture per hour. Moreover, the functionality doubles as an energy-saving option while eliminating the need to purchase a dedicated dehumidifier.
Its remote control is responsive and gives you access to adjusting all of the aforementioned settings in a responsive manner. The remote control also allows other functions such as switching between Celsius and Fahrenheit, sleep timer, and fan speed.
Topping it all off, the SereneLife Portable Air Conditioner has a noise level of 55 dB, which is comparable to other quiet cooling window units.
Floor Area: 215 square feet | Cooling Power: 8,000 BTUs | SEER Rating: 9.8 | Number Of Fan Speeds: 3 | Noise Level: 55 dB
The Vremi Portable Air Conditioner is a small portable air conditioner that aims to be flexible with its multiple operating modes. It can be used effectively in rooms that are sized between 150 and 250 square feet.
This 6,250 BTU portable air conditioner has four distinct operating modes meant for different purposes, namely sleep, cool, fan, and dry. I found the sleep mode to be an option worth considering for light sleepers, as it only produces 51 dB of noise.
When in dry mode, the air conditioner can remove up to 63 pints of moisture every day, acting as a dehumidifier in this mode. And in fan mode, the air conditioner is capable of up to 880 r/min, depending on your settings. Lastly, the cool mode makes use of the 6,250 BTUs that the unit has access to cool air effectively.
The Vremi Portable Air Conditioner has a removable air filter that can be washed and reused to maintain its performance consistency. Ideally, it should be cleaned weekly for optimum performance.
As for the secondary features, the AC comes with an LED display screen, along with remote control storage. The latter is particularly useful if you’re worried about losing the remote in your room.
Lastly, the portable AC unit is easy to install next to an accessible window. Installing it is as simple as attaching the hose and window slide adapter, after which the cooling device can be turned on.
Floor Area: 150-250 square feet | Cooling Power:6,250 BTUs | SEER Rating: 2.6 | Number Of Fan Speeds: 3 | Noise Level: 51 dB
POWERFUL COOLING CAPACITY: The 5,000 BTU window air...
COMFORTABLY QUIET: Thoughtfully designed to not disturb you,...
What I like
Affordable pricing
Easy to install
Simple unit operation
Included installation kit
What I don't like
No included remote control
The TCL 5WR1 is one of the most affordable small air conditioners on the market while being one of the quietest models available. Its noise level is at 50 dB, which is quiet enough not to be obtrusive.
This model boasts a cooling capacity of 5,000 BTUs, which can cover an area of 150 square feet. With two fan speeds and several temperature control settings, the TCL AC allows you to choose your level of comfort. You can tweak the settings with the two knobs present on the console that turn smoothly and click into place without much trouble.
Additionally, the direction of the airflow can be customized to reach where you need it the most, providing air in 8 directions. This is made possible through two 4-way directional vents that move independently of each other.
The air conditioner can fit window sizes that are 23-36 inches wide and 14.5 inches high. It can be installed quite easily using the included installation kit, so long as the unit can fit the window.
Floor Area: 150 square feet | Cooling Power: 5,000 BTUs | SEER Rating: 11.0 | Number Of Fan Speeds: 2 | Noise Level: 50 dB
Three-in-One Unit: Black and Decker portable air conditioner...
For Small Rooms & Living Spaces: Our room air conditioners...
What I like
High cooling capacity
The “Follow Me” function
Self-evaporating dehumidifier setting
Simple installation
What I don't like
Low energy efficiency
The Black + Decker portable air conditioner is one of the more premium models on this list, offering a high cooling capacity and several features. It is a quiet cooling unit that doesn’t surpass 54 dBs during operation, which may be helpful in an office environment.
Boasting 8,500 BTUs of cooling capacity, the Black + Decker air conditioner is powerful enough to be used during harsh summers. Using the settings incorporated in the device, the air conditioner can keep you comfortable throughout the season.
One of the first things I noticed about the Black + Decker air conditioner is the “Follow Me” function included in the remote. This allows the remote to function as a mini-thermostat that gives you precise control over the room temperature. It makes it so that you can choose how cool a specific area of the room is simply through the remote.
In addition to the normal cooling mode, the small portable air conditioner can operate in fan and dehumidifier modes. For the latter, the device has a built-in self-evaporating design that eliminates the hassle of removing accumulated moisture every week. The portable air conditioner doesn’t require maintenance as frequently as other devices, only needing general cleaning every once in a while.
Lastly, the Black + Decker portable air conditioner can be used right out of the box with no extensive installation required. You only need to attach the hose, plug it in and turn the switch on for it to begin cooling.
Floor Area: 150 square feet | Cooling Power: 8,500 BTUs | SEER Rating: 4.2 | Number Of Fan Speeds: 3 | Noise Level: 54 dB
Built-in remote thermostat may be a little inaccurate
The Keystone Window-Mounted Air Conditioner is a cooling device that is suited for small living spaces, bedrooms, or offices. This AC comes in two variants: one with an Energy Star certification and one without, where the former is the more expensive of the pair. The model I reviewed was the one without the Energy Star rating.
Featuring 5,000 BTUs of cooling capacity, the Keystone AC can effectively cool a room up to 150 square feet in all operation modes. Even with a cooling capacity that rivals ACs at a similar price point, the Keystone air conditioner manages to be just a little quieter. Its noise levels are at 49 dBs when operating on low settings, which is low enough not to be noticeable easily.
This air conditioner is operated using a remote controller that has a built-in thermostat. The options you choose on the remote are reflected on the LED display on the AC itself, which responds the moment a button is pressed.
Alongside the cooling mode, you can also switch to the dehumidifier mode, which removes 1.3 pints of moisture from the room every hour. Moreover, you can choose from a few energy-conscious settings that can help lower your electricity bills. These include a dedicated energy-saver mode, a sleep mode, a 24-hour timer, and an auto-restart functionality.
The chassis of the Keystone portable air conditioner can be removed to allow for easier installation. Leaning into this is the included adjustable window kit to make window installation even simpler.
Floor Area: 150 square feet | Cooling Power: 5,000 BTUs | SEER Rating: 11.2 | Number Of Fan Speeds: 3 | Noise Level: 55 dB
Powerful Cooling: Cool spaces up to 300 square feet with an...
1 Product, 3 Uses: This is not only a Portable AC but also a...
What I like
Powerful portable AC unit
Lower noise mode
X-Fan Technology for self-evaporation
Visually interesting design
What I don't like
Exhaust hose limit positioning options
The TOSOT Portable Air Conditioner features a visually interesting design that strives to balance function with it. This is a powerful cooling unit that is one of the more expensive air conditioners on this list.
Rated at 8,000 BTUs (ASHRAE), the TOSOT air conditioner is capable of effectively cooling spaces up to 300 square feet. This is powerful enough to be used as a main cooling device in your living room, master bedroom, or home office.
The device features three main modes: cooling, fan, and dehumidifier. As a dehumidifier, the small portable air conditioner is capable of removing 2.3 pints of moisture per hour. Small portable air conditioners are more efficient at cooling dry air, which gives using the dehumidifier to take care of the humidity some merit.
You can switch the TOSOT Portable Air Conditioner to low noise mode during the night as well. As the name suggests, the mode lowers the noise produced by the small portable air conditioner unit to provide you with an optimal sleeping experience.
The small portable air conditioner also makes use of the X-Fan technology that keeps the fan running at a low speed. This serves as a form of self-evaporation, eliminating any residual water in the machine and the exhaust hose.
As for the installation, the device needs to be in proximity of a window by following the detailed instructions in the user manual. The process is relatively quick, taking up to 15 minutes at most to finish.
Floor Area: 300 square feet | Cooling Power: 8,000 BTUs | SEER Rating: 4.4 | Number Of Fan Speeds: 3 | Noise Level: 49 dB
3 CONVENIENT MODES: Use as an Air Conditioner, Fan and...
2 SPEEDS & MORE: Adjust between two fan speeds, save energy...
What I like
Self-evaporating dehumidifier
High cooling capacity
Touch-operated LED control panel
Removable and reusable air filter
What I don't like
It can be quite noisy
For a medium-range portable AC unit, the Rosewill Portable Air Conditioner is an option to consider. The air conditioner features a large touch-operated LED control panel, along with a remote control, to make AC operation easier.
This small portable air conditioner boasts a high cooling capacity of 7,000 BTUs, which is enough to cool a single room, such as a bedroom, apartment, and the like. Accompanying the powerful operation are two adjustable fan speeds and power-saving options. The power-saving options are fairly standard, offering a sleep mode and automatic timer to save energy.
Rosewill Portable Air Conditioner is a fairly compact cooling device that can be moved easily with the four mobility caster wheels. The free-standing air conditioner can also function as a dehumidifier with a self-evaporating system, drawing out moisture without the need to clean it up repeatedly.
This small portable air conditioner can cool a small room of up to 200 square feet with relative ease in all of its featured modes. It also comes with a removable and reusable EVA filter to clear out air pollution and provide you with refreshing air.
Floor Area: 200 square feet | Cooling Power: 7,000 BTUs | SEER Rating: 2.0 | Number Of Fan Speeds: 2 | Noise Level: 60 dB
For rooms with limited area and no access to HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning), the smallest portable air conditioners are a great option to manage room temperature. They are designed to be easy to install and be as efficient at cooling small spaces as possible while being simple to use and maintain.
If you’ve never purchased a portable air conditioner before, it can be troubling to pick from the smallest portable air conditioners on the market. After all, not all air conditioners are created equal, and some are bound to be better than others. As a consumer, you will want to maximize performance for the money you invest in the new air conditioner.
There are five main considerations that predicate whether a small air conditioner suits your needs: AC size, placement, ease of maintenance, noise, and energy consumption.
Sizing The Air Conditioner
It’s nothing less than a tragic occurrence when you purchase a new, fancy mini-split ductless air conditioner, and it turns out to be of the wrong size. The AC can neither be too large nor too small for the space you use it in. An air conditioner that is too large may make your attic feel like an arctic tundra while spiking your energy bills. On the flip side, an air conditioner that is too small can barely make a dent in the overall room temperature.
Fortunately, it’s easy to tell if the smallest portable air conditioner is of the right size or not using the British Thermal Unit (BTU). Every AC is assigned a BTU rating, which increases by a factor of 20 for every square foot of the living space. For instance, a 300-square-foot room requires an AC with 8,000 BTUs.
This rating increases with the size and weight of the AC as well, in addition to the size of the room itself. As a consequence of this increase in size and power, the energy consumption of the appliance increases as well. This number will also fluctuate based on the ceiling height, solar exposure, and if the area has a kitchen.
Medium-sized spaces can require a 12,000 BTU air conditioner, while larger rooms require upwards of 20,000 BTUs. But for spaces no larger than 100 square feet, you won’t require a small portable air conditioner unit that is substantially more powerful than 2,000 BTUs.
Placing The Air Conditioner
Placing the smallest portable air conditioner to maximize the cooling capacity is fairly straightforward. What is not quite as simple, however, is to ensure that the hot air it produces can leave the room through hoses. This means that the small portable air conditioner must be placed within a few feet of a window.
Now, it is worth mentioning that not all ACs have this strict placement restriction. Chillers don’t require window ventilation and you can place them wherever you like, so long as a window is open.
Ease Of Maintenance
Small portable air conditioners don’t require much in the way of maintenance apart from clearing out the collected moisture. These devices drain moisture from the air to cool the room down, which is then collected in a pan housed inside. There are several solutions for this, such as using a gravity-based draining system, removing the pan manually, or using an external pump.
Ideally, the air conditioner that takes care of this problem on its own would be the best. These appliances make use of a fully self-evaporative design that, as the description suggests, evaporates most of the accumulated water without external aid. You will only need to clean these very occasionally, and the task takes a few minutes at most.
Apart from moisture, ACs require the filters to be cleaned as well, which house behind a panel as well. Typically, they can be removed just as easily as the moisture pan. And lastly, you will need to periodically defrost the unit if ice builds up on the cooling coils.
Of course, several models have features that take care of this problem on their own.
Noise Levels
Air conditioners are loud devices by design, a quality that has seen very little change over time. Portable ACs, in particular, can be prone to creating a loud noise that can be disruptive in your space. This is a drawback that is not shared by AC types like window ACs since their noisy parts extend out of the window.
The lower the noise an air conditioner produces, the better a model it is. Prolonged exposure to loud noises can cause hearing loss, which is far from the ideal prospect.
Energy Consumption
Energy bills rack up over time, adding to the overall costs of an AC, which makes it important for the device to be energy efficient. You can check the energy consumption and how much energy the air conditioner saves by looking at the SEER rating.
The baseline SEER rating of a small portable air conditioner is 10, but you may want to look for devices with a rating of 12. Consider 12 the golden SEER number to watch for when purchasing a portable AC, as devices with this rating are highly efficient.
Conclusion
As far as general use is concerned, I found the Midea EasyCool Window AC to be the best air conditioner. It is an affordable and functional AC that can effectively cool a small room while consuming very little energy.
That said, other air conditioners like the Black + Decker small portable air conditioner and the Vremi AC are also viable options to consider. They serve different functions at different price points, and they may serve your particular needs, depending on what you’re looking for.
When it comes to air conditioning, there is no such thing as a one-option-fits-all model. There are several variables that change which air conditioner is the best for each particular use case. At the end of the day, you alone can choose which brand is the right one for your home.
The Nicetown high-end thermal curtains, with their two-layer triple weave blackout fabric and uniquely designed silver grommets, are great for soundproofing purposes. Similarly, Deconovo soundproof curtains have a thermal insulation layer and high-density material to eliminate noise.
Soundproof curtains can prove ideal for reducing noise in your home or office. Made using mass-loaded vinyl and PVC blended with crushed limestone, these curtains are great at absorbing sounds, such as conversations and traffic noise.
They can even be used with other soundproofing techniques for better results. Due to the popularity of soundproof curtains, you can choose from numerous options, and this guide reviews some of the best ones.
Best Soundproof Curtains
Here's the list of the 11 best soundproof curtains for efficient noise reduction, perfect for quieting your space and enhancing your privacy.
Complete blackout curtains block light and reduce noise for...
Curtains measure 52 inches wide x 84 inches long per panel,...
What we like
Wide range of colors
High-quality construction
Does not contain any chemical substance
Reliable soundproofing
What we don't like
Aligning the curtain pleats requires some effort
With over 20 years of experience in the industry, Nicetown is among the top brands for many people looking for curtains. Based in Nicetown-Tioga, the brand manufactures these high-end thermal curtains using polyester, measuring 52 inches wide and 84 inches long, which makes them suitable for most rooms.
The curtains are available in a wide range of color options, including aqua, black, beige, bright yellow, gray, and more. This makes it easy to choose the one that fits your room the best. Along with that, they have a uniquely designed silver grommet for easy installation.
Coming to the construction, this soundproof curtain is manufactured using two layers of triple-weave blackout fabric. Because of this, it works well to regulate the temperature of the room where it is installed and ensures complete privacy.
And since the manufacturer does not use harmful materials, such as formaldehyde, in the manufacturing process, these curtains are environment-friendly and completely safe to use.
As for noise reduction, the Nicetown thermal curtains can absorb two times as much sound as standard curtains, which is possible due to their greater thickness. This provides them with greater density and prevents the entry of all loud noises in the room.
But soundproofing walls, doors, or windowsis not the only purpose for which these curtains can be used, as they are full blackout curtains. This means that they can be used to darken a room completely by keeping sunlight out when you want to nap during the day.
Color: Black | Material: Polyester, polyester blend | Pattern: Solid | Top Style: Grommet, rod
Manufactured using polyester, these curtains are available in sets of two panels, and each drape measures 52 inches in width and 96 inches in length. They are great for absorbing ambient noise and can be used in almost any room.
The curtains come with silver grommets, which are noteworthy for having an anti-rust coating, ensuring long-lasting durability. On top of that, they are thermal insulated and can be used to regulate the temperature, depending on the weather conditions outside. You can even use them to block out sunlight and keep a room dark during the daytime.
This is possible due to the high-density blackout material, which features a triple weave for greater density. Similarly, the fabric is soft to the touch and has a silky texture, which makes this curtain suitable for contemporary home décor.
These curtains are also available in solid colors, and there are numerous options to choose from, like beige, black, khaki, etc. While testing these soundproof curtains, I discovered they are versatile and can be used in almost any room, such as the living room, gaming room, kitchen, nursery, or office.
Moreover, these curtains do not require a lot of maintenance since they can be machine-washed easily. If you have doubts regarding the right size, contact customer service and choose the most appropriate option.
CURTAIN DETAILS: The room divider curtain's fabric is super...
SPACE SOLUTION: Curtains can be a clever and temporary...
What we like
Suitable for smaller spaces
High-quality construction
Attractive design and colors
Durable
What we don't like
Lesser number of grommets per inch
Another option from the Nicetown brand, these soundproof curtains have been specially designed for small spaces and partitions. They are best suited for a scenario where you want to divide a larger space into multiple smaller ones without putting up walls.
The density and heaviness of the curtains make sure that objects or people are not visible from the other side. Plus, the higher shading rate of the fabric enhances this property.
Constructed using triple-weave polyester fabric, these soundproofing curtains have a high density that can block out all unwanted noise from the area. Since they work by sound absorption rather than bouncing the sound waves, they can be used withsound masking techniques, to soundproof doorsand windows.
For installation, these Nicetown curtains come with 14 silver grommets that look good in modern homes and are easy to set up. What's more, you can easily remove and pack up the curtains when they need to be moved, delivering greater convenience.
Use them in a wide variety of spaces, such as your bedroom, office, study, living room, and more. The high-quality materials coupled with superior finishing ensure these soundproof curtains will last several years without any complaints.
Like other curtains from the Nicetown brand, this option is available in various colors and can be used for temperature regulation or as blackout curtains.
WELL MADE: Sold as 2 panels, each measuring 52"W x 84"L...
FINE DETAIL: Each curtain has 8 HOLES and the inside...
What we like
Easy to install
Modern design
Superb soundproofing
Reliable temperature regulation
What we don't like
Expensive
The next item on this list is the Miulee soundproof curtains, which also come with thermal insulation technology for room temperature regulation. This soundproof curtain is 52 inches wide and 84 inches long, adequate for most spaces, and has a set of two panels.
Similarly, the grommet top has an interior diameter of 1.6 inches and has been designed to make it easy to slide the curtain rod through them. The curtains have a velvety texture that feels good in the hand and provides an attractive appearance by adding a touch of elegance to your rooms.
Moreover, you can select from 15 colors, so it is easy to find an option that fits well with the decor of your rooms. And depending on the color, the blackout velvet curtains can block out 70% to 80% of sunlight.
But the highlight of these curtains is their thermal regulation capability, which can help keep a room warm in winter and cool in summer. This is possible because of the thick fabric that limits the amount of air entering or leaving a room to make your thermoregulator more efficient.
Besides helping reduce noise, the heavy material of the curtains also guarantees privacy, and you can use these curtains in areas like the study or home office. I would further like to point out that this curtain can be machine washed and does not require a lot of maintenance.
Color:Olive green | Material:Velvet | Pattern: Solid | Top Style: Grommet
Room divider curtains, such as this one from Lordtex, allow you to eliminate unwanted noise from a room without occupying too much space. These curtain panels have a width of 100 inches and a length of 84 inches, including 12 silver grommets. The grommets enable the curtain to be used with both decorative and regular curtain rods, thanks to their 1.6-inch interior diameter.
For making these curtains, the manufacturer has used 100% polyester fabric with similar colors on the front and back for room darkening. But what makes them stand out from the crowd is the fact that they are manufactured in an Oeko-Tex Standard 100-certified factory.
This means that the material is completely free of harmful substances and will not cause any allergies or other adverse side effects. And the triple weave blackout fabric is also thick enough to be able to block out 90% of UV rays and sunlight. This helps in darkening rooms and can be used in areas where you want some privacy.
Alternatively, you can use the Lordtex sound-deadening curtains as room dividers for partitioning rooms and creating separate spaces. The curtains are compatible with several types of spaces and can be used in shared bedrooms, lofts, apartments, dormitories, and even classrooms.
Sound proofing can also be achieved quite easily using these curtains, and you can hang them in front of sliding doors or even as backdrops for photoshoots for sound insulation. Due to their thickness, the curtains do not deform easily and can be machine-washed.
3 LAYERS - Package includes 2 panels total width 104 inch. 1...
NOISE REDUCTION - Detachable felt fabric liner is in the...
What we like
Good-quality construction
Easy to maintain
Great for blocking light
Value for money
What we don't like
Not 100% soundproof
Ryb Home is best known for its custom curtains, blinds, shades, and other home products, but these soundproof curtains are a popular choice from the company. These curtains have three fabric layers - two layers for the front and back, and a detachable middle fabric made from felt.
This construction makes them a dependable option for any DIY soundproofing project since the three layers work well in absorbing sound. You can use them in front of doors, glass windows, and walls for effective noise control.
One of the key features of the Ryb Home soundproof curtains is that they do not contain any formaldehyde or other harmful substances, making them a safe choice. This means those with allergies can use them without experiencing any side effects.
Additionally, the three layers allow this blackout curtain to keep 100% of the sunlight out, which is not an easy feat to achieve. Because of this, harmful UV rays are kept out, and you can enjoy your daytime sleep in complete comfort.
The triple weave fabric also performs well when it comes to temperature regulation, and you can experience greater savings. With this curtain, it is possible to keep a room warm or cold easily for an extended period without the thermoregulator.
Finally, installation and maintenance are easy, and you just need to remove the detachable felt fabric liner before machine-washing the curtain. If required, you can use non-chlorine bleach while washing and even iron the curtains for a bit once they are dry.
Color:Gray | Material:Fabric | Pattern: Solid | Top Style: Grommet
When it comes to blackout curtains, Buhua takes a different approach. Instead of offering such curtains in a single bold color, the brand offers patterned curtains, such as this one. This curtain comes in various color options, and there are some unique ones to choose from, such as white and silver.
The Buhua soundproof curtain has a silky texture, and the foil branch pattern helps break up the monotony that is often created by solid color curtains. Hence, it can help add some style to your home without requiring a lot of effort.
These curtains have a width of 52 inches and a length of 63 inches, which makes them suitable for most rooms. And they can even be used in spaces such as in front of doors since these soundproof curtains work by absorbing noise. Their thick and dense material can reduce sound easily, preventing them from bouncing off surfaces and creating echoes or reverberations.
Another advantage of this construction is that you can use these curtains to block out sunlight, and they can filter out 85% to 95% of light. For people who prefer to sleep late or take a nap during the day, this curtain can provide adequate darkness for comfortable sleep.
Besides blocking light, you can use the Buhua curtains to control the temperature inside your home. The thick material helps restrict the flow of air, thus providing better heat and sound insulation. And like some of the best soundproof curtains, these can be machine washed for easy maintenance.
Color:Grayish white | Material: Polyester | Pattern:Branch | Top Style: Grommet
Any list of the best soundproof curtains would be incomplete without mentioning these soundproof curtains from the Melodieux brand. These are premium curtains designed for bedrooms, living rooms, and more, and they come with unique chevron-printed designs.
The curtains are available in several colors, and the off-white background with the colored chevron prints suits almost any setting. Each curtain has a width of 52 inches and a length of 84 inches, and the package includes matching tie-backs.
To make installation easy, the curtains come with eight bronze top grommets in each panel that fit up to one-and-a-half-inch curtain rods. Simply slide these grommets through the curtain rail for hanging the soundproofing curtains.
The manufacturer has used triple weave tri weave fabric for making these curtains, which works flawlessly for the purpose of noise reduction in your living room, gaming room, or bedroom. And this material does not have a chemical coating, which makes it a completely safe option.
Additionally, it can block 90% of light and UV rays, allowing you to use the curtains to darken a room. This also means that you can use these soundproof curtains to ensure privacy since the thick material can block visibility completely.
I also discovered that using these curtains can make your thermoregulator more efficient, which is due to the fact that they can block the passage of air between various rooms. This means your room will get warmer or cooler as required much faster, resulting in greater energy savings.
And you can clean the Melodieux soundproof curtains by simply machine washing them.
Color:Red | Material:Fabric | Pattern:Chevron | Top Style: Grommet, rod
PRODUCT INFO: 100% blackout curtains. Both sides of the...
DESIGN and TEXTURE: The curtains are made by faux linen...
What we like
Blocks out all light
High-quality construction
Low maintenance
Affordable
What we don't like
Colors can be slightly different from the pictures
Most blackout curtains do not block out light completely, which is why these soundproof curtains from Deconovo stand out. They are 100% blackout curtains manufactured using faux linen fabric and can filter out any light that enters your room, making them perfect for bedrooms.
The package has two curtain panels, each measuring 52 inches wide and 72 inches long. Available in multiple colors, these curtains have the same color on both sides, making them attractive from either side. And their threads are well trimmed while the fabric is wrinkle-free, which further adds to their appearance.
To make installation easy, there are eight silver grommets, each with an interior diameter of 1.6 inches through which the curtain rod can slide. This high-quality construction of these grommets and the soundproof curtains make them an extremely durable choice.
Similarly, the material of the curtains is soft and heavy, which provides them with a nice texture and allows them to block outside noise easily without costing much. But unlike the competition, this material does not fade, and the curtain will retain its original appearance for a long time.
What's more, you can use these curtains in areas where you want some privacy by creating partitions or barriers as people on the other side cannot see through the fabric. And the thick material can provide thermal insulation and can help maintain the right temperature in any room, in addition to sound reduction.
You can even machine wash and iron these budget soundproof curtains for maintenance purposes.
Color:Gray | Material:Linen | Pattern: Solid | Top Style: Grommet
Total Blackout Performance: Crafted with double-layered,...
Thermal Insulation and Energy Efficiency: These curtains act...
What we like
Wide application
Durable construction
Effective soundproofing
Modern printed design
What we don't like
Relatively heavy
When looking for soundproof curtains, going with a renowned brand like Beauoop is a good idea, and I've reviewed one of its best offerings here. These curtain panels measure 50 inches in width and 108 inches in length, which makes them large enough to cover your doors and windows.
Manufactured using triple weave double layer thermal insulated blackout fabric, the curtain has impressive sound-dampening qualities. It can be placed in various areas of the room to absorb any sound wave that comes in through the window and ensure that theroom is quiet. This construction also provides the curtain with a high level of durability, so rest assured it will last a long time.
Functionality aside, the fabric of the curtain is soft to the touch and feels pleasant, and it is available in six color options. These feature a geometric design, enhancing your interior decor and making the curtains suitable for almost any room.
Apart from that, they work well for blocking out sunlight and can keep out 95% to 99% of light, depending on which color curtain you use. So, they can be used to create the perfect environment for watching movies in your home cinema or for taking a daytime nap.
The heavy material also makes these curtains ideal if you want to create partitions and ensure privacy. And they work equally well for thermal insulation purposes, helping maintain an optimal temperature inside without excessive use of the thermoregulator.
This means you can enjoy the benefits of lower energy bills in addition to the other advantages offered by these great soundproof curtains.
Color:Spa/Gray | Material:Fabric | Pattern:Geometric | Top Style: Grommet
3 LAYERS - Package includes 2 panels total width 104 inch. 1...
NOISE REDUCTION - Detachable felt fabric liner is in the...
What we like
Easy to install and remove
Safe
Superb light blocking
Easy to clean
What we don't like
Gets easily wrinkled
Next up, I have the Ryb Home thermal insulated noise-reducing curtains, which come with features like detachable felt fabric for easier installation and removal. This curtain has three layers, one at the back, one at the front, and the detachable felt fabric in the middle.
All materials used in the manufacturing process are safe, and harmful substances like formaldehyde are not present. The three layers work together to absorb sound and can provide good results, though this will depend on your environment to a certain extent.
These are also 100% blackout curtains, as the triple weave blackout fabric and the three-layer design can keep UV rays and harsh light out of your room. So, they are a great pick for rooms that are used for daytime naps.
And this construction and design also make these curtains well-suited for building insulation purposes. You can use them to keep the room warm in winter and cool in summer without spending as much energy and saving on power bills.
Apart from that, these curtains are extremely easy to install, thanks to the silver grommets that are provided with the curtains. Like all standard grommets, these have an interior diameter of 1.6 inches, which makes them compatible with most curtain rods.
Lastly, these Ryb Home sound-deadening curtains are easy to maintain, and you can simply put them in the washer when they need to be cleaned. You only need to remove the felt liner and nothing else before washing it so that it does not get damaged.
Color:Biscotti beige | Material:Fabric | Pattern: Solid | Top Style:Grommet
These are the 11 best soundproof curtains as per my analysis, but the purpose for which they are required can vary significantly. That is why it is essential to consider certain factors when choosing between them. And I've mentioned such crucial information here in this buyer's guide.
Dimensions
The dimensions or size are one of the first things to consider when looking for the best soundproof curtains. To ensure that the curtains are of the correct size, measure the spot where the curtains have to be attached, such as the front of your doors and windows.
It is important to remember that the curtain should extend at least six inches on each side as well as the top and bottom. Having a curtain larger than the window frame or door will ensure that sound does not leak from the sides, especially since curtains can only block high-frequency sounds.
You should also check that the curtain reaches down to the floor for the same reason. Such long sound dampening curtains are often made from velvet since this texture is better for external noise reduction. In the case of larger windows, the curtains can even be extended to the ceiling, but avoid using such curtains over smaller windows.
Additionally, look for curtains that have some extra material, which can help create a larger number of folds. More folds result in greater thickness and ensure better sound absorption.
Weight
The weight or mass of the curtain is another factor to consider. Sound-absorbing curtains are much heavier than regular ones and also have multiple layers to prevent sound leakage. Different layers can include window liners, curtain liners, and blackout liners. Multi-layered curtains are denser and thicker and are ideal for active noise control, but the weight of the curtain will also matter when installing the curtain.
You should make sure that your curtain rod can support their weight. The best soundproof curtains can weigh over ten pounds and require special mounts as they cannot be installed using standard curtain rods. Or you can get a heavy-duty rod and wall plugs to support such heavy curtains.
Many soundproof curtains even require special mounts for the same reason.
Material
How much noise can pass through sound reducing curtains depends to a large extent on their construction. Soundproofing curtains are manufactured using various materials, with the outer fabric generally made from cotton or polyester. In contrast, the inner lining can be made from velvet, felt, wool, or suede.
These sound absorbing materials have tightly-woven fibers in multiple layers that can help absorb sound more easily. You can also go with curtains made from thermal weaves, which are similar in nature.
Layered curtains or those with thermal weaving can also help keep your home warmer and can help in efficient energy use. Also, they can block out sunlight during the summer and keep your room cooler for the same reason. Thermal insulated curtains also the additional advantage of keeping ultraviolet rays out, which can cause the flooring and furniture to fade.
However, these things will often depend upon the color of the curtain, and darker-colored curtains will provide improved acoustics. An alternative solution to blackout curtains is to get a blackout liner when using a regular curtain, which can help keep sunlight out.
Soundproofing curtains may be available as multilayered, insulated, or blackout options. Multilayered curtains are manufactured using various materials sewn together, while insulated ones provide additional protection against heat and cold.
NRC Rating
NRC rating is a measure of how good a material is in absorbing sound and is measured from zero to one. Curtains that have an NRC rating of zero absorb no sound, while those with an NRC rating of one can absorb all sound completely. Generally, an NRC rating is present only in the case of good soundproofing curtains.
When considering this factor, look for curtains with an NRC rating of 0.7 or more since they are better at noise reduction and can absorb more sound energy. That said, even the best soundproof curtains with a lot of mass usually have an NRC rating of around 0.85.
A curtain with an NRC rating of 0.85 can absorb about 85% of sound, so it is a great choice for blocking room noise, music, and other sounds. You can check out the FAQ on the product page of the curtains to learn about the NRC rating.
Price Range
Soundproof curtains are available at several different price points, so it is important to consider what you need and how much you are willing to spend. In most cases, the best soundproof curtains are not very cheap and are most suitable for people willing to spend a considerable amount.
On the flip side, many curtains are available at a very low price, but these may not be able to block all noise coming into the area. That is why finding the best budget soundproof curtains isn't easy, and you need to plan carefully when making a decision.
Installation And Maintenance
How easy it is to install soundproof curtains is a major factor you should consider when comparing various options. Most soundproof curtains that have multiple layers, especially thermal insulation ones, are heavy and will require more effort in installation. They cannot be installed using standard curtain rods due to their weight and will require a heavy-duty curtain rod.
In contrast, noise-reducing curtains made from lighter fabrics, like cotton and linen, can be easily installed. Also, curtains may come with grommets or with a hook-and-loop fastener, which can affect the installation process.
Aside from installation, you should look at the maintenance instructions. A soundproof curtain needs to be kept in good condition to ensure that it lasts longer. This is especially true if you work in a recording studio or similar profession.
Many of the options available can be machine washed, which makes cleaning them a simple process. And you can even iron them to keep them wrinkle-free, but this may not be advisable in the case of all acoustic curtains.
Soundproof Curtains FAQs
How does the weight of the curtain affect soundproofing?
The weight or mass of the curtain plays a significant role in soundproofing. Sound-absorbing curtains are typically heavier than regular curtains and have multiple layers to prevent sound leakage. Ensure that your curtain rod can support the weight of the curtains, as some soundproof curtains may require special mounts or heavy-duty rods for installation.
What materials are soundproof curtains made of?
Soundproof curtains are constructed using various materials. The outer fabric is often made from cotton or polyester, while the inner lining can be made from velvet, felt, wool, or suede. These materials have tightly-woven fibers in multiple layers that help absorb sound more effectively. Thermal weaves can also be used to make soundproof curtains, which offer additional benefits such as insulation and blocking out sunlight.
How does the price range vary for soundproof curtains?
Soundproof curtains are available at different price points. Higher-quality soundproof curtains, which provide better noise reduction, tend to be more expensive. Cheaper options may not offer the same level of noise blocking. Consider your needs and budget when choosing soundproof curtains.
How easy are soundproof curtains to install?
The ease of installation depends on the type of soundproof curtains. Those with multiple layers and thermal insulation are heavier and may require special mounting hardware or heavy-duty curtain rods. Lighter fabrics, like cotton or linen curtains, are easier to install. Some curtains come with grommets or a hook-and-loop fastener, which can affect the installation process.
What maintenance is required for soundproof curtains?
It’s important to keep soundproof curtains in good condition for optimal performance. Many options can be machine washed, making cleaning them a simple process. However, not all acoustic curtains are suitable for ironing, so refer to the manufacturer’s instructions. Proper maintenance ensures that the curtains last longer and maintain their soundproofing capabilities.
Conclusion
There you have it! While each of these curtains possesses impressive soundproofing capabilities, it is advisable to use them along with other soundproofing techniques, such as a soundproof blanket or acoustic panels.
Now, before I sign off, I would like to mention my favorites here. My top pick would be the Nicetown High-End Thermal Curtain, which comes with two layers of triple weave fabric, manufactured using safe materials and available in multiple colors.
Another excellent option would be the Deconovo Soundproof Curtains, featuring rust-proof grommets and a high-density blackout fabric for filtering light.
If you are a professional or even someone who needs work done around the house – you will need concrete vibrators.
These machines can make difficult tasks look easy and set the cement in next to no time. Moreover, thanks to the vibrations, you will be able to get rid of excess air or water, resulting in a complete performance.
And they are highly versatile as well, allowing you to use them on a range of jobs from the sidewalk to construction work for buildings. Plus, with all the upgrades and innovations, it is much more convenient than ever before to use concrete vibrators.
Despite the power, they have become more compact to ensure you get easy transportation. But how do you choose from the numerous products lining the market? We have the answer for you with our list of the 11 Best Concrete Vibrators right now!
So, let’s get started, shall we?
Best Concrete Vibrators
Here's the list of the 11 best concrete vibrators of 2023, helping you choose the perfect tool for your construction or home improvement needs.
1. Makita XRV02Z - Best for Portability & Ergonomics
Occupying the top spot on the list is the Makita XRV02Z, which has turned out to be a trustworthy product for most people. It is well-balanced and innovative, making it a quality unit capable of handling light to medium jobs with aplomb. All this and more guarantee a satisfying performance.
Makita-built motor delivers 12,500 VPM to help increase...
Dual-directional switch to conveniently hold the tool in...
Why Did We Like It?
It weighs in at only 11.4 lbs, making it one of the lightest tools on the market. The size well supports the weight as it measures 39x24x6 inches. Therefore, it is compact and is ideal for taking from one site to another. Additionally, it is powered by an 18V lithium-ion battery that drives all the functions and makes it long-lasting.
Likewise, it features an ergonomic design that makes it comfortable to work with and comes in handy while controlling the 12,500 vibrations per minute. However, the star attraction is the dual-direction switch that ensures you get the much-needed stability.
On top of this, there is a computer control protection system that improves both performance and battery life by monitoring the output under various conditions. So, you do not have to worry about overheating, overloading, or over-discharge and can get the job done swiftly.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Batteries are not included with it, so you will have to pitch in extra to buy a compatible power source. Hence, it could be an inconvenience for many people. Besides, it is not ideal for massive projects, meaning that a section of buyers would look for other options.
The name Stark usually reminds us of Iron Man. While this may not be Tony Stark's brainchild, the Stark 2.0HP Gas Vibration Industrial Plate Compactor is impressive when it comes to delivering a stable output. Thus, you will not only be able to handle various types of work, but it will also stand out from the crowd.
To ensure that your work is long-lasting, it delivers a 2000-pound impact force due to the 2.0HP engine. As a result, even a large area can be covered in quick time, which is made possible by its ability to compact an area of 2691ft per hour. So, it is the ideal model if you want your machine to be versatile.
Therefore, you can use it around the house or for professional purposes and even for landscaping work. Moreover, it has fold-up wheels that make it best suited for transportation from one place to another. Plus, the recoil ignition enables you to start it up quickly.
This proves to be very convenient and added to the 79cc vibratory plate; you get a dependable output in most scenarios. Finally, it measures 40x15-1/2x34-1/4-inch which, coupled with the base area of 17x11.8-inch, allows you to get a vibration frequency of 5210.
What Could've Been Better?
It is smaller than some of the other units. So, if you want your tool to look muscular and powerful, this is not the model for you. Besides, users have reported that it leaks oil, which could not only bring your work to a stop but also mean that you will have to buy a new machine.
Pros
Versatile
Compact
Portable
Recoil ignition
79cc vibratory plate
Cons
Slightly small
May leak oil
Power Source: Gas | Voltage: N/A | Horsepower: 2HP | Vibration Frequency: N/A | Vibration Amplitude: N/A | Length of Shaft: N/A | Weight: 165 lbs | Warranty: 1-year limited
And in the third spot, we have the GlobMarble Concrete Vibrator which comes with some exciting upgrades. These additions make it a highly useful tool with some of the features not available in other products. Thus, you get a very reliable performance that has earned it positive reviews.
Concrete Vibrator for Concrete Vibrating Table. Concrete...
Vibration Motor, Electric Vibrators, Electric motors
Why Did We Like It?
Right off the bat, you will be charmed by the IP65 protection feature, which is hardly seen in any other tool. Thus, your machine is well protected against dust, water, or other harmful contaminants that can enter it while working. Moreover, the vibrating motors are heat-resistant and can withstand temperatures as high as 180 degrees Celsius.
Furthermore, it is low maintenance, unlike other devices, but that does not compromise reliability. Likewise, the motors generate a lot of power that produces both small and large-scale vibrations for different jobs. However, just in case you also have the option of adjusting the intensity of vibrations as you wish.
Additionally, it is very versatile, and you can use it as a vibrating source if you need to use vibrating screens, vibrating fielders, vibrating dryers, and concrete forms. Moreover, even under full force, you get an uninterrupted performance and a high level of consistency.
What Could’ve Been Better?
It is a heavy unit that could be a deterrent for a lot of people. Most people like their models to be lightweight so that they can maneuver quickly, which is found wanting in this case. Plus, it becomes difficult to control the speed as well-meaning that you may not get the desired result at work.
Pros
Powerful
Versatile
Reliable
Waterproof
Low maintenance
Cons
Heavy
Difficult to control the speed
Power Source: Electric | Voltage: 110V | Horsepower: 3/4HP | Vibration Frequency: 12,000 VPM | Vibration Amplitude: 1.5" | Length of Shaft: 10 ft | Weight: 10.5 lbs | Warranty: 1-year limited
Having gone through our top three products, we now take a look at the Lightweight Chicago Pneumatic, which just missed the cut. Yet, there is no reason to be disappointed as this is a feature-heavy tool that can carry out light-duty tasks with ease. Therefore, it is incredibly efficient.
It measures 28x8x4 inches which makes it ideal for maneuvering on most jobs. Plus, the weight of only 15 lbs means it is incredibly lightweight, making it portable as well. Now, thanks to the 1-3/8-inch diameter, it can generate up to 13000 vibrations per minute. Added to this, the vibration head is 15-1/8 inches long, allowing you to use it for deep concrete consolidation.
It also features a lock-on button that provides stability and makes sure that extended working hours are not a worry. You can enable the function and continue working without having to ponder about the controls.
Meanwhile, due to the cast aluminum body, this is a sturdy unit that can handle even the toughest of jobs regularly. And thanks to the swift-to-change shaft, you will be able to enjoy it without any hassle. Finally, despite all the functions on offer, the designers have kept the price within reasonable limits.
What Could’ve Been Better?
There is a problem with the switch, which could affect performance while you are at work. Thus, it is not ideal to find yourself in such a situation when you have to meet a deadline. Besides, it is not the most flexible tool meaning you could be prompted to look elsewhere.
Pros
Affordable
Durable
Powerful
Lightweight
Swift-to-change shaft
Cons
Not very flexible
Problems with the switch
Power Source: Electric | Voltage: 110V | Horsepower: 1.5HP | Vibration Frequency: 13,000 VPM | Vibration Amplitude: 1" | Length of Shaft: 0.83 ft | Weight: 5.5 lbs | Warranty: 1-year limited
The USA Pro Concrete Vibrator is a handy unit that can take care of your light-duty requirements at work. Plus, it is affordable, and with a range of features on offer, you will undoubtedly take a liking to it. As a result, it has earned a lot of praise from users making it highly accessible.
Heavy Duty Vibrator has a 60in X 35mm shaft needle
Will Vibrate the Bubbles out of Concrete / Cement
Why Did We Like It?
If you need to vibrate air bubbles out of the cement or concrete, then the 60-inch by 35mm shaft needle will come in handy. Plus, thanks to the 6.5ft power, you will be able to reach most spots quite quickly. Moreover, thanks to the 110V supply, no job is too tight for this model.
Moving on, the 1-3/8-inch breadth of the head makes it ideal for generating 12000 vibrations per minute. Likewise, the trigger lock is well-suited to allow you to control all the power. It helps you to get better results and makes the overall experience user-friendly.
Besides, since it is handheld, you can use the 1.5HP to set the concrete quickly. Additionally, you get all these features for a meager price. The manufacturers have made sure that it is reasonably priced to cater to a broad audience.
What Could’ve Been Better?
It is not the most powerful option that is available in the market. If you are looking for a model that delivers a high power rating, then you have to consider some other option. And because the power is less, it is not ideal for big-scale projects.
Pros
Affordable
Long cord
Maneuverable
Suitable for light-duty tasks
Eliminates air bubbles and water
Cons
Not very powerful
Not for heavy-duty projects
Power Source: Electric | Voltage: 110V | Horsepower: 2HP | Vibration Frequency: 13,000 VPM | Vibration Amplitude: 1.2" | Length of Shaft: 6.5 ft | Weight: 11 lbs | Warranty: 1-year limited
We are nearing the end of our list, but the top-notch products just keep on coming. Up next is the Seeutek Hand-Held Concrete Vibrator, which is a useful option if you want to finish your projects fast. So, you are guaranteed a powerful performance thanks to its potent functions.
If you have a need for speed, you will love the 13000 vibrations per minute that it generates because of the 1HP engine. Additionally, it can produce a maximum of 750W power, which effectively allows you to remove air bubbles so that the concrete is durable and consolidated.
Furthermore, it has an extra-long shaft woven from steel and ensures you get the desired flexibility. Thus, you can rest assured that it will not stop working under normal conditions due to overheating problems. Meanwhile, it comes with an ergonomically designed handle that makes long working hours possible.
And this design is well complemented by the lock-on button enabling you to leave your machine on until the work is complete. Therefore, you do not need to worry about anything else and can get the desired output. Plus, it has a metal screw thread that forms a secure connection.
What Could've Been Better?
This unit is not suited for heavy-duty work. Therefore, the buyers' base is reduced, and several people may miss out. Plus, there is a slight delay before it starts, which may not please you. You may even have to bang it on the head to get it up and running.
Pros
Metal screw thread
Flexible
Suited for light-duty projects
The shaft is 4.9ft long
Secure connection
Cons
Not for large-scale tasks
Slight delay before it starts working
Power Source: Electric | Power: 1500W | Vibration Frequency: 13,000 VPM | Vibration Amplitude: 1.2" | Weight: 10 lbs | Length of Shaft: 6.6 ft | Warranty: 1-year limited
If you are a professional worker or if you harbor hopes to be one, then the WEN 56035T Compaction Force Plate Compactor is the tool for you. It is a highly versatile unit that comes with some unique features which have made it one of the top buys in the market.
It comes with a 212cc engine that gives it a lot of power and allows you to use it for different compounds other than just cement. So, you can form a solid groundwork on most projects and use it for walkways, driveways, repair work, or even the foundation for small buildings.
Plus, with the swing-over-handle, you get a high degree of maneuverability while also being capable of taking it to various worksites. Therefore, given the versatility on offer, you can even use it for projects around your home. Likewise, thanks to the 4496 lbs of force, it can generate 5400 blows per minute.
Furthermore, due to the isolators, the vibration from the motors is reduced considerably, helping to extend the lifespan of your tool. Besides, it has fast travel speed, likewise increasing output, and ensuring that a single direction plate can travel up to 82ft per minute.
What Could've Been Better?
There have been reports that while working, it tends to bog down on instances. Therefore, you will have to put in more effort to get the maximum out of it. Plus, you will have to keep a check on the bolts to see if they are coming to lose or wearing out.
Pros
Swing over handle
Highly maneuverable
Vibration isolators
Portable
Durable
Cons
May bog a bit
Bolts could be an issue
Power Source: Gas | Voltage: N/A | Horsepower: 7HP | Vibration Frequency: N/A | Vibration Amplitude: N/A | Length of Shaft: N/A | Weight: 207 lbs | Warranty: 2-year limited
At number two on our list is the DeWalt DCE531M1 Cement Vibrator, which is quite similar to the first product. But there are a couple of areas where it is different, which has placed it in the runners-up spot. Nevertheless, it has quality features that will please many buyers.
The concrete vibrating tool has 4 foot long flexible shaft...
Why Did We Like It?
It is a very convenient model, weighing in at only 8lbs and added to the overall measurements of 8x46.5x3.8 inches, it is compact. Now, the 1-1/8 head permits you to get 14,000 vibrations per minute, and coupled with the shaft and isolated motor, you will see that it delivers productive output.
Plus, it is very versatile and works well with both residential as well as industrial operations. Because it is cordless, you get added maneuverability under most circumstances. So, you can use it to get into tight areas for excellent execution.
Furthermore, due to the separate drive shaft and motor, it is sturdy and can last for a long time. Also, given that it is portable, you can consistently use it for several small-scale jobs. Besides, it will give most consumers great pleasure to learn that it is easy to clean, and you can rinse it off.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The problems with this device are similar to the earlier product. For one, batteries are not included, and many people would not like to spend extra to purchase the batteries. If you need a machine for big projects, then it is better to consider some other option.
A pencil is usually associated with subtlety, but in this case, the designers of the DeWalt DCE531B 20V Max Pencil Concrete Vibrator have been quite smart. They have coupled finesse with power so that you get an uninterrupted performance on most jobs. Therefore, most people have taken a liking to its excellent features.
4 foot long flexible shaft for easy use and long reach
1- 1/8" diameter vibrator delivers maximum consolidation...
Why Did We Like It?
If you crave power, then you will love the sharp performance that it produces. Thanks to the shaft, you get 14000 vibrations per minute, allowing you to take on most tasks with assurance. As a result, you can fix anything from the sidewalk to the footing required for streetlights.
Such is the reliability that you can bet your bottom dollar that it is much faster than other units. Meanwhile, the shaft is 4ft long, enabling you to use it on some large-scale tasks. Moving on, it is lightweight so you do not face any problems while controlling it.
Besides, when you use it on the concrete, you will see air bubbles coming to the surface. This is thanks to the 1/8-inch vibrator that offers a consistent burst of power. Finally, it can reach even the problematic spots to produce a complete performance.
What Could've Been Better?
If you opt to buy this unit, then you must know that you will have to purchase the batteries separately, which will drive up the total cost. Additionally, it is not the ideal unit if you have to cater to big-scale projects and, therefore, potential buyers may look elsewhere.
We are down to the last three products on our list, and maintaining the quality, we have the BIZOERPO Hand-Held Electric Concrete Vibrator. This is a very versatile tool that provides you with incredible efficiency. Moreover, it is potent, which has endeared it to users.
【HIGH EFFICIENCY】: The length of vibrator shaft is up to...
【HIGH POWER】: Remove air bubbles and level concrete...
Why Did We Like It?
The vibrator shaft measures 4.5m in length, having a 1.5” head that both improves as well as gives you more coverage while working. Therefore, it comes equipped with an advanced leading design that lets it work at a maximum power of 1100W.
Thus, you can get rid of air bubbles with ease and get a smooth operation while leveling the concrete. All you need to do is dip the head into the wet cement that will get rid of air or excess water and solidify it within the structure. Furthermore, it has a metal roll cage that provides excellent protection and makes working with it safe.
Finally, it is incredibly versatile, causing it to be suitable for use on numerous jobs from concrete slab bridges to hydroelectric power plants. Also, you will be happy to know that you will not have any issues in starting it up, such as having to tap or knock on the vibrator shaft.
What Could’ve Been Better?
This is a heavy model, so there may be people who will opt for another option. Thus, if you are not well-built, you could have trouble controlling it. Besides, it could bog and start smoking hence bringing your work to a premature stop.
Pros
Powerful
Efficient
Easy to use
Versatile
Accurate
Cons
Bit heavy
Could bog down and start smoking
Power Source: Electric | Voltage: 110V | Horsepower: 2HP | Vibration Frequency: 16,000 VPM | Vibration Amplitude: 1.2" | Length of Shaft: 13 ft | Weight: 10.7 lbs | Warranty: N/A
The penultimate product on our list is the BEAMNOVA Electric Concrete Vibrator which flaunts a simple design. It comes with all the components to make this a complete unit, and you will enjoy working with it. Thus, it is a trendy device and is a good investment for most buyers.
Efficient & Long Reach - The BEAMNOVA concrete vibrator is...
Versatile Use - Submerge the vibrator head into wet concrete...
Why Did We Like It?
It is a lightweight model allowing you to get better handling so that you can control the 13000 vibrations per minute. Complementing the speed is the 1-3/8-inch vibrator shaft that gives you more range at work and makes the entire operation more potent.
Moving on, you can dip the head into the wet concrete to remove air bubbles or excess water. This will allow the concrete to set into the mold which will make it stable. Plus, you can even use it to level the concrete, which is a great function to have.
The significant inclusion is the dust-proof button switch that provides you with user-friendly operation and permits you to get over 10000 presses. Likewise, thanks to the metal-built case, you do not have to worry about cement entering the machine. Thus, it is a highly versatile tool that can perform a range of tasks such as patching or pouring operations.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Like some of the other modes, it does not start instantly. You may have to bang it on the body to get it rolling, which many people may not like. Another cause for concern is the lack of robustness that will affect the longevity of the unit.
Pros
4.9ft shaft
Versatile
13000 vibrations per minute
1-3/8-inch vibrating head
Removes trapped air
Cons
May not start instantly
Durability is an issue
Power Source: Electric | Voltage: 110V | Horsepower: 2HP | Vibration Frequency: 11,000 VPM | Vibration Amplitude: 1.2" | Length of Shaft: 43 ft | Weight: 9.3 lbs | Warranty: N/A
Before you get to buying, there are some points that you need to keep in mind. These are the aspects which distinguish the top products from the not-so-good ones. Although they may all look and feel the same, the best concrete vibrators' anatomy is a little different.
It is based on these points that we have formulated our list, but you still have to choose the best from the best. Therefore, by taking note of the details, you will be much better placed to make an informed choice.
Durability
Most significantly, your model must be able to withstand the demands at work daily. A concrete vibrator is likely to be subjected to the harshest of conditions, and in that regard, it cannot afford to break down. The designers need to be careful and use quality materials so that you get a long lifespan.
If the device is unable to deliver on longevity, then all the other functions go to waste. There is no point in loading it with features if you do not get to enjoy it for a long time. Also, it is not precisely feasible to keep purchasing new tools in a short period. Therefore, durability is essential for any user.
Ease of Use
It must be user-friendly because you are working with a heavy machine, which is already difficult. On top of that, you do not need the added burden of figuring out what every function or feature does. One does not have the time.
All the functions should come to you quite smoothly. The tool's primary purpose is to ease your workload and, in that regard, you cannot afford to compromise. Rather than having lots of features, manufacturers should focus on the most important ones to make the device uncluttered.
Speed
Finally, it has to be fast. Working in the field is hard, and being fast is essential because you are working with various components that need to dovetail to make your work complete. Thus, it has to offer the maximum number of possible vibrations per minute to ensure that the cement sets appropriately.
Additionally, you have a lot of work to do and cannot just focus on one task. The best concrete vibrators reduce the time of work considerably, allowing you to focus on other things. Plus, the faster you get your job done, the more chances you will have to work on various projects.
But being fast does not mean compromising on efficiency. There must be a precise balance between pace and output, and they should complement each other for the best results.
Concrete Vibrators FAQ's
What are the types of concrete vibrators available in the market?
The most common types of concrete vibrators are internal (needle) vibrators, external (form) vibrators, and surface vibrators. Internal vibrators are most commonly used for concrete consolidation.
What is the ideal frequency and amplitude for a concrete vibrator?
The ideal frequency for a concrete vibrator is between 7,000 to 12,000 vibrations per minute (VPM) and the ideal amplitude should be around 0.04 to 0.06 inches.
How do I choose the right concrete vibrator?
The choice of a concrete vibrator depends on the size and shape of the concrete pour, the thickness of the concrete, and the desired level of consolidation. Also, consider the type of vibrator needed and its power source.
Can a concrete vibrator damage concrete?
If a concrete vibrator is used improperly, it can damage concrete. Over-vibrating or using a vibrator with too high of a frequency or amplitude can cause segregation of the concrete mixture, which can weaken the final product.
How do I maintain a concrete vibrator?
To maintain a concrete vibrator, keep it clean and dry, lubricate the internal bearings, and store it in a dry place. Check for damage or wear on the cord, switch, and housing before each use.
Is it safe to use a concrete vibrator?
Yes, it is safe to use a concrete vibrator as long as you follow the manufacturer’s instructions and take safety precautions, such as wearing protective gear and ensuring that the power source is properly grounded.
What is the average lifespan of a concrete vibrator?
The average lifespan of a concrete vibrator depends on its quality, frequency of use, and maintenance. Generally, a well-maintained vibrator can last for several years.
Can a concrete vibrator be used for other purposes?
No, a concrete vibrator should not be used for any other purpose other than consolidating concrete. Attempting to use it for other purposes can damage the tool and result in injury.
Are concrete vibrators noisy?
Yes, concrete vibrators produce a significant amount of noise during operation. It is important to wear hearing protection while using them.
Conclusion
We hope that having gone through our list, you have a better idea about concrete vibrators.
We have decided to assist you a bit more before you make the final choice. We have narrowed the top three products from our list to give you a much clearer idea of where every model stands.
In first place is the Makita XRV02Z, which is an exceptional model that can carry out a range of functions even under challenging situations. It is followed in the second spot by the DeWalt DC530B Cement Vibrator which has ticked most of the right boxes and has turned out to be a dependable tool for most people.
Finally, in the third spot, we have the GlobMarble Concrete Vibrator, which presents a different option compared to the other two products which many users will like. So, that is all from us.
We believe you are well equipped with all the knowledge to make your purchase. Till next time!
When you’re often bombarded with new ideas, it’s hard to stick to a certain supply of resources. That includes brushes or even textures on designing apps such as Medibang.
With the increasing amount of users making use of the same brush designs, we normally want to venture into newer options. Lucky for us, there are numerous creators out there who come up with new brushes, different brushes each time, making sure designers get the best experience on Medibang.
And today, we’re going to share 54 Medibang brushes and textures which you can add to your collection.
The following brushes resemble a pattern of ropes, rail tracks or can also be considered as a string design.
The brushes painting such patterns can be used to design the borders of a certain picture or can be effectively used to divide the paper into different parts or segments. And other than a simple line dividing the page into different parts, if we used the following brush, then it brings about a pleasing pattern. That looks better than a simple bold black line.
These brushes can be used to draw different patterns with the same themes as well as in different colors.
Here we come across the simple chain brush which brings about the effect of a chain pattern as a design wherever used.
The simple chain brush can be used to create a design in order to connect two objects or one figure holding another. It brings about a sense of connection between two different figures or objects exactly like its pattern, which displays in itself a connection of numerous pieces joined together to form a never-ending pattern or ending till any point used.
The simple chain brush can be used to design borders of images as well as the periphery of objects.
The brushes used here are of digital patterns which gives a different variety of designs. These brushes can be used widely to design an image as it gives an unorthodox feel or figures as well as a modern or digital influenced look.
The digital pattern brush brings about a new and modern generation influenced look as well as a graphic feel to the picture. These brushes can be used to either design or form the borders of different pieces of art. They have a wider variety as more than a design it gives a pattern and sci-fi feel.
Here we have the multicolor pens that involve the effect of all colors by combining them together. Its range of use is wider as it offers a spectrum of colors, it even offers an adjustable mode where it restricts the usage of just 3 colors as we can see in the image listed below.
A rainbow effect can be brought about to your pictures alongside a pleasing appearance. It can be used to form the borders of pictures or divide the page into different segments or just bring about a simple rainbow with its wide spectrum of colors.
Presenting the Zig brushes bring about the pattern of zig-zag to your picture. The Zig brushes are simple and effective and take us back to normal and simple designs among a variety of improved patterns.
The length of the zig can be adjusted as well as the zig ratio bringing to us more freedom to draw as per our intended desire. The height of the zig can be adjusted as well. Overall a recommended brush if you want to stick to the basics and bring an effective design to your image. It must be noted though that the BETA testing states it has bugs.
Down below we can see two varieties of brushes that can be used to decorate or paint on a picture. We have arrowhead brushes and the book brushes. If we were to show directions or the pathway inside our image, we could use these arrowhead brushes.
The book brushes can be used to design a library where it makes it much more convenient than drawing each individual book. The book brushes can be slightly adjusted with designs though the effect doesn't differ by much. The arrowhead brushes can be used to show connections inside the picture as well.
Medibang here brings us a more and highly customizable as per one’s need brush. It allows people to customize their brushes in any proportion they want and in different shapes and sizes as they desire.
On using Medibang Paint Pro, we are made available with a variety of customizable tools that we can combine to develop our own brushes and influence image with more originality, using our own patterns.
The ratio of the patterns, the stroke size, the colors used, and depth as well as the subtleness can be adjusted as per one’s own choice and can be applied to paper.
Down below we have listed an array of patterns that can be used on a dark background to bring a subtle look to the picture being drawn by the artist. We have six different varieties of brushes in different shapes and designs. We have the flowers, hearts, stars, bubbles, babies, and Flowah design to choose from and decorate our picture.
The brushes are available to us our convenient to design night skies or decorate the borders and corners of our demonstration whether a poster or picture itself. They would form beautiful backgrounds if used properly.
Down below we can see the wave brushes which are made available to us by Medibang. The brushes form a wave pattern and can be used to bring about the feel of wave patterns around the picture.
The design of the waves is customizable and the thickness of it as well. The waves can be used to even draw and bring the same effect to objects as we can see below the effect it brings while drawing a flower.
The different shapes and sizes, dimensions, patterns, and colors give us a dynamic brush which can bring about a lot of effects to the picture.
Presenting the Dripper brush, the dripper brush is designed to give a dripping effect of color whenever and wherever used.
The drip pattern is beneficial when we want to express the melting of, say an ice-cream in our picture or to showcase the increased heat due to which substances melt. The effect can be successfully given to the drawn figure with this drip brush.
The drip brush is also effective in making a pattern background with the drip effect as we can see in the example below, it gives a unique angle to the picture. The thickness of the drips, as well as the shape and weight, can be adjusted and made as per our liking, with adjustable details, the dripping brush makes a good case to be often used by users.
Here, we have the faded out brush which can be helpful in highlighting or fading outlines, figures, images, etc. The fade-out brush effect much like the previous drip brush can be used to design the background of a picture as it has a very pleasing effect on the eye.
It can be used to design borders as well as divide the page into different segments. With a variety of colors to choose from, we can combine two different sets of colors and form an original shade to supplement the look of our picture.
Just like the former brushes, the fade-out brush can also be adjusted using tools where the intensity of colors, the ratio of fading, etc. can be adjusted and suited to one’s own preference.
Coming back to the digitally inspired brushes, the brushes made available here once again give a digital look to our picture though these sets of brushes have much more to offer than its predecessor.
The brushes have a variety of solid colors its available in, thus allowing us to freely make use of it while designing the background of our picture. Much like the rest, the thickness, color, combinations, intensity, etc. can all be adjusted according to one’s liking.
The density of the color, as well as the pattern prominence, can be adjusted as well, thus giving more control to the artist to be free in his creative thinking and execute his desired picture.
Here, we have the Zipper brush which is a more traditional and one of the commonly used brushes as the pattern shares the same characteristics.
The zipper brush can be used to design the borders of the picture as well as to border any figures or objects within the picture, the zipper brush can also be used to divide the page into different parts to show different images in one photo.
Like the other brushes, the zipper brush features can also be adjusted and it's customizable. The dual color or single color used on the pattern can be adjusted as well and we can either have a solid or dual shade for the brush. The length of the brush can be adjusted as well along with the design and thickness of the zip.
Presented below are three different variations of brushes, first, we have the pencil brush which brings about a sketchy feel to the picture as we can see below in the sketch of an animated character, second is the oil-water brush which gives the effect of oil pastels being used to draw or paint an image.
Lastly, we have the Mix brush which is a combination of colors to form one color or a band of a combination of colors. The details can all be adjusted for the below-listed brushes, including the different colors used, the thickness of the brushes, length, and in case of a pencil brush we can even adjust the intensity of the sketch drawn.
The Stars, Bubbles, and Hearts designed brush can be used to design borders of a picture as showcased in the image below, the pattern can also be used as a decorative band across the page as well as to maybe highlight the positivity the photo wishes to portray.
The design of the pattern is simple yet very effective and elegant, much like the former brushes, the Stars, Bubbles, and Hearts brush can also be adjusted and customized as to one’s own choice and preference. Tools can be used to edit characteristics such as the width of the brush, color, design, spacing of the brush, etc.
Below listed here we have the cloud effect brushes. These brushes give a wonderful cloud effect on the picture.
It can be used in various forms, either to draw actual clouds in a day or night sky, they can be used to form cloud shapes like those made by super jets, or you can use the brush cloud simply as a border on a page or to divide the page into different parts.
Brush clouds are so whimsical and beautiful, right?
The clouds can be drawn into different shapes as shown below, the characteristics of the cloud can be adjusted as well as the length and shape and sizes. They can be the most prominent or simple fades.
The brush shown below is of shade combination patches that vary slightly in texture and can be a color mix of two to three shades going side by side.
The patches made by the brushes are more of a paint job rather than a design purpose served, thus these brushes are very effective in painting a background of a picture with a variety of combinations and give a very artistic effect to the background of the picture. These brushes can be used to bring the same effect in the figurines or different parts of the picture.
The below-listed brushes are environment influenced patterns which can be effectively used in a nature-oriented image.
As we can see these brushes form nature-oriented patterns like coconuts joined together, mud patches in different shapes and sizes, designs resembling the paw marks of domestic animals, the brushes can be used to draw or paint hay or nature associated surfaces.
These brushes can be used to design posters of environment day, eco support posters, environment day advertisement content, etc. They can simply be used to decorate the periphery of a picture as well to divide the page into different parts. They can be used to fill in color as well in wood figures etc.
Listed below are some design brushes that form a banner of patterns, with a black background, these brushes form patterns such as stars and bubbles of similar design while seeing below we also notice the popping purple used to show digital brick designs giving a mosaic look to the background.
These brushes can be used to design a starry night background or modern bubbles in a nighty sky look or can go for the purple brick design as well. They can bring out a different and more modern look to the picture as well as can be used in designing posters with attractive and eye-catching colors that relate to the modern generation.
Down below we have the Mo-Fox’s FireAlpaca leaf brush collection which provides us a variety of leaves such as the straight leaf blade, the aspen leaf, the maple leaf, the leaf side, a maple leaf side as well as the leaves blowing in the wind in three different varieties.
The different designed brushes form different patterns when used in number and give the feel of a cluster pattern showcasing numerous leaves put together to form a pleasing pattern. The leaves can be a little scattered inside the pattern as well as they can be clustered close together as well. They can be spread out with a lot of spacing between them as well.
Listed below are the Pearl Brushes, that draw a chain of pearls in each stroke of the brush. The pearls are a beautiful gem and as mostly it is associated with expensive jewelry as it is not that easy to attain, many can associate it with the Aquatic or Sea world as well.
The shade of the pearls can be adjusted and customized as well as the width of the pearl, the spacing of the brush, the size by pressure as well as the type of the pearl. The pearl brushes can also be used to give a bubble effect along with the pearl effect by editing the color of the pearl and making it blue.
22. FireAlpaca Custom Brushes
Here, we have three varieties of brushes, the Stipple Pen, the Sumi Pen, and the Acrylic Pen.
These brushes bring a slightly varying effect to the image or picture constructed, the stipple pen brings about a light stripe effect to the effect of the brush, the Sumi brush brings another little variable effect followed by the Acrylic brush that brings the acrylic effect into each stroke made by the brush.
More than decorating the borders of a picture or using the brushes to divide the pages into different parts or segments, the pens listed below can be more effectively used in color and outlining as well as sketching a figure within the picture for the effect that they bring about in each stroke.
Listed below, we have the grass and feather brushes in a few varieties and types. We have 6 types of differently designed grass brushes and two types of feather brushes.
These grass brushes can be used to design the fields in a picture or can be similarly used to design or show patches of grass in a scenic picture as well.
The feather brushes can be used to symbolize feathers blowing on a windy day and give a windy effect to the picture, this effect can also be brought about if grass brush number 5 or 6 is used as well where the grass blades are swaying from one side to another thus depicting the blowing wind effect.
Down below, we have the Bokeh Brush 4 set category of brushes to be used for art. In the photography circle, bokeh is the aesthetic quality of the blur effect showcased in the out-of-focus parts of a picture produced by a lens. Bokeh can be defined as "the way the lens renders out-of-focus points of light".
These brushes can be effectively used as a background of a picture or to decorate the borders of an image or just to denote an out-of-focus image. These patterns formed come in four varieties as shown below and the intensity of the bokeh feature differs in each type thus we can choose the prominence of the design we want among the option available.
In this picture, you’ll see there are 3 sets of chained brushes, the chained brushes listed below differ from each other on the basis of shape as one resembles a rectangle, a circle and followed by the third which is shaped like a pentagon.
Resembling the modifications of the previous brushes, these brushes can also be adjusted to one’s own preference. The width of the brush, the spacing of the brush, size, and shape, all have options to adjust and suit one’s own choice.
These chained brushes can be used to decorate the borders of a page as well as to make margins or divisions on the page. It gives a simple yet elegant look to the picture and its simplicity throws out more when used sparingly.
Mo-Fox presents us with the Sparkle and Heart brush collection, We have available to us a variety of 6 different brushes. There are two varieties of sparkle brush followed by two varieties of heart brushes, we have scattered patterns and bitmap patterns for two different groups of brushes.
These brushes can be used to decorate the borders of a picture or image, it could be used to design a night sky scenery or just some simple decorative patterns. The patterns are simple and give a subtle look to the image, these brushes can be handy as it can be often used.
Our list is not complete without a snowflake brush to bring that winter festive spirit to life. Luckily for you, we’ve got more than one snowflake brushes in the picture below! The picture also includes previews of what the effects will look like when choosing one of the options. Now, you can pick your favorite one from these designs.
Numbers 1, 2, and 3 are leaner and resemble floral patterns while numbers 4.1, 4.2, and 4.3 are stars-shaped and thicker, filling more spaces in between them. These brushes can most commonly be used in decorating the borders of a page or on a dark background such as black, grey, purple, etc.
The following brushes can be used for creating colorful pieces. On top of this, we are able to edit the color and pattern to suit our own preference.
The designs of the different varieties of brushes listed below are well detailed and when used in a cluster bring about a very beautiful pattern. For those who wish to use simple and beautiful patterns to decorate their photos or pictures can opt for these brushes, they can be used to border the page or decorate a birthday card or an achievement card, anniversary card, etc.
Here we have simple shape brushes to design our pictures, these shapes have an outline of whilst the inside fades into white, we have the heart shape, square, the shape of a circle. That of a pentagon and ending with a spiral shape.
The colors and depth of these brushes much alike the previous brushes can be adjusted as well and made to one’s own preference. The colors are simple and the fade into white results in much of the shape being white in shade, thus the drawn shapes are very pleasing to the eye.
Let's get those starry effects back with the use of these sparkle brushes shown down below, the use of a dark background is to show the entire effect and impact of these brushes.
The different sparkles drawn by these brushes can be used to design a night sky or just a simple border for a picture. These brushes come in a variety of 5 different shapes and sizes, giving us a much wider range to choose from. Some of them are shaped like stars while some are shaped like diamonds and others as small circles.
Love squares? Then these are the brushes most suited for you, these brushes come in eight different varieties and their effect can be understood by seeing the picture listed below.
The squares can be multicolored with the parent shade being blurry, their quantity can be adjusted as well as their prominence. The design can be given a fade effect or a cluster effect, a paint effect, a scattered effect as well as a crayon effect.
On the use of the third brush, one could even portray a digital look in the picture. These brushes could be used to paint a picture and give it a square texture or it could be used while giving a glitch effect or a digital look.
For those artists who have a rock or music inspiration, can go wild with this set of five unique grunge brushes. A preview of these brushes can be seen in the photo listed below.
The patterns formed are detailed and beautiful and can be conveniently used to bring effect into a music poster or a music festival is a poster. It can give a nice border or effect even when used inside the page to be a part of the background. For music lovers and those designing the same, these sets of brushes are a must use.
Down below we can see the wave brushes which are made available to us by Medibang. The brushes form a wave pattern and can be used to bring about the feel of wave patterns around the picture.
The design of the waves is customizable and the thickness of it as well. The waves can be used to even draw and bring the same effect to objects as we can see below the effect it brings while drawing a flower.
The different shapes and sizes, dimensions, patterns, and colors give us a dynamic brush which can bring about a lot of effects to the picture.
Listed below are some trendy design brushes which can bring a freshness of the modern environment into the picture.
We have four different patterns to choose from, the first being the po[p art pattern which can be used anywhere around or within the picture as one’s wish, the grid pattern resembles that of a grid and can be used to design the same as well.
The Stars/Skin texture can, like the previous brush, can be used to design a night sky and give it a starry effect, finally, we have the cool kid texture which is unique in itself and can be well used to make borders along with the photo.
Bubble lovers? We have the perfect brush for our use, listed below we have the bubble brushes which form patterns of bubbles when used to draw. These bubbles can be designed and customized as per one’s own liking.
The color and size of the bubbles, as well as the space between them, can be adjusted. These bubbles are helpful in giving a lit look to the picture being drawn as the colors used are popping and not dull and thus they can stand out or be the highlight as well of the drawn picture.
Here listed below are a few patterns that bring about a paint effect when used on your picture. There are six different patterns along with the coffee cup pattern brush.
The coffee cup brush can be effectively used when designing a coffee house or cafe poster, it can also be used in designing a confectionery poster. The other patterns are of patches and spherical objects which form a beautiful pattern while being drawn.
The paint patches or brushes can be used to design the background of a page as well as along the borders to give a paint effect to the image.
In love with nature? Below, we have twelve different real-life leaves of plant available to us to decorate or be used whilst designing our page. We have the Cirsium palsture, Geranium sanguineum, Parthenocissus, and ranunclus inundatus just to name a few. These leaves can be used by nature lovers to decorate posters or photos for their ventures. They are very detailed and very clear to the naked eye thus giving a perfect design on your image. They can be used to decorate the corners of a page or simply be used along the borders of the frame.
The love of rainbows can be expressed through the use of this brush. The beautiful spectrum of colors throwing brush can be used to decorate the sky of a poster or be widely used in children’s oriented posters like a school or tuition or childcare poster.
The brush size, width, length, and color scheme can all be adjusted and customized as per the artist’s liking. These brushes can use a variety of shades to draw the rainbow and can also be used to design circles on paper or be used to border the pages as well as divide the page into numerous parts and form a beautiful pattern on the page.
Pieces of glass or Shards brush is a brush made of shards of glass as their pattern. These brushes bring that edgy look to your picture while designing it. They can be used to decorate the borders or just be drawn in different places on the picture.
Their sharp edges bring a sense of directness to the picture and are eye-catching. The corners, chunk amount, and size can be adjusted and customized to one’s own liking. The color of the shards can be modified as well and form a beautiful eye-catching color through the pattern.
If you’re an admirer of starry nights, we have the perfect option for you in these starry brushes available in six different shapes and patterns.
The colors of these stars can be adjusted as well as their width and size, their separation apart can also be adjusted, these customizations available to us help us design it as per our own preference.
These stars can be used to design the borders of a page or be used to fill night skies on the background of an image or poster. The simplicity of these designs makes it so interesting to use.
41. Colorful Triangle Brushes
We have these miniature triangles forming the pattern of the brushes used below. These miniature triangles bring about a very subtle look to the picture and prove to be effective though simple.
These brushes can be used to design a party picture or simply to design the borders of an image. Their colors, size, and shape can all be adjusted and customized as to one’s own liking. The popping colors as demonstrated in the below picture stand out on a dark background.
The triangles can be drawn on any background can also form banners if the size is adjusted likewise. For example banners in sports meet pictures.
Much like the previous brushes, here we have a couple of brushes that though could be used in normal designs, these are rather theme oriented. We have a range of lace brushes that can be used widely although particularly have use for those who are making a cloth oriented poster or for a knitting contest etc.
More feminine oriented, these brushes bring about a beautiful pattern on the borders of a picture or can be used to divide the page into different parts. These can also be used to decorate the borders of garments inside the picture drawn.
Listed below are a few random design brushes that use simple designs and can form a decent and simple border around the picture or image being drawn. We have the ‘ - ‘ design followed by two lines intersecting at regular intervals, the addition sign and so on.
These brushes are simple and can be put to a variety of use. As mentioned, they could be used on the borders or to form margins or to decorate a figure/object on the picture, coming back to the concept of simple but effective.
Fans of animals - Here we are, provided with an array of paw brushes for our use. We have the paws of dogs, cats, tigers, etc. These brushes can be used to design any animal or wildlife oriented pictures, posters, cards, etc.
Their use is widespread and can be even used as symbols while decorating the picture. The size of the paws and the distance between each paw can be adjusted and customized as well. Their colors also customizable though they are best effective fully black as they can look attractive on any given background.
Still a fan of letters in this digital age? we have been provided the perfect brush for our use. These are a variety of letter brushes that we can use and incorporate into our design or poster.
Much like the previous pictures, the details are customizable and can be adjusted. Tools like the brush spacing, angle, ratio, width and type of the letters can all be adjusted. To make a copy of ancient telegrams used for communication with a modern touch, these brushes can be used as well as to most commonly be used to decorate the borders of a page or form different sections on a page. They can just be simply used to draw a letter as well.
These brushes can draw simple designs, though random and not themed, these brushes can also be used to design the borders of a picture or on different positions on a picture.
Sometimes it's best to not make your design too flashy and with a lot of content, sticking to the basics and maintaining minimal decorations is advisable and these brushes can supplement an artist very effectively. These brushes can also be widely used whilst constructing a figure where the use is of many brushes, these brushes due to sit simplicity can prove to be effective then.
47. Full Brush Pack
For all black lovers, Medibang has brought to us a variety of black brushes in a pack since different shapes of black objects or shades can be used to decorate and bring about that black effect in your demonstrations.
Different impressions and patterns of black are also available that can form beautiful backgrounds and borders to the pictures. A black background is most convenient to work along with white of the same. Black is a widely used color and with the help of these brushes, we can enhance and have a more applied use of this color.
Below we come across another chain brush pack that has a variety of chained patterned brushes to use while drawing or decorating our picture, poster. We have square-shaped brushes, to five-sided shaped, circular-shaped, etc. to choose from.
The size of these patterns can be adjusted much like the previous brushes. Most commonly these brushes can be used to highlight some important information on the image or poster being created. The Artist could use these brushes to design the borders of a picture and image as well. These could also be a fancy way to divide the page into different parts.
Down below listed we have six differently shaped splashes of blood which could be used to design a goth or death note image. The views of such brushes are that they are most commonly used to demonstrate the act of killing. Although these brushes have mostly one use, they could also prove to be handy in different situations.
We have six varieties to choose from and customize the quantity of splash as per our own requirement. An odd brush but an option it definitely is while decorating or designing different images on the demonstration.
The bottom listed image portrays the hand-drawn flower designs in a variety of six different designs. These flowers would look beautiful when placed as part of a design on the page of an art piece. They could also commonly used to design the borders of a picture or likewise on the corners of the piece.
These brushes can be adjusted and customized much like the previous brushes were the size of the flowers, their shading and transparency can be adjusted and customized as well. These brushes are simple and can be used anywhere around the image or picture by the artist, a recommended brush to use.
Down below we have listed another set of paw brushes though these are grunge paws giving more grunge or rugged look to the patterns. They have the same usage as most brushes as they look appealing when drawn around the picture, though the artist might have a little hindrance with the sketchiness of the image in the patterns.
These brushes can again be used to design the borders of a picture or on a poster as well as the corners of a poster or demonstration. They can be used to design even animal-oriented images and posters.
Here Medibang brings us a three variety brush, one DNA pen brush, a two-color gradient brush, and a rainbow brush once again though the flow and color of this brush are more enhanced.
As demonstrated below these brushes can be used to draw such images such as the sheep and the rainbow drop. The DNA brush can be used to design the borders of a picture or show the DNA symbol across a page.
The two-color gradient combinations can be adjusted and the rainbow brush we well aware of its array of uses.
Finally, we have the chequered pattern brushes, these brushes are mostly used to bring about the chequered effect on a piece of art or as a background of a picture.
As shown and demonstrated below we can see the contrast of the image to its background though both use the same brush the change in color contrast makes it look appealing to the eye. It brings about a nice texture to the image in many cases it can be used to design tiles or an area where checkered patterns are most commonly used like table floors or kitchen floors.
Medibang Brushes iPhones and Android Guide
For iPhones/iPads
Open the software and look for the brush icon. Click on the icon and you’ll have a number of brushes popping up.
From this list, choose one which you would like to practice with. When you’re done, there will be two options - add or download brushes. Choose the ‘add brushes’ option to enable it for use.
Once you’ve added the brush, a settings screen will open up, allowing custom edits to your pick. Here, you can make the desired changes that will go best with your art. Now, you’re all set!
If you want to download more brushes, follow these steps below:
On the upper left corner, there is a brush panel. Within it, click on the + icon. You’ll see a menu of options, then click on Brush Download.
When you’re done, click on the Cloud to see a list of options available for download. Select your desired brushes and begin your download. Note that you can position the brushes by using the arrows which are on the right side of the board.
For Androids
Open Medibang and select the brush icon. Select a brush from the given list. Do this by clicking on the + icon to let you add a brush.
Look for the color palette icon to select a shade you want. Here you can also adjust the size of the brush.
Note that there is another location to change the size of your brush. One is located inside the brush panel, while the other is right under the HSV Bar available on the left side of the canvas. Just click on the circle and drag it. This will automatically change the size.
The same two locations are available for adjusting the opacity of the color.
If you want to download more brushes to your android device, follow the steps below:
Click the + icon on the brush panel. Look for the Cloud tab and click on it. This will take you to the Brush Cloud where numerous brushes are available for downloading. By clicking on a brush, it will directly take you to the editing screen.
After selecting a brush of your choice, tap on Set and it will save your latest addition at the bottom of your brush list.
Keep in mind that you can use already available brushes without having to create a Medibang account.
Conclusion
To make sure designing remains exciting for artists, new textures, designs, and brushes are always added from time to time. Keep looking for updates so you can use them for your latest art.
If you own a car but don't have a garage to put it in, we know you want more. Not only will you be leaving your car out in the rain, but standing in the sun for a prolonged period of time can also lead to the fading and discoloration of the paint. Besides that, having your car sitting under the sun for long periods of time can also result in premature wear and tear of your vehicle. But, there’s an easy way out of this problem, and it’s called a carport.
Best Carport Kits
Here is the list of the 6 best carport kits that you can use to create a covered area outside your home for your car or other vehicles.
Heavy duty 1-1/2-inch diameter white powder coated steel...
The Abba Patio carport is considered to be one of the finest products in the niche. This is an extremely versatile carport that not only features a modern design but also includes a heavy-duty frame and fabric canopy that can withstand the elements and keep your car safe. The polyethylene cover with 8 stabilizers makes this carport unique and versatile.
Sturdy and Versatile
The Abba Patio 10 x 20 ft. Heavy-Duty Carport with Sidewalls boasts of a sturdy build with reinforced edges. The large carport can also double as a horse shade along with many other uses. Abba is a well-known brand when it comes to designing garden accessories and brings the same level of high quality and affordability to the carport niche.
The large size of this carport means that it can easily fit larger vehicles with ease. Other features include two front-zipped flaps and powder-coated steel frames that are rust and corrosion-resistant.
Heavy Duty Metal Carport: Constructed from a sturdy metal...
Multipurpose Storage: With dimensions of 12' x14', this...
The Palram - Canopia Arcadia 6400 is a sleek and stylish carport that’s been designed keeping the user in mind. This carport is incredibly easy to install since it comes with pre-cut and pre-drilled parts. All you have to do is follow the user manual and you can set up this carport in no time.
One of the main selling points for the Palram Canopia Arcadia 6400 is that the roof panels are unbreakable and offer UV protection for the car. The high quality that the Arcadia 5000 boasts of should come as no surprise since Palram is a well-known company that has been manufacturing building materials and other specialty products for many years. All of the products in Palram’s lineup have been designed with the latest technologies and follow high-quality standards, and the Palram Arcadia 6400 is no exception.
Galvanized Steel Frame Can Withstand Strong Winds
To make sure that this product lasts a long time Palram has used powder-coated aluminum and galvanized steel for its frame to guarantee sturdiness and the ability to withstand strong winds. Apart from that, the frame is also rust and corrosion-proof, so you can rest assured that this carport is going to last you for a long time.
Pros
UV resistant cover
Rust and corrosion-resistant frames
Easy assembly
Extended warranty
Maintenance-free
Cons
No sidewalls
Small size
Expensive
Dimensions: 254" x 141" x 95" | Weight: 405 lbs | No. of Legs: 6 | Pole/Frame Material: Aluminum, Alloy Steel | Canopy/Roof Material: Polycarbonate | Resistance: Resists UV, Water, Strong Winds, Impacts, Rust, Corrosion, & More
Dimensions: 10ft 8in wide x 20ft long x 6ft 8in side height...
Frame and Cover : Frame is made of 2” diameter...
The King Canopy carport is one of the best-selling carports available in the market today. Some of the stand-out features of this product are its durable design that is coupled with 8 legs for more stability. This means that the carport is able to withstand strong winds and extreme temperatures with ease. The material that has been used for the canopy is also high-grade which ensures that it is able to offer better protection from rain or hail storms.
Easy Assembly and Durable Build
King Canopy is a company that is synonymous with delivering superior quality products and exceptional design quality, and the Hercules HC1020PC is no exception. The easy assembly of this carport takes the guessing out of putting the canopy together and also makes it easier to set up or take down when not in use.
This makes the King Canopy Hercules HC1020PC canopy one of the most versatile designs in the market. Its versatility means that the carport can also be used as an event booth, animal shed or to provide shade when celebrating an event.
DURABLE FRAME: Made from an all-steel metal 10 x 20 x 8-feet...
MADE TO LAST: Bonded with a premium powder-coated finish...
If you are looking for a durable and easy-to-install carport for your car then the ShelterLogic AutoShelter 62680 – 10 x 20 ft. Instant Garage® is going to be your best bet. This is one of the high-quality carports that are available in the market today. One of the complaints with this carport is its steep price tag, but the high-grade materials and fabric quality that this carport offers makes it worth the investment.
Maximum Car Protection
The ShelterLogic AutoShelter 62680 has been crafted using high-quality durable materials ensuring maximum car protection. Its large size makes it easy to house many large vehicles including SUVs. Since ShelterLogic is a household name when it comes to manufacturing shelters, shades, and other high-quality storage products, the AutoShelter 62680 follows the same high-quality standards that have made ShelterLogic one of the highest-rated shades and shelters manufacturing brands for over 50 years.
This carport is the first to introduce many features which make it a premium quality product. From the Ratchet Tite cover tensioning system to the Easy Slide Cross Rail system, and Patented ShelterLock stabilizers, the ShelterLogic AutoShelter 62680 – 10 x 20 ft. Instant Garage® offers the ultimate in carport design and quality.
Pros
Anti-fade, anti-aging, and waterproof cover
High-quality steel frames
Patented ShelterLock® stabilizers
Includes sidewalls for added protection
Easy installation
Cons
Some people might find it expensive
Dimensions: 237.97" x 117.45" x 98.2" | Weight: N/A | No. of Legs: 8 | Pole/Frame Material: Steel | Canopy/Roof Material: Polyethylene | Resistance: Resists UV, Water, Fading, Tearing
Stylish and durable Carport to protect your car or boat or...
197” length x 114.5” width x 94.5” height
The Palram Vitoria carport features a stylish and modern design that also happens to be virtually indestructible. This high-end carport offers an all-around versatile and sturdy structure that can keep your car safe from just about any kind of weather. The bronze-tinted 6 mm twin-wall polycarbonate roof panels are solid and have been designed to take high impacts. The roof also provides much-needed UV protection to ensure the vehicle’s pain does not discolor or fracture over time.
Solid Construction for Better Protection
While the Palram Vitoria carport has a lot going for it in terms of design and build quality, one of the main selling points for the company is the solid frame and panels that are shatter-resistant and rust-resistant. The powder-coated frame made up of heavy-duty aluminum and galvanized steel offers the ultimate protection against the elements, making sure that your vehicle stays safe at all times.
Pros
Sleek and modern design
Durable construction
Built-in gutters
Comes with a 10-year warranty
Cons
Some folks might find it a bit pricey
Heavy materials make it difficult to assemble
Dimensions: 197" x 94.5" x 114.5" | Weight: 240 lbs | No. of Legs: 4 | Pole/Frame Material: Aluminum, Alloy Steel | Canopy/Roof Material: Polycarbonate | Resistance: Resists UV, Rust, Impact, & More
Super Sturdy structure, high density of framework, carport...
Durable 800 D oxford fabric with PU coating, waterproof!
The Ikuby Lockable carport is as compact and versatile as they come. This carport features a super sturdy build and weighs up to just 170 lbs., which also makes it the lightest carport available. The Ikuby Lockable carport boasts of premium 600 D Oxford fabric along with PU coating and is also waterproof.
Unique Design
But, the main selling point for the Ikuby Lockable carport has got to be its unique and extremely portable design. This makes it easy for the carport to be set up in the tightest of spaces while ensuring that your car remains safe from the elements. Another selling point for the Ikuby Lockable carport is the folding steel framework and high-grade materials that have been used in its design to protect your valued car from sunlight or hail damage.
Pros
Modern design
Solid build quality
Solid build quality
High wind/load rating
Cons
Limited in size
Pricey
Dimensions: 246" x 110.4" x 90" | Weight: 210 lbs | No. of Legs: N/A | Pole/Frame Material: Steel | Canopy/Roof Material: Polyurethane | Resistance: Resists UV, Water, Rust, Wind, Dust, & More
A carport or a portable garage is a great alternative to a garage for your car. It helps keep your vehicle safe from the damage that can be caused when a vehicle is exposed to the elements for a prolonged period of time. The structure of a carport is made up of a metal frame that helps hold together the vinyl roof and sides. The best part about carports is that they are available in multiple sizes, which makes it easy for you to find one that’s the perfect size for your vehicle.
Another major benefit of investing in a carport kit is that they are extremely easy to put up. Since there’s no drilling or digging involved you can set up your carport within a matter of minutes without any hassle. Carports are a smart alternative for those people who do not own a garage for their car. But, that’s not all your carport can be used for. Because of its versatile design, the carport can also double as a shed if you are hosting an outdoor activity for friends or family.
Buying Guide For The Best Carport Kit
Like most other things you will buy, the features of a carport are going to vary depending on the manufacturer. From the colors and design to the installation process and durability of the materials used in its design, there are various factors that need to be taken into consideration before you purchase a carport for your vehicle. The following is some information on carports that you can use the next time you are in the market for a carport.
Design
Carports are temporary structures that are very similar to tents. This means that there are several options available when it comes to the color, size, and design of carports that are available in the market. From classic canopy and fabric carports to modern carports sporting aluminum and metal frames, there are many options to choose from for the modern carport purchaser.
When it comes to the design you are going to find quite a few options from which to choose for the carport. But, before choosing a design, it’s important to first figure out what you want the carport for and the type of vehicle that’s going to be parked in it. This will get you a better idea of which design to choose for your carport.
For instance, those who are looking for a temporary fix or plan on moving tend to go with the classic vinyl and fabric carport that’s easy to set up and take down when needed. On the other hand, those who are looking for a more permanent solution for their parking woes tend to opt for the aluminum carports which are sturdier and are more resilient when exposed to the elements.
Furthermore, carports that feature a strong roof made of aluminum or some other material have a better chance of protecting your car from extreme weather, rain, and hail storms. You can also choose to get enclosed weatherproof carports that provide even further protection during the winter months.
Because of the carport’s design, it can also be used to keep your lawn maintenance equipment and garden furniture safe when not in use. Before you get yourself a carport, it is important to first be certain of the main purpose of the carport.
Assembling the Carport
Since for most people, carports are seen as a temporary or mid-term solution to their parking problems, it is important to make sure you get one that isn’t too complicated to set up or difficult to take down. One of the factors to consider when purchasing a carport is the amount of time it takes to assemble and get the tent up. For instance, you might want to use the carport for the weekend you spend at the lake, or for setting it up in the backyard or some other location to party with friends.
This means the carport you choose needs to be simple and easy to set up within a short period of time without the need for any expensive tools or hardware. To make sure you are not inconvenienced by a carport that’s too complicated it's best to choose one that’s easy to set up, take down, store, or relocated. This is where lightweight, yet durable material and a straightforward frame will be your best bet.
Durability of Materials
Another extremely important factor to consider when purchasing a carport is the weather and geographical location where you are living. This is very important since the whole idea of investing in a carport is to make sure your car is kept safe from the elements. This is not going to be possible if you do not take into consideration the climate of the area where you live and what type of material should the canopy be made of to ensure that your car remains protected even during extreme temperatures.
For instance, those who live in warm climates such as Texas normally get carports that consist of a steel frame that holds up a vinyl or nylon fabric canopy to protect their car against the rays of the sun. On the other hand, those who live in North Dakota or some other state where there’s plenty of snowfall usually tend to focus more on the snow load rating of the canopy.
Those who are looking forward to using the carport for the occasional party or to be used once or twice a year tend to go with carports with fabric canopies, while those who are going to be using it on a more permanent basis will go for carports that have harder canopies that offer more durability.
Carport Kits FAQs
What is the size range of carport kits?
Carport kits come in a wide range of sizes, from single-car to triple-car or even larger sizes. The size you need will depend on the type and number of vehicles you want to shelter.
Do carport kits require permits or licenses to install?
Depending on where you live, you may need a permit or license to install a carport kit. Check with your local building department to see what permits or licenses are required in your area.
How long does it take to assemble a carport kit?
Depending on your level of experience, assembling a carport kit can take anywhere from a few hours to a full day. Follow the instructions carefully and have the necessary tools on hand to make the process go smoothly.
What kind of foundation or base do I need for a carport kit?
Your carport kit will require a solid foundation or base to anchor it properly. This can be a concrete pad, a gravel bed, or even a wood deck. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for recommended foundation options.
Are carport kits easy to dismantle or move?
Depending on the design and materials used, carport kits can be dismantled and moved to a new location if needed. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to properly disassemble the kit without damage.
Conclusion
When it comes to protecting your vehicle from the elements, investing in a high-quality carport kit is essential. From design and durability to protection and versatility, there are many factors to consider when choosing the best carport kit to suit your needs.
From the above 6 best carport kits, here are the top three expert recommendations:
The Abba Patio 10 x 20 ft. Heavy-Duty Carport with Sidewalls is an ideal option for those seeking versatility and ample space for larger vehicles. Its sturdy build, easy assembly, and added sidewalls make it a top choice for users.
For those who prioritize UV protection and durability, the Palram – Canopia Arcadia 6400 Carport is a good option. With a sleek design, unbreakable roof panels, and rust-resistant frames, this carport is built to last.
Lastly, the King Canopy HC1020PC Hercules 10 by 20 Ft. Carport is the right choice for users looking for wind resistance and easy assembly. Its patented cover design, multi-purpose use, and sturdy construction make this carport a reliable option for vehicle protection.
Ultimately, the best carport kit for you will depend on your specific needs, priorities, and budget. By researching and comparing various options, you can make an informed decision that will provide reliable, long-lasting protection for your vehicle for years to come.
Can you hang a shower curtain in your bathroom without a premium quality shower curtain rod? Of course not!
Hence, this bathroom fixture is a must-have, especially if you wish to enhance the aesthetic appeal of your shower or tub area. However, choosing the best option from a vast list of styles and finishes can be quite challenging.
This is because the requirement for each tub or shower is different. So, what should you do? Well, first things first, let go of the stress and confusion.
After extensive research, we have handpicked the 10 best shower curtain rods of 2023 for you to consider.
In this guide, we have provided detailed reviews for each of our recommendations, along with their pros and cons, to help your decision-making. Furthermore, the buyer’s guide included at the end of this article will help you make an informed purchase.
So, without further ado, let’s dive in.
Best Shower Curtain Rods
Here's the list of the 10 best shower curtain rods of 2023, carefully selected to meet your bathroom needs and elevate the overall look of your shower or tub area.
First up on our list, we have this innovative curved shower rod from Zenna Home, an everyday living brand dealing with products that can transform your bathroom, while improving its utility. That being said, the curtain rod is a perfect combination of quality and functionality, available at an affordable price.
Enhance Shower Space: The Zenna Home curved shower curtain...
Fits Most Showers: Adjustable curved tension shower curtain...
Why Did We Like It?
For us, the highlight of this shower rod was its innovative curved design, which not only enhances the decor of your bathroom but also increases the elbow room. Having said that, we found this unit easy to install, thanks to its exclusive TwistTight technology.
All you need to do is extend the rod to fit the required space. And being easily adjustable, this is relatively easy and quick to do with no tools, cutting, or drilling, whatsoever. Once you find a suitable fit, twist it, so that the tension mount holds it firmly in place.
That’s not all; as you know, unlike steel, aluminum never rusts. For this reason, the Zenna Home curtain rods are made from aluminum. In fact, they have been tested and proven to outlast other shower rods when it comes to rusting. So, rest assured that this shower rod will look beautiful and offer superior performance for years to come.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The Zenna Home Shower Curtain Rod is definitely worth the investment, primarily because of its easy installation and rust-resistant construction. However, we wouldn’t suggest this rod for a freestanding shower or tub because it clips to both walls.
Pros
Rust-free, aluminum construction
TwistTight technology for easy installation
Easily adjustable
Curved and sleek design
Durable and long-lasting
Cons
Not suitable for freestanding showers or tubs
Material: Aluminum | Type: Curved | Adjustable Length: Yes | Installation Method: Tension Mount | Rust-Resistant: Yes | Maximum Weight Capacity: Up to 30 lbs
Dedicated to manufacturing superior quality stainless steel wares for bathrooms and kitchens, Briofox has managed to build its name in the industry. On that note, we’d like to introduce you to this innovative, shiny, and rust-resistant shower rod from the brand.
Unlike standard tension rods, the Briofox curtain rod is designed to overcome the common issue of slipping down the tile walls. For this, it comes with two large plates on each end, along with spring tension. Also, being robust and strong, it can hold a maximum of 30 pounds, making it a viable choice for most showers.
Furthermore, the rod is made using 304 stainless steel, featuring a premium mirror-like finish. As a result, it shines, adding a touch of elegance to your bathroom decor. Not only that, but the unit is also resistant to rust and corrosion. In fact, it comes with a guarantee of not rusting for up to 5 years.
So, you need not worry about replacing it anytime soon. What’s more? Well, the Biofox shower curtain comes with various finish options to choose from. From stainless steel to bronze, buy a unit that matches your bathroom design and decor.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Unlike our previous recommendation, the length of this curtain rod from Briofox is not easily adjustable. It is only available in a standard shower length. So, we’d not recommend this to those with an extremely large or small tub or shower. However, it serves as a valuable option for most consumers.
Pros
Can be installed in less than 3 minutes
Guaranteed rust-proof for 5 years
Smooth and shiny surface
Can be easily relocated
Never falls down
Cons
Not adjustable
Material: Stainless Steel | Type: Straight | Adjustable Length: Yes | Installation Method: Tension Mount | Rust-Resistant: Yes | Maximum Weight Capacity: Up to 30 lbs
Launched by Amazon in 2009 to primarily sell electronic accessories, AmazonBasics has now reached a broader consumer base with its expanding, diverse product lines. Having said that, it has managed to innovate its line of bathroom supplies with this tension shower curtain rod, which is affordable and extremely easy to install.
Spring-pull tension curtain rod for showers, windows, closet...
Durable, lightweight metal with a Nickel finish
Why Did We Like It?
Hanging a shower curtain is a lot easier, thanks to this adjustable curtain rod from AmazonBasics. We were able to install it easily and quickly without having to drill the wall or use tools.
After choosing the preferred size from the available list of options, hold the rod in both hands to expand it by twisting both sides clockwise and anti-clockwise. Continue this until it’s longer than its opening. Once you achieve the desired length, pull it back to create tension and slide it into place, ensuring a tight fit.
You won’t have to worry about it falling or slipping down. The rod will securely and reliably stay in place over the years. In fact, it does not limit itself to providing utility only in bathrooms and showers. The versatile unit can also be used in other areas of your house to hang blackout and privacy curtains in windows and doorways.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The AmazonBasics tension shower rod is an attractive and affordable unit that is capable of enhancing your bathroom decor. However, we weren’t that impressed with its quality. In fact, it is quite prone to rust, which in turn, may reduce its overall longevity.
Pros
Consistent tension for secure placement
Versatile hanging options
Sleek and modern design
Easy and quick installation
Cons
Poor quality
Material: Metal | Type: Straight | Adjustable Length: Yes | Installation Method: Tension Mount | Rust-Resistant: Yes | Maximum Weight Capacity: Up to 20 lbs
Kingston Brass, a brand known for its creatively crafted, premium quality, and cost-effective bathroom and kitchen sanitary fittings, comes forth with the CCD2171 shower curtain rod. Being highly durable, you can rest assured that this unit from the brand will most definitely ensure exceptional performance for the generations to come.
The double-curved design is what prompted us to buy the Kingston Brass CCD2171 from the get-go. It not only enhances the modern aesthetics of your bathroom but also offers extra space for your convenience. Confused? Well, thanks to its unique design, the unit comes with a second rod, which allows you to hang or dry towels and other accessories.
Moving on to its build, the shower rod features a solid 1” OD 201 stainless steel construction. This makes it resistant to rust and corrosion, making it perfect for the long haul. In fact, it is also less likely to cause leakages, so you need not worry.
It doesn’t end there. This particular bathroom fixture from Kingston Brass offers a wide range of finishes for you to consider. From polished chrome to oil-rubbed bronze, you can choose a style based on the decor of your bathroom.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Despite being equipped with all the required mounting hardware, flanges, and instructions, we found the Kingston Brass CCD2171 comparatively tricky to install. In fact, unlike the previous options on our list, you will require power tools and screws for its installation. So, this may be challenging and time-consuming, especially for tile walls.
Pros
Makes the shower area more spacious
Offers extra space for hanging towels
Mounting hardware and decorative flanges included
Durable and rust-resistant
Cons
Installation is not easy
Material: Metal | Type: Curved | Adjustable Length: No | Installation Method: Screw Mount | Rust-Resistant: Yes | Maximum Weight Capacity: Up to 25 lbs
The CSR2172BN Single Curved Curtain Rod from Moen’s extensive line of kitchen and bathroom fixtures offers exceptional functionality. Backed by a limited lifetime warranty from the brand, it serves as a reliable option that will ensure a hassle-free and comfortable showering experience throughout the years.
EASY-INSTALLATION: No drilling required for this curved...
ADJUSTABLE CURTAIN ROD: Sized to securely fit 6 feet (72...
Why Did We Like It?
The most impressive feature of the Moen CSR2172BN is its stunning curved design that can complement any bathroom decor. Its versatile look is further enhanced by the warm brushed nickel or chrome finish. Apart from this, the unit comes with decorative covers to add a stylish element to it, while concealing the mounting hardware.
Having said that, the mounting hardware makes its installation significantly easy. In fact, you can adjust the length of the shower rod to fit a 5’ tub. This means that there will be no cutting or drilling required, even though you get complete customization control. Pretty convenient, right?
Well, that’s not all. The single curved design of this curtain rod from Moen ensures extra elbow room in the bathroom, keeping the curtain at a suitable distance from the shower. In other words, you will be able to achieve the comfortable showering experience that you’ve always desired.
What Could’ve Been Better?
We weren’t quite impressed with the overall quality of the Moen CSR2172BN. In fact, it is prone to falling down, thereby leaving dents if the curtain is a bit heavyweight. But this won’t be a significant issue, provided it’s installed correctly and securely.
Pros
Backed by Moen’s lifetime guarantee
Made of stainless steel for durability
Corrosion-resistant finishes
Easy to install
Versatile looks complement any bathroom design
Cons
Quality control issues
May fall down
Material: Aluminum | Type: Straight | Adjustable Length: Yes | Installation Method: Screw Mount | Rust-Resistant: Yes | Maximum Weight Capacity: Up to 30 lbs
By now, you must be aware of Zenna Home, a brand dedicated to upgrading your shower instantly with its vast line of NeverRust shower rods. For this reason, we bring you the Zenna Home E36602BN, which features a dual rod design to improve its utility in terms of functionality and space.
YOUR CHOICE OF EASY TENSION-MOUNT OR PERMANENT SCREW-MOUNT...
Why Did We Like It?
If you are looking for a lightweight yet robust and strong curtain rod for hanging your standard curtains and liners, then the Zenna Home E36602BN is your best bet. It can be adjusted to fit most showers or tub openings ranging between 44 to 72 inches. But that’s not all.
The rod comes with tension mounting hardware for tool-free installation, preventing damage to walls. Not just that, but you can also opt for a permanent and secure installation using the included screws and hardware. And from experience, we can assure you that this is quick and easy to do, provided you follow the given instructions.
Moving on, the unit is constructed using aluminum to ensure long-lasting functionality. In fact, it comes with a NeverRust guarantee for life, making it a durable option to consider. Furthermore, it features a dual rod design, offering extra space for optimal usage. You can use one rod for hanging curtains and the other for liners and towels.
What Could’ve Been Better?
We found the tension lock adjustment system of the unit to be its weak point. It was locked extremely tight, and we faced issues adjusting its length according to the shower or tub opening. That being said, once you get past this, its overall installation is quick and easy, so you need not worry.
Pros
Lightweight and robust
Guaranteed rust-resistance for life
Double rod design
Tool-free installation
Cons
Tension lock adjustment
Material: Aluminum | Type: Straight | Adjustable Length: Yes | Installation Method: Tension Mount | Rust-Resistant: Yes | Maximum Weight Capacity: Up to 30 lbs
Coming to another noteworthy mention on our list, the L-corner shower rod from Barclay is ideal for freestanding tubs and clawfoot tubs. Designed for two-sided shower enclosures, the unit can be fastened to your bathroom walls and ceiling for additional support.
This Barclay Shower Rod stands out from the rest, thanks to its L-shaped design, which allows you to attach its two sides to your bathroom walls. Not just that, but it can be fastened to a ceiling using the pillar that reaches down near the rod’s curved right angle.
The ceiling pillar, in turn, ensures extra support, safeguarding the unit from falling after the curtain is hung. What’s more? Well, the rod features a 1” solid brass tubing that comes with a chrome finish. In other words, it’s not only robust and durable but also smooth and seamless to look at.
You can install the rod with ease using the two included wall mounts. In fact, the widened flanges will be able to support both the heavyweights of the rod and curtain. Moreover, you can decide the height and location of installation by cutting the rod to size, ensuring a perfect fit.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The Barclay shower rod is a suitable choice for those with standalone tubs and showers. However, there is a lot of cutting and drilling required for its installation. And this may not be easy to do alone. Therefore, you will need a professional to help you measure and cut with precision for its easy setup.
Pros
Easily adjustable fit
Robust and durable
Seamless appearance
Secure installation
Cons
Cutting and drilling required for installation
Material: Chrome | Type: L-Type | Adjustable Length: No | Installation Method: Screw Mount | Rust-Resistant: Yes | Maximum Weight Capacity: Up to 25 lbs
ALLZONE, a premium supplier of spring load tension rods, comes forward with this sturdy and versatile shower window curtain rod that will never rust. Available in a variety of adjustable sizes, you can choose a variant that best meets your requirements.
[ NON-SLIP DESIGN] - This tension shower curtain rod is...
[ HEAVY DUTY ] - With the 1 inch large Diameter rod, the max...
Why Did We Like It?
Thanks to the new patent technology, the ALLZONE Curtain Rod comes with a unique button feature that locks it in position after installation. Hence, it will never fall, ensuring 100% safety at all times.
In fact, we were quite impressed by its strength. Being a heavy-duty rod, it can easily hold a heavy curtain, weighing up to 20 lbs. Not only this, but you can also use it as a rack for drying clothes or a room divider. Its versatility doesn’t just end here.
The unit can be installed with ease on both rough and smooth surfaces, including wallpaper walls, wooden frames, tile walls, etc. You won’t even have to worry about scratches or damage to the surface since it comes with a non-slip foot.
Moreover, the rod can be set up within minutes without tools. All you need to do is adjust its length by pulling and extending and then lock it into place.
What Could’ve Been Better?
In our opinion, amateurs may find it a tad challenging to understand how the push button works. This is because the instructions provided in the manual are not clear and well-written. So, in order to prevent the button from breaking, we’d suggest you spend a few minutes knowing about the technology.
Pros
Suitable for all wall types
Easy and quick to set up
Doesn’t fall down
Can hold up to 20 lbs weight
Cons
Instructions are not easy to understand
Material: Stainless Steel | Type: Straight | Adjustable Length: Yes | Installation Method: Tension Mount | Rust-Resistant: Yes | Maximum Weight Capacity: Up to 30 lbs
My PlumbingStuff is a brand you can always rely on. Why? Well, it has managed to deliver trusted products to meet your home’s DIY needs. This is why we decided to introduce you to the RX2300A Shower Curtain Rod Kit from the brand, which includes all the essentials required for its secure installation.
CLAWFOOT TUB & SHOWER CURTAIN ROD COMBO: The My...
3 ⅜-INCH CENTER-DIVERTER TUB FAUCET: The B3100 3 ⅜-inch...
Why Did We Like It?
In our opinion, My PlumbingStuff RX2300A is worth the investment despite being a bit expensive. This is because the kit is equipped with all the accessories required for setting up the rod. From a 3 3/8-inch center diverter faucet to a showerhead, it includes the basic essentials that will ensure an enjoyable showering experience.
You can install the rod with ease using the wall and ceiling-support brackets. In fact, they can be cut to ensure a secure and seamless fit. Apart from this, we loved the D-style design of the unit since it allows you to hang the curtain around your tub to gain complete privacy from all sides.
Furthermore, all the components of the shower set, including the clawfoot bathtub faucet and shower head are made using high-quality materials, ensuring durability.
Having said that, the shower rod is available in two finishes to choose from - chrome-plated brass and chrome-plated aluminum. Both these options ensure resistance to corrosion and rust for long-term use.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Using this kit, you can easily convert your clawfoot tub into a modern and stylish shower. However, the complete assembly of the faucet, showerhead, and curtain rod is quite cumbersome. Also, you will need a professional plumber for the fittings.
Pros
Complete kit of plumbing fittings
High-quality and durable
Includes wall and ceiling brackets
D-style design for complete privacy
Cons
Professional plumber is required for the installation
Material: Aluminum | Type: Rectangular | Adjustable Length: Yes | Installation Method: Screw Mount | Rust-Resistant: Yes | Maximum Weight Capacity: Up to 25 lbs
As you already know, Moen offers a wide range of kitchen and bathroom faucets, shower fixtures, and accessories to add comfort and a sense of style to your home. And the CSR2167BL Curved Shower Rod from the brand does that, and much more. So, why don’t we dig a little deeper?
BOLD STATEMENT: Matte Black finish adds a touch of...
STANDARD SIZE: Shower rod sized to securely fit 5 ft. tub
Why Did We Like It?
To our delight, the Moen CSR2167BL comes in three different contemporary finishes to choose from, including matte black, chrome and brushed nickel. That being said, each of these variants adds a touch of elegance and sophistication to your bathroom decor, allowing you to make a bold statement at home.
Apart from this, it includes accessories like pivoting flanges to help you install it with ease. In fact, rest assured you won’t be facing any hassle while setting it up as it fits most standard shower sizes.
Not only this, but its curved design manages to provide extra space within the shower enclosure. And in case you need to adjust the length, it offers provision for cutting. Furthermore, the unit is backed by Moen’s lifetime warranty, so it is a reliable investment built to last for years to come.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Although the rod is significantly easy to install on the wall, you may not be able to do it by yourself. Tools such as a power drill are required to screw it into position. Apart from this, you will need accessories like tape, a saw, and a spirit level, to name just a few.
Pros
Contemporary design
Fits most shower sizes
Moen’s lifetime warranty
Curved design offers more space
Cons
Tools and accessories needed for setting up
Material: Aluminum | Type: Curved | Adjustable Length: Yes | Installation Method: Screw Mount | Rust-Resistant: Yes | Maximum Weight Capacity: Up to 30 lbs
Choosing the best shower rod from a list of excellent choices may sound simple, but it isn’t. You need to pick a rod that suits your bathroom decor and meets your requirements. For this, it is important to consider a few critical factors while making a choice. What are these factors? Read on to know the answer…
Shape
By now, you must know that shower curtain rods are available in various shapes and styles. So, it is essential to choose a shape based on the position of your shower or bathtub.
For instance, an L-shaped rod is ideal if your tub is located in a corner. On the other hand, freestanding showers and bathtubs will require spiral or D-shaped shower rods.
What’s more? Curved rods offer extra room for a more comfortable showering experience, while double rods provide additional space. So, you may use the second rod for hanging towels and liners.
Style and Finish
Apart from the shape, make sure the design and style of the unit match that of your bathroom. Having said that, a contemporary shower rod, featuring a chrome, black matte, or nickel finish will help enhance the aesthetic appeal of the bathroom decor. Hence, going for a good-looking shower rod is always a win-win!
Installation
For amateurs with no experience installing shower rods, we’d suggest you call for a plumber in case the unit requires cutting and drilling for its setup. That being said, it’s always better to opt for a comparatively easy rod to install without tools.
In fact, these units are suitable for those who don’t wish to modify their walls and ceilings by drilling holes. Furthermore, ensure that the rod you buy comes with mounting flanges for a convenient setup.
Many units also include ceiling supports, which are strong enough to withstand the weight of curtains and the rod. Hence, if you wish to make sure that the unit remains sturdy and fall-resistant, then this is something you wouldn’t want to miss out on.
Shower Curtain Rods FAQ's
What types of shower curtain rods are available?
There are several types of shower curtain rods available, including straight rods, curved rods, tension rods, double rods, and corner rods.
How do I choose the right size shower curtain rod?
Measure the width of your shower area to determine the appropriate size. Adjustable rods are versatile and can fit a range of sizes, while custom-sized rods may be needed for specific shower dimensions.
Can I use a shower curtain rod for a bathtub?
Yes, shower curtain rods can be used for both showers and bathtubs. Make sure to choose a rod that fits the width of your bathtub and consider the height of the curtain to ensure proper coverage.
Can I use a shower curtain rod for heavy curtains?
It’s recommended to choose a sturdy and durable rod if you plan to hang heavy curtains. Look for rods specifically designed to handle the weight of heavier materials.
Conclusion
Installing a shower curtain rod in your bathroom will help you hang shower curtains with ease. However, it is essential to choose an ideal option that will not collapse. Each of the recommendations in this guide was carefully selected, keeping several factors in mind.
On that note, we come to the end of our informative and review-based guide. And we hope that the buyer’s guide helped you gain the required insight for buying the ideal shower curtain rod for your bathroom.
Do you work on a farm or a ranch? If so, you will know how muddy or snowy the surroundings can get.
It can take hours to clean the mud or snow off your floors, and that is extremely exhausting. But we have a brilliant solution to all of those woes.
A boot scraper will be the perfect choice to keep mud and gunk out of the house. It has been around for ages, but today it is way more advanced and can clean your boots without leaving any scratches.
But selecting one from among an umpteen number of options can be quite challenging. To help with the decision-making, we have curated a list of the 13 best boot scrapers available today. Also, we have a buyer's guide that will help you choose the one that fits your needs.
So, without further ado, let's dig in!
Best Boot Scrapers
Here's the list of the 13 best boot scrapers of 2023, designed to keep your floors clean from mud and snow while ensuring no scratches on your boots - so let's dig in!
The product which tops this list with its brilliant cleaning features is the Carlisle 4042414 Commercial Boot 'N Shoe Brush Scraper. Paired with specially designed brushes and a sturdy frame, this will make sure you leave the dirt behind every time you enter the house.
Steel scraper below the brushes assists in the removal of...
Chrome Steel tube frame can be securely bolted to the floor...
Why Did We Like It?
To begin with, this product consists of 2 brushes with blue polypropylene bristles. These can tackle all kinds of dirt, including snow, manure, and grass. We placed one outside our doors as well as the barn door, and that saved us from a lot of cleaning.
The brushes are attached to a chrome-plated steel frame. This frame is very sturdy and will hold the brushes steadily while being able to take a lot of weight. It is also resistant to corrosion and daily wear and tear. And if it does get dirty, all you need to do is wipe it clean.
Additionally, to prevent moisture from affecting the steel, there are plastic blocks on both sides. This prevents water from damaging it and makes sure that the body is not affected. We found that it can easily survive rain and snow if you leave it outside.
What Could've Been Better?
Although the scraper worked perfectly for us, we discovered that it might be slightly problematic for short people. If your height is less than 5 feet 5 inches, there's a high chance that the mud might splatter across your face as you try to remove it. We're trying to create a splash guard ourselves, and we would suggest you do it too.
Pros
Steel scrapers help remove bigger debris
Plastic block with bristles is non-absorbent
FDA compliant
Cons
Not suitable for very short individuals
Material: Plastic | Dimensions: 12" x 16" x 4" | Weight: 2.4 pounds | Features and Benefits: Dual brushes, durable construction, rust-resistant
Known for its subtle design and effectiveness, the Rubber-Cal "Herringbone" Coir Boot Scraper Brush is one of the favorites for many customers. It complements the entrance and keeps the house free from dust and debris, which the boots tend to bring in.
Subtle design complements entryway or mud room decor
Shake, brush or vacuum shoe scrapers for easy cleaning
Why Did We Like It?
This is a product built to last. It uses tough and resistant coir to ensure every bit of mud and gunk is removed from the boots. It has a wire frame to keep the coir in place and deal with high foot traffic.
In most cases, this unit will be placed outdoors just before the entrance. So, it will be facing different weather conditions. But do not worry at all! It shows a very high resistance to UV rays and moisture. Adding to it, the material would not let molds form on the surface even when it gets damp.
Besides, the product comes with excellent scraping potential. With its highly effective angled pattern, it reaches the tough spots and grooves in the boots' soles and cleans thoroughly.
Furthermore, the scraper is made of natural materials, making it safe for the environment. It is sourced from coconuts to make the tough bristles.
What Could've Been Better?
Although the unit itself worked exceptionally well, we had to place it beside a wall for support. Whenever you stand on it, you have to do so with both feet, which may cause a loss of balance. Now that you know about this, make sure there is some form of support besides it.
Pros
Weighs only 2.3 pounds
Easy to clean
Known for its attractive design
Made from husks of coconut
Cons
Needs external support to maintain balance
Material: Coir, Rubber | Dimensions: 2.5" x 12" x 13" | Weight: 5 pounds | Features and Benefits: Natural coir bristles, a durable rubber backing, eco-friendly
Ranking 3rd on this list is the Rhino Bilt Folding Boot Scraper, which is well known for its sturdy body. This is one of the best quality scrapers available today and is also quite affordable. We loved the scrubber scraper and cleaner combination that it offered.
First of all, this unit is 100% resistant to nearly all weather conditions. We have been leaving it outside, and it has been through some heavy rain, but there have been no signs of rust on the body. It can truly stand against extreme weather conditions, thanks to the powder-coated steel used to make it.
Besides, the body consists of a steel frame along with firm wood, which adds to the sturdiness. It also has screws that let you fix it to any kind of surface. The mounting process is pretty simple, and you would not need professional help for it.
Also, the brushes which come with it are made of plastic fiber. These do not come off even after applying pressure while cleaning because the material is very strong.
Additionally, there is a folding plate on both sides of the product. These make it easy for you to store when not in use, as the size gets reduced on folding.
What Could've Been Better?
We found one major drawback here. People with bigger foot sizes will not be able to use this scraper as it is made for small to medium-sized feet. Bigger boots are wide, while this provides a narrow area that will not fit them. So, make it a point to check the width of your boots before buying this scraper.
Pros
Combination of scrubber, scraper, and cleaner
Resists moisture and rust
4 pre-drilled holes for easier mounting
Corrugated composite bristle tips
Easy to install
Cons
Very narrow
Material: Wood, Plastic, Steel | Dimensions: 9.92" x 6.57" x 4.72" | Weight: 2.9 pounds | Features and Benefits: Foldable, compact design, rust-resistant, detachable brushes
Are you worried about the surface of the boots being scratched by rough bristles? Fret no more as the Scrusher - Original Scrusher Boot and Shoe Cleaner has a solution to this. It has soft bristles on each side, which will clean the top of the shoes with great care without leaving any marks.
THE ULTIMATE BOOT CLEANER - Get rid of mud and grime without...
EFFICIENT CLEANING SOLUTION - Say goodbye to dirty floors in...
Why Did We Like It?
We will begin with the unique design that this product boasts of. It has sturdy maple wood on both sides to which the bristles are attached. This will not only clean your shoes thoroughly but will also make sure that the brushes stay in place for years to come.
Furthermore, from mud and grass strands to snow and dirt, this scraper works well with all materials. To make the cleaning process efficient, there are strong and firm bristles below, which brush the sole properly.
Also, if you work in the barn very often, you would be using the unit almost every day. With greater usage, the brushes might lose their scrubbing power. But they can be easily replaced, and you will not need to buy another.
To top it all, this product is made to last and has a 5-year warranty. We have been using it for a year now, and there are no visible signs of damage from rough usage.
What Could've Been Better?
Although we found no signs of wear and tear, the product is not very resistant to rust. It is described to be weather resistant, but we found that this is not the case. If you keep it in the snow, you will find rusted patches. To escape this, we would suggest that you coat it with Rustoleum for protection.
Pros
Sturdy wood to hold bristles in place
Brushes can be replaced when needed
Provides a clean sweep
Comes with a 5-year warranty
Cons
Prone to rusting
Material: Steel, Hard Maple | Dimensions: 9.75" x 6.5" x 5.25" | Weight: 4 pounds | Features and Benefits: Made in the USA, durable construction, portable, effective in cleaning all types of footwear
If you are looking for a versatile product that will take care of every kind of dirt with ease, the JobSite Original Boot Scrubber is a remarkable choice. It cleans sawdust, snow, mud as well as grass and manure to provide you with clean boots every time.
Mounting Required: Mount to a variety of surfaces with...
Why Did We Like It?
This product is truly built to last. A common problem that occurs with most of its peers is that they are prone to rust or rot. Now, there is a big chance that it will be exposed to extreme hot and cold temperatures, so the company has made the sides with sturdy plastic.
Wood is generally used here, but it rots after a few years. On the other hand, plastic will never rot, and the high-density composite molded sides provide better stability and ease of usage.
Apart from this, the brushes are made to handle the toughest of materials. They are made to be long-lasting and strong, and you do not need to worry about them coming off.
Adding to this are the two side guards. These help in catching dirt and gunk every time you scrub the soles. It even prevents mud from flying around to a large extent.
What Could've Been Better?
The frame is not as sturdy as we would have wanted it to be. It may not be able to hold up against too much pressure. This is something that disappointed us considering how efficiently the rest of it works.
Pros
4 screws for easy mounting
Can be used in all weather conditions
Long-lasting, strong bristle brushes
Non-rotting, non-cracking material
Cons
The frame is not that sturdy
Material: Heavy-duty Plastic | Dimensions: 9.25" x 6.5" x 4.75" | Weight: 2.35 pounds | Features and Benefits: All-weather construction, durable bristles, portable
If you are looking for a scraper to take care of industrial-level boot cleaning, we have an incredible option for you. The Mr. Boot Cleaner Scraper brush will make sure you have spotless boots after working in mud and gunk. It can easily be mounted on all kinds of floors, including hardwood.
EASY MOUNTING: Our shoe cleaning brush for cleaning shoes or...
USE INDOORS OR OUTDOORS: Shoe brush cleaner outdoor has...
Why Did We Like It?
First of all, this boot brush has a perfect set of brush heads, making it convenient to reach the toughest parts of the sole with ease. Getting mud and snow out from deep grooves is a difficult task indeed. But it shows remarkable capabilities when it comes to cleaning without scratching the surface of the boots.
To achieve this, the unit has a metal body with premium bristles. The metal makes sure that its frame is firm while the tough bristles take out the gunk. It also has reinforced sides with softer brushes that clean the sides of the boots efficiently.
Besides this, the boot scraper weighs less at 2.55 pounds and will not be a hindrance while transporting it. With a host of amazing features and an affordable price tag, this is a great choice to make.
What Could've Been Better?
Although we appreciated the compact size of this scraper, we wish it was a little broader. It will work well with smaller foot sizes, but with broad boots, this can be a problem. So, make sure that you keep this into consideration before purchasing one.
Pros
Can be mounted on all kinds of floors
Weighs only 2.55 pounds
Mounting hardware included
Can be kept indoors as well as outdoors
Cons
Will not fit wide boots
Material: Heavy-duty Rubber, Coir | Dimensions: 16" x 10" x 2.5" | Weight: 3.2 pounds | Features and Benefits: Durable construction, all-weather use, easy to clean, effective in cleaning all types of footwear
Do you own a commercial barn and want to keep your house free from mud and gunk every time someone walks in from the yard? The Rhino Bilt Boot Scraper, Deluxe Boot Scraper, will come to your rescue. With a solid design and a wide area to place your foot, this is a brilliant product to own and work with.
Our house has never looked cleaner before, thanks to this remarkable product. It fits well outdoors and can be placed just at the entrance. You can mount it with the help of pre-drilled holes and screws provided with the pack. Once it is in place, your main job is done.
Though there are wooden panels on both sides that have the bristles attached to it, it is still weather resistant. The wood is very sturdy and will hold against extreme weather conditions. The body is also powder-coated to prevent rusting and to enable water droplets to fall off.
We also admired the versatility that it offered. Place it anywhere from farms and ranches to beach homes and hunting camps. It is lightweight and easily portable while dealing with dirt and dust efficiently.
Along with this, the 5 brush system makes sure every inch of particles is removed from the bottom and sides.
What Could've Been Better?
We felt that the side brushes are too wide apart for people with smaller feet sizes. If you have kids, it may not be able to clean their boots at one go. But the good part is you can adjust the base and sides according to your advantage. So, we would not hold this as a drawback in this case.
Pros
Extra wide for all shoe sizes
Versatile and fit for any location
Powder-coated to prevent rusting
All-in-one scrubber, scraper, and cleaner
Cons
Side brushes are too wide apart
Material: Steel, Wood | Dimensions: 15.5" x 9" x 4.5" | Weight: 6 pounds | Features and Benefits: Durable construction, detachable brushes, easy to clean, all-weather use
Bid messy houses goodbye with the Kole Imports Shoe Boot Cleaning Brush. Place this anywhere from your backdoor, barns, and construction sites or even outside beach homes, and you would not have to spend the better part of the day cleaning anymore! With a durable body to boast of, this brush will make your life so much easier.
Safe for leather, suede, rubber, and fabric materials
Why Did We Like It?
This is one of those basic brushes which will do the job at hand perfectly well. It has 4 brushes, which clean the soles of shoes as well as the sides. The bristles are strong and can get to the inner edges of grooves on your sole.
Additionally, the wooden frame is made to deal with all kinds of weather and will stand firm through it. Bad weather is a problem in many cities, and you cannot be completely prepared for it. With this unit outside your doors, the house will not see any marks of wet mud and snow.
Also, after a night of heavy snowing or once the product is full of dirt, just wash it with water! That will do the trick, and we have not yet used any kind of soap for it.
What Could've Been Better?
Although the product worked well, we had to get additional screws to mount it. The package did not come with screws, and we were not aware of that earlier. So, it took us a while before we finally managed to get them and mount it. Once it was done, we faced no more issues.
Pros
For both indoor and outdoor use
Can clean golf and athletic shoes too
Durable and robust construction
Lightweight and portable
Cons
Screws were missing
Material: Plastic, Nylon | Dimensions: 9.5" x 5" x 4.5" | Weight: 0.55 pounds | Features and Benefits: Compact design, affordable, effective in cleaning all types of footwear
Next up is an attractive product that will add to the aesthetics of the entryway. The Superio Boot And Shoe Scrubber are known to do its work exceptionally well while making sure that the entryway looks nice! It is a perfect cleaning equipment that will do its job leaving you with a dirt-free home.
COME HOME WITH CLEAN SHOES - We all know better than to take...
GORGEOUS WOOD DESIGN - This product may be designed to wipe...
Why Did We Like It?
Leave the mud and gunk outside your house with this brilliant product. Made with natural elements, this product features an attractive wood design with natural bristles that are efficient in removing every bit of sand and snow from your boots.
And that's not all, it is super easy to wash and clean, and you would only need water to do so. We usually clean it and then leave it outside to dry. It dries quickly, and you can use it soon after.
Adding to the convenience, since the scraper brush is so light, you can carry it anywhere with you. We had placed it in the car and would use it before entering the vehicle after camping or hiking. This ensured that the car stayed clean, and we did not have to spend long hours on it.
Also, we have to mention how broad it is, allowing every boot to fit in and scrape the dirt away easily.
What Could've Been Better?
Although the brushes worked very well, we were disappointed to see that some of the bristles started coming off after a year of usage. We are still able to use it but are unsure about how long it will survive. It would be great if we could get replacement brushes.
Pros
Deep cleanses snow, mud, and dirt
Can withstand all weather conditions
Known for versatile usage
Made with durable premium quality wood
Cons
Brushes break off in time
Material: Heavy-duty Plastic | Dimensions: 10" x 6" x 4.5" | Weight: 1.3 pounds | Features and Benefits: All-weather use, durable bristles, easy to clean, affordable
With a flat design and very sturdy construction, the Jobsite Boot Scrubber Flat Mat Scraper Brush is one of the most convenient options to use today. It does not need to be mounted, and you can easily stand on it without losing your balance.
Best Boot Cleaner: As seen on TV, this is the perfect...
Leave The Dirt Outside: The built-in sole and edge brush...
Why Did We Like It?
Be it in front of your doors or inside the car; this freestanding product will help keep your home and vehicles free from dirt and sand always. With a high-density molded plastic body, it stands firmly and can take weight up to 250 lbs without breaking down or bending.
To make sure that you can stand comfortably, the product comes with three non-slip rubber grips. This will help maintain balance while on any kind of surface. We were initially very worried about slipping and falling since it is not mounted, but we ended up completely trusting this one.
Additionally, this unit comes with low-profile brushes. These brushes are the right height for cleaning sides and edges. They are also designed not to scratch the surface of the boots. There are roller bristles also, which enhance the process of cleaning.
Overall this impressed a lot, and for the affordable price that it came for, we could not complain at all.
What Could've Been Better?
The only drawback was that this product took time to get the dirt out. It does work well, but it took us almost 10 minutes to clean both our boots. You might not have that much time in your hands always, and hence this could be slightly disappointing. But for the price it comes in, this is not a dealbreaker.
Pros
Roller bristles for effortless cleaning
Sturdy construction
Three non-slip rubber grips to maintain stability
Does not scratch shoes
Cons
It takes time to clean
Material: Heavy-duty Rubber, Coir | Dimensions: 20" x 15" x 1.5" | Weight: 5 pounds | Features and Benefits: Large size, all-weather use, durable construction, effective in cleaning all types of footwear
Next up is a product that will effortlessly scrape, scrub, and clean to give you absolutely clean boots. Featuring 3 benefits together, we had strong bristle brushes scrubbing the dirt while an edge scraper helped clean the mud from both sides. Many homeowners choose this simply for the number of benefits offered.
HEAVY-DUTY SHOE BRUSH: Easily clean boots and shoes with...
VERSATILE BOOT SCRAPER FOR ALL FOOTWEAR: Features a durable...
Why Did We Like It?
A scraper needs to be sturdy enough to take the weight of whoever is standing on it! With a heavy gauge metal frame, we were sure that this one would not break under pressure.
Accompanying the frame are strong bristle brushes with firm tips to clean all kinds of boots and sneakers. We loved the versatility that is offered in this case. From Wellingtons to cowboy and hunter boots, this will take care of it all.
Not only this, but we also found it very easy to store the product. All you need to do is fold the flaps, and it becomes compact enough to fit anywhere.
To add to the product, we got a free shoe brush, which can be used to further clean off any remaining particles of dust and snow from the boots. We would say it works remarkably well, and the brand has taken every measure to ensure proper cleaning.
What Could've Been Better?
The product works exceptionally well after you manage to assemble it well. When it arrived, the side wings were bolted in the opposite direction of its brushes. We tried to unbolt and turn them over and then attach them again. But they are fixed tightly, and it took us a lot of effort to make a change.
Pros
No mounting required
Folding design adds to the ease of storage
Extra shoe cleaner brush
Works as a scraper, scrubber, and cleaner
Cons
Wings are bolted inwards
Material: Heavy-duty Rubber, Coir | Dimensions: 15.5" x 9" x 4.5" | Weight: 5.8 pounds | Features and Benefits: Durable construction, detachable brushes, all-weather use, easy to clean
Next up is a unique product that is specially designed to meet your cleaning needs. The Cadillac Boot Scrubber Cleaner Shoe Brush combines convenience and reliability and is bound to satisfy you completely. We were very happy with how clean the house was after we brought this home.
To begin with, the unit is made of high-quality materials that are not prone to damage in extreme weather conditions. We live in an area with a lot of snowfall, and you can imagine the amount of cleaning we had to do every time someone stepped in from outside. But with this just outside our entryway, we can finally breathe a sigh of relief.
Another feature that needs to be mentioned is the scrubber and its exceptional capacity of removing dirt even from within the stitching. This is often ignored, but dirt and sand get trapped in between threads too. The brush attempts to remove all of it, improving the longevity of your boots.
Besides, this product is designed to be portable and made with lightweight materials. You can either mount it or use it without installing it. It will still be stable and will be able to take your weight without getting imbalanced.
What Could've Been Better?
The only part that needs improvement would be its wooden sides that hold the bristles. These are rough and unfinished and stick out a little. It will not cause damage, but be careful about letting the sides of your boots touch this. It may lead to scratches.
Pros
Cleans all kinds of footwear
Can be used indoors and outdoors
Weather-resistant and rustproof
Cons
Wood sticks out and is rough
Material: Heavy-duty Rubber, Coir | Dimensions: 15.5" x 9" x 4.5" | Weight: 4 pounds | Features and Benefits: Durable construction, all-weather use, easy to clean, effective in cleaning all types of footwear
Occupying the 13th place is a product we can rely on because of its effective performance. The Ninamar Natural Coir Boot Scraper Door Mat consists of strong fiber, which will deal with the most difficult of dirt with ease. It is also known for its modern design, which will add to the decor of the place.
Strong, Thin Fibers: Strip off caked-on dirt, sand, mud,...
Attractive, Modern Design: Fits any home décor
Why Did We Like It?
If you live with life stock and a barn, you will know how muddy it can get. Also, the black clay on the ground can turn into solid gunk and stick to soles. But this product will make sure that every inch is removed, thanks to the strong coir of this mat.
The coir is made from sustainable, environmentally-friendly coconut fiber, which is very resistant and will not break off. It is also resistant to moisture and dries very quickly.
To add to this, the unit is unaffected by all weather conditions, and you can expect it to survive throughout the year without any issues. The body is supported by a steel frame, which is rustproof. So, you can easily keep it outdoors.
Besides, the mat is also very light and can be kept in cars too. There is no need to mount it, so, it is always portable.
What Could've Been Better?
This product worked excellently for us till it lasted. The lifespan is slightly limited, and our one started falling apart after a year and a half. But we would say it served its purpose well and is totally worth the money that would be paid for it.
Pros
Attractive and modern design
Made from environmentally friendly natural coconut fiber
Easy to clean
Weighs only 2 pounds
Cons
Shorter life span
Material: Natural Coir, Rubber Backing | Dimensions: 16" x 24" x 1.5" | Weight: 5.15 pounds | Features and Benefits: Large size, all-weather use, eco-friendly, durable construction, effective in cleaning
Large size, all-weather use, eco-friendly, durable construction, effective in cleaning
Buying Guide For The Best Boot Scraper
Picking the boot scraper that fits perfectly depends on your cleaning needs. Now that you have gone through the 13 top products, you will know that each one is unique in its own way. Some work well with wet mud or snow while others work better with dry sand.
You must understand the type of dirt you are dealing with and the weather conditions before purchasing. Make a note of the following points that you need to consider.
Type of scrapers
Two types of boot scrapers are popular today. One is the doormat, and another is a scrub brush. Doormats are flat and can be placed both inside as well as outside the house. They come with different properties.
Some are good absorbents and help in cleaning wet mud and gunk while others are hard and grainy. These would work well with dry dirt.
But a doormat would not clean the sides of your boots, which are equally dirty most of the time. For these, you have scrub brushes. Scrub brushes clean the bottom and sides of boots with great efficiency and will leave them in perfect condition to be taken inside the house.
Material Used
The main materials that are used in the making are coir, rubber, and metal. A rubber surface is floor-friendly but will not work well with cleaning out grooves. They do not make any scratches but may not be able to clean perfectly too.
Coir, on the other hand, is one of the most popular materials with its superb capabilities. They are not prone to weather changes and are mold-proof and water-proof. They are also known to be very durable and thus are preferred.
When it comes to bristles, tough plastic bristles are the best as they would also be mildew resistant and can handle tough jobs with ease.
Weather Resistance
This is another vital factor as you would probably be leaving the unit outdoors. Make sure that it is weather resistant and not prone to rusting or decaying of wood. It is best if the metal parts are powder coated. This prevents corrosion as well as rust formation to a great extent.
Also, in case of heavy snowfall, if you are planning to mount this outdoors, the product will be seeing a lot of snow. Hence, you must opt for one which will be able to tackle the weather.
Now, if you reside in a place with moderately hot weather or by the beach, go for a coir brush or doormat. This will clean dry waste easily and prevent the house from having sand everywhere.
Dimensions
You might be thinking a compact product is a better option to purchase as it will be lighter and take up less space while storing. But in this case, being too compact may mean that your boots will not fit in properly. The problem generally occurs with people with boot sizes above size 11.
The boots are wider than the feet and need more space, which many boot scrapers do not have. They will provide you with a narrow space where you will not be able to clean big boots properly. So, check the dimensions and then compare them to your foot size.
Boot Scrapers FAQ's
What are the types of boot scrapers available in the market?
There are several types of boot scrapers available in the market, including standalone boot scrapers, boot scraper mats, and boot brushes.
What materials are used to make boot scrapers?
Boot scrapers can be made from various materials, such as metal, plastic, and wood. The scrapers and bristles can be made from metal, plastic, or natural fibers like coir.
How do I clean my boot scraper?
To clean your boot scraper, remove any debris that has accumulated on the scraper or brush. You can use a brush or hose to clean off the scraper, and then wipe it down with a damp cloth.
Can I use a boot scraper indoors?
Yes, you can use a boot scraper indoors, but you should make sure that it has a tray or mat to catch any debris that falls off the boots.
Where should I place a boot scraper?
A boot scraper should be placed near the entrance of your home or business, ideally on a flat surface like a porch or step.
Can boot scrapers damage my shoes?
Boot scrapers are designed to remove dirt and debris from the bottom of shoes and boots without causing any damage. However, if the scrapers or bristles are too harsh, they may scratch the surface of your shoes.
How often should I replace my boot scraper?
The lifespan of a boot scraper depends on the materials used to make it and the frequency of use. A well-maintained scraper can last for several years, but you may need to replace it if the bristles or scrapers become worn or damaged.
Are boot scrapers environmentally friendly?
Boot scrapers made from natural materials like coir are biodegradable and environmentally friendly. However, those made from synthetic materials like plastic may not be as eco-friendly.
Can I make my own boot scraper?
Yes, you can make your own boot scraper using materials like wood, metal, or plastic. There are many DIY tutorials and plans available online to guide you through the process.
Conclusion
We have reached the end of this detailed guide, and we sincerely hope that you found the boot scraper you were looking for. But in case you haven’t, we will help you a bit more before signing off. So, allow us to tell you about our favorites:
We have seen an increase in the use of pixel art as a method of creating animations.
Many artists in our generation are engaging themselves in this digital art to produce phenomenal creations. As a result, there are many existing as well as upcoming tools to help them out.
Since spotting the right tools can get difficult at times, we have selected 16 of the best programs which are compatible with many operating systems out there.
So if you’re ready to start an amazing pixel art session, take a look at what the best pixel art software can offer you!
Best Pixel Art Software Programs
GIF via steamcommunity.com
Here is the list of the 16 best pixel art programs and software to help you create amazing animations.
Let’s kick off this list with iDraw - a simple, yet very popular pixel art program in the world of pixels.
In it, you’ll find a variety of features including the basic ones such as a customizable palette, drawing, and selection tools. iDraw is very popular among the RPG Maker group. It embraces the 90’s style of creating pixel art or in other words, the JRPG style.
In recent years, it used to be common for people to use pirated copies of iDraw and RPG Maker 2003 in order to create their own customized versions. However, today the RPG Maker 2003 is available for $5 after getting upgraded, which leaves iDraw still openly available for those who want to download it for free.
Although iDraw does not come with many up-to-date features, it still remains a good pick for those who are starting out with pixel art programs. Some may not find this to be in their favor, but it does come in handy if you want to learn the basic and simple concepts of pixel art.
There are also a tonne of video tutorials available online which can help beginners get familiar with the software. It is, in fact, still a very popular choice among pixel artists at the moment. Plus, ’90s pixel art never seems to go out of style as seen in recent movies and video games.
iDraw has been purchased by Autodesk and it is now entitled Autodesk Graphic.
Free to Use: No | Features: Customizable Pallette, Drawing, Selection Tools, & More
Aseprite is another well-known program created for the sole purpose of designing pixel art.
Here’s the deal with using Aseprite - it is available for free if you’re someone who can arrange the program yourself, otherwise you can get the compiled and finished software at $15 (which includes as many modern features as you can think of).
If you’re wondering why it’s a famous software among pixel editors, that’s because Aseprite offers artists alluring creations as well as an easy user interface. It is capable of performing heavy-duty tasks effortlessly.
Let’s have a look at one of its features - onion skinning - which allows users to add frames both above and under the one they are currently creating. This option makes the work of the artist much easier and faster. Moreover, beginners will likely find the timeline easily accessible on their very first use.
It also contains exceptionally good sprite sheet exporting tools which are useful daily materials for game developers.
One other feature that contributes to its popularity is that it can edit fonts into pixels. A lot of game developers find this feature highly desirable.
Since we are on this topic, we also want to include the wrapping tool which is used for tiling, except that it repeats the process. If you’re thinking about a faster way to create roof tiles, Aseprite has got you covered.
Free to Use: Yes (Free Version) | Features: Alluring Creations, User-Friendly, Effortlessly Performs Heavy-Duty Tasks, & More
3. Photoshop - Best for Full Digital Editing Package
Adobe Photoshop is one of the best programs one can use not only for pixel art but also for digital painting and graphic designing. You can say that this software is the total digital editing package.
Because of what it provides, Adobe Photoshop is among the most popular picks when it comes to pixel editors too. It offers users all the important tools needed for creating high-quality pixel animations.
However, keep in mind that Photoshop can be pretty tough to get used to since it contains more features than any other programs intended for pixel art, given that it serves multiple purposes as well. But to make things easier for the absolute beginner, there are numerous online tutorials about designing pixel art to look up.
If your plan includes learning to create more than one type of animation, Adobe Photoshop is the right software for you. Rather than jumping from one program to the other, all your projects can be done on a single platform.
Among many uses, Photoshop is widely known for its many available resources. And the best part is that there are tutorials for almost each and every single one of them. On top of that, you can also find free plugins and scripts to gain more flexibility in using the program.
Knowing how to operate the program can increase your chances of developing games as a career.
Free to Use: Yes (Within Trial Period) | Features: Has All the Important Tools for Pixel Animations, Free Plugins & Scripts
A very similar program to Adobe Photoshop is GIMP. The main difference is that GIMP is available for free download.
Similar to Photoshop, it comes with a lot of tools, resources, and features to create digital art including pixel designs. Here, you’ll find there are effective tools meant for photo editing as well as digital painting.
But unlike Photoshop, GIMP has a friendly user interface that’s customizable, so it is perfect for starters. However, it includes an animation player and a timeline which are pretty much like those of Photoshop.
Since the program is popular with many digital artists out there, it receives a lot of support from creators as well as experienced users who provide video tutorials on YouTube.
Another important aspect to consider is that it saves money for those on a restricted budget who are searching for a complete package.
Free to Use: Yes | Features: User-Friendly Interface, Animation Player, Timeline, & More
The Pixie Engine Editor is available for free download online. It provides all the fundamental tools required for creating pixel art.
It is true that many professional digital artists may not find it to be completely satisfactory when it comes to doing detailed work because of its lack of resources. However, it is well-suited for beginners who are looking forward to learning pixel art without having to pay any fees.
Although you can only create static animations, there are other benefits that come with this program such as a huge collection of colors and it also allows you to save an image after designing.
If you want to learn how to make proper use of this software, they have a separate section on their site in which you can go through the masterpieces of other experienced artists.
It also offers a tune composer for artists who want to develop games so they don’t have to look for this feature elsewhere.
Even the source code comes at no cost and is available on GitHub which you can make use of it as a base to create pixel art.
Free to Use: Yes | Features: Good for Beginners, Huge Collection of Colors, Offers a Tune Composer, & More
Here is an open-source application that can be used to design pixel art either on Linux or Mac.
PikoPixel is a program that you can work effortlessly on as it provides many useful tools and features such as layering, unlimited undos, a customizable canvas, and hotkey-activated panels that pop up.
When you think about PikoPixel, think about a fair substitute for pixel editors that run only on Windows. It comes with demos but because it is simple to operate, you probably won’t be needing them. It works wonderfully with both Linux and Mac.
Starters will find it easy to use because of its basic features even if it lacks modern ones. But we can say that given to the advanced artist, PikoPixel can provide some of the best quality pixel art.
Free to Use: Yes | Features: Layering, Unlimited Undos, Customizable Canvas, Hotkey-Activated Panels, & More
Tile Studio is a program that focuses on one area of graphics designing - creating tiles.
The software is very helpful for game developers who want to create pixel art and full-fledged tile-based games. It has several necessary features such as a bitmap editor which can be used to make tiles and a level editor to design them.
One of the good benefits we get from using Tile Studio is that it is workable with almost any type of programming language. Hence, you have full control over the outcome of the design by using your own code. Because of this, there are many game studios and designers who turn to Tile Studio for their projects. It is available free of cost for Windows.
There are several things you can do with Tile Studio such as importing tiles from other programs and using them for your design. You can also use special effects and numerous drawing tools with the help of the level editor.
Even though Tile Studio does not have as many features as expensive editors do, it still makes creating pixel art pretty easy even for beginners.
When you’re done designing frames, you can export them either as a tile sequence or a sprite sheet.
Tile Studio comes with both easy and advanced tools. However, they also provide detailed demonstrations and tutorials to help speed up the learning process.
Free to Use: Yes | Features: Bitmap Editor, Level Editor, Tiles From Other Programs Can Be Imported, & More
The Lospec Pixel Editor is a new online graphics editor which is meant to make the work easier for its users.
We can say that this program is simple enough for beginners to use and at the same time, will still catch the interest of professionals.
Keeping in mind that the application is relatively new, there are still many features left to be developed. But the good thing is that it already appears promising with its exceptional interface as well as being easily accessible online.
Free to Use: Yes | Features: Simple, Good For Beginners, Great Interface, Accessible Online, & More
GrafX2 is an application for editing bitmap images. It gained inspiration from Amiga Deluxe Paint. Ever since the program’s source code was made available as an open-source project, it has been updated with newer features and used for contemporary machines.
The software is loved by many of its users because it has a great toolset that includes a pixel palette and also a very systematic interface. It offers all the required for starting a drawing project with plenty of cool features such as the “spline” that helps the user achieve accurate curves.
There are also tools such as the “histogram” which guides users on using colors and the “merge” option to arrange colors according to their average shades. It provides an option that allows you to repeat tiling as you wish.
Besides, the program has been around for more than 20 years which makes it very popular in the world of pixel art. Therefore, you won’t find it hard to learn how to use it since there are numerous tutorials on that topic.
GrafX2 has most of the desirable features in designing pixel art. Some of which are special effects and frames. It also allows easy operation so you don’t need to practice to get started with a project.
While some people find the display to be too outdated, others love the vintage looks.
Free to Use: Yes | Features: Pixel Palette, Systematic Interface, Helps Achieve Accurate Curves, Guides in Using Colors, & More
If you are looking for a free and simple drawing app online, check out Pixilart, a digital editor founded in 2013. It does not offer much but it provides cool features for artists who are learning the basic steps of drawing digital animations.
What gets the interest of users is that it hosts contests and provides a solid ground for artists to get together and share their creations.
So if you’re searching for a social platform where pixel artists come together, Pixilart is the right place to be.
This application is very interesting to use since it comes with an advanced interface and includes features that you will normally find on any pixel art software. To name a few of its features, they have an autosave option, dithering, pixel drawing, frame designing, and pixel text animation.
We also like the number of settings it offers which allow users to customize it with any kind of workflow. Therefore, it is suitable for both professionals and beginners.
You can always use the social platform to connect with other artists for help. On top of it, there are video resources to help you out with any issue within the app.
Free to Use: Yes | Features: Simple, Autosave Option, Dithering, Pixel Drawing, Frame Designing, Pixel Text Animation, & More
Piskel is a digital editor program meant solely for making pixel animation.
The program is free for download and at the same time, it is also available online for easy access and usage.
Having an interface that’s clear and understandable makes this software favorable to many users including learners and professionals. It comes with an animation preview that introduces its users to how to use the software.
Of course, it comes with many different features but the cool aspect about it is that it is simple to use and easy to understand.
With Piskel, you can export Sprite sheets, GIF animations or even static images.
The program has limited resources and features for a reason. They want to include only the most common aspects needed for creating professional animations. So if you’re someone who loves minimalism, this is the perfect choice for you.
Free to Use: Yes | Features: Accessible Online, Simple, Good for Learners, Animation Preview, & More
For those in the Windows community who are looking for an alternative to GIMP or Photoshop, here is Paint.NET. It works with all present Windows versions or upcoming ones based on updates.
Unlike its superior alternatives, Paint.NET is a lightweight software that supports basic functions such as image editing which serves more than just designing pixel animation.
They have a community in which many of its users interact and share designs with each other. Here you can also find help to finally get started with your projects. But for experienced users, support is available using plugins.
Even though its range of features is not as wide as those of GIMP or Photoshop, Paint.NET is pretty simple and allows users to work on it easily.
But some of its limitations include not supporting more than one image for editing. Also, it is only compatible with Windows. This is a huge drawback for those using Linux or Mac.
However, keeping aside those setbacks aside, Paint.NET is beginner-friendly and fun to work on.
Free to Use: Yes | Features: Lightweight Software, Simple, Easy to Use, & More
Pyxel Edit is one more popular pixel editor that artists all around the turn to for completing their professional projects.
A free version is available online for users to download but it has limited features which may not be adequate for most experienced users. So, one would usually opt for the paid version that comes at $9 as it is far better and also suits artists on a budget.
The one aspect which grabs an artist’s attention is its wonderful user-friendly interface and the fact that it includes all the basic features one requires to design animations which include the “onion skinning” to help arrange frames systematically.
The most common reason one picks Pyxel Edit is because of its exceptional tools used for creating tile-based art and games.
Pyxel Edit makes creating tile maps an effortless activity. Its tools help speed things up on the workflow. You can also export/import or even convert file types such as JSON and XML to use in engines.
There are many good reviews from game developers as per time is concerned. It is quality software for those who are practicing or taking up a career in designing pixel art.
Free to Use: Yes (Free Version) | Features: User-Friendly Interface, Helps Arrange Frames Systematically, Easy to Create Tile Maps, Export/Import/Convert Different File Types, & More
Many illustrators, digital painters, concept artists, and even cartoonists love Krita because it is a free open-source program that offers more than what is expected.
You can use Krita to create amazing art with the help of a few settings that are available on the application. You’ll find it easy to operate since the program is meant to serve digital painters and artists.
The program is perfect for use if the artist is well-equipped with traditional painting and makes a shift to digital art.
Krita may not include as many features as Photoshop or GIMP do but it contains some tools which are not normally found in other pixel-based programs. For instance, Krita encompassed motion into pixel art in the past few years.
The software will serve you based on your requirements. If a combination of high-resolution animation and pixel artwork is what you’re searching for in a program, then this is the best one yet. Given that it comes at zero cost, you’ll be surprised to find that Krita offers some of the best digital pieces.
A few limitations are not entirely unexpected. For example, the demonstration fails to introduce us to some important aspects of the software. But that does not mean it affects the performance of the application. Besides, there are many tutorials available online to help you out with any problems.
Free to Use: Yes | Features: Easy to Use, High-Resolution Animation & Pixel Artwork, & More
GraphicsGale is one of the best digital editors given that it comes with a retro user interface. It is free and has a lot of features for a program that is dedicated only to designing pixel art.
It includes palette control, animation, drawing, layering, and many other features.
It is pretty flexible in that it supports both sprite sheets and GIFs. With GraphicsGale, you are able to export different files.
You can also preview your creations before finalizing them which makes it perfect for those artists with a number of projects in their hands.
One of the best features of the program is that it allows users to import image files from a camera or a scanner with the help of TWAIN imaging. Artists who prefer to first portray their concepts on paper and later convert them into digital prints find this aspect really helpful.
The only drawback is that GraphicsGale works only on Windows, therefore, setting a limit for other users.
Free to Use: Yes | Features: Palette Control, Animation, Drawing, Layering, & More
Pro Motion is a program that helps create pixel art, animations, and even tiles more quickly.
This is perfect for artists who are looking for software that focuses on details more than anything else. Game developers for smartphones and other handheld gaming devices are known to go for Pro Motion in order to get amazing graphics.
It is also a lightweight program used to create light graphics for web games or applications. It supports tile map, bitmap, and sprite sheet designing. Moreover, it works pretty well with most popular frameworks or game engines to get started.
Free to Use: Yes (Free Version) | Features: Lightweight Program, Supports Tile Map, Bitmap, Sprite & Sheet Designing, Works w/ Popular Frameworks, & More
Best Pixel Art Programs and Softwares Comparison Table
Lightweight Program, Supports Tile Map, Bitmap, Sprite & Sheet Designing, Works w/ Popular Frameworks, & More
Pixel Art Software Programs FAQs
What file formats do pixel art programs typically support?
Most pixel art programs support a variety of file formats, including BMP, JPG, PNG, and GIF. The specific formats supported will depend on the software you are using, so be sure to check with its documentation or support.
Can I import custom palettes or use pre-built color palettes?
Most pixel art programs provide options for importing custom palettes and using pre-built color palettes. This feature helps users achieve desired color schemes more efficiently and maintain consistency across their designs.
Are there any online communities or resources to help me learn pixel art?
Absolutely! There are numerous online forums, communities, and tutorial websites dedicated to pixel art. Examples include Pixel Joint, Pixelation, and Lospec. These platforms provide a wealth of resources to help improve your pixel art skills.
Can I collaborate with others on pixel art projects?
Some pixel art programs offer collaborative features that allow multiple users to work on a single project simultaneously. However, the specific collaboration capabilities depend on the software you are using, so it’s crucial to check with the respective documentation or support. In some cases, sharing files between users can be an alternative method for collaboration.
Conclusion
As we have analyzed and discussed a multitude of pixel art programs and software, it's now time to narrow down the best options for different needs and levels of expertise. From the above 16 best pixel art programs and software, here are the top three expert recommendations:
iDraw, which is now Autodesk Graphic, is an ideal option for beginners looking to learn the basic concepts of pixel art. With its customizable palette and drawing tools, as well as the availability of video tutorials online, those starting out can easily grasp pixel art fundamentals with this program.
For more advanced users who need feature-rich software that is tailored specifically for pixel art creation, Aseprite is a good option. With a user-friendly interface, powerful tools like onion skinning, and stellar sprite sheet exporting capabilities, Aseprite caters well to professional pixel artists.
Lastly, for artists who desire a versatile program offering pixel art creation alongside other design tasks such as digital painting and graphic design, Adobe Photoshop is the right choice. Offering powerful tools, abundant resources, and tutorials, it is an industry-standard software that can be an invaluable asset to budding and experienced game developers alike.
By choosing the right software that caters to your requirements and skill set, you can unleash your creativity and explore the endless possibilities offered by pixel art and game development. So dive in, harness the power of these top-notch programs, and bring your pixel art visions to life!
The rise in popularity and the success of Blender can be attributed to two main reasons. One of which is because it’s free and open-source.
And the second reason is the massive community of designers and developers who dedicatedly work to build up the Blender ecosystem.
If you are a 3D artist who likes to reap the benefits of this amazing software, you must be familiar with these amazing add-ons and plugins that the community produces.
And, of course, the curiosity of finding something new like that has brought you to this article. Go ahead and give it a read.
Best Blender Addons & Plugins
Here is the list of the 17 best Blender addons & plugins to help you create stunning 3D models, animations, and visual effects.
One of the most debated attributes of Blender is its open nature. Blender believes in giving all of the controls to its users.
That’s why you get a plethora of options and tools that riddle the UI of the software. So, if someone takes their sweet time discovering all of the nooks and crannies of this software, they can seriously enhance their productivity and the scope of their projects.
Amaranth is a plugin that is helpful in that specific area. With this plugin, you get loads of shortcuts and extensions for Blender’s most used features that seriously step up one’s workflow speed.
The aim of this plugin is to speed up the workflow by making the UI easier to manipulate with shortcuts. This removes the friction of working in this software and you’ll see a drastic improvement once you get used to the plugin.
There are too many shortcuts that this plugin offers and it’s not feasible to list them all here but we highly recommend you check out their website and learn all about it.
Overall, if you want to work well and work fast, this plugin must be in your arsenal. Once you get used to it, Blender won’t feel the same without it.
By: Pablo Vazquez | Guide/Demo: Text-Based, Images, GIFs
If you indulge yourself in a lot of character modeling and character design work, then you are going to love this.
You may be a game developer or make 3D animations, but, in any case, if you like fleshing out your characters and modifying the minutest of details then RetopoFlow must be in your arsenal.
This add-on brings a whole slew of powerful and handy tools that will make sculpting your 3D models a piece of cake.
Even if it doesn’t make the work too easy, it’ll surely give you a lot more control and you’ll be a fan of RetoooFlow, especially, if you like to work on details.
Working with these high-res objects and animating them will first require you to craft a simpler model using the process of retopology. Unfortunately, Blender doesn’t have a lot in this regard by default.
And that is when RetopoFlow does its magic. The tools provided by it can help artists retopology their objects.
It gives you an intuitive that lets you draw new contours over the default objects and gives you immense control over its geometry. The best part is that the clean new mesh automatically covers the surfaces of your initial object and with its quad-based geometry you can even finetune the animations.
So, if your work falls in this category, there’s no reason for you to skip on RetopoFlow.
By: CG Cookie | Guide/Demo: Text-Based, Images, GIFs, Video
In the pursuit of achieving beautiful and realistic textures on your models, you’d require a nice UV Layout. But for some reason, Blender doesn’t have anything more than the bare minimum in terms of UV.
That’s why you need TexTools to get professional-looking UV and texture tools that work in Blender.
First of all, you get more than eighteen baking models to work with that can give you the best-looking textures in Blender.
But more importantly, you get all of the other tools that can help you align your UV layouts and really smoothen out your topology.
BLAM is an amazing tool that can help you to manipulate the 3D camera in Blender.
It is extremely helpful, especially, if you work in special effects or simulations.
Basically, this plugin uses a photo to determine the focal length and orientation of the camera that was used to take the photo. Consequently, it calibrates Blender’s camera to match the imagery in the photo.
BLAM is even more useful when you do projection mapping. You can even feed vanishing lines to the plugin in reference to the photo and it’ll recreate the geometry on its own.
For obvious reasons, this trick is extremely useful and almost pure magic because you reconstruct a 3D architecture using just a photo.
Simulation artists and game developers are going to love this tool!
Ragdoll Tools is an awesome plugin to generate hitboxes in the bones of the model that will eventually help you to achieve more realistic animations and Ragdoll physics.
The tools let you edit the armature and the settings of the rigid body without a hitch and make it extremely easy to manipulate the physics.
Apart from these basic tools that are impeccably helpful, if you want to take it up a notch, you can even take a look at the custom options of the tools.
By: XBodya13 | Guide/Demo: Text-Based, Images, GIFs, Video
We have already talked about TexTools that help you out UV layouts but if you want even more control over your UV workflow, then you should go for Magic UV instead.
It fulfills all of Blender’s shortcomings in the department of UV and gives you a less frustrating experience of UV work than Blender’s minimal and ineffective controls.
But if you have updated yourself to Blender 2.7, you don’t need to worry about this because, after several community requests, Blender added this plugin by default.
This tool might seem weirdly specific to a novice but it’s one of the best examples that glorifies the freedom and helpfulness of the Blender community.
As you might have already guessed, this tool lets you generate a huge number of books on simple commands.
You can fill up 3D shells and cupboards with as many books as you may want. It also takes care of the variety of books in terms of shape, size, and colors to provide you with an interesting and unique setting every time.
The tool becomes immensely helpful once you actually deal with the tedious nature of making highly detailed backgrounds.
Artists who create models of interior decor or architects can really improve their workflow with this tool. So, be sure to check it out!
By: Oliver Weissbarth | Guide/Demo: Text-Based, Images, Video
Lighting is one of the key components that you have to take care of while working in Blender. And Gaffer is a must-have if you are anywhere near serious in terms of lighting Blender.
Blender’s default setup is, unfortunately, not that good in terms of lighting. Not just in terms of access and organization but also in terms of its capabilities in getting natural lighting.
So, if you want to take your lighting game up a notch there’s no option for you but to opt for Gaffer.
This tool not only organizes multiple lights and makes it convenient to access but it also provides a wider range of settings so you can tinker with each and every light source to make it as realistic as possible.
Moreover, it also improves your productivity because instead of hunting for the right settings, it places them at a convenient location for you.
The best part is that each light source can be manipulated individually and the settings don’t mingle and create a mess with each other.
Along with this, you also get an HDRI handler that makes managing your HDRIs a piece of cake. It lets you cycle through them without a hitch.
So, if you want to make the lighting in your projects really realistic and natural, you can’t really skip on this handy add-on.
By: Greg Zaal | Guide/Demo: Text-Based, Images, GIFs, Video
If you are a game developer and plan to work with the default engine of Blender for making a game, you should really be acquainted with this add-on.
FPS Setup gives you most of the necessary tools and presets to make a simple First-person shooter.
In our experience, we don’t think this tool is capable to meet the needs of a veteran developer but even then it sure helps. A more ideal user will be a video game enthusiast who is still testing waters.
It takes care of the basics like controls, motion, and collision, so, if you are interested in making a first-person shooter, you should really check it out.
Blender, in general, is really great at generating simulations of complex surfaces such as cloth or fluid.
But if you want to improve your results beyond just the very basics, then you have to make this simulator yours.
It can make it possible for you to create high-quality cinematic fluid simulations that are otherwise not possible.
Not only does it make the settings and options more readily available and easier to manipulate but it also enhances the default capabilities of Blender.
One of the most amazing simulations that we found in the FLIP is the whitewater simulation. It's an amazing simulation that can work for any water body you can imagine.
For Blender users who are used to using Sculpting software to make character models, etc., this tool kit will provide you with everything you need for the same experience in Blender.
It gives you complex Boolean and modifier actions that can help you to work better with models in Blender. The workflow also gets a speed boost because of it.
One of the most intuitive and amazing tools is the grease pencil. Grease pencil lets you shape 3D objects in an extremely natural way and is similar to other sculpting tools.
So, if you work a lot with sculpting in Blender, there’s no way for you to skip this because it will make your workflow faster and streamlined.
Asset Management is a wonderful add-on that does exactly what it says, i.e., manage your assets.
There hasn’t been anything better in improving work speed irrespective of the type of work you do with Blender than this add-on.
Basically, this tool lets you create a library of all the assets you create, like, scenes, HDRIs, etc. And the best part is that you can even share these assets across projects.
Moreover, when you actually get riddled with the huge variety of assets you create, this can help you to manage your assets in a more convenient way.
You get a plugin that is essentially a custom thumbnail generator that can help you keep track of your assets when you work with extremely complex scenes.
This add-on is also helpful with HDRI maps.
Ultimately, it’s an amazing management tool that is, according to us at least, crucial for good speed in Blender!
By: Pitiwazou | Guide/Demo: Text-Based, Images, GIFs, Video
Texture painting is one of the cumbersome tasks in Blender and no matter what you use Blender for, if you want to make your work authentic, you'll have to do a lot of it.
In that case, you should seriously consider this fantastic add-on called BPainter. Even though Blender does have good-quality painting tools, there are a lot of factors that hamper the workflow while painting textures.
First of all, this tool adds a layering system that resembles a lot of other 2D painting software like Photoshop.
Moreover, it also cleans up the UI and makes it less cluttered. Along with that you also get a plethora of brushes and textures that smoothens out the work.
One often overlooked feature that it adds is that of blending options. So, it adds a few blending options like Overlay, Subtracts, etc. for your textures to give you more control while drawing.
The color picker tool is also improved using this add-on. All of it is awesome, but you will have to shell out about $40 for the add-on, which, in our honest opinion, is totally worth it.
Blender's default modeling system is quite impressive but it struggles with curved and round surfaces.
To avoid that hassle, one of our top recommendations is MESHmachine. It’s a fantastic modeling tool that gives you better control while modeling curved surfaces.
It provides you with more flexibility than Blender’s default beveling tools and will help you achieve a smoother workflow.
For full information, you will have to shell out a few dollars to add this to your arsenal but if you happen to deal with a lot of rounded and beveled surfaces, this is worth it.
Are you also annoyed with the default node-based material setups in Blender? You can now say goodbye to that whole array of hassle with this simple plugin called Material Pipeline.
This plugin comes with over a hundred unique PBR materials that will surely make your life easier. And if that doesn’t satisfy you, you can also create your own custom PBR-based materials with the included node group.
The best part about this node group is that it lets you simulate any material that you can imagine, which is similar to Disney’s Principled Shader.
But if you happen to be looking for a particular set of materials then you can also consider using their Material Pipeline add-on that lets you use the material packs of your choice.
So, there’s really no reason to skip this one out!
By: ONELVXE Studios | Guide/Demo: Text-Based, Images, Video
Game developers already know the pain of designing levels and any Blender user who has ever tried to work with a load of assets in a complex scene knows how hard it is to work with Blender's default tools.
While we are not saying that Blender’s default situation is bad, it sure is less than adequate for someone who has to work on such projects frequently.
One of the biggest problems that this add-on deals with is the annoying nature of constantly placing assets in your scene.
With Asset Sketcher, you can directly draw assets in the scene and that already makes it a lot less tedious.
There is also a huge variety of randomizing options and customizing features that provide the designer with a lot more control over the scene.
The quality of work is also improved as you can directly place your assets on a ground plane that snaps according to a grid. And an included physics calculation will also settle those assets accordingly.
Overall, this add-on is a godsend for level designers, and if you happen to be one, you really shouldn't skip this one.
By: ndee | Guide/Demo: Text-Based, Images, GIFs, Video
Both free and commercial addons/plugins are available. Blender itself is open-source, which means that many free addons are available; however, some developers also offer premium addons for a fee.
Are there any compatibility issues with Blender addons/plugins?
Compatibility issues may arise when Blender updates to a new version. Addons/plugins may need to be updated by their developers to function smoothly in the new version.
Can Blender addons/plugins slow down the overall performance of Blender?
While addons/plugins offer additional functionality, excessive use can potentially slow down Blender’s performance, especially on low-end hardware. It is recommended to enable only the addons you currently need for your project to optimize performance.
How do I install Blender addons/plugins?
Simply download the addon/plugin, open Blender, go to Edit > Preferences > Addons > Install, and then locate and select the downloaded file. Make sure you have the correct file format (.zip, .py, etc.) for the addon.
How do I enable and disable addons/plugins in Blender?
In Blender, go to Edit > Preferences > Addons. Then, search for the addon you want to enable or disable, check or uncheck the box next to the addon’s name, and click Save Preferences.
How can I troubleshoot Blender addon/plugin issues?
If an addon/plugin is causing issues, try the following steps:
Update Blender and the addon/plugin to their latest versions
Disable other addons to determine if there is a conflict
Consult the addon/plugin’s documentation or contact the developer for technical support.
Can I create my own Blender addon/plugin?
Yes, if you have knowledge of Python programming, you can create custom addons/plugins to fit your unique requirements. The Blender API documentation (https://docs.blender.org/api/current/) provides guidance to get started with addon development.
Conclusion
As we have explored the numerous addons and plugins available to enhance Blender's functionality, it becomes evident that the right tools can significantly improve an artist's workflow, modeling, texturing or the overall user experience. Based on our analysis of the top 17 options, we would like to present three expert recommendations to fit various needs and preferences.
From the above 17 best blender addons & plugins, here are the top three expert recommendations:
For those who are looking to streamline their workflow and reduce friction while working within the Blender interface, Amaranth is an ideal option.
RetopoFlow is a good option for artists focusing on character modeling and design, allowing them to retopologize objects with ease and control.
Finally, TexTools is the right choice for artists who require professional-looking UV and textures, offering extensive functionality beyond the built-in Blender tools.
Each of these plugins offers distinct advantages that cater to different areas within the world of 3D design. Whether your focus is on improving productivity, refining character models, or producing realistic textures, these addons and plugins are sure to enhance your artistic experience within Blender. Don't hesitate to explore these tools further and find the perfect fit tailored to your individual needs.
Colored pencils are some of the most under-appreciated mediums of artistry. They are easy to use, inexpensive, versatile, and can make some of the finest pieces of art.
Some artists think that colored pencil is an immature medium that is only meant for kids. This distaste might be because erasing any colored pencil drawing is simpler than other types of paintings or drawings. But that is certainly not the case.
Many professional artists have created some of the best works of their life using these handy pencils. And while there are certainly inexpensive colored pencils for the casual, the market is also saturated with professional-grade pencils.
So, today, in this discussion we are going to highlight some of our top picks of colored pencils for artists everywhere in the world – both professional and beginners alike.
So, without any further adieu, go ahead and give it a read!
Best Colored Pencils for Art
Here is the list of the 11 best colored pencils that you can use to create incredible artworks.
By far, one of the most popular brands in the world of colored pencils is Prismacolor. The reason behind their popularity is their price-to-performance value, even if some consider them to be on the pricier side. And with flexible size options, varying from 12 to 150 different colors in a single set, we absolutely fell in love with them!
Experience
Even though these are wax-based colored pencils, like many others on this list, the performance is astoundingly good. The set that we used in our testing is one of the basic sets, but there are many other options to choose from as well.
The lead has a fairly high pigment count and even though these are wax-based pencils, the colors are significantly softer and blend more evenly than the other wax-based pencils we have used.
The colors are also very vibrant and no matter what color we used from the set, it looked attractive and gave results that are very close to something we’d expect from a professional-grade pencil.
But even though the pencils have an excellent performance, arguably the best among all the other brands of wax-based colored pencils, we’d still not recommend it for professional use. Due to the lack of any lightfast rating, we don’t trust its permanence.
Overall, the pencils are a great value for money, with each color costing roughly $0.60, for any casual beginner or even intermediate artist.
Pros
Great value-for-money option for beginners
Arguably the best wax-based colored pencil in terms of performance
Versatile set sizes ranging from 12 to 150 colors in a set
Cons
Not meant for professional use
Point Type: Fine | Color: Multicolor | Quantity (Per Set): 72 | Dimensions: 8.15″ x 1.15″ x 10.25″
VIBRANT COLOUR: With a round 4 millimeters soft core, the...
SOFT TEXTURE: The velvety soft core helps emphasize the...
Derwent’s ColourSoft colored pencils perform remarkably well, which honestly surprised us. With its soft core lead and vibrant colors, these pencils are so good that they can steal the heart of a professional.
While there are a few objectively better brands of colored pencils that professionals abide by, the value these pencils offer for the price is seriously astounding.
Experience
The colors are incredibly lightfast and you can get the exact information of each color with the attractive color chart that is included in the box.
The lead is extremely soft and produces some of the most vibrant colors we have seen when a pencil is put on paper. And the soft nature of the core also makes it excellent at blending and shading.
Some of us were worried that the soft core of the pencils would break often and would chip while sharpening but, fortunately enough, the lead is extremely resistant to breaking, and there was no case where it broke off unexpectedly when we put pressure.
The lead, however, is a little on the thicker side - roughly, 4mm. While that is a problem for detailed work - because you’d need to constantly sharpen it, it proved excellent for blending and filling out the larger parts of the painting.
Overall, these pencils are excellent for professional-grade use, and they come at a fairly reasonable price, unlike some other brands of similar quality and performance.
Pros
Incredibly attractive colors and great lightfastness
Soft leads that are great for blending
A durable core that won’t break easily
Great value-for-money options for professional artists
Cons
Off-brand blenders don’t suit the pigments
Point Type: Fine | Color: Multicolor | Quantity (Per Set): 72 | Dimensions: 13.95″ x 1.02″ x 7.8″
Tombow Irojiten is a Japanese company that manufactures some of the most unique art products that we have had our hands on. Their products have stolen the hearts of many artists since 1913 because of their impeccable quality, and their quality of standing out in the market. And these colored pencils also stay faithful to their formula.
Experience
The colors are vibrant, and the pigments are soft and produce an even tone, which is great for blending.
As for lightfastness and permanence, it seems to be excellent in that regard. But the sources we’ve used are not very reliable.
And these unique colors are packaged according to the palette instead of size. Because of that, you get sets like Cool Grey, Seascape, Woodlands, etc. And all of these sets have a different number of colors as well.
We found this on the favorable side because you can just buy colors on the basis of the piece you are doing. If you are doing an art piece with Earth shades, then you can just go ahead and buy only those.
But this argument becomes a little redundant because the pencils are also sold individually but at an extra charge.
They also have many unfamiliar shades and colors that we hadn’t experienced before. So, if you are looking to bring some newness to your artworks, then you have found your match!
Pros
Unique palette of colors, providing 90 colors in total
Can be bought in sets on the basis of colors
Can also be purchased individually
Incredibly good performance and vibrant colors
Cons
It is kind of expensive
Point Type: N/A | Color: Multicolor | Quantity (Per Set): 90 | Dimensions: 9.7″ x 8.3″ x 3.6″
Progresso woodless color pencils 24/pkg assorted colors
Brand of Chartpak
Koh-I-Noor Progresso Woodless Colored Pencils redefine the fundamentals of a pencil at an extremely inexpensive price point. And yes, you heard that right! These pencils are indeed made without wood. These are just leads that are wrapped in lacquer. The result of which is positively interesting.
Experience
Since the pencils are all-lead, you can toggle between fine lines and broad strokes with just a slight movement making them extremely flexible to use. Filling out large areas also becomes way easier.
In our experience, we couldn’t help but draw parallels between brushes and these pencils. And don’t worry, the lacquer covering is great at preventing the colors from spreading and making it all messy.
In terms of performance as well these pencils do remarkably well. The colors are vibrant and the pigment density is enough to provide softness to the colors, which is great for blending purposes.
There are two gripes that we have with this color set though. One is the lack of color charts and lightfast ratings and another is the inability to be bought individually.
But when each pencil costs about only $0.58, we couldn’t hold any grudges against it.
Overall, these pencils have a unique feature that we haven’t witnessed in other brands before. And although we would not deem it fit for professional work, we consider it an excellent product for any other use case.
Pros
Unique woodless pencils that are great to use
Extremely affordable pricing with each pencil costing about $0.58
Great colors and performance in terms of vibrancy and softness
A huge variety of possible strokes due to its woodless nature
Cons
Not fit for any professional use
Not sold individually
Point Type: Flat | Color: Multicolor | Quantity (Per Set): 24 | Dimensions: 7″ x 4″ x 0.91″
Unsurpassed Lightfastness: Features pigments that resist...
Faber-Castell is a company that needs no introduction to the art community. They make some of the best quality art products that artists all around the globe abide by.
Their oil-based Polychromos colored pencils constitute one of those fine specimens. These pencils check all the boxes of an excellent colored pencil set and offer interesting advantages over other wax-based colored pencils.
Experience
These are oil-based pencils and these are extremely reminiscent of oil pastels or oil colors in terms of flow and how the colors behave. So, it’s way smoother than wax-based colored pencils which makes it better at blending.
Oil-based colored pencils are not that common – as evident from the abundance of wax-based pencils on our list as well. Other than being better at blending, these pencils are also resistant to water, and since oil is a stronger binder, the lead is way less prone to breaking or chipping.
As for the performance of these pencils specifically, the colors are well-saturated and behave consistently. And the lightfastness is absolutely amazing! Hence, we deem it fit for professional use.
The pencils also have a thicker core - about 3.8 mm - so, you get a wider range of strokes capable of both detailing and blunt blending.
Overall, these are excellent oil-based pencils that are great for almost any kind of artist, even though the slick feeling is a departure from more popular wax-based colored pencils. And if you are unsatisfied with wax-based pencils, then surely give these a try!
Pros
Oil-based colored pencils that are great for blending
Incredibly lightfast and great permanence
A thick core that is capable of providing a wide range of strokes
Great performance in terms of color vibrancy
Great for professional use as well
Cons
Can be considered to be on the pricier side
Point Type: N/A | Color: Multicolor | Quantity (Per Set): 120 | Dimensions: 3.94″ x 1.97″ x 7.87″
There are some brands in the art supplies industry that represent the state of the art. These brands don’t care about compromises for a smaller price tag. All they aim to do is to make the best product possible to cater to the needs of professionals all around the world. Caran d’Ache is one of those companies, and their colored pencils exhibit that commitment as well.
Experience
These pencils are at the top of the ladder. The finest pencils a professional can lay a hand on.
The pencils feature thick 8 mm lead cores that can be sharpened to the finest tip possible, and they’d still not break or chip. Of course, this provides a wide variety of strokes that’d not be otherwise possible.
They also surpass any other colored pencils in terms of lightfastness and permanence. Over 80% of their pencils belong to class I of lightfastness, which means they will remain unhindered for over 100 years. And the remaining colors belong to class II, meaning they will maintain their luster for 50 to 100 years.
The colors are also impeccably good-looking and the pencils flow smoothly no matter what kind of paper we used. And blending is also jaw-droppingly graceful.
Of course, the best of the bests will also be valued at a similar price point but that would never be a problem for a professional who is making a living from the quality of these pencils.
And you can get these pencils in 5 different set sizes.
Pros
Impeccable performance, barely rivaled by any other colored pencil brand
Impeccable durability of colors in terms of lightfastness
A balanced palette and immensely beautiful colors
Intended for serious professional use
Cons
It’s one of the most expensive pencil sets we’ve ever used
Point Type: Fine | Color: Multicolor | Quantity (Per Set): 76 | Dimensions: 5″ x 1″ x 1″
Beautifully Pigmented - The colored pencils in this set...
Surface Versatility - These colored pencils for artists are...
A fair competition to Faber-Castell Polychromos colored pencils set is LYRA Rembrandt Polycolor Art Pencils. These are also oil-based colored pencils but these offer a different set of pros & cons compared to the aforementioned brand.
But that doesn’t change the fact that these pencils are of excellent quality as well, and hence, they are worthy of competition.
Experience
Like the Polychromos, these pencils also flow incredibly smooth and blend effortlessly as well. The colors also perform outstandingly in terms of vibrancy and vividity. The pigments can also be manipulated with turpentine or any odorless mineral spirit.
The purchase options for these pencils are also very lucrative. You can buy these in 5 different size options – 12, 24, 36, 72, and 105. But the best part is that you can buy any pencil individually, which is great news for professional artists.
What’s not so great though is that the pencils don’t come with a color chart and that’s not suitable for many professionals.
When compared to Polychromos, these pencils are indeed a little more affordable but still fall on the expensive side of the spectrum with each pencil costing roughly $1.33 when bought in a set of 24.
Some artists have complained online that the lead chips and breaks but we never had such an experience. Hence, we also recommend using manual sharpeners with these pencils instead of electric ones.
Pros
Incredibly smooth oil-based pencils
Great performance in terms of color vibrancy and consistency
Various size options are available and can also be bought individually
Cons
It is expensive
Point Type: Bold | Color: Multicolor | Quantity (Per Set): 72 | Dimensions: 13.19″ x 0.83″ x 7.36″
Artist quality chalk-pastel coloring pencils - available in...
All of the colors we have talked about until now were either wax-based or oil-based colors. But we wanted to vary this list with an entry from Stabilo CarbOthello. These pencils are chalk-pastel, and they bring a fairly unique experience to the table, fundamentally different from all the other entries on this list.
Experience
Chalk-pastel colored pencils are significantly different in experience from conventional colored pencils based on wax or oil. The powdery nature of the colors makes blending way more fun.
These pencils belong to the premium category, and hence, are followed by a matching price tag.
The pigments are of top-notch quality, and they are smooth and vibrant. The colors blend together extremely well and with a mix and match of different kinds of paper, you might just witness a unique artwork that’d not have been possible with any other brand of pencils.
As for lightfastness, these colors are extremely resistant to fading due to light and it defines the premium nature of these pencils. So, we think that if you love the experience, and the results you get from these pencils, then don’t be afraid to use it for professional artwork.
The pigments are also partially aquarellable, meaning that you can use these pencils with brush and water, and the contours of your artwork will remain intact. And the range of colors in the set is quite satisfactory too with 60 different colors.
Pros
Premium quality chalk-pastel colored pencils that have a unique experience
Extremely enjoyable blending because the colors are smudgeable
Top-notch quality of pigments. Vibrant and consistent colors
Can be used with brush and water to a certain extent
Cons
Falls on the expensive side of the spectrum
Point Type: N/A | Color: Multicolor | Quantity (Per Set): 60 | Dimensions: 13.25″ x 8.05″ x 1.35″
An extremely unique way to use colored pencils is by using them in a combination with other mediums, especially, watercolors. For those who are looking for colored pencils capable of such artistry, we have brought you Creative Art’s Materials colored pencils.
Experience
While we have had some other oil-based pencils on this list like Polychromos and Lyra, these pencils are better for mixed media because they are significantly softer and silkier than other oil-based colored pencils.
Hence, the pigments latch onto the paper better, and the result is more vibrant colors and expressiveness when used alongside other mediums like watercolor.
Other than that, this set of colored pencils behaves pretty much similar to any other oil-based colored pencil. Its feeling is silky, and the blends are more realistic than the ones created with waxed-based colors.
The durability of the lead is also better than wax-based pencils because oil is a stronger binder. There will be no chipping or breaking after sharpening.
Along with all these redeeming features, the lead is also sufficiently thick. This allows a wider range of strokes.
And the colors are fairly lightfast as well, which makes it capable of being used in a professional project.
Overall, it’s an outstanding colored pencil set like its other oil-based siblings. And its soft lead also makes it the best choice for mixed media.
Pros
Excellent oil-based pencils of incredible quality
Outstanding performance in terms of saturation and consistency
Superbly durable with no possibility of chipping or breaking
Incredibly lightfast and resistant to fading
Softer and silkier lead that is perfect for mixed media
Cons
Like other oil-based colored pencils, these are also very expensive
Point Type: Fine | Color: Multicolor | Quantity (Per Set): 40 | Dimensions: N/A
It is adjusted to meet the high demands of professionals; It...
Soft and shaped oil-based colouring pencils with fine and...
Holbein Artist Colored Pencils is one of the most elaborate sets of colored pencils that we have seen that comes at an affordable price point. Even though the 150 different shades of colors steal the show, the pencils themselves are of remarkable quality and perform quite magnificently.
Experience
The number of colors that you get in a box can be quite overwhelming. When you get 150 different shades of colors stacked in two layers of a box, you don’t really have room to complain.
We deem it the most comprehensive set of colors for a beginner and casual artist. As for performance, the colors are quite excellent as the pigments are saturated and blend excellently.
The lightfastness and the permanence of the colors are also quite satisfactory. Although, we don’t recommend this to professional artists who need it to be pitch-perfect.
We’ll rate these colors well above average in terms of performance, meaning that it’s superb enough to deal with the needs of most artists until it’s some serious business.
One thing that was pleasing for us to note, was the thickness of the lead. It’s 3.8 mm, and since it’s on the thicker side, you get a wider range of strokes.
Overall, it’s an excellent colored pencil set for casual beginner and even intermediate artists. But unfortunately, the lightfastness of these colors makes them fall short of any professional use.
Pros
A huge number of colors with 150 colors in a single set
Great performance in terms of vibrancy and blending ability
Adequate lightfastness and permanence
An excellent comprehensive option for beginners
Cons
Not meant for professional use
Point Type: Medium | Color: Multicolor | Quantity (Per Set): 150 | Dimensions: 7.9″ x 2″ x 18.1″
Blick is one of the most beloved brands in this industry. They have found a perfect balance of price-to-performance that seems to please a lot of artists all around the world. And to no surprise, Blick does it again with their colored pencils as well.
These are the perfect middle-of-the-ground pencils that are priced in a beginner-friendly fashion but perform like a professional-grade tool.
Experience
Right off the bat, the performance matches and even rivals some of the professional-grade pencils that are way more expensive than these ones.
The colors are vibrant, and they blend extremely easily. The pigment density is also high.
And the best part is that your artworks will maintain their luster for years to come because the colors are incredibly lightfast. Nothing about the performance felt short, especially, when considering the price.
And the purchase options are incredibly flexible too. First, there are 5 different sizes you can buy – 12, 24, 36, 48, and 72. If that doesn’t suit you, you can also buy them in thematic sets called Greys, Landscape, and Portrait. And if that doesn’t feel right to you, then you can also purchase them individually!
So, if you are looking to move on from rudimentary colored pencils and get into some serious works of art, there is no better option than this. And once you do move on, you won’t change soon because these are nearly gems.
Pros
Great price to performance and impeccable quality
Amazingly vibrant and attractive colors
Good quality pigments for great blending
Incredibly lightfast and great permanence
Huge variety of purchase options. Can be bought individually as well
Cons
May not suit artists who need super-premium pencils
Point Type: N/A | Color: Multicolor | Quantity (Per Set): 72 | Dimensions: 13.10″ x 8″ x 1.40″
By now, you must have realized that there are a number of color pencil options on the market and that choosing one can be difficult. In this section, we will discuss the factors that can help you purchase the right set of colored pencils.
Type of Pencil Set
Today, most colored pencils are wax-based, which provides a smooth texture. The pigment flows well, and you can create many layers on the paper. There is no need to worry about adhesion or smearing, and the layers will be clearly visible.
The only issue is that you may see wax bloom, which may give a splotchy look to the picture. However, you can wipe the excess colors with a cloth to perfect the sketch.
Next, there are oil-based pencils that have some wax in them. These have a different consistency, and they do not cause a wax bloom. They are firmer than wax pencils but will provide a smooth finish. Also, the lead does not break easily, and the pencils last longer.
But oil-based colors can be harder to remove, and they smear easily.
Then, there are watercolor pencils where the binder is water-soluble, and the pigments can mix with water. They contain a dry watercolor pigment, which can be used along with water and brushes.
Another type to mention is chalk-pastel pencils, which are perfect for blending. These have a chalky texture, and you can use your fingers or cotton to blend them together.
Experience Level with Colored Pencil Art
If you have used pencil colors before, then you must have noticed that some are easier to use than others. The ones available for schoolchildren have a harder lead, and they do not break easily. They are easier to sketch with and have less blending capacity.
On the other hand, for advanced painters, there are more delicate and fragile pencils. These have better blending capacity and a soft lead. Also, if you are using watercolor pencils, then the colors could react with the slightest amount of water and help you blend well across surfaces.
These artist-grade colors can be more expensive as they contain more pigment and are of higher quality.
Durability
With normal use, colored pencils can easily last for two to five years at a stretch. But, if you keep them in a cool dark place in appropriate boxes, then they can easily last for a longer time. Artists who use colors regularly have even used color pencils after 25 years of storing them.
Today, there are woodless colored pencils that can last for 100 years. But, please remember that the colors are susceptible to breaking or chipping in the long run. This is especially true for thin wooden pencils. So, make sure that you keep them properly and do not drop them off often.
If you are teaching your kids how to use these colors, it is best to sit on the floor and work to prevent the pencils from dropping from a higher surface. For school use, purchase pencil colors that are thicker to prevent easy breakage.
Lightfastness Quality
Lightfastness rating helps one understand how resistant the color pigment is to fading. If you are just purchasing colored pencils to practice and do not plan to preserve your work, then this is not going to be an essential factor.
However, if you are planning to sell your work or frame them, then the colors have to be resistant to fading. Most professional-grade color pencils available today are not prone to fading.
Colored Pencils for Art FAQs
What kind of paper should I use with colored pencils?
Heavyweight, acid-free paper with a slight texture is recommended for colored pencil art. The texture provides tooth for the pigment to adhere to, while the acid-free quality ensures long-lasting artwork without yellowing or deterioration.
Do I need to use fixative when working with colored pencils?
Fixative is not always necessary for colored pencil art, but it can help prevent smudging, reduce wax bloom, and protect the artwork. However, it may alter the overall appearance of colors, so testing the fixative on a small sample is recommended.
Can I blend colors with colored pencils?
Yes, colored pencils can be blended using various techniques like layering, burnishing, and solvents. These techniques help create smooth transitions, gradients, and more depth in your art.
What is lightfastness in colored pencils?
Lightfastness refers to a colored pencil’s resistance to fading when exposed to light. Pencils with higher lightfastness ratings will retain their colors better over time, allowing the artwork to remain vibrant and colorful.
Are artist-grade colored pencils better than student-grade ones?
Artist-grade colored pencils typically have higher pigment concentration and better lightfastness than student-grade alternatives, which can result in more vibrant, long-lasting artwork. However, they are usually more expensive, so the choice depends on your budget and needs.
What are some techniques used for creating art with colored pencils
Common techniques include hatching, cross-hatching, stippling, and scumbling. Artists may also use layering, burnishing, and blending for richer, more dimensional results. Experimenting with different techniques can open up a range of creative possibilities with colored pencils.
Can I sharpen my colored pencils with a regular pencil sharpener?
While you can use a regular pencil sharpener for colored pencils, specialized colored pencil sharpeners are better suited for the task. They have less aggressive blades that prevent the fragile colored cores from breaking or crumbling during sharpening.
Conclusion
Finding the best colored pencils for your artistic needs can be a challenge, as the options on the market are varied in terms of price, performance, and suitability for beginners or professionals. However, our thorough review has made it easier for you to choose the best product based on your requirements.
From the above 11 best colored pencils, here are the top three expert recommendations:
For casual beginners, the Prismacolor Colored Pencils and Sets are an ideal option. With a high pigment count, soft colors, and excellent blending capabilities, casual artists could fall in love with these pencils.
Professional artists looking for value should consider the Derwent Colored Pencils ColourSoft. With lightfast and vibrant colors, a soft lead that is great for blending, and excellent durability, these pencils are an impressive choice.
If you're looking for unique palettes, the Tombow Irojiten Color Pencils are the right choice. Featuring vibrant colors, great blending capabilities, and unique palette options, these pencils can help you explore new artistic possibilities.
Regardless of your artistic experience or preferences, our expert recommendations can help guide you to the best colored pencil product for your unique needs. So, go ahead and unleash your creative potential with these exceptional colored pencil options.
One of the most popular 3D sculpting animation programs today is ZBrush.
We are sure most animators are familiar with the tool, yet not everyone can operate it - at least not without a proper guide.
There are many tutorials about the ZBrush application available online, but choosing which one is beneficial for you can be time-consuming. Therefore, today we have prepared a list of 25 detailed and helpful video tutorials - since many people understand better if they simply see it with their own eyes.
These tutorials cover all skill levels, so, perhaps you’ll find one which suits your needs perfectly. Beginners can have a good start to using the application while advanced users will find more new steps as they progress.
Here is the list of the 25 best ZBrush tutorials & courses to help you to create amazing digital sculptures, master the essential tools, and take your ZBrush skills to the next level.
Here’s a video tutorial you can find on YouTube by North Pixel whose specialization is in 3D animation and entertainment. Their video’s intro focuses on sculpting from scratch. Their aim is to let people know how to sculpt without being too hasty in the process.
The video is about an hour long, so it contains a lot of tips and lessons that can be quite useful for beginners.
While it’s true an hour is not enough to learn everything necessary, however, it does offer more information on the basics that starters need to know. It will come in pretty handy if you are self-taught as well.
Here is another introduction video to the application, except that it is specifically meant for version ZBrush 4R7.
In this video, you’ll learn about 2.5D designs including some basics about 3D workflow. Other subjects include ZSpheres, ShadowBox, ZModeler, and a few more..
There aren’t a lot of differences regarding the features, but Justin Marshall gives a very detailed introduction in this 4-hour long video. You would want to watch it because there is a lot of visual guides about what and how you can do your tasks.
Moreover, the instructor also happens to be an author of Pluralsight who focuses on this area of work. Therefore, if you are a beginner this would be highly beneficial for you.
If those two are not enough, we have here another introduction to ZBrush which is meant for beginners only. The instructions are presented by Edge-CGI-3D which has its own channel on YouTube.
Before starting an actual project, one needs to have enough practice on the basics of sculpting - and this is exactly what the video provides. Besides the basic concepts, it also describes what ZBrush is all about, hence, making it perfect for the absolute beginner.
Although it can be short to include a complete fundamental guide, we also have to consider the fact that not everybody has the time to spend on more lengthy videos. So, paying close attention to the instructions will do just fine.
By: Edge-CGI 3D Tutorials and more! | Duration: 48 Minutes (Video) | Free: Yes
A more systematic approach to help you get familiar with the basics of using ZBrush is this video by artist Richard James Cook who came up with 10-part ZBrush series. It is also one of the most viewed ZBrush tutorials on YouTube.
Every one of his videos is about 30-60 minutes long. Going through each of them at a time can help you get a wider understanding of the program. But most importantly, all of the tutorials are free, so you can learn them at your own pace without having to shed a penny.
This video tutorial is not necessarily for beginners but for users who are shifting from one sculpting program to ZBrush. So basically, it is an introductory course for those who are already familiar with 3D animation concepts.
The instructor, Ryan Kittleson, covers many of the common techniques and tools used for both sculpting and painting in a program.
Although the video is a bit old, most of the methods remain the same, making it still applicable for reference to date. And since it is a course, fees are required except for the one-month trial which is completely free of cost.
This one is not a video - it’s a platform. The platform allows you to sign up with Pluralsight for a free trial and have access to many video tutorials on ZBrush. Through these tutorials, you get to learn many sculpting processes you need to know in proper detail.
If you go to Pluralsight, there will be some tests to help analyze your sculpting skills on ZBrush so it can assign which level suits best for you.
Yet, another popular video to help learners is this one by Liam Shaw. In this tutorial, the instructor takes his viewers through a process to sculpt characters from scratch.
You can follow similar steps if you’re planning to create patterns or designs. We assure you that beginners will find this guide very effective.
One of the features which make a character look more appealing is the hair. If created precisely, your character will look almost life-like. And lucky for you, here is a video that will help you achieve that. You will see how the artist sculpts perfectly fine lines to make hair or fur. Besides, it is short and is not as complicated as one might think.
If you are someone who wants to create their own human characters and not download free ready-made ones, this guide might be the perfect one for you.
With this tutorial, you will be able to construct a whole realistic humanoid anatomy from nothing. The software program allows you to mould any form you desire which makes it ideal for such sculpting.
By: Jakub Chechelski | Duration: About 10-15 Minutes (Article) | Free: Yes
The environment or background of your project is as important as the character itself. Therefore, you need to be very detailed with it.
This video is particularly made to achieve that purpose. The tutorial stresses making fine details on objects such as walls or rocks since they have a strong influence in making the project appear realistic.
Now, we are going to shift our focus to creating clothes for our human characters. In ZBrush, the user can color, model, as well as add a finishing touch to the characters’ clothing.
This next video by David Jones is around 3 hours long. It is about sculpting clothes, and as usual, it also aims at making them appear real so that they fit the characters’ look.
We have to admit that making clothes in 3D animations is never easy, and that is why we included this video.
It will be very helpful for those who are struggling to create clothing designs by offering them a step-by-step guide. You will also get to know the basics of where the body’s tension areas are so that it becomes easy to sculpt the clothes better.
By: David Jones | Duration: 185 Minutes (Video) | Free: Yes (Within Trial Period)
Moving away from designing human anatomy, we will now introduce you to the video that teaches ZBrush users how to create a fantasy character.
The instructor, Raul Tavares, explains everything in a simple manner so that everybody, including beginners, may understand it perfectly. However, it would be much better if you already know a thing or two about using ZBrush first.
As a sample, this video will show you how to create a fictional character (or anything similar) using the methods it provides, also by starting from scratch. You can start by sketching the thumbnail, coming up with a concept, and finally creating a 3D model.
In case you have ever made or at least tried designing a character, then you know that in ZBrush there is a lot of posing and modeling needed. Keep in mind that it does require a smooth workflow to accomplish the process.
Kyle Green, the artist, has had a lot of experience in the field, hence, users will find his tutorials more convenient for practicing posing in ZBrush.
His tutorials embrace easy language, tips, and techniques, so the course suits beginners and novice 3D animation designers. You can manipulate the characters’ poses in any manner possible.
In this tutorial, Darrel Abney shows us how to create an alien face. By acting as a sample, you can draw inspiration from his video to create anything alike.
The reason this artist chose ZBrush for his work is due to the features it provides. Lots of tools for sculpting is one of the main reasons.
A very interesting technique to enhance the realistic look of a character/creature is to use both Photoshop and ZBrush to modify it - and that’s exactly what Adam Dewhirst did.
In this project, the artist shows us the methods of using these two programs in order to create a fantasy creature.
We have here a video series that will help users design their environment by following these simple, yet very effective methods instructed in detail.
One of the important things to keep in mind is that the environment requires a lot of props and structures. This video series is perfect for those who have never tried this area of designing before but want to create realistic environments.
The video series shows how to use the different tools in ZBrush to create and mold such structures as desired.
By: Dan John Cox | Duration: 137 Minutes (Video) | Free: Yes (Within Trial Period)
Besides the character and the environment, texture painting is another part of ZBrush which plays an important role in 3D animation designing.
Here, you’ll be able to see how to use texture painting for creating 3D objects. Some videos already featured the types of tools that can be used for poly painting or workflow.
In time, it will become very easy for creating amazing elements as you learn how texture painting works.
As we mentioned about poly painting, here is a video by Paul Gaboury which explains what and how to use it. You will see how he creates helmet panels followed by throwing some gold paneling to the ring of this character.
While it’s not a complete guide, this video shows how you can create tile texture by explaining how it works, therefore, it is perfect for the absolute beginner.
We recommend going through this course since tiling is a must for all 3D artists. Note that, this video also uses Photoshop to create realistic tiling.
This video is by ArtStation, a channel on YouTube, that places its focus on 3D animation designing. Among many of their content, we found this to be the best tutorial on using ZBrush.
There are many series providing techniques to create characters while this one shows us how to create the base of a creature.
If you’re thinking of creating a monster/demon for your project, take a look at this video where the artist, Titouan Olive, demonstrates how to model-making tips that are commonly used for Hollywood animations. The bonus is that he also provides a few tricks to use in order to make the creature looks real.
For a more specific creation to help users have a sound understanding of using ZBrush, we have here a project of Star Wars’ Stormtrooper done by Juan Martin Gracia Forn.
Using both ZBrush and Photoshop, he tells us that we must first plan the construction carefully before proceeding to the modeling. He also mentions and proves that rendering is a hard task in ZBrush.
By: Juan Martin Garcia Forn | Duration: About 10-15 Minutes (Article) | Free: Yes
If you are a beginner aiming to better understand the concept of environment textures, we suggest giving this video series a try. The complete time amounts to only 3 hours. It is available through the Pluralsight library which offers you a one-month free trial.
However, creating incredible environment textures is not possible without the help of 3D Max. Many artists go for this option because of the professional methods it provides.
Finally, after all the tutorials you might want to check out some of the tips on using ZBrush which are provided by Madeleine Scott-Spencer, the instructor who shares her own tips for sculpting with ZBrush.
Are there any prerequisites for taking ZBrush tutorials and courses?
Most beginner ZBrush tutorials and courses have no prerequisites. However, some basic knowledge of 3D modeling concepts, computer skills, and familiarity with other 3D software may be helpful in enhancing your learning experience.
Will ZBrush tutorials and courses stay up-to-date with new software updates and features?
While some older tutorials and courses may not cover recent features, creators of ZBrush tutorials and courses often release updated content or additional lessons to address new software updates and techniques.
Are paid ZBrush tutorials and courses worth the investment?
Paid ZBrush tutorials and courses usually provide more structured learning experiences, downloadable resources, and instructor feedback, which can be valuable for mastering ZBrush. However, make sure to check reviews before making a purchase.
Conclusion
Navigating the wide variety of ZBrush tutorials and courses can be overwhelming, especially for beginners and those looking to learn efficiently. To help streamline the process, we have sifted through and analyzed 25 of the best tutorials and courses to find the top three expert recommendations for various learning needs.
For beginners who want a comprehensive introduction to ZBrush basics, Introduction to ZBrush is an ideal option, offering a solid foundation in sculpting without rushing the learning process.
For users specifically working with ZBrush 4R7, Introduction to ZBrush 4R7 is a good option as it provides detailed instructions on the unique features of this version.
Finally, for those seeking a shorter learning time, ZBrush for Beginners is the right choice as it offers a concise overview of the fundamental concepts.
From these top selections, you can make an informed decision on the best ZBrush tutorial or course that best suits your learning goals, preferences, and available time. Dive in and start mastering the powerful features of ZBrush to unleash your creative potential!
Adult coloring books have been on the market for long - however, it’s only recently that they have begun to find footing as an acceptable, regular everyday product.
There is a lot of research that suggests that these coloring books are a wonderful way to let go of stress, whether it’s personal or professional.
It’s not odd to see adults, especially millennials, travel with a set of colors and books which helps them de-stress after a long time of constantly working.
To avoid burnout, a coloring book is one of the best ways. The question, then, remains: which coloring book is best for me?
Fortunately, today it’s incredibly easy to find a variety of coloring books, which are all different and created keeping particular consumers in mind. Without further ado, let’s begin!
Best Adult Coloring Books
Here is the list of the 11 best adult coloring books that can help you to relax, unwind and explore your creativity.
This book is aimed specifically at people who prefer colored pencils and can spare a few hours at a time in order to finish up their coloring. The designs come straight from Disney’s classic movies such as Pocahontas and Aladdin, and the paper is thick enough to handle all but watercolors. The coloring is done in the same manner as Thomas Kinkade’s originals!
Experience
The stories depicted in the book are typical of all that one relates to their childhood - a great way of relieving stress. The book has pages that are finished in matte rather than glossy papers you expect to see on generic children’s books.
There are sixty-three such intricate works, so you’ll be covered for a fair bit of time. Going through all of those stories like Sleeping Beauty, Snow White, The Beauty and The Beast, and so on will surely put you in a meditative state as you forget the world and immerse yourself in a time where there were no worries, where you could just be yourself.
Most books generally focus on the patterns and designs and the colors - this one, being story-based, does a great job of keeping you involved. However, if you’re just starting out, you may want to get a hang of coloring on another (easier) coloring book before going for this.
Pros
Sixty-three drawings for you to fully explore
Wonderful with colored pencils, can handle anything but watercolors
Matte finishing on the pages is a neat touch
Cons
Might be a little difficult for those just starting out
Author: Thomas Kinkade | No. of Drawings: 63 | Book Binding: Paperback
50 Hand-Drawn Mandalas to Color. Relax and unwind with 50...
Durable Hardback Book Covers. Color anywhere at any time...
Mandalas are a class of Buddhist religious symbols, which tend to be incredibly intricate and colorful. They symbolize peace and prosperity and ultimately, attaining Nirvana. Many books use mandalas - this one does only Mandalas though it does them very well. The page quality is amazing so you can use any kind of medium in order to fill between the lines.
Experience
If you want the best quality of paper among mandala coloring books, this makes for a very interesting choice. Mandalas are complex, intricate designs and you don’t want to fumble around too much with colors - they take as much time as it is. Therefore, the card stock-esque paper quality is something to write home about - it’s that good.
Furthermore, you get to use any medium you want - from watercolors to colored markers, you can color with whatever is comfortable. Another wonderful feature is that it is spiral-bound, which means you can frame or showcase your coloring if you so wish! Hence, if it’s a calming and high-quality coloring experience you seek, this should be on top of your list.
Pros
Incredible paper quality, the lines are very neat
Mandala designs vary from the simpler to the more complex, so you can start off wherever you wish to
Comes in a spiral binding, so you can easily pin these colorings on the wall
Cons
Quite a bit more expensive than the rest
Author: ColorIt, Terbit Basuki (Illustrator) | No. of Drawings: 50 | Book Binding: Spiral-Bound
This book is meant strictly for adults because the blanks that you’ll be filling in are only relatable when you’re an adult. This book takes the concept of an “adult coloring book” to the most literal extent possible, resulting in one of the most fun and rebellious coloring books you’ll see on the market today.
Experience
The adult experience is often full of not-so-great things, but also full of other great experiences which are unique to adults. This book does a wonderful job at bringing together those parts of our lives which give us pleasure and pain - as well as happiness. The drawings themselves range between being moderate to complex.
There are twenty-one pages full of tidbits from our lives that we can color up - anyway we wish to. There are also (thankfully) two pages that serve a different purpose - these are the test pages that you can use to try out various media like colored pencils, pastels, and watercolors (we wouldn’t suggest acrylics) before going for coloring the designs.
It’s inexpensive, it’s fun, and it’s a bit different from the generic coloring books you see on the market.
Pros
A breath of fresh air in a market that is full of similar designs otherwise
Page quality is good enough to withstand most media without issues
Test pages are useful even if you go for other coloring books later
Cons
Twenty-one drawings won’t last you as long as some competing books will
Author:: Sasha O'Hara | No. of Drawings: 21 | Book Binding: Paperback
For people who are completely done with their work and can’t handle more stress, this book may come to the rescue. This book is targeted squarely at the crowd which usually attempts to color these books on getaways from work, or during breaks from high-pressure work. The pages are of decent quality as well.
Experience
This book will be perfect for those who want to do coloring, but on a budget. Further, nature lovers will be impressed by the theme of the book, which revolves around butterflies and flowers and sometimes mixes the two as well! The designs aren’t very complicated compared to many others we’ve reviewed, so feel free to get one if you’re just starting out with coloring.
The book has thirty one-sided pages which are all meant to give you a meditative experience as you go through the drawings one by one. The patterns themselves are open-ended - you can color them in any way you wish to go about it. Though we feel that there could have been more variety in some designs, the book overall does a great job.
Pros
Thirty-one relatively inexpensive and high-quality pages for you to color
Some of the designs are truly breathtaking
Easier to complete than many other books, which may get too complex for beginners
Cons
A few of the designs tend to be repetitive
Author: Cherina Kohey | No. of Drawings: 30 | Book Binding: Paperback
If you’re on a shoestring budget but still want to achieve some kind of mental piece, or are unsure of whether adult coloring is really worth any of the attention it is getting - this is for you. In terms of value, nothing else on the market comes within shouting distance - you could even give away some of these if you’re a fan of coloring and want your dear ones to get started.
Experience
Who said adult coloring had to be an expensive hobby? Adult coloring can be as expensive or cheap as you want it to be - and this coloring book serves as a prime example of that. A set of 12 colors of any medium, and this book will ensure you’re well on your way to attaining mental peace at a fraction of the cost of other books. There are very few compromises, too.
The only compromise here comes in the form of paper quality, which is predictable enough because high-quality paper costs a lot. However, with this book, if you stick to colored pencils or wax crayons, you’ll be good to go - you do get forty-eight of the most diverse designs spread across experience levels. Inexpensive it may be, but it’s a pretty solid book.
Pros
Undercuts the competition by at least half the price
Designs are varied and range from easy to fairly complex
Can easily be given away as a gift
Cons
Paper quality is decidedly not the best
Author: Two Hoots Coloring | No. of Drawings: 48 | Book Binding: Paperback
If you’re looking for designs that are a bit out-of-the-blue and don’t have a problem with somewhat dark designs, this is what you’re looking for. A small caveat first: there are drawings on both sides of the page, so your markers will bleed through in all probability. If you stick to drier media, you’ll be alright though. Otherwise, it’s a pretty solid coloring book.
Experience
Posh coloring books are the latest trend to hit the market, and this one is no different in being as hip as the others are. These designs are much more modern and sophisticated, and sometimes a bit dark as well. It doesn’t have anything close to the mandalas and nature-based scenery we’ve covered in some other offerings - it has a different audience.
It is also much larger, having more than 100 drawings for you to fill up and make artworks out of! The paper itself can’t handle more than strong pastels - so markers and watercolors are off the table. If you can manage that, the rewards are immense - the drawings themselves hardly ever disappoint. A solid recommendation from our side!
Pros
Enough material to last multiple vacations and breaks
Wonderful, non-repetitive material which is sure to soothe you
High-quality material used for the pages
Cons
Printing on both sides of the page causes bleeding even though the pages are thick enough
Author: Andrews McMeel Publishing | No. of Drawings: 100 | Book Binding: Paperback
For the lover of all things swirl, here’s your way to all-but-guaranteed relief. The best part about this particular coloring book is that you get a large variety of swirly patterns which will definitely uplift your mood and color up all the greyness you might have been feeling. The book comes with a variety of difficulty levels, so it is easier for you to start at your ease.
Experience
Sometimes, books don’t have to follow a set subject - they can cover a variety of designs and subjects while following one certain theme. This book focuses exclusively on swirls in all the varieties that are possible - as well as some you may have never thought of. This book excels in providing a few out-of-the-world highly creative designs that you won’t find elsewhere.
It’s one of the least expensive items which are being reviewed today, and that has an obvious consequence - the paper quality suffers in comparison to a few others. Hence, it’s possible that you may see some bleeding around some parts if you do use media such as wet-erase markers, or watercolors. Otherwise, you should not face any problems.
Overall, the swirly designs in this book are abundant and you should have no problems in going about the business of bringing back some peace of mind.
Pros
Comes with a large number of drawings and designs to keep you occupied
Relatively inexpensive
Cons
Paper quality is decidedly not as good as the best
Author: Selah Works | No. of Drawings: 40 | Book Binding: Paperback
You're invited to come inside and play with doodles, shapes,...
The Good Vibes Coloring Book is a perfect fit for those who need some cheering up after a particularly hard week/month/year - it is also a brilliant gift for those who you know are going through a particularly hard time and could be helped by some positivity and optimism headed their way. So whether it’s you or people who you hold dear - this gift is wonderful for all of you!
Experience
The way in which this book unfurls alone makes it worth a purchase, with a number of positive (but not overwhelmingly so) messages lined up for you to give color to. These messages will surely help in uplifting your spirits after a hard time personally or professionally - or if you have been facing problems for a while, this can be a good place to start finding yourself.
The thing about coloring books like these is, they are not only a way to find peace but also to start working towards happiness which may have been lost for a number of reasons.
The quality of paper is such that it can handle any medium, and it’s hard enough to not let any color bleed over to the next page. There are plenty of uncolored illustrations for you to go through and fill up in any color you wish to!
Pros
One of the few books which emphasize positivity and happiness instead of indirectly leading you to peace
You can fill it up with any medium you wish to
Plenty of designs for you to fill up and rediscover happiness
Cons
Some may think it’s too expensive for what it offers
Author: Thaneeya McArdle | No. of Drawings: 30 | Book Binding: Paperback
Laurence king publishing Secret gardens coloring book
Laurence king publishing Secret gardens coloring book an...
The Secret Garden is one of the more niche entries on today’s list of the top coloring books for adults. It’s niche even though it’s sold millions of copies worldwide and is probably one of the most popular coloring books to have hit the shelves and online bookstores. It’s niche and popular because it’s a color-as-you-go storybook, and you can even color the back and front!
Experience
This book has been on the market for a while today, and it’s for good reason - it has a connection between each of the pages that you fill up with color, and it’s a damned good book otherwise too. The pages are of exceedingly high quality and allow one to use any medium they want to.
The creatures that the book makes you color include octopi, anemones, and more! There are tons of different scenes in the book which you can fill up and create a world that looks absolutely the same way you want it to. This book is great for all ages, should you want to get this for your kids or young ones in the family.
Pros
The coherent story flows between the pages
Not recommended for detailing and precise art
The shades are not sold individually
Cons
None
Author: Johanna Basford | No. of Drawings: N/A | Book Binding: Paperback
For someone who is a fan of all the wonders that lie under the horizon, this book makes a whole world of sense! As children, many of us get to see so many of these creatures for the first time in coloring books. Hence, it makes sense to encourage the kind of peace we found in colors with books like these.
Experience
The first thing that you see about this book is that the difficulty level is tuned a few notches below the rest of the book. That’s because this book is not meant exclusively for adults - this is a book that children and adults can use all at the same time. However, the contents of this book are sure to keep you hooked if you enjoy coloring.
The paper quality is far away from children’s coloring books - which means as always, the choice is yours for which media to go to. The general medium of choice is, of course, pencil colors because they’re the lightest of the lot - but if painting with brushes is more appealing, you’re free to do that as well. A great book all around.
Pros
Comes with a number of drawings to keep you thoroughly occupied
The page quality is incredibly decent and good
One side page drawings which can be easily removed if you wish
Cons
May seem somewhat childish at times because of the low level of difficulty in coloring it
Author: Patricia J. Wynne, Creative Haven | No. of Drawings: 31 | Book Binding: Paperback
The last book on our list is a blast from the near past - a reminder of when things were much better (as is the general consensus). Seinfeld was on TV, video game graphics weren’t half as realistic and people actually talked to each other (or as the kids say, in real life - or is that IRL?). Jokes apart, this is a brilliant book.
Experience
While most of these books soothe you by teleporting you to unknown worlds, this one just takes you 20 years or so into the past. Surprisingly, however, it does the job of taking you there very well. With easy-to-fill-in pages, and a free box of crayons included in the bundle, this is one solid book for the nostalgic adult.
While it is nostalgic, the paper quality remains modern. You can bring other materials to the mix, should you wish to do so. All in all, it remains a solid addition to anyone’s coloring book collection. It’s also one of the best ones to start off with because of the ease of coloring in the beginning.
Pros
Comes with its own set of crayons so you don’t have to bother
A nostalgic trip back to the nineties is guaranteed
Wonderful designs
Cons
Might not be very relatable for younger adults
Author: James Grange | No. of Drawings: N/A | Book Binding: Paperback
Can coloring books really help improve mental health?
While individual experiences may vary, many adults find that coloring helps to relieve stress, anxiety, and depression. Coloring allows for creative expression and can promote a sense of accomplishment and relaxation.
How to choose the best adult coloring book?
Consider your interests, art style preferences, theme or subject matter, paper quality, and desired level of complexity. It’s important to find a coloring book that matches your aesthetic and skill level for the best experience.
What are some popular themes in adult coloring books?
Popular themes include nature, animals, patterns, mandalas, cityscapes, fantasy, and inspirational quotes. There is a wide variety of themes catering to different tastes and interests.
Is there a specific type of coloring tool best suited for adult coloring books?
The choice of coloring tool depends on your preference, skill level, and the paper quality of the book. Popular options include colored pencils, gel pens, markers, and watercolor brushes.
Do adult coloring books cater to different levels of skill?
Yes, adult coloring books come in various levels of difficulty. Some cater to beginners with simpler designs, while others have more intricate and detailed drawings for advanced colorists.
Are there benefits in digital coloring books compared to physical coloring books?
Digital coloring books offer convenience and portability, as they can be accessed on smartphones or tablets. They also provide unlimited ways to experiment with colors without damaging original illustrations. However, physical coloring books provide a tactile experience that can be more satisfying for some users.
Will coloring in adult coloring books help me improve my artistic skills?
While coloring can help develop your understanding of color theory and shading techniques, it might not substantially improve your drawing abilities. However, consistent practice in coloring and exploring other artistic mediums can contribute to overall artistic growth.
Conclusion
Finding the perfect adult coloring book to help you unwind and de-stress is essential, as it can greatly impact your overall coloring experience. Our list of 11 best adult coloring books provides a variety of options to cater to diverse interests and skill levels.
From the above list, here are the top three expert recommendations:
For those seeking spiritual and mental relaxation through the intricate patterns of mandala art, the Mandala Coloring Book for Adults is a good option with its incredible paper quality and spiral-bound design.
With these top recommendations in hand, it's time to pick up your coloring tools, explore your creativity, and immerse yourself in the comforting world of adult coloring books. Happy coloring!
If you want to buy the most economical yet high-quality paper for colored pencils, you have come to the right place! Today, we will discuss the best paper you can buy!
There are a few kinds of paper you can buy for art with colored pencils. However, there are certain factors where you must not compromise:
Every artist wants the best possible archival properties, so there should be no yellowing with time.
The paper should not tear easily.
It should be able to absorb multiple layers of colors for compound finishes.
The paper should be of a reasonably high quality
With these qualities in mind, we’ve chosen the ten best papers for colored pencils you can buy this year. Without further ado, let’s get to the product reviews!
Best Papers For Colored Pencils
Here is the list of the 10 best papers for colored pencils that you can use to create vibrant and captivating artworks.
When we talk about performance and value, very few products come close to the Canson XL Series Mix Media Paper Pad. Canson has been manufacturing papers for over five centuries. The XL Series Mix Media Paper Pad is one of the cheapest papers you can buy and has relatively decent quality too!
Experience
This Mix Media Paper Pad is terrific for beginners since it costs very less per sheet. It is available in many different sizes, ranging from 5” x 8.5” to 18” x 24”. These sheets have negligible flaws when it comes to creating art with colored pencils, but they are known to bleed with sketch pens.
The surface has a smooth and buttery texture. It is sturdy enough to bear multiple layers of pencil colors. In case you are looking for multiple pads to draw on - say one for home and one for the studio, you should probably buy two of these. The texture is quite similar to medium watercolor paper.
Pros
Excellent texture for its price
Decent quality for use by most artists
Smooth finish and offers excellent value-for-money
Cons
It is known to bleed with other media, so not the best option for liquid inks
Sheet Size: 7" x 10" | Paper Weight: 160 GSM | Acid-Free: Yes | No. of Sheets: 60 Sheets
Legion Stonehenge Drawing Paper Pad - 9" x 12", Warm White,...
Warm White
The second product in our recommendations comes from Legion, a company known for making cotton-based drawing paper pads for a long time. The Stonehenge series is renowned for being the best-colored pencil paper you can buy. It is 100% acid-free, comes with no chlorine or optical whiteners, and is made very responsibly.
Experience
The Stonehenge Pad comes with Legion’s printmaking expertise, thereby giving you an enjoyable experience overall. It is made out of cotton, which provides you with a superb drawing experience with almost every top-notch colored pencil on the market today.
The paper does not bleed ink, gives you supreme control over colors, and withstands several layers of colors on the surface without any problems. It allows you to be flexible and create almost anything that comes to your mind! We undoubtedly recommend this to professionals and experts. Beginners should not spend so much to practice.
While it is expensive, you wouldn’t expect the highest GSM paper to be value-for-money. It is definitely worth the outlay - especially if you’ve become a professional artist.
Pros
250 GSM paper, which is the best you can get for colored pencils
100% non-toxic
Features a best-in-industry texture
Cons
Expensive and suitable only for professionals and experts
Sheet Size: 9" x 12" | Paper Weight: 250 GSM | Acid-Free: Yes | No. of Sheets: 15 Sheets
Technically, this isn’t colored-pencil paper. However, once you use it, you will fall in love with the weight and the smoothness. While using this paper and colored pencils, you’ll soon forget that it wasn’t made to be used with colored pencils at all! It is recommended for pencils that are slightly harder so that the paper won’t break the pencil nib.
Experience
Besides the Legion paper, this paper is one of the few which comes with a high GSM rating of 300. Don’t be fooled by the rating - these two papers are worlds apart in all other contexts. The Fabiano is hot-pressed, while most other papers tend to be cold-pressed, so they give a bit more texture.
You can get this paper in a variety of sizes and in different quantities as well - you may want a roll if you’re a professional, but if you’re experimenting, you might want to go for single sheets. However, there is one problem - the cost. For a paper that isn’t even technically colored-pencil paper, it’s one of the most expensive options out there.
Pros
Incredibly high GSM paper; the heaviest you can find in the market
Papers are hot-pressed, but they work well
Comes in various sizes and quantities
Cons
Incredibly expensive, even for a watercolor paper
Sheet Size: 4.92" x 7.08" | Paper Weight: 300 GSM | Acid-Free: Yes | No. of Sheets: 25 Sheets
MOLESKINE ART COLLECTION: From sketchbooks and sketchpads to...
DURABLE COVER & ELASTIC CLOSURE: Hold writing projects &...
Moleskine comes to the market with a wonderful product that shines because of its portability. Moleskine’s claim to fame is their notebooks, which are some of the best you can find in the market. Their sketchbook is brilliant, irrespective of which set of colored pencils you use with them.
Experience
Moleskine’s Art Sketchbook comes in four sizes, ranging from pocket-sized (5” x 5.5”) to full-fledged A3. Paper quality is one of the most important aspects of this notebook - it outshines most of its competitors when it comes to this attribute. Moleskine is known for high-quality paper, and this product certainly does its best to uphold the company’s reputation.
This sketchbook comes with a pocket up front, which is useful for storing tidbits.
We especially liked the shade of the paper, which is a toned ivory color. Another great feature of the pages is that they are acid-free and have rounded corners, which helps when you’re keeping the notebook in your pocket. For drawing something up quickly or sketching while traveling, there are very few products that come close in quality.
Pros
165 GSM paper, which is perfect for drawing something quickly
Highly portable and comes with a neat pocket
Has a rare toned ivory color, which is hard to find on sketch pads
Cons
The A3-sized Moleskine notebook has better substitutes and isn’t the best product for its price
Sheet Size: 8.25" x 11.75" | Paper Weight: 165 GSM | Acid-Free: Yes | No. of Sheets: 96 Sheets
Ideal for pencil, charcoal, sketching sticks, airbrush, pen,...
With this, we come to the real deal - the actual sketching pads which are directly aimed towards colored pencils and shading pencils. This paper is slightly more textured than the best color pencil sketch pads on the market but does the job just as well in most circumstances. Vellum used to be made from animals but is now made from plant material.
Experience
This sketchpad is a little different from regular colored pencil sketching pads, in that you get multiple ply sheets on one page and hence, a heavier sheet with a 270 GSM weight to it. This pad is ideally suited for a studio because it is too large to be used on the go. We especially liked the paper quality, which is beyond reproach.
The shade of the page is slightly light grey/yellow, because of the way vellum is prepared. The 400 series and the 300 series differ in that the 400 series is somewhat more expensive and slightly better when it comes to performance with a variety of color pencils, such as the Prismacolor and the Faber-Castell ranges.
Pros
Excellent color performance and can efficiently deal with multiple shades of colored pencils
The tone of the page is a bit different from the generic white pages you get in sketch pads
Vellum’s texture is worlds apart from usual sketch pads
Cons
If you can afford the outlay, the 400 series may be a better product for you
Sheet Size: 14" x 17" | Paper Weight: 270 GSM | Acid-Free: Yes | No. of Sheets: 20 Sheets
Excellent for use with colored pencil; great for graphite,...
Smooth, even coverage can be achieved, and the durable...
The OG Strathmore Colored Pencil Pad has 100 sheets with some of the best quality paper you can buy today. We especially liked the price of this pad - merely above the average price you would expect from normal sketchpads. It offers brilliant value for money and is one of the better choices you can make if you want the regular sketch finish.
Experience
This set of pages is very polarising among the artist community, mostly because it’s one of the few sketch pads which allow the tooth to show through the work. Hence, artists with softer leads such as Prismacolor have an affinity for the 400 series. However, it remains a solid choice, even in light of intense competition and its unique tooth property.
Strathmore has taken into account the needs of users who like to move around with their colored pencils. They have introduced a portable variant that measures approximately 6” x 8”. It will easily fit into a small bag or a purse - you can draw with ease pretty much anywhere you wish to. The paper is acid-free and comes in at around 270 GSM.
Pros
Very high GSM rating for its price, relative to other products
When used with softer tips, it can become a handy tool, somewhat like more expensive brands of papers
The pocket series fits into a small bag quite handily, giving stiff competition to the Moleskine notebook in terms of value
Cons
It is not meant for use with harder pencils
Sheet Size: 9" x 12" | Paper Weight: 163 GSM | Acid-Free: Yes | No. of Sheets: 30 Sheets
HIGH QUALITY - 50 acid free, natural white drawing sheets...
TEXTURED - 30% post consumer recycled sheets have a natural,...
It is another one of the few rare sketchbooks which were explicitly designed for colored pencils. It comes with 50 pages and is geared mostly towards those starting with colored pencil-based art. Many competitors are primarily concerned with covering all kinds of art possible, which makes this product a bit different.
Experience
It is a beginner-level colored pencil pad - it has neither the GSM heft nor the tooth expected from more premium surfaces such as those recommended above. However, it brings a few remarkable features to the forefront - including 100% acid-free paper. It is a spiral-bound notebook rather than individual sheets, which gives you great archival benefits.
The pad is available in three sizes - 5” x 8”, 5” x 11”, and 8” x 8”. Thus, it makes a lot of sense for students who are just starting out with colored pencils or want more practice to get this pad. 50 sheets for as little as this pad offers is a bargain you do not want to miss out on! It’s also great for the outdoorsy types and has gotten rave reviews from a lot of people as well.
Pros
Comes with a reasonably high GSM for its cost
Offers some tremendous archival properties, allowing you to display your work later on
Sizes available make a lot of sense
Cons
Professionals may want to look elsewhere for a better-quality paper
Sheet Size: 8.5" x 11" | Paper Weight: 147 GSM | Acid-Free: Yes | No. of Sheets: 50 Sheets
Developed for Professional Artists — The Canson Artist...
Dependable Sketch Paper — A finely textured surface for...
If you’re looking for a smoother paper and want to introduce more detail into your work, the Canson Universal might be what you’re looking for. However, be warned - adding more detail to your work comes at the cost of allowing more colors into your work. Hence, it only makes sense to go for this pad if you’re sure you don’t want to mix colors too much.
Experience
This sketch pad comes with everything you need if you want to try less color but more detail. The surface is incredibly smooth for the price, which means that standard artwork will be a breeze to put on these sheets. They also come at somewhere around the average price mark, so they’re neither too cheap nor too expensive to buy.
The pages are finished in a natural white, so you won’t have any problems when it comes to color reproduction. These pages are acid-free, which means they have excellent archival properties as well - though not the best. The pages are also perforated, and it comes in a spiral binding which should give you an exceptional finish. Hence, you’ll be quite happy if you want to create art on these papers.
Pros
Decent GSM rating for the price
Acid-free papers tend to last long
It is micro-perforated, so you won’t have issues with tearing pages apart
Its natural white shade of paper is hard to come by
Cons
It cannot take too many layers of color before it starts curling up
Sheet Size: 9" x 12" | Paper Weight: 96 GSM | Acid-Free: Yes | No. of Sheets: 100 Sheets
There are 24 sheets per pad of 80 pound / 130gsm paper
Perfectly suited to line drawings and technical artwork
With Strathmore’s third entry into our list of reviews, you should get an idea of how well they have mastered the art of making papers for all kinds of purposes, especially colored-pencil papers. It is a much larger pad with an 8” x 10” size, which means it is another excellent product to have around in the studio.
Experience
The papers are a fair bit heavier than you’d expect your generic sketch pad to be, but that’s a pretty good sign - in both archival properties and color absorption. It comes in at one of the best medium-weight papers that we’ve reviewed, both in terms of archival qualities as well as range.
It only comes in a specific size - which is 8” x 10”. If you’re looking for pads that come with a bit more in terms of size, you should have a look at the other offerings that we reviewed earlier.
Pros
Medium-weight papers are hard to find, which also gives you so much range
It makes a lot of sense in the home or studio setting
Great archival properties
Cons
Only comes in 8” x 10”
Sheet Size: 8" x 10" | Paper Weight: 130 GSM | Acid-Free: Yes | No. of Sheets: 24 Sheets
Artist-Recommended Sketch Paper - Loved by artists for...
General Purpose & Heavyweight - Tackle sketch projects like...
Jack of all trades but master of none - this idiom sums the drawing pad up pretty well, in our opinion. The drawing pad gives you more range than you need when it comes to colors but also gives you enough tooth to get some excellent detail going. The sketch series is aimed at all artists and not just colored-pencil users, but it behaves quite nicely with it too!
Experience
As the last item on our review list, it leaves little to be desired. It is a beautiful combination of natural-looking colors, with enough heft to allow good quality designs with as much color as you wish. At the same time, it has enough smoothness for you to detail your designs as much as possible. The GSM rating is 74, the least of all here - but it does give you a great experience!
The low GSM points to it being strictly practice paper, but this is not the case. It is useful even if you want to showcase the odd drawing or two. This set of pages, in fact, turns out to be one of the best-rounded products that we have reviewed today.
Pros
It comes with a tremendous quantity-to-price ratio
Generally, one of the best papers a beginner can buy
8.5” x 11” size is decent enough for the studio or desk at home
Cons
Other papers come with more archival properties and better GSM ratings but at a higher price
Sheet Size: 5.5" x 8.5" | Paper Weight: 89 GSM | Acid-Free: Yes | No. of Sheets: 100 Sheets
How does paper texture affect colored pencil drawings?
Paper texture plays a crucial role in how colored pencils lay down pigment. A rougher texture provides more tooth, allowing for stronger color payoff and improved blending, while a smoother texture is better suited for fine details.
How can I prevent my colored pencil drawing from smudging?
To avoid smudging, you can use a fixative spray, place a protective sheet between your hand and the paper, or carefully work on your drawing from one side to another, avoiding resting your hand directly on the artwork.
Can I use toned or colored paper with colored pencils?
Yes, you can use toned or colored paper to create unique and dynamic effects, as it provides a base color to work with and can affect the overall appearance and mood of your artwork.
Can I use the same paper for colored pencils and other mediums?
Some papers, like mixed-media or heavyweight drawing papers, can handle various mediums, including colored pencils. However, performance may vary, and it’s typically best to use papers specifically designed for the type of media you’ll be working with.
Does the weight of the paper matter?
Yes, the weight of the paper is important, as heavier papers, typically around 300gsm, can handle more layers of colored pencils and prevent the paper from buckling or tearing.
Conclusion
Selecting the best paper for your colored pencils is vital to ensuring a pleasurable and quality experience in creating stunning artwork. Different paper products cater to varying needs, involving factors such as skill level, budget, paper texture, and weight.
From the above 10 best papers for colored pencils, here are the top three expert recommendations:
The Canson XL Series Mix Media Paper Pad is an ideal option for beginners and hobbyists, offering excellent value for money and a smooth finish.
The Legion Stonehenge Colored Pad is a good option for professional artists, with a high GSM and top-quality texture.
Lastly, the Fabriano Artistico Aquarelle is the right choice for heavyweight paper lovers due to its high GSM and hot-pressed variety.
Consider these top suggestions when selecting the best paper suited to your needs, requirements, and level of expertise. Enjoy the creative journey, and always remember that practice and quality materials will help elevate your work to greater heights.
When you invest in good quality colored pencils, you want to keep them in good shape and prolong their useful life.
For that to happen, one of the crucial things to be careful about is sharpening. Now, there are three different types of tools you can use to sharpen your pencils - a sanding block, a manual sharpener, and an electric sharpener.
While two of those tools include careful and meticulous methods of sharpening a pencil, an electric sharpener is a fast and convenient way to do the job.
However, getting the right electric sharpener for your precious colored pencils can be a little more complicated than you’d like. The primary reason for this complication is the diversity in the market and the many factors that make each sharpener unique for a specific case.
But don’t worry because we have handpicked the best electric pencil sharpeners for colored pencils in 2023!
Go ahead and give it a read!
Best Electric Pencil Sharpeners For Colored Pencils
Here is the list of the 6 best electric pencil sharpeners that you can use to quickly and easily sharpen your colored pencils for your next art project.
If you have ever bought a sharpener on your own before, there is no way you haven’t heard of X-ACTO. Their wide range of sharpeners caters to the needs of many artists around the world.
X-ACTO has also been a prominent brand for almost a century. And their expertise and experience have led them to make products that are fine-tuned to an artist’s needs.
Stylish electric pencil sharpener ideal for home or office
Classic design fits with most decor
Experience
XLR sharpener is an affordable product that meets most of the standard requirements while also being long-lasting. For the price, you get an excellent sharpener that does the job with no frills.
We found the product to be extremely reliable, and many of our fellow artists have been using these sharpeners for years without any complaints.
You can expect to get the sharpest tips after using this sharpener and it also doesn’t chew away the pencil with its pencil-saving technology.
The product is also safe to be kept around kids and toddlers because of its safety measures. It won’t turn on the blades if the tray is open.
One downside is that the sharpener is not portable. You’d have to use an electrical outlet to power it up. So, we don’t recommend it to painters who like to work outside mostly.
Overall, it’s an affordable, durable, and functional sharpener that will faithfully serve you for years. Also, it has a 2-year warranty.
Pros
Super affordable, extraordinary quality
Genuine and reliable brand with a legacy
2-year warranty
Safe for keeping around children
Cons
It’s not portable and doesn’t offer any bonus values as such
Dimensions: 7.25" x 4" x 6" | Weight: 1.8 lbs | Power Source: Corded Electric | Auto-Stop: Yes | Warranty: 2 Years
Like the EX-20, OfficeGoods Electric & Battery Operated Pencil Sharpener is a feature-packed tool that comes at an immensely modest price.
The quality is more than just satisfactory, and the product itself has been top-rated in the community, even proving to be one of the favorites of professionals.
Sharp and versatile - This electric pencil sharpener offers...
Safe for kids and adults - The OfficeGoods automatic pencil...
Experience
OfficeGoods’ offering is akin to our previous entry, EX-20. And it is equally eligible for admiration for its value-for-money proposition.
Despite being in the moderate price range, this sharpener offers the feature of variable tip sharpening. So, you can get blunt, medium, and sharp pencil tips on the switch of just one button.
Artists have also raved about its quality and performance. Its online reviews are adorned with positive remarks for not clogging in long-term use and producing pin-sharp tips.
It can also be used with other pencils that have graphite or lead cores.
As for power options, like the EX-20, it can also be powered by batteries, USB, and directly from an outlet. And like the EX-20, it’s capable of catering to any artist’s needs.
Overall, it’s also a splendid pencil sharpener that can work even on soft and delicate pencils without chipping while also providing immense flexibility.
Pros
Affordable price and doesn’t skimp on quality
Extremely portable with 3-way power options – batteries, USB, and from the wall
Variable tip sharpening options
Cons
Only one year of extended warranty
Dimensions: 5" x 2" x 3.5" | Weight: 0.53 lb | Power Source: AC & Battery-Powered | Auto-Stop: Yes | Warranty: 1 Year
LINKYO’s electric pencil sharpener is not about being full of features to attract customers. Its value stems from its impeccable design, which is both smart and gives the machine an elegant look.
And along with several safety features and intelligent design elements at an extremely reasonable price, it stands to be the best option for classroom environments.
LINKYO Electric Pencil Sharpener is one of the most handsome sharpeners that we have laid our hands on. The design is not only beautiful but also very smart and innovative.
It has a vertical design where the pencil is fed in a top-down fashion. It’s not only unique but also incredibly smart because the shavings get collected with ease.
Also, it’s one of the safest sharpeners we have tried yet. There are several small but thoughtful safety features, such as preventing the blades from rotating when the tray is out.
In our opinion, it is perfect for use in an art class where several people use the sharpener in a day, and you’d want to ensure that no accidents happen.
Moreover, the sharpener also intelligently turns off after the pencil is sharpened. So, no worries about over-sharpening your pencils!
A 1-year warranty accompanies all of these attractive features.
Pros
Affordable and moderate pricing
Impeccable and intelligent design – elegant and smart
It has a 1-year warranty
Plenty of safety features that make it perfect for art classes
Cons
No battery option or portable usage options
Dimensions: 6.97" x 3.39" x 4.8" | Weight: 2.57 lbs | Power Source: Corded Electric | Auto-Stop: Yes | Warranty: 1 Year
When it comes to quality, reliability, and minimal design, there’s nothing that tops this premium sharpener from Bostitch. With its excellent durability and industrial design and a warranty of 7 years, it has remained to be a professional favorite and has found its home in many art classes around the world.
Tool-Free Removeable Cutter Cartridge for fast and easy...
10x Longer Cutter Life – The SharpGlow has an extra...
Experience
For a professional, the reliability of a product is way more important than having extra features that would rarely be used.
That requirement of reliability and long-term use is the key focus of this premium sharpener from Bostitch.
It has a super quiet motor that will keep serving you without a hitch for several years. You can straight away sharpen a 170 pencil set with its stall-free motor.
Moreover, its blades can also be replaced without any hassle with just $10 worth of replacement blades, so you can keep on using it for as long as you like.
Of course, due to its impeccable reliability, it’s also an excellent choice for a classroom where all the students can use it while learning.
Ultimately, it’s a quality product that will keep running without a hiccup, and if for some reason, it does fail, you still have a 7-year warranty.
Pros
Quiet stall-free motor that will work for years without failure
Easy-to-replace blades that ensure long-term usage
Perfect for professional use and classrooms
Excellent support and a 7-year warranty back it
Cons
It is expensive or better put, a one-time investment
Dimensions: 10.63" x 6.13" x 9" | Weight: 4.03 lbs | Power Source: Corded Electric | Auto-Stop: Yes | Warranty: 7 Years
The School Smart Vertical Pencil Sharpener stands out as a robust and efficient tool for classrooms and artistic environments. Designed for quick and reliable sharpening, this electric pencil sharpener handles colored and standard graphite pencils with ease, ensuring finely sharpened tips in just a few seconds.
Seriously Sharp: Made of alloy steel, the single-hole...
Smart Design: The transparent shavings bin is extra-large to...
Experience
The School Smart Vertical Pencil Sharpener boasts a range of noteworthy features. For one, its speed and efficiency are impressive thanks to a fast, high-performance motor with helical steel blades. This combo guarantees uniform results each time.
Secondly, the integrated autostop function both prevents over-sharpening and extends the life of your pencils.
Lastly, the sizeable shavings receptacle enables a hassle-free sharpening process for multiple pencils, as you can easily discard the shavings after a large amount. The clear design of the receptacle also allows users to see when it needs emptying.
Pros
Affordably priced
Quick and resilient
High-performance motor
Hassle-free sharpening process
Cons
Somewhat noisy due to its powerful motor
Blades aren’t replaceable
Designed for only one standard pencil size
Dimensions: 6.5” x 5” x 7.25” | Weight: 2.9 lbs | Power Source: Corded Electric | Auto-Stop: Yes | Warranty: N/A
The AFMAT Electric Pencil Sharpener is a heavy-duty, classroom-ready pencil sharpener created to handle 6.5-8mm No.2 and colored pencils. With its UL-listed industrial design and robust helical blade, this top-of-the-line sharpener is an excellent choice for school classes, art settings, or home use.
Sharpen 10000 Times Without Wearing out: This heavy duty...
UL Listed Electric Pencil Sharpener: Our classroom pencil...
Experience
The AFMAT Electric Pencil Sharpener stands out due to its impressive efficiency and versatility. Its powerful motor allows users to sharpen over 200 pencils without any signs of overheating, while the large helical blade can sharpen more than 6,000 pencils throughout its life.
Perfect for regular use across various environments, this pencil sharpener works well with both wooden and colored pencils, making it an ideal tool for artists, teachers, and students alike.
Pros
Powerful motor can sharpen more than 200 pencils
Capable of sharpening more than 6000 pencils
Works well with both wooden and colored pencils
Reasonably priced
Cons
Slightly louder than other pencil sharpeners
No option to adjust the sharpening style of the pencil nib
Dimensions: 6.65” x 3.15” x 3.55” | Weight: 2.7lbs | Power Source: Corded Electric | Auto-Stop: Yes | Warranty: 2 Years
Best Colored Pencils Electric Sharpeners Comparison Table
Buying Guide For The Best Colored Pencils Electric Sharpener
Buying an electric pencil sharpener can be a tricky task if you are doing it out of the blue. There are a lot of things to consider for ensuring a sound purchase.
This section is dedicated to discussing all the factors you should keep in mind to make the right decision when buying an electric pencil sharpener.
Price
The money you have to shell out for an electric sharpener can vary drastically depending on the quality. But you can roughly estimate it to be somewhere between $15 and $45.
While, of course, you can pay more to get the best in quality, we found out from our experience that spending somewhere around $25 is enough for almost everybody.
We would recommend buyers to not cheap out when buying one of these sharpeners because a low-quality product will damage your pencils way too often, ultimately costing more in the long run.
Blades
The blades of an electric sharpener can’t be taken out and sharpened manually for long-term use. Instead, you’d have to take them out and fit new ones in the machine.
Hence, to extend the life of the machine, you’d have to consider something called replacement blades.
If you plan on using the sharpener for personal use, then you can buy it without considering this factor because the blades will likely last decades.
But if you are buying it for an office or a class, then go for brands that have cheap replacement blades, which can be purchased conveniently.
Portability
Compromising on portability is not an option for many artists who like to paint or sketch on the go. More so for artists who do live landscaping, portrait, or meet clients at their place instead of working in a studio.
A portable sharpener is the best option in such cases. These sharpeners are usually lighter and more compact than conventional sharpeners. And you can pack them in your backpack and carry them around conveniently.
These are typically powered by AA batteries and are significantly quieter than other sharpeners. But don’t just go for these for the sake of it. These are less powerful and less durable than regular corded sharpeners.
So, if you plan to only use your sharpener in and around your office, studio, or home, then opt for a non-portable one. Otherwise, these are better suited for your use.
Multi-use
Even though today we discussed all of the electrical pencil sharpeners in the context of colored pencils, these sharpeners can be used for other mediums as well.
Most electrical sharpeners can work on more than one medium and of course, we believe, the more mediums, the better overall value it has.
So, before you plan on buying one, see if it has some added value in terms of working on other tools like charcoal pencils, graphite pencils, watercolor pencils, pastel pencils, and hard pastels.
Electric Pencil Sharpener FAQs
Are electric pencil sharpeners easy to use?
Yes, electric pencil sharpeners are generally very easy to use. The user simply places the pencil in the sharpener and the motor does the rest. Some models may have additional features, such as automatic shutoff or adjustable sharpening angles.
Are electric pencil sharpeners noisy?
Some electric pencil sharpeners may be noisy due to the sound of the motor and sharpening mechanism. However, there are many models available that are designed to be quieter and less disruptive in a classroom or office environment.
Can electric pencil sharpeners sharpen different types of pencils?
Most electric pencil sharpeners can sharpen standard-sized pencils, but some models can also sharpen larger or smaller pencils. It’s important to check the product specifications before purchasing to ensure that it can sharpen the type of pencil you need.
Do electric pencil sharpeners require any special care or maintenance?
Electric pencil sharpeners generally require very little maintenance. It’s important to keep the blades clean and free of debris, and some models may require occasional lubrication. You should always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for care and maintenance.
How long do the blades on electric pencil sharpeners last?
The lifespan of the blades on an electric pencil sharpener will depend on the frequency of use and the quality of the pencils being sharpened. In general, the blades will last for several years with proper care and maintenance.
Can electric pencil sharpeners overheat?
It is possible for electric pencil sharpeners to overheat if they are used for an extended period of time or if they are plugged in for too long without being used. Most models have built-in safety features that prevent them from overheating, but it’s important to use them properly and take breaks if necessary.
Are there any safety concerns with using an electric pencil sharpener?
As with any electronic device, it’s important to follow the manufacturer’s instructions and safety guidelines when using an electric pencil sharpener. It’s also important to keep the device out of reach of children and to supervise their use to prevent injury.
Conclusion
The journey to find the perfect electric pencil sharpener can be daunting, considering the myriad of options available on the market today. To make this choice more accessible and enable you to pick the ideal product that meets your specific needs, we have selected six of the best electric pencil sharpeners, carefully examining their features, quality, and performance.
From the above six best electric pencil sharpeners, here are the top three expert recommendations:
The X-ACTO XLR Electric Pencil Sharpener is an ideal option for those in search of affordable reliability, backed by a trustworthy and well-established brand that ensures a durable, functional, and safe product.
Finally, the LINKYO Electric Pencil Sharpener is the right choice for classrooms prioritizing safety and an intelligently designed sharpener.
Selecting the best electric pencil sharpener ultimately depends on your specific requirements, whether you are considering aspects such as reliability, portability, or safety. We hope this article has provided valuable insights into the top options available to help you make a more informed and confident decision.
![8 Best Glues for Acrylic Plexiglass [Reviews & Buyer’s Guide]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Best-Glues-for-Acyrilic-Plexiglass-.jpeg "8 Best Glues for Acrylic Plexiglass [Reviews & Buyer's Guide]")
This is perfect for artists who are looking for software that focuses on details more than anything else. Game developers for smartphones and other handheld gaming devices are known to go for Pro Motion in order to get amazing graphics.
![10 Best Paper For Colored Pencils in 2023 [Reviewed]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2019/07/Best-Paper-For-Colored-Pencils-2.jpg "10 Best Paper For Colored Pencils in 2023 [Reviewed]")
